JP2021166681A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably notifying a player of the state of the game machine.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation is performed, rotation of each reel 32 L, 32M, 32R based on operation of a start lever 41 is started. Then, corresponding reels are stopped by operation of stop switches 42 to 44, and a stop combination according to a lottery result is stopped and put-out of tokens can be generated. A second BB winning combination is included as a winning combination in a 2-bet game, and it is possible to perform a 3-bet game in a state in which the winning state of the second BB winning combination is carried over. When a front door 12 is switched from an open state into a closed state or while the front door 12 is in the open state, it is determined whether or not a game state is the winning state of the second BB winning combination,and when it is determined that the game state is not the winning state of the second BB winning combination, an internal state notification is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the gaming machines illustrated above, there is still room for improvement in notifying the employees of the gaming hall of the state of the gaming machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying the state of the gaming machine.

The present invention includes a housing that is open forward and
A door body provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
The first operating means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a combination based on the operation of the first operation means, and
A second operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means capable of adding game value corresponding to the predetermined combination,
With
A specific combination is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
A specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won, and
When the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state, or when the door body is in the open state, the specific notification corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means. Specific notification execution means to be used and
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably notify the state of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. (A) is a flowchart showing the rotation effect processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of winning notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CZ mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st AT mode transition. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending the 1st AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st point lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the point lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd point lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. (A) is a flowchart showing the point processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the discharging process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of a point effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the type lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a point suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st RAM clear process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-up process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting change. It is a flowchart which shows the process for internal state notification. It is a flowchart which shows the door opening notification processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a sub-control device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a sound data table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a reproduced sound data storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the sound output processing by a sound IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data according to the first modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data according to the second modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a flowchart showing a process for executing point effect according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table for points used. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st point. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd point. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a point suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a point suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a point which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the point effect execution processing according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a rank information table. (A) is a flowchart showing the point processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the discharging process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the privilege grant value and the point grant opportunity which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the process for ending the first AT mode, and (b) is a flowchart showing the section display first process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games. (A) is a flowchart showing the first point lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the second point lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the point lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-point lottery table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the point information storage area, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the trigger flag. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the process for giving suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the trigger flag and the type lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the effect type and the effected points. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for grant suggestion effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the effectable points and the type distribution. It is a flowchart which shows the process for total suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the total suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the type lottery table for total suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for release. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a point production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of a point production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the continuous production which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an effect setting process at the time of all stops, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. (A) is a flowchart showing an effect setting process at the time of all stops, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the time of all stop which concerns on 7th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table for a high probability mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type lottery table for a high probability mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for giving suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the start-time effect setting process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for giving suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the type lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for total suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the type lottery table for arrival. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of total suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows the internal state notification processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying an internal state which concerns on tenth Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data according to the first modification of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data according to the second modification of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of sound data according to the third modification of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of internal state notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound data which concerns on the modification 4 of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a selector. It is a flowchart which shows the medal detection process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is a flowchart which shows the internal state notification processing which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of internal state notification. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on notification processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a power-on notification. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the sub-control device which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for internal state notification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by hitting a nail against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops at the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops at the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which is a game medium, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize will not be established and the above benefits will not be granted.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as an effective line. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the first small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the line where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and the second small winning combination are used. It is also understandable that different small role prizes have been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is won. If the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbols corresponding to the fourth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination to third small winning combination winning It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is won. If the fifth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is won. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a mound shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small role prize different from that is established.

Left reel 32L "bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, right reel 32R "white 7" symbol, "white shell" If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “watermelon” symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth small winning combination is won. If the 8th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the eighth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the line where the "watermelon" symbols are aligned. It is also possible to understand that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are mainly so-called missing roles in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. Designs and medium reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are all stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination to 32nd small winning combination, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st replay prize to 10th replay prize as prizes to which the privilege of the replay that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first to tenth replays.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

The second re-game and the third re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The fourth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 4th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 4th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The fifth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while being in the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The sixth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the symbols corresponding to the sixth re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the seventh replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right side. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R. The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 10th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th re-game prize or the 10th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 8th re-game or the 10th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 8th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 10th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 8th re-game prize and the 10th re-game prize. In the ninth re-game, a prize is established when the eighth re-game and the tenth re-game cannot be won, that is, when a missed game may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB prize are stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 14) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent medals exceeding a predetermined amount from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 operates mechanically in conjunction with each other, and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, 3 virtual medals of 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the insertion is performed, the specified number of medals is set as two, and the specific number is set as two, two virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. Is input. Further, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2 and the specific number is set as 3, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of cards is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number of cards is set to 2, 2 One virtual medal is inserted.

Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals.

Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operation surface operated by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operability than the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided, respectively. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order indicator that notifies the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which includes a section indicator for changing the winning rate of the small winning combination and indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a sub control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

Further, on the back surface side of the front door 12, a door opening sensor 27 for detecting that the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the housing 11 is provided. The door opening sensor 27 is electrically connected to the main control device 101 and outputs a door detection signal indicating whether or not the front door 12 is open. The door detection signal is turned on when the front door 12 is opened, and turned off when the front door 12 is closed.

In the front door 12, a lower panel 67 is provided below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, on which a model name, characters related to the game machine, and the like are displayed. A light emitting substrate on which a light emitting element (LED or the like) is mounted is arranged behind the lower panel 67, so that the lower panel 67 can emit light. In the following, the lower panel 67 and the light emitting substrate are collectively referred to as a lower display unit 69. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for a hole manager or the like to adjust the output of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is not. The main control device 77 is visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12, and is invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 14 and 15.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, front Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 27 that detects the opening of the door 12 are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control device 101 and the like are generated with the required operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Specifically, the drive voltage output from the power supply unit 91a (for example, a stabilized drive voltage of 12 volt DC) is monitored, and when the monitored voltage drops below a predetermined lower limit value (for example, 10 volt), the power supply is cut off. It is determined that this has been done, and the power failure signal is output to the input / output port 104 of the main control device 101. By receiving the power failure signal, the main control device 101 recognizes the occurrence of the power failure and executes the power failure processing described later.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

Further, the power supply device 91 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. When the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the off operation of the power switch 71, the power for storing and holding the power from the power supply unit for power failure to the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 (power for power failure). ) Is supplied. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 106 when the power is cut off is retained as it is as long as the power supply at the time of power interruption continues. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure state, it is possible to return to the state at the time of the power failure (before the power failure). For example, if the slot machine 10 is turned off due to the closing of the game hall and the slot machine 10 is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 can be started up in the same internal state as when the slot machine 10 was turned off the day before. .. The power failure signal and the power for power failure are also supplied to the sub control device 81 when the power failure occurs.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit The display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the combination ratio monitor 77, the sub control device 81, and the like are connected via the input / output port 104. Further, an external centralized terminal board 121 is connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104, and various types are connected to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the game hall side through the external centralized terminal board 121. A signal is output.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 contains a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 16), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, the sub-control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The sub control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65, and a lower display unit 69 are connected to the output side. Is connected. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the lower display unit 69 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the sub-control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the sub control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the sub control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. Of these processes, the timer interrupt process and the main process will be described below.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the outline of the power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 14) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, the payout detection sensor 51a, and the door opening sensor 27 connected to the input / output port 104 are read and read. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether the result is normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the sub control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovering from a power failure or turning on the power switch 71. Since the power switch 71 is arranged inside the housing 11 (FIG. 3), it is an operation unit that can be operated when the front door 12 is opened. In other words, the locking device in the game hall. Only a person (hall employee) who has the authority to unlock 20 can operate it.

First, in step S11, as the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the CPU 102, the interrupt mode for permitting the interrupt process is set, and then various settings for the register group in the CPU 102, the I / O device, and the like are set. And so on.

In step S12, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 106. If the power failure flag is set, it is confirmed in step S13 whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the checksum value of the RAM 106 is checked, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal, that is, whether or not the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0. When the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the data in the RAM 106 is normal.

When it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, it is determined in step S14 whether or not the set value is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current set value belongs to the range of 1 to 6. If it belongs to those ranges, it is determined that the set value is normal, and if it does not belong to the range (if the current set value is 0 or 7 or more), it is determined that the set value is abnormal.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S12 to S14, that is, when the power failure flag is not set, the RAM determination value is not normal, or the set value is not normal. , Step S15, recognizing that there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 106, and setting the RAM abnormality.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S14 (when the stored data in the RAM 106 is normal) or after the execution of step S15, the process proceeds to step S16, and whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on. More specifically, it is determined whether or not an on signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 73a. Since the setting key insertion hole 73 is arranged inside the housing 11 (FIG. 3), it can be operated when the front door 12 is opened. In other words, the lock device 20 is locked in the game hall. Only those who have the authority to unlock (hall employees) can operate it.

Here, the setting key detection sensor 73a is in the off state when the regular setting key is simply inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73, and the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 is on the right side (on side). Turn it to to turn it on. That is, the on operation of the setting key corresponds to the operation of turning the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion hole 73 to the right. The setting key may be turned on, which corresponds to a state in which the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned to the right. In addition, the setting key may be off, but this is a state in which the setting key is not inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73, or a state in which the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 is not turned to the right. Corresponds to.

If the setting key is turned on, the process proceeds to step S17, and it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open. When the front door 12 is open, in step S18, the first RAM clearing process for clearing the data stored in the RAM 106 is executed. After that, in step S19, a setting change process for changing the setting value of the slot machine 10 is executed, and after the execution of the setting change process, in step S20, a normal process for performing main control related to the game is performed. Move to. Details of the first RAM clear process in step S18, the setting change process in step S19, and the normal process in step S20 will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S16 (when the setting key is not turned on) or a negative judgment is made in step S17 (when the front door 12 is not opened), the process proceeds to step S21 and a RAM error is set. Judge whether or not it has been done. If the RAM error is not set, in step S22, the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the CPU 102, and the stack state is restored to the state before the power was cut off.

In step S23, the power recovery command is transmitted to the sub control device 81. The power recovery command is a command for notifying the power-on (recovery from the power-off state). In step S24, various sensors such as the start detection sensor 41a are initialized. In step S25, the power failure flag set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 106 is cleared, and then the address returns to the address before the power was cut off. As a result, the timer interrupt processing is restored and the watchdog timer clear processing (step S104) is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S21 (when a RAM abnormality is set), there is a high possibility that the data in the RAM 106 is damaged. In such a case, the operation prohibition process of steps S26 to S28 is performed. As the operation prohibition process, first, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited in step S26, and all the output ports in the input / output port 104 are cleared in step S27, thereby all connected to the input / output port 104. Controls the actuator in the off state. In the following step S28, an error signal is output to the management control device HC of the game hall via the external centralized terminal plate 121. As a result, the hall manager and the like are notified of the occurrence of an error. After the execution of step S28, the process shifts to an infinite loop until the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off.

Next, the normal process of step S20 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the sub-control device 81 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the sub control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals possessed and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, the sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process is performed. If an error occurs, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in the game state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S206. The command set here is output to the sub-control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The sub-control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S208. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the flag for the gaming state set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state Select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the state information storage area 106c is used for the normal game state. Select a lottery table. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 21).

Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, the processing related to the setting of the winning probability will be supplementarily described.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is set as the setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see step S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is set. If is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

A lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 / 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 / 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 / 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5) The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). The probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinching bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 each. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the first BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, before the 1st BB is won, about 1.50 medals can be expected to decrease per game (net increase minus about 1.50), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carry-over state after winning the first BB, a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase number minus about 2.10).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal game state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the second BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, before the 2nd BB is won, a decrease of about 0.24 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 0.24), excluding the increase of the 2nd BB, and the 2nd BB. In the carry-over state after winning, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the second BB state (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when there is no determination target to be determined in step S308, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the sub control device 81. The command transmission to the sub control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winned when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (winned when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination will be displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB winning is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role and the 7th. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the second re-game, the third re-game, and the second re-game prize is set, priority is given so that each re-game prize is established with priority over the second BB prize. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize of any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S314. In the game number update process, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, the CZ mode, and the AT mode is updated. The process for updating the number of games will be described in detail later.

In the following step S315, the section display first process is executed, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310. It is a process. The rotation effect processing will be described in detail later. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information set in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the distance between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The 18th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red clam" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is displayed on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop.

In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbols with a small number of sliding frames on the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 reels), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper stage, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper stage, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the case where the winning combination may be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination may be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 is won or the middle forward push bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and the 18th small winning combination is won. And even if the stop mode is such that there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for the winning.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the operation is performed. Depending on the operation timing, the small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if the common bell is won, the 1st small winning combination, the 2nd small winning combination, the 3rd small winning combination, the 4th small winning combination, and the 5th small winning combination will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing. , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in step S411, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the sub control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game prize to the tenth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for setting the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is present depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags are set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes have not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB prizes has been established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB prize has been established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, when "90" is input to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the following step S509, the first BB start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The first BB start command is a command for causing the sub control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the sub control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the sub control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of bets in the above game, and the number of bets that can start the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the game can be started). It corresponds to the number of bets that can be made). That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bets are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "90" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, the second BB winning flag is cleared in step S512, and the second BB state flag is set in step S513. After that, in step S514, the second BB start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the sub control device 81 to grasp that the second BB state is started. The sub-control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and the second game is started from the next game. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed.

The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, the specified number of games is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

In the present embodiment, the BB counter (upper limit payout number) is set to the same value when the first BB prize is established and when the second BB prize is established, but these may be different values. For example, the value of the BB counter set when the first BB prize is established may be larger than that when the second BB prize is established, or vice versa.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In the present embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. Normally, the probability of winning Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1 / 5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1 / 1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of about 0.00 plus or minus), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/5.96, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/9.64. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/596 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table that can reduce the medals in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are digested will increase. It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combination prizes has been established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, when the common bell is won and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established, 13 cards are paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is not 0 or less in step S517, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, the BB end command corresponding to the BB state that ends this time is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The sub-control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for the end of the first BB and the effect for the end of the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is won is a state called a so-called non-internal state. In this case, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and it is possible to play a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 2-bet game.

If the 1st BB combination or the 2nd BB combination is won and no prize is established in the winning game, the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even in the carry-over state, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and it is possible to play a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 3-bet game.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the state in which the first BB combination is won and the state in which the second BB combination is won, the former is referred to as "three-sheet internal state" and the latter is referred to as "two-sheet internal state". There is a case.

In this slot machine 10, each reel 32L, 32M so that the first BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB winning cannot be established in the 2-bet game in the three-card internal state in which the first BB winning combination is won. , 32R stop control is performed. In addition, in the two-card internal state in which the second BB role is won, the second BB prize is not established in the 3-bet game, while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the second BB prize can be established in the 2-bet game. Control is done.

In other words, if the 1st BB role is won in the 3-bet game (when the internal state of 3 cards is established), the 1st BB winning can be established by continuing the 3-bet game as it is, but after winning the 1st BB role. When switching to the 2-bet game, the first BB prize cannot be established. In addition, if the 2nd BB role is won in the 2-bet game (when the internal state of 2 cards is established), the 2nd BB winning can be established by continuing the 2-bet game as it is, but after winning the 2nd BB role. If you switch to a 3-bet game, you will not be able to win the second BB prize.

Then, the 1st BB role and the 2nd BB role will not be won in duplicate, and in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB role will not be won again, and the 2nd BB role may be won in duplicate. No. For this reason, if a game is played in a 2-bet game in a situation where the three cards that have won the first BB role are in the internal state, the game in which the first BB winning is carried over will continue endlessly.

In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB winning combination will not be won again, and the first BB winning combination will not be won in duplicate. Therefore, if a game is played in a 3-bet game in a situation where the two cards that have won the second BB role are in the internal state, the game in which the second BB winning is carried over will continue endlessly.

Here, as described above, the first BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, 3 in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over. If the 2nd BB prize is not established even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the betting game, and the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the second BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the first BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over is displayed. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to use a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win a prize in another role at the time of the loss.

Further, in the first BB state that shifts when the first BB prize is established and the second BB state that shifts when the second BB prize is established, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won, and the assist. It is possible to switch between a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) in which the above is not performed, and it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, a game in a 2-bet game is performed in a non-internal state, and the second BB combination is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB combination is won, the internal state (two-card internal state) is set, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB prize cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the game in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over without winning the 1st BB role or winning the 2nd BB winning. Will be continued.

Here, the first BB winning flag for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp that the first BB combination is in the winning state (three internal states) is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. NS. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags of other roles are stored.

Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 will be left with various flags of the normal area stored before the power is turned off. It will be started. Therefore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off in the internal state of the three machines in which the first BB winning flag is set and then the power is turned on, the slot machine 10 is started in the state where the internal state of the three machines is maintained. NS.

However, when the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up (when the setting is changed), the normal area initialization process (clear process) is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in these normal areas. Therefore, if the setting is changed after the slot machine 10 is started, the internal state of the three machines is cleared and the slot machine 10 becomes a non-internal state.

On the other hand, the second BB winning flag for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp that the second BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states) is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage areas 106d. This storage area is subject to backup processing when the power is cut off, like the normal area. Therefore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off in the internal state of the two machines in which the second BB winning flag is set in the storage area, and then the power is turned on, the slot is in a state where the internal state of the two machines is maintained. Machine 10 is started.

Unlike the normal area, the storage area is excluded from the data clear processing (initialization processing) when the setting is changed. Therefore, even if the setting is changed in the internal state of the two sheets in which the second BB winning flag is set in the storage area, the second BB winning flag set in the area is not cleared. That is, the game is performed in a situation where the internal state of the two cards has been established under the set value changed by the setting change.

In this way, it is possible to continue the game in the two-card internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over, not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off, but also when the setting is changed. Then, once the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game (the internal state of 2 cards is established), after that, unless the 2nd BB winning is basically established and the 2nd BB state is performed, the second BB state is established. The 2BB winning flag will be stored in memory (the internal state of the two cards will be maintained). By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably carry out the game in a state in which the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the number of bets of the game to be started this time is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the grasped number of bets matches the specific specified number corresponding to the game state at that time. That is, in step S601, it is grasped whether or not any of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is 2.

As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the first BB and the second BB, and in the internal state after winning the first BB and the second BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of bets, and the first BB state and the second BB are set. In the state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific specified number (specified set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. If the number is not the specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (process for the instruction function) after step S604.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the specified number of non-internal states and internal states is set to 3, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is executed in the 2-bet game. Not done. Further, in the present embodiment, the specific specified number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, but in each of these BB states, 3 is set as the specified bet number, so that the 2-bet game is played. It is not executed, and the processing for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state or the second BB state.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the two-bet game is played in the internal state, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate the normal game in which the second BB state is carried over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that this game is a game in the advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section. Will be done.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous section transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order Bell and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S703, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not a loss result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If the transition lottery has been won in step S705, the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27), if the advantageous section flag is set in step S604, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag or the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode, in which the number of continuous games in the AT mode and the additional winning probability of the number of AT mode games are different, are set. The first AT flag and the second AT flag are flags for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode is in progress and its type. Each of these AT flags is set at the time of transition to AT mode. If none of the AT flags are set in step S606, the AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S606, the AT addition process is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
The AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S801. In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the first AT flag is not set, that is, when the first AT mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S803, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. In the present embodiment, when the number of games (number of hamari games) that are not won in the first AT mode transition lottery reaches a predetermined number of ceiling games (for example, 700 games) while staying in an advantageous section, the first 1 AT mode transition It is configured to shift to the first AT mode regardless of the result of the lottery. The ceiling counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games, and the process of step S803 has reached whether or not the number of remaining games has become 0, that is, the number of ceiling games has been reached. It determines whether or not it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S803 (when the value of the ceiling counter is not 0), the process proceeds to step S804 to determine whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the CZ mode, is set at the start of the CZ mode, and is cleared at the end of the CZ mode. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as a state before winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode is changed to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as a mode that makes it easy to win the transition lottery.

When the CZ flag is not set in step S804, that is, in the normal mode, in step S805, the normal first AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the normal first AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the first AT mode (winning probability of the first AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, when the CZ flag is set in step S804, that is, in the CZ mode, in step S806, the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. Also in the first AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the first AT mode is set according to the lottery result of each game.

In the present embodiment, in both the normal first AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ mode first AT mode transition lottery table, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C can be used as triggers for the first AT mode transition lottery. Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, Common Bell, Push Order Bell, and Watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as the 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the first AT mode transition lottery. However, in the 1st AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the 1st AT mode transition rate when the chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, and watermelon are won is for normal use. It is higher than the case of the 1st AT mode transition lottery table, and the transition rate to the 1st AT mode is given preferential treatment.

The trigger of the 1st AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above, and the 2nd BB is carried over, for example, the 1st AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as the 3-bet game serve as a trigger.

After the execution of step S805 or step S806, the process proceeds to step S807 to execute the first AT mode lottery process. In the first AT mode lottery process, a random number for the first AT mode transition lottery is acquired, and the acquired random number, the lottery result grasped in step S801, and the first AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S805 or step S806 are obtained. The first AT mode is used to draw a winning / failing lottery. In the following step S808, it is determined whether or not the transition to the first AT mode has been won in the first AT mode lottery process of step S807. If it is won, the process for winning the first AT mode in steps S809 to S813 is executed, and if it is not won, the process for not winning the first AT mode in steps S814 to S819 is executed.

Here, the first AT mode is a mode in which the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. When the push order notification is generated after shifting to the first AT mode, it is possible to establish the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination at the time of winning each push order bell. In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the first AT mode is plus about 8.04 cards. In the first AT mode, the initial number of games is set to 15, and by winning the additional lottery, the remaining number of games is added. When the number of remaining games becomes 0, the first AT mode ends.

When the first AT mode transition lottery is won in step S808, the process of clearing the value of the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e (setting the value to 0) is executed in step S809. In the following step S810, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0. The role of the disconnection counter will be described later. If the value of the off-counter is not 0 in step S810, the value of the counter is cleared in step S811.

After the execution of step S811 or when a positive determination is made in step S810 (when the value of the deviation counter is 0), the first AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S812. The first AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the first AT mode. In the following step S813, the first AT winning command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The first AT winning command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the first AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S808 (if the first AT mode is not won), the process proceeds to step S814 to determine whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the CZ flag is not set, that is, in the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S815. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the CZ mode (the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as a trigger for the CZ mode transition lottery, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell , Push order bell, watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery.

The trigger of the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won, and the 3 bets that carry over the second BB. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a game is a trigger.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S815, the CZ mode lottery process is executed in step S816. In the CZ mode lottery process, a lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is performed based on the acquired CZ mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S817, it is determined whether or not the transition to the CZ mode is won in the CZ mode lottery process of step S816.

If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won in step S817, the process proceeds to step S818, and the CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In step S819, the CZ winning command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The CZ winning command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S814 (in CZ mode) or a negative determination is made in step S817 (if the lottery for transition to CZ mode has not been won), the AT lottery process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802 (when the first AT mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S820 to acquire the second AT mode transition lottery table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to the second AT mode is performed only when the player is staying in the first AT mode.

Similar to the 1st AT mode, the 2nd AT mode is a mode in which the push order notification corresponding to the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. In both the 1st AT mode and the 2nd AT mode, the lottery for adding the number of staying games is performed, but the rate of adding the number of games in the 2nd AT mode is more favorable than that in the 1st AT mode. .. That is, the second AT mode is an AT mode higher than the first AT mode, in other words, the AT mode is more advantageous to the player than the first AT mode.

In the second AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the second AT mode (the winning probability of the second AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, chance eyes A, chance eyes B, chance eyes C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, and watermelon are set as triggers for the second AT mode transition lottery. That is, in the game in the first AT mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, some of the winning results are set as a trigger for the second AT mode transition lottery.

The trigger of the second AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, as in the case of the first AT mode transition lottery. The configuration may be such that all the winning results are the triggers.

After acquiring the second AT mode transition lottery table in step S820, the second AT mode lottery process is executed in step S21. In the second AT mode lottery process, the second AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the acquired second AT mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S822, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode lottery process of step S821 has been won.

If the second AT mode transition lottery has not been won in step S822, the present AT lottery process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the second AT mode transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S823, and the second AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The second AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second AT mode transition lottery has been won. In step S824, the second AT winning command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The second AT winning command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the second AT mode transition lottery has been won.

<Process for adding AT>
The AT addition process in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S901, the lottery result of this game is grasped. In the following step S902, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode is in progress.

When the first AT flag is set in step S902 (when the first AT mode is in progress), in step S903, the additional lottery table for the first AT is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. On the other hand, if the first AT flag is not set in step S902, it means that the second AT mode is in progress. In this case, the process proceeds to step S904, and the additional lottery table for the second AT is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a.

In the additional lottery table for each AT mode, as shown in FIG. 32, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. Comparing the additional lottery table for the 1st AT and the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT is more than the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT. It's easier to win. For example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table has a 15% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table has a 30% probability. In the situation after the transition to the AT mode, the probability of winning the additional lottery is higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S903 or step S904, the additional lottery process is executed in step S905. In the additional lottery process, a lottery process is performed based on the above-acquired additional lottery table for each AT mode and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 to determine whether or not to add the number of games. In step S906, it is determined whether or not the player has won the addition of the number of games in the addition lottery process of step S905.

If the number of games added is not won, the process for adding the AT is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the player has won the additional game number, the process proceeds to step S907 to execute the additional game number lottery process. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the number of additional games table is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, if the addition is usually triggered by Lip B, an average of 100 games will be added, while if the addition is triggered by Cherry A, an average of 15 games will be added. It is set so that the number of additional games will be larger when the additional games are made when it is difficult to win the lottery.

In step S908, a process of adding the current number of additional games drawn by the lottery process for the number of additional games in step S907 is executed for the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode. After the execution of step S908, the addition command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S909, and then the AT addition process ends. The addition command includes information indicating that the number of games is to be added and the number of games to be added, and the sub-control device 81 that has received the command assists and displays the addition notification effect corresponding to the addition. The process to be performed by the unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed.

<Rotation effect processing>
Here, the rotation effect process of step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a). In the present embodiment, the display windows 26L to 26R corresponding to the reels 32L to 32R are configured to notify the winning of the first AT mode by stopping a specific symbol combination, and the rotation effect processing is a processing for that purpose. ..

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ flag is for the CPU 102 to know that it is in the CZ mode, as described above. If the CZ flag is not set (when not in the CZ mode), the main rotation effect process ends as it is. If the CZ flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the first AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

If the 1st AT winning flag is not set, the main rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. When the 1st AT winning flag is set (when the 1st AT mode transition lottery is in the winning state), the 1st AT winning flag is cleared in step S1003, and then in step S1004, the various flag storage areas 106d. Set the 1st AT start flag to. The first AT start flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the first AT mode should be started.

After the execution of step S1004, in step S1005, it is set to execute the rotation effect for the first AT notification. As the rotation effect for the first AT notification, for example, after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, as shown in FIG. 33B, as a symbol combination for the first AT corresponding to the first AT, "red". 7 ”The effect is set in which the symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) at a predetermined line (downward right line L4), and then the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R is restarted. This first AT notification rotation effect is an effect performed during the invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective after the game is started. In the present embodiment, the first AT mode is a so-called pseudo-bonus.

In the following step S1006, the first AT notification command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the rotation effect processing is terminated. The first AT notification command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the first AT mode winning is notified by the rotation effect for the first AT notification in this game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first AT mode is won or the game after the CZ mode is completed, the first AT mode is produced by the rotation effect for the first AT notification using the reels 32L to 32R. Winning will be notified. At the same time, the flag for starting the first AT for starting the transition to the first AT mode is set, and the game shifts to the first AT mode from the next game of the winning notification. When the mode shifts to the first AT mode, the notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the push order bell can be generated.

The notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processes of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery process and the AT addition process are executed in the process of step S607 or step S608, the push order notification process is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process, the outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the sub control device 81, and the sub control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of the eight segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In that case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, the light is turned off.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during a specific section where the benefit of push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of medals is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that it is twice as bright as the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lit state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine should be higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first are the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 35B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT flag or the second AT flag is set. When any of the AT flags is set, the instruction monitor is instructed to perform the push order notification corresponding to the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in step S611 according to the type of the push order bell this time. Control 68. Then, in step S612, a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the main pressing order is set. End the notification process. The sub-control device 81 that has received this push order notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if any AT flag is not set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Process for updating the number of games>
The process for updating the number of games in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. In the game number update process, a process of updating the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and the like is executed.

In the game number update process, first, in step S1101, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and the game to be started this time is in any BB state. Determine if there is any. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1101 to S1103 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process.

If a negative determination is made in each of the processes of step S1102 and step S1103, the process for updating the number of games is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in those processes, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The advantageous section flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section is in progress.

If the advantageous section flag is not set (if it is not in the advantageous section), the process for updating the number of games is terminated as it is. When the advantageous section flag is set (when the advantageous section is in progress), the process proceeds to step S1105, and it is determined whether or not any AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT transition lottery is in the winning state.

If none of the AT winning flags are set, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not any of the AT flags is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode is in progress. If none of the AT flags are set, the process proceeds to step S1107, and the values of the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are subtracted by 1 and updated.

In the following step S1108, the value of the deviation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is subtracted by 1 and updated.

Here, the disconnection counter will be described. In the present embodiment, internal points can be given as the game progresses. These points are given through a grant lottery process consisting of a grant lottery for whether or not to grant points and a point number lottery for drawing the number of points to be granted. When points are awarded, the points are not limited to one game, but are accumulated. When the total points reach the privilege grant value (for example, 5 points), a predetermined privilege is granted to the player.

When an undesired event occurs for the player, a point-giving lottery is performed, and with such a configuration, the player's disappointment can be alleviated by giving points. In the present embodiment, a plurality of triggers are provided as triggers for executing such a point-giving lottery, and one of them is not won in the first AT mode transition lottery while staying in an advantageous section. It is assumed that the number of games (number of hamari games) reaches a specific number (for example, 600 games). The out-of-counter is for counting the number of remaining games up to a specific number, and as described above, each time a game that is not won in the 1st AT mode transition lottery is played while staying in an advantageous section, 1 It is subtracted one by one. The points-giving lottery and the benefits when the total points reach the privilege-giving value will be described in detail later.

After the execution of step S1108, in step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation counter is 0. When the value of the deviation counter is 0, it means that the number of remaining games up to the specific number is 0 games, in other words, it means that the number of Hamari games has reached the specific number. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1110, and the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The point lottery flag A is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the execution trigger of the point granting lottery has been established. In step S1111, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The point trigger command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the execution trigger (point grant trigger) of the point grant lottery has been established. In the present embodiment, a plurality of triggers are set as the point granting triggers, and the point triggering command includes information indicating that the point granting trigger has been established, and which trigger is the current granting trigger. Contains information indicating whether or not.

After the execution of step S1111, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1105 (when any AT winning flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S1109 (when the value of the deviation counter is not 0), step S1112 is performed. Proceed to determine whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The CZ flag is a flag indicating that the CZ mode is in progress.

When the CZ flag is set (in the CZ mode), the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the CZ counter is executed in step S1113. As a result, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is updated. In step S1114, the CZ game number update command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81. The CZ game number update command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has been updated. After the execution of step S1114 or when a negative determination is made in step S1112 (when not in the CZ mode), the process for updating the number of games is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106 (when the AT mode is in progress), a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter value is executed in step S1115. As a result, the number of remaining games in AT mode is updated. In step S1116, the AT game number update command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the game number update process is terminated. The AT game number update command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the AT mode has been updated.

<Processing for winning results>
The winning result handling process in step S415 in the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the CZ mode, the AT mode, and the like is performed according to the game result of the game. This process is executed when all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (when the game is finished).

First, in step S1201, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1201 to S1203 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process.

If an affirmative determination is made in each of the processes of step S1202 and step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204 to execute the CZ mode process for starting the CZ mode or ending the CZ mode. In step S1205, the first AT mode transition process for starting the first AT mode is executed, and in step S1206, the first AT mode end process for ending the first AT mode is executed. In step S1207, the second AT mode processing for starting the second AT mode and ending the second AT mode is executed. In step S1208, the first point lottery process for performing the point award lottery is executed. After the execution of step S1208, if a negative determination is made in step S1202 or a negative determination is made in step S1203, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

<Processing for CZ mode>
The CZ mode process of step S1204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the CZ winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the CZ mode transition lottery. If the CZ winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1302, the winning flag is cleared, and then the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1303. As a result, the CZ mode is started (shifts to the CZ mode).

In step S1304, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 games) as an initial value of a CZ counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by 1 for each game. The initial value of the CZ counter (the number of initial games in the CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games, and for example, a plurality of types of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of games.

After the execution of step S1304, the CZ start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S1305, and then the CZ mode processing is terminated. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the CZ mode has been entered. The CZ start command includes information indicating that the game has shifted to the CZ mode, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the sub-control device 81 can grasp the transition to the CZ mode and the number of games in the CZ mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301 (when the CZ winning flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1306, and whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, that is, the CZ mode is in progress. Judge whether or not. When the CZ flag is set (in the CZ mode), it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0.

When the value of the CZ counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1308 to clear the CZ flags set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the CZ mode ends. In step S1309, the CZ end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The CZ end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the CZ mode has ended.

After the execution of step S1309, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the first AT mode transition lottery. When the first AT winning flag is set, that is, when the first AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the processing for the present CZ mode is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the first AT winning flag is not set (when the first AT mode transition lottery is not won during the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1311 and the point lottery flag B is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. do. The point lottery flag B is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the execution trigger of the point award lottery has been established. That is, in the present embodiment, although it was possible to shift to the CZ mode, the fact that the CZ mode ended without being able to win the first AT mode transition lottery is one of the triggers for executing the point-giving lottery. I'm trying.

In the following step S1312, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The point trigger command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the point grant trigger has been established. After the execution of step S1312, if a negative determination is made in step S1306 (when not in CZ mode) or when a negative determination is made in step S1307 (when the number of remaining games in CZ mode is not 0), the processing for this CZ mode is terminated. ..

<Process for transition to 1st AT mode>
The process for shifting to the first AT mode in step S1205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If the CZ flag is not set (when not in the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the first AT winning flag or any AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

If the first AT winning flag is not set and none of the AT flags are set (neither the winning game in the first AT mode nor the AT mode), the various flag storage areas described above are set in step S1403. It is determined whether or not the first AT mode start flag is set in 106d. The first AT mode start flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the first AT mode should be started.

When the first AT mode start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1404 to clear the first AT mode start flag, and in step S1405, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the first AT mode is started (shifts to the first AT mode). In step S1406, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 15 games) as an initial value of an AT counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and is decremented by 1 for each game. The initial value of the AT counter (the number of initial games in the AT mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games, and for example, a plurality of types of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of games.

In step S1407, the first AT start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The first AT start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the mode has changed to the first AT mode. The first AT start command includes information indicating that the game has shifted to the first AT mode, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the first AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the first AT start command, the sub-control device 81 can grasp the transition to the first AT mode and the number of games in the first AT mode.

After the execution of step S1407, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1401 (in CZ mode), if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1402 (the first AT winning flag is set, or one of the AT flags is set). If a negative determination is made in step S1403 (when the first AT start flag is not set), the first AT mode transition process ends.

<Process for ending the 1st AT mode>
The process for terminating the first AT mode in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If the first AT flag is not set (when the first AT mode is not in progress), the process for terminating the first AT mode is terminated as it is. When the first AT flag is set (when in the first AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the first AT mode is 1 or more, the process for ending the first AT mode is terminated as it is in order to continue the first AT mode. On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the first AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1503, and the first AT flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared. As a result, the first AT mode ends.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the second AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The second AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the second AT mode transition lottery. When the second AT winning flag is set, that is, when the second AT mode transition lottery is won during the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1505 and the second AT winning flag is cleared. In step S1506, the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the first AT mode end process is terminated. The second AT start flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the second AT mode should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504 (when the second AT winning flag is not set), that is, if the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1507 and various counters of the RAM 106 are used. It is determined whether or not the value of the PT counter provided in the area 106e is 5 or more. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the total points reach the privilege grant value (for example, 5 points), the privilege is given to the player. However, the processing of this step is the total. It is used to determine whether or not the points have reached the privilege grant value.

If the value of the PT counter is 5 or more and the total points have reached the privilege grant value, the process proceeds to step S1508, and the value of the PT counter is cleared to 0. In step S1509, the point achievement command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81. The point achievement command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the total points have reached the privilege grant value. After the execution of step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the second AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first AT mode, if the total points reach the privilege grant value, the second AT mode is shifted after the end of the first AT mode. This is a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value. In addition, in a situation where the total points have reached the privilege grant value, the second AT mode transition lottery may be won during the first AT mode. In that case, the transition to the second AT mode is performed without consuming the total points, and the total points are carried over to the first AT mode from the next time onward.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507 (when the value of the PT counter is less than 5), the process proceeds to step S1510, and the first AT end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode has ended. In step S1511, the first AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The first AT end command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1512, the point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The point lottery flag C is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the execution opportunity of the point granting lottery has been established. That is, in the present embodiment, although it was possible to shift to the first AT mode, the fact that the first AT mode ended without being able to win the second AT mode transition lottery triggered the execution of the point-giving lottery. It is one of. In the following step S1513, a point trigger command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the first AT mode termination process is terminated.

<Processing for 2nd AT mode>
The process for the second AT mode in step S1207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1601 and step S1602, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag or the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If any of these flags is set (either in the CZ mode or in the first AT mode), the processing for the second AT mode is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when neither the CZ flag nor the first AT flag is set (neither in the CZ mode nor in the first AT mode), the process proceeds to step S1603, and the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. Is set or not.

If the second AT flag is not set, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the flag for starting the second AT is not set, the process for the second AT mode is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the second AT start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1605 to clear the second AT start flag, and in step S1606, the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the second AT mode is started (shifts to the second AT mode).

In step S1607, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 40 games) as an initial value of an AT counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode (the number of initial games in the AT mode) does not necessarily have to be larger than the initial value of the AT counter in the first AT mode, and may be the same value or the AT counter in the first AT mode. The value may be smaller than the initial value. Further, the initial value of the AT counter in the second AT mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games, and for example, a plurality of types of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of games.

Next, in step S1608, the second AT start command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the second AT mode processing is terminated. The second AT start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the mode has changed to the second AT mode. The second AT start command includes information indicating that the game has shifted to the second AT mode, as well as information indicating the number of initial games in the second AT mode. Therefore, by receiving the second AT start command, the sub-control device 81 can grasp the transition to the second AT mode and the number of games in the second AT mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 (when the second AT flag is set), the process proceeds to step S1609 to determine whether or not the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. .. If the value of the AT counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the second AT mode is 1 or more, the processing for the second AT mode is terminated as it is in order to continue the second AT mode. On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the second AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1610, and the second AT flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared. As a result, the second AT mode ends.

In step S1611, the second AT end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The second AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the second AT mode has ended. In step S1612, the second AT end command is set as the output target to the sub control device 81, and then the second AT mode processing is ended. The second AT end command is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 that the second AT mode has ended.

<Processing for 1st point lottery>
The first point lottery process of step S1208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not any AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If none of the AT flags are set and the AT mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The point lottery flag A points when the value of the loss counter becomes 0 and the number of Hamari games (the number of games that are not won in the 1st AT mode transition lottery) reaches a specific number (for example, 600 games). It is set on the assumption that the execution opportunity of the grant lottery has been established (step S1110 in FIG. 36).

When the point lottery flag A is set, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the point lottery table A is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the point lottery table A, as shown in FIG. 43, the awarding probability is set for each number of points from 0 to 5. The probability of giving each number of points is the highest, with the probability that the number of points becomes 0 (points are not given) is 90%. Then, at 10% where points are given, the probability of giving 5 points, which is the highest point, is the highest, and the probability of giving points decreases as the number of points decreases. That is, in the point lottery table A, although the probability that points are given is low, when points are given, a large number of points is likely to be given.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702 (when the point lottery flag A is not set), the process proceeds to step S1704 to determine whether or not the point lottery flag B is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. .. The point lottery flag B is set on the assumption that the execution opportunity of the point award lottery has been established when the CZ mode ends without being able to win the first AT mode transition lottery (step S1311 in FIG. 38).

If the point lottery flag B is set, the process proceeds to step S1705 to acquire the point lottery table B from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 43, the probability of giving each number of points in the point lottery table B is that the probability that the number of points becomes 0 (points are not given) is 50%, and the point giving rate is higher than that of the point lottery table A. Is also getting higher. On the other hand, as a distribution of the number of points when points are given, the probability of giving 1 point, which is the lowest value, is the highest, and the probability of giving points decreases as the number of points increases. That is, in the point lottery table B, although the probability that points are given is high, when points are given, a small number of points is likely to be given.

If a negative determination is made in step S1704 (when the point lottery flag B is not set), the process proceeds to step S1706, and it is determined whether or not the point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. .. The point lottery flag C is set when the first AT mode ends without being able to win the second AT mode transition lottery, assuming that the execution opportunity of the point award lottery has been established (step S1512 in FIG. 40).

When the point lottery flag C is set, the process proceeds to step S1707, and the point lottery table C is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 43, the probability of giving each number of points in the point lottery table C is the same as that of the point lottery table B.

If a negative determination is made in step S1706 (when the point lottery flag C is not set), that is, if the point lottery opportunity has not been established, the first point lottery process is terminated as it is.

After executing step S1703, step S1705, or step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708 to execute the point award lottery process. In the point granting lottery process, the number of points is drawn based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not the points are awarded (whether or not the number of points to be awarded is 1 or more) in the awarding lottery process of step S1708.

If the points are not awarded (when the number of points drawn is 0), the first point lottery process is terminated as it is. If the points have been awarded, in step S1710, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of points granted in the present grant lottery to the PT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The PT counter is for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of accumulated points (total number of points). In step S1711, a point giving command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The point-giving command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that points have been given. The point granting command includes information indicating that points have been granted, as well as information indicating the number of points granted in the present lottery and the total number of points granted. Therefore, in the sub-control device 81, by receiving the point-giving command, it is possible to grasp not only the points given but also the number of points given and the total number of accumulated points.

After the execution of step S1711, the first point lottery process is completed. Further, when a positive determination is made in step S1701 (when any AT flag is set and the AT mode is in progress), the first point lottery process is also terminated. That is, in the AT mode, the point award lottery (point awarding) is not performed.

<Management of advantageous sections>
The section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The section display first process is a process performed in step S315 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the advantageous section winning game flag is cleared in step S1804. Then, in step S1805, the advantageous section flag is set. As a result, the advantageous section is started (shifts to the advantageous section).

In step S1806, a process of starting counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section.

In step S1807, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games (for example, a value corresponding to 700 games) is executed as an initial value of the ceiling counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1808, a process of inputting a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 600 games) as an initial value of the deviation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then, in step S1809, a second point lottery process is performed. Run. In the present embodiment, the start of the advantageous section is one of the execution triggers of the point-giving lottery, and the process of step S1809 corresponds to the point-giving lottery based on the establishment of the execution trigger.

Here, the second point lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. In the second point lottery process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not any AT flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. If neither AT flag is set and the AT mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1902, and a point trigger command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81.

In the following step S1903, the point lottery table D is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 43, the probability of giving each number of points in the point lottery table D is that the probability that the number of points becomes 0 (points are not given) is 30%, and the probability that points are given is another. It is higher than the point lottery table. Further, when the points are given, the number of points is easily distributed to be smaller than the number of large points.

The point lottery tables A to D in this embodiment are merely examples, and the point award probability and the distribution of the number of points can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the configuration is such that a separate lottery table is used in response to the establishment of each opportunity, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common lottery table corresponding to all opportunities is provided (point award probability and number of points). There may be a configuration in which there is no difference in the distribution rate for each opportunity).

After the execution of step S1903, the processes of steps S1905 to S1907 are executed, which are the same as those of steps S1708 to S1711 in the first point lottery process (FIG. 42). That is, the number of points is drawn based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and when points are given, the number of points this time is up to the previous time. Add to the number of points.

Returning to the description of the section display first process (FIG. 44), after executing the second point lottery process in step S1809, in step S1810, an advantageous section start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The advantageous section start command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the advantageous section is started.

After the execution of step S1810, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1802 (in the advantageous section) or a negative decision is made in step S1803 (if the advantageous section winning game flag is not set), step S1811 is performed. , Any AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. When any of the AT mode flags is set, the display of the section indicator is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1812.

After the display of the section display is started in this way, if the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1813 to display the display in the advantageous section. Execute continuous processing. Specifically, a process is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state. That is, the process for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display process.

If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1811, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1814, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the process of step S1812 or step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1815. In step S1815, a process of adding 1 to the winning combination second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1814 or step S1815, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1816. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1817, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1816 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units including seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77A, a second display unit 77B, a third display unit 77C, a fourth display unit 77D, and a fifth display unit 77E as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77A to the fifth display unit 77E have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the combination monitor 77, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1817, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1816 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77A to 77E on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 such as "0.5012" and up to 4 digits after the decimal point. The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1817, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1816, the display control of the combination ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the combination monitor 77, the first display unit 77A basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77A is not provided, the first display unit 77A is printed, or the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77A and the second display unit 77B by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
The second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22), and is based on the medal payout (payout determination process) and the winning result at the end of one game. It will be carried out after the transition of the game state, etc. (processing for dealing with the winning result) is performed.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S2102. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S2102, in step S2103, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S2103, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on the condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is the number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section MY. By adding to, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S2103, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S2104, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S2105.

The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the total of the advantageous section game number AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode), and the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode) is , Understand whether the situation is equal to or greater than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section or greater than the maximum number of games. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. .. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. Know if there are more situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S2106, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S2107, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S2108, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed.

In step S2109, processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed. In the initialization process of the advantageous section information, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time are returned to the initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT winning flag, the AT flag, the various CZ flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the counters for the number of continuous games such as the advantageous section game number AG, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, and the CZ mode are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using push order notification, and RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters.

Further, in the initialization process of step S2109, a process of clearing a flag related to the point granting lottery process and a counter related to the given points is also performed. Specifically, if any of the point lottery flags is set, those flags are cleared, and if the value of the PT counter (counter for grasping the total number of points) is larger than 0, that flag is cleared. Performs a process of clearing the value to 0 (a process of initializing the total points).

In step S2110, the advantageous section end command and the initialization command are set as output targets to the sub control device 81. The advantageous section end command is a command for notifying that the advantageous section has ended, and the initialization command is a command for notifying that the initialization process has been performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106 (when the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number), the process proceeds to step S2111 and any AT Determines if the end flag is set. The AT end flag is set at the end of each AT mode (step S1510 in FIG. 40, step S1611 in FIG. 41).

If the AT end flag is set, the AT end flag is cleared in step S2112. After that, the process proceeds to step S2107, and the processes of steps S2107 to S2110 are executed to end the advantageous section. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode shifted to the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2111 (when neither AT end flag is set), the second process of displaying this section is terminated as it is.

In the second section display process, the number of bets corresponds to the game state, as in steps S601 to S603 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27) and steps S1101 to S1103 of the game number update process (FIG. 36). The process of determining whether or not the data has been executed is not executed. Therefore, the game was played for the number of advantageous section games AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section) and the number of MY (the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the advantageous section from the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section). It is updated every time the game is run, regardless of the number of bets at the time. That is, the update process of the number of games executed in the advantageous section and the number of medals increased / decreased is performed even when the game is played with the number of bets set to 2 (when the game is played in a state where the number of bets does not match the specified specified number). Will be executed.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 47, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if the 7th small winning combination 7 (common bell) is won and the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won, the number of games to be executed in the advantageous section from the next game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established. (Counting the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won during the advantageous section and the push order notification can occur due to the winning notification and the AT flag being set, the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. As a matter of fact, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends and the eighth display is finished when the third reel stop ON operation is performed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. Is finished. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the next game of the game that won the transition lottery to the advantageous section, while the push order notification is performed only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. appear. In other words, the push order notification does not occur in the section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off even in the advantageous section. That is, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefit of the push order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). Can be clearly grasped. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally enjoyed even though it is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall and the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

<About the production related to points>
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution opportunity of the point-giving lottery is established as the game progresses, the point-giving lottery is executed. If you win the point-giving lottery, points will be given and the points given will be added cumulatively. Then, when the total value of the granted points (total points) reaches the privilege grant value, the privilege (transition to the second AT mode) is granted to the player. In this case, in the process until the total points reach the privilege grant value, if the effect (notification) that suggests the total points is performed each time, the player has the impression that the points are accumulated, or even the privilege grant value. Since it is possible to predict the remaining number of points, the motivation to further increase the points is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the configuration where the value of the PT counter is cleared to 0 at the end of the advantageous section and the points accumulated up to that point disappear, if this is reflected in the production as it is, the willingness to continue the game by giving points. May stay in the advantageous section and may not be evoked well after the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production is devised so that the motivation to continue the game by awarding points is preferably aroused even after the end of the advantageous section. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for that purpose will be described.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S2202, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201 or after the process of step S2202 is executed, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 18). If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S2204.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or after the process of step S2204 is executed, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is a command other than the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process (FIG. 19). , CZ winning command, AT winning command, addition command set in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27), point giving command set in the second point lottery process (FIGS. 44, 45), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S2206.

When a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after the process of step S2206 is executed, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). There is a stop command command set in. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S2208 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, or after the process of step S2208 is executed, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S418 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the CZ start command, CZ end command, AT start command, AT end command set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37), and the first point lottery process (FIG. 37, 42) are set. There is a point giving command, a point achievement command set in the process for ending the first AT mode (FIGS. 37 and 40), and the like. In the case of these commands at the time of all stops, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed in step S2210.

If a negative determination is made in step S2209, or after the process of step S2210 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2211, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S2211, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above-mentioned effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S2211, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected to, set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, the process proceeds to step S2303 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the setting of.

In step S2301, when the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, in step S2304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is hard to appear as a lottery result of each game (it is hard to win), and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C, cherry A to cherry C. And watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery result other than the specific combination.

If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2305. In the specific combination notification process, a setting is executed so that a chance effect suggesting that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific combinations is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), for example, the character "Chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the characters with the exclamation mark are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Make them correspond and display each.

After executing steps S2303 and S2305, if a negative determination is made in step S2302 (when the push order notification command is not received) or a negative determination is made in step S2304 (when a specific winning combination is not won), in step S2306. It is determined whether or not the first AT notification command (step S1006 in FIG. 33A) is received as the start command this time. When the first AT notification command is received, in step S2307, a pseudo-bonus winning effect for notifying that the first AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the setting of. In the pseudo-bonus effect, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), for example, "V !! 777" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a voice congratulating the winning of the pseudo-bonus (first AT mode) is heard. Make it output.

After the execution of step S2307 or when a negative determination is made in step S2306 (when the first AT notification command is not received), in step S2308, whether or not the second AT winning command is received as the start command of this time is determined. judge. When the second AT winning command is received, in step S2309, the promotion winning effect for notifying that the second AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Perform the settings.

After the execution of step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308 (when the second AT winning command has not been received), in step S2310, an advantageous section start command (step S1810 in FIG. 44) is used as the current start command. Determine if it is being received. When the advantageous section start command is received, the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2311. This advantageous section flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the advantageous section is in progress.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not a point giving command (step S1907 in FIG. 45) is received as the start command of this time. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 101 is configured to perform a point-giving lottery at the start of the advantageous section, and this step determines whether or not points have been given in the point-giving lottery. Is to be determined. When the point award command is received, that is, when the points are awarded in the above award lottery, the points accumulated on the main control device 101 side are transferred to the CPU 181 (sub control device 81 side) in step S2313. Execute the point processing for managing with. The details of the point processing will be described later.

After the execution of step S2313, if a negative determination is made in step S2310 (when the advantageous section start command is not received) or when a negative determination is made in step S2312 (when the point grant command is not received), step S2314 is performed. Execute the point effect execution process. The point effect execution process is for executing the effect related to the point, and performs the process for the above execution based on the process result of the point process in step S2313 and step S2405 described later (FIG. 50). It is a thing. The details of the process for executing the point effect will be described later.

Next, in step S2315, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then the main start-time effect setting process ends. In step S2315, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process for turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed. ..

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S2210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the CZ start command (step S1305 in FIG. 38) is received as the command at the time of total stop. When the CZ start command is received, in step S2402, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ start effect is performed in the next game. In the CZ start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters to notify that the CZ mode such as “CZ mode start” is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401 (when the CZ start command has not been received), whether or not the CZ end command (step S1309 in FIG. 38) has been received as the current all-stop command in step S2403. To judge. If the CZ end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2404, and it is determined whether or not the point giving command (step S1711 in FIG. 42) has been received as the command at the time of total stop. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, the main control device 101 is configured to perform a point award lottery, and this step is performed. It is determined whether or not points have been awarded in the point granting lottery. When the point award command is received, that is, when points are awarded in the award lottery, the point processing is executed in step S2405. This process is the same as the point process (FIG. 49) in step S2313.

After the execution of step S2405 or when a negative determination is made in step S2404 (when the point grant command is not received), in step S2406, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ end effect is performed in this game. do. In the CZ end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "CZ mode end" to notify that the CZ mode has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 (when the CZ end command has not been received), the first AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 39) or the second AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 39) is used as the current stop command in step S2407. It is determined whether or not step S1608) of FIG. 41 has been received. When these commands are received, in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the corresponding AT start effect is performed in the next game. In the first AT start effect (pseudo-bonus start effect), for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters to notify that a pseudo-bonus such as "BONUS START" is started. .. Further, in the second AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "RUSH rush !!" to notify that the AT mode is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2407 (when the AT start command has not been received), whether or not the first AT end command (step S1511 in FIG. 40) has been received as the current stop command in step S2409. To judge. If the first AT end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2410, and it is determined whether or not the point achievement command (step S1509 in FIG. 40) has been received. The point achievement command indicates that the total points stored in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 have reached the privilege grant value, and if the command is received, the release process is performed in step S2411. To execute. The release process is a process for executing the point release effect in accordance with the privilege grant (shift to the second AT mode) based on the arrival of the privilege grant value. The details of the point release effect will be described later.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2410 (when the point achievement command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2412, and is the point granting command (step S1711 in FIG. 42) received as the command for all stops this time? Judge whether or not. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the main control device 101 is configured to perform a point award lottery, and this step is , It is determined whether or not points have been awarded in the point granting lottery. If the point grant command has been received, the point processing is executed in step S2413.

After the execution of step S2413 or when a negative determination is made in step S2412 (when the point grant command is not received), the first AT mode end effect (pseudo bonus end effect) is performed in this game in step S2414. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In the first AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), in addition to the character display notifying that the pseudo-bonus such as "BONUS END" has ended on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is acquired during the pseudo-bonus. Characters are displayed to inform the achievements such as the number of medals that have been made.

If a negative determination is made in step S2409 (when the first AT end command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2415, and is the second AT end command (step S1612 in FIG. 41) received as the command at the time of all stoppages this time? Judge whether or not. When the second AT end command is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled in step S2416 so that the second AT mode end effect (RUSH end effect) is performed in this game. In the second AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "RUSH END" to notify that the second AT mode has ended, and continues the AT mode. Characters are displayed to inform the achievements such as the total number of medals acquired in the game and the first AT mode and the second AT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (when the second AT end command has not been received), whether or not the point giving command (step S1711 in FIG. 42) has been received as the command at the time of total stop in step S2417. To judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when 600 games are completed without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, the main control device 101 is configured to perform a point award lottery, and this step is configured. It is determined whether or not points have been awarded in the point granting lottery. If the point grant command has been received, the point processing is executed in step S2418.

If a negative determination is made in step S2417 (when the point granting command has not been received), it is determined in step S2419 whether or not the initialization command (step S2110 in FIG. 46) has been received as the command for all stops this time. do. If the initialization command has been received, in step S2420, a process of erasing the storage point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. The accumulated points correspond to the total points managed by the main control device 101, and specifically show the same value as the total points. That is, it is for the CPU 181 to grasp the accumulated points on the sub control device 81 side. In the present embodiment, the information of the holding point is stored and managed in the RAM 183 separately from the storage point, but the holding point is deleted even when the initialization command is received. Hold without. The details of the holding points will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2419 (when the initialization command has not been received), it is determined in step S2421 whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received as the current stop command. do. When these commands are received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the bonus end effect is performed in this game in step S2422.

After executing the processes of step S2402, step S2406, step S2408, step S2411, step S2414, step S2416, step S2418, step S2420 or step S2422, or if a negative determination is made in step S2421, other steps are taken in step S2423. After setting the stop effect, the main effect setting process ends. In step S2423, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Processing for points>
The point processing of step S2313, step S2405, step S2413, and step S2418 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51 (a).

First, in step S2601, the total points (the number of points accumulated on the main control device 101 side) are specified based on the point assignment command received from the main control device 101, and the accumulated points are grasped. Although the names are different for the sake of distinction, the total points and the accumulated points indicate the same information. In step S2602, a process of updating the accumulation points is executed. Specifically, the accumulated points (previous accumulated points) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are rewritten with the current accumulated points grasped in step S2601.

In step S2603, a process of reading and grasping the holding points stored in the point information storage area 183d is executed. The holding point indicates the maximum value of the accumulated points (total points) in the period from the initial value (0) of the points to the present. As described above, the total points are set to the initial value (0) each time the advantageous section ends, and the holding points indicate the highest number of points among the total points obtained in each advantageous section. ing. For example, if the total points in the advantageous section two times before the previous time are 3 points, the total points in the previous advantageous section is 1 point, and the total points up to now in the advantageous section this time are 2 points, the holding points are It will be 3 points.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulated points grasped in step S2601 is larger than the value of the holding points grasped in step S2603. If the accumulation point is less than or equal to the retention point, the processing for this point is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the accumulation point is larger than the retention point, that is, when the accumulation point larger than the maximum value up to that point is known, the process proceeds to step S2605 to execute the process of updating the retention point. Specifically, the holding points stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are rewritten with the storage points grasped in step S2601.

In step S2606, an effect execution lottery process is performed in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the point suggestion effect. In the effect execution lottery process, the point suggestion effect execution lottery is performed based on the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 and the lottery table for allocating the presence / absence of the point suggestion effect. The point suggestion effect suggests the accumulated points (total points) at that time, and the details will be described later. It should be noted that the winning probability in the execution lottery is not particularly limited and can be set arbitrarily, but various points awarding opportunities according to the present embodiment are not frequently established, and an opportunity for point suggestion production is established. Therefore, the probability of winning the execution is set to be higher than the probability of not winning.

In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the execution of the point suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S2606. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S2608, and the suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point suggestion effect should be executed. After the execution of step S2608 or when a negative determination is made in step S2607 (when the execution of the point suggestion effect is not won), the processing for this point is terminated.

<Treatment for release>
The release process of step S2411 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51 (b).

First, in step S2701, a process of clearing (initializing) the accumulation points is executed. Specifically, the value of the accumulated point stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is changed to the initial value (0), or the information of the point is deleted. In step S2702, the holding point is cleared (initialized) by changing the value of the holding point stored in the point information storage area 183d to an initial value or erasing the information of the point. That is, the retained points are initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when the privilege based on the arrival at the privilege grant value is granted, and over the period until the next arrival. Is retained.

Next, in step S2703, the release effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and then the main release process is terminated. The emission effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point emission effect should be executed. The details of the point release effect will be described later.

<Process for executing point production>
The process for executing the point effect of step S2314 (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. When the suggestion effect flag is set, that is, when the point suggestion effect should be executed, the suggestion effect flag is cleared in step S2802, and then in step S2803, various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182 are cleared. Get the type lottery table from.

Here, the point suggestion effect will be described. In addition to the points being given, the point suggestion effect notifies the accumulated points (total points) accumulated at that time. At that time, the notification of the accumulated accumulated points is not clearly indicated by a numerical value or the like indicating the number of points, but is only suggested by an animation image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the point suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 56, a plurality of bubble images are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the degree of accumulation points is suggested by their sizes. When the game is started (when the start lever 41 is operated), these bubble images are displayed so as to rise from the lower side to the upper side of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the bubble images are displayed. At that time, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 64. In the present embodiment, as the types (modes) of the point suggestion effect, a small bubble effect (FIG. 56 (a)), a medium bubble effect (FIG. 56 (b)), a large bubble effect (FIG. 56 (c)), and a bubble are used. There are four oversized effects (Fig. 56 (d)).

As shown in FIG. 56A, the small bubble effect displays the extremely small size bubble image 201 and the small size bubble image 202, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is small. There is. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the bubble effect, the small-sized bubble image 202 and the medium-sized bubble image 203 are displayed, suggesting that the number of accumulated points is medium. It has become. As shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the large bubble effect, the medium-sized bubble image 203 and the large-sized bubble image 204 are displayed, and many accumulated points are accumulated. It suggests that it is slight. As shown in FIG. 56 (d), the bubble oversized effect displays an oversized bubble image 205 larger than the bubble image 204, suggesting that the accumulated points have reached the specific grant value. It has become.

The suggestion effect table acquired in step S2803 is for drawing which of the above bubble effects is to be executed. In the type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 53, the number of holding points at that time and the selection probability of each bubble effect are set, and the more holding points, the easier it is to select a higher bubble effect. It has become. For example, when the holding point is 1 point, either no effect (non-execution of the point suggestion effect) or small bubble effect is selected, and at that time, the small bubble effect is selected rather than no effect. It's getting easier.

The point suggestion effect is not limited to the bubble effect, and may be an animation or a still image. Further, the number of types is not limited to 4, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more.

After the execution of step S2803, in step S2804, a type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, the type of point suggestion effect is drawn based on the acquired type lottery table, the holding points updated in step S2605 of FIG. 51, and the lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. Execute the process. At this time, since the holding points and the accumulated points have the same value, the lottery process in this step is performed based on the above-mentioned type lottery table, the accumulated points at that time, and the lottery counter. You can also.

In step S2805, the effect data setting process is performed so that the point suggestion effect of the type selected in step S2804 is executed. In the following step S2806, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that the lottery point suggestion effect is executed based on the set effect data. After the execution of step S2806, the process for executing the point suggestion effect is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the point suggestion effect is executed at the start of the game, but when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the game or a predetermined stop operation (for example, the first stop operation) is performed after the start of the game. In this case, it may be configured to be executed at the end of the game (when the final stop operation is performed). In these cases, the sub-control device 81 reads the effect data at the corresponding timing in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48) so that the effect is performed with the read data. Control the notification means.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801 (when the suggestion effect flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S2807 to determine whether or not the emission effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the release effect flag is set, that is, when the point release effect should be executed, the release effect flag is cleared in step S2808, and then the effect data for executing the point release effect in step S2809. To set.

The point release effect notifies that the accumulated points are released and the privilege is granted when the accumulated points (total points) reach the privilege grant value. In the present embodiment, the transition to the second AT mode is a privilege, and the transition timing (the timing of granting the privilege) is the end of the first AT mode. Based on this, the point-giving effect is structured as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player of the end of the first AT mode in order to make it appear to the player that the first AT mode has ended. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), a large number of bubble images 205 (extra-large size bubble images) are displayed so as to rise from the bottom of the display screen, and the bubble images 205 display the end screen of the first AT mode. It is obscured so that it is invisible or difficult to see. Then, when all the bubble images 205 disappear above the display screen, a second AT mode start notification appears as shown in FIG. 57 (c), thereby notifying the transition to the second AT mode.

The mode of the point release effect is not limited to the above, and is any other mode as long as the player can recognize that the privilege has been granted based on the arrival of the privilege grant value. May be good.

In the following step S2810, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) are controlled so that the point emission effect is executed based on the effect data set above. In the present embodiment, the point release effect is executed at the start of the game, but when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the game or a predetermined stop operation (for example, the first stop operation) is performed after the start of the game. In this case, it may be configured to be executed at the end of the game (when the final stop operation is performed). After the execution of step S2810 or when a negative determination is made in step S2807 (when the emission effect flag is not set), the process for executing the point suggestion effect is terminated.

<Flow of point suggestion production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, it is assumed that the first advantageous section A is started with the total points (accumulation points) being 0 points. In addition, in the production execution lottery when points are given (lottery for whether or not to execute the point suggestion production), all of them are won, and the type with a high selection probability is selected as the production type at that time. And.

After the advantageous section A is started at the timing t1, when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery at the timing t2 and the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established, the point award lottery is executed. At that time, if 1 point is given, the total points are updated to 1 point in the main control device 101 (step S1710 in FIG. 42), and the holding points are updated to 1 point in the sub control device 81 (FIG. FIG. 51 (a) step S2605).

Further, at the timing t2, a type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed as the points are given. In this case, since the holding point is one point, a lottery is drawn as to whether the point suggestion effect is no effect or a small bubble effect (FIG. 53). As a result, assuming that the small bubble effect is selected as the point suggestion effect, the small bubble effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like as shown in FIG. 58 (a). This suggests that points have been awarded and that the total number of points at that time is still small. The point suggestion effect ends when all the bubble images have passed the display screen, and the period is set shorter than the period of one game. That is, the point suggestion effect is started at the start of the game and then ends in the middle of the game.

After that, at the timing t3, which is the intermediate timing of the advantageous section A, when the number of Hamari games reaches 600 games and the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established, the award lottery is executed again. Assuming that 2 points are given by the grant lottery, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main control device 101. At that time, in the sub control device 81, the holding points are updated to 3 points based on the accumulation points (3 points) at that time being larger than the holding points (1 point) (FIG. 51 (a)). Steps S2601 to S2605).

Further, at the timing t3, the type lottery is executed as the points are given. The number of points given in this case is 2, but the type lottery is executed based on the number of points (3 points) on the holding point side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the foaming effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This suggests that points have been awarded, that the total number of points at that time is medium, in other words, that the number of accumulated points has increased.

At the timing t4, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section A ends. Along with this, the initialization process (step S2109 in FIG. 46) is executed in the main control device 101, and the value of the total points is set to the initial value (0). At that time, the accumulation point is set to the initial value (0) also in the sub control device 81, but the holding point is not initialized, and the value (3) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as it is.

When a new advantageous section B is started at the timing t5, the point award lottery is executed in the main control device 101 (step S1904 in FIG. 45). Assuming that 1 point is given in the lottery, the total points are updated to 1 point in the main control device 101. At that time, in the sub control device 81, the accumulation point (1 point) and the retention point (3 points) at that time are compared, but since the value of the accumulation point does not exceed the retention point, the retention point is updated. Not, it remains at 3 points. Further, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted based on the fact that the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points, and the point suggestion effect is not executed (step S2604 in FIG. 51 (a)). That is, the suggestion effect corresponding to the accumulated points (total points) being 1 point is not executed.

In the above case, after the total points are initialized, the execution of the effect is restricted at the first execution trigger of the point suggestion effect, but the current accumulated points are less than or equal to the holding points (in other words). Therefore, considering that the execution of the point suggestion effect should be restricted) starts with the initialization of the total points, the restricted state of the effect execution starts when the total points are initialized. You can also.

At the timing t6, when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section B ends, and the total points are set as the initial values. Even if 1 point is given in the lottery just before that and the total points (accumulated points) become 2 points, the accumulated points at that time are still smaller than the retained points, so the retained points are not updated and the points are not updated. Suggestion production is also not executed. That is, the execution limit of the point suggestion effect is maintained.

If the opportunity of the point-giving lottery is established at the timing t8 after the advantageous section C is started at the timing t7 and 4 points are given, the total points are set to 4 points in the main control device 101. Along with this, the accumulation points on the sub-control device 81 side become larger than the holding points (3 points) at that time, so that the holding points are updated to 4 points.

Further, at the timing t8, based on the fact that the accumulated points become larger than the holding points, the execution restriction of the point suggestion effect is released, and the type lottery is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), it is suggested that the bubble large effect was executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like, points were given, and the total number of points at that time was large. .. At this time, the actual change in the total points is that once initialized to 0 points, it increased to 4 points in one grant lottery, but points are suggested while the accumulated points are less than the holding points. Since the production is not executed, from the player's point of view, it seems as if the total points have increased from the numerical value suggested in the previous point suggestion production (timing t3).

Assuming that the point award lottery is triggered again at the timing t9 and 1 point is given, the total points are updated to 5 points in the main control device 101 and the holding points are updated to 5 points in the sub control device 81. NS. Further, at the timing t9, the type lottery corresponding to the holding points of 5 points is executed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the bubble oversized effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This suggests that the total points have reached the privilege grant value.

When the first AT mode ends at the timing t10 and the privilege granting opportunity arrives, the privilege (transition to the second AT mode) is granted. Along with this, the total points are initialized in the main control device 101 (step S1508 in FIG. 40), and the holding points are also initialized in the sub control device 81 (step S2702 in FIG. 51 (b)). At this time, the point release effect (FIG. 57) is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and the grant of the privilege based on the arrival of the privilege grant value is notified.

<About the internal state when the power is turned on>
As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game design is based on the premise that the player plays a 3-bet game in a situation where two cards are in an internal state (a state in which the second BB winning flag is set). It has been done. Therefore, if the game is played in the three-card internal state (the state in which the first BB winning flag is set), the first BB state, or the second BB state, the intended game playability may not be properly exhibited.

For example, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the process for the display mode (process for the instruction function) is not executed, and the game is advanced so that the number of medals does not increase or decrease. Each of these BB states is continued until the number of payouts in the bonus state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 90). Therefore, when the slot machine 10 starts up in those BB states and the player starts the game in that state, the game is played in a state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode or the like is not received and the medal does not increase or decrease. You will be forced to play multiple games until the state ends.

Further, in the three-card internal state, the first BB winning can be established by playing the three-bet game, and when the first BB winning is established, the state shifts to the first BB state. The specified number of bets (the number of bets that can start the game) in the internal state of 3 cards is set to 2 and 3, and it is up to the player to decide whether to play in the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game. It is entrusted. However, the player who will start the game from now on does not know that the three medals are in the internal state, and it is considered that the player starts the game by inserting three or more medals unless he / she is particularly conscious of it. Therefore, if the slot machine 10 starts up in the three-card internal state and the game is started in that state, there is a high possibility that the game will be played in the three-bet game, and the first BB prize is established to enter the first BB state. Expected to migrate. Then, when the game shifts to the first BB state, as described above, the game is forced to play in a state in which the lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is not received and the medal does not increase or decrease over a plurality of games. ..

By the way, in the situation where the three cards are in the internal state, the establishment of the first BB prize (and the transition to the first BB state) can be avoided by playing the two-bet game. However, since the processing for the display mode is not executed, the player cannot receive the lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like. That is, the game is in a disadvantageous situation as compared with the case where the 3-bet game is played in the situation where the two cards are in the internal state.

In addition, when the game is started in a non-internal state that is neither the two-card internal state nor the three-card internal state, the player who will start the game from now on does not know that it is in the non-internal state. Since it is customary for players to insert three or more medals, there is a high possibility that the game will be played in a three-bet game. That is, after the game is started in the non-internal state, it is expected that the first BB combination will be won and the three cards will be in the internal state, and then the first BB prize will be established and the state will shift to the first BB state. Then, when the game shifts to the first BB state, as described above, the game is forced to play in a state in which the lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is not received and the medal does not increase or decrease over a plurality of games. .. Further, after the end of the first BB state, the internal state of the three sheets is cleared and the state shifts to the non-internal state again, so that the flow of the first BB winning → the first BB winning → the first BB state may be repeated.

If the game is started in a situation where the two cards are not in the internal state (a situation in which the two cards are not in the carry-over state), it is assumed that the player is forced to play in a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the start of the game in such a state is suppressed. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described in detail.

<1st RAM clear processing>
The first RAM clearing process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The first RAM clear process is executed in step S18 in the main process of FIG. 17, and is when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the front door 12 is open and the setting key is turned on. It is what is executed.

In the first RAM clearing process, first, it is determined in step S5201 whether or not a RAM abnormality is set. The RAM abnormality is set when the power failure flag is not set, the RAM determination value is not normal, or the set value is not normal when the power is turned on (step S15 in FIG. 17). ).

If the RAM abnormality is not set, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not the second BB winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d (storage area) of the RAM 106. The second BB winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second BB combination is in the winning state (two pieces internal state), and the process of step S5202 determines whether or not the two pieces are in the internal state. It becomes a thing.

If the second BB winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S5203, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d (normal area). The first BB winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state (three-card internal state) of the first BB combination, and the process of step S5203 determines whether or not it is in the three-card internal state. It becomes a thing.

If the first BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5204, and the first BB winning flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared. As a result, the internal state of the three cards shifts to the non-winning state.

After the execution of step S5204 or when a positive determination is made in step S5202 (when the second BB winning flag is set), the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S5205. Determine if it is. The CPU 102 is for grasping that the first BB state flag is the first BB state and the second BB state flag is the second BB state. The second BB state flag is stored in the normal area of the various flag storage areas 106d, unlike the second BB winning flag.

When the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, that is, when it is either the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S5206 and the set BB state flag is cleared. This clears the bonus state.

After the execution of step S5206, when a negative determination is made in step S5203 (when neither the second BB winning flag nor the first BB winning flag is set), or when a negative determination is made in step S5205 (first BB state or second BB state). If neither is the case), in step S5207, other data (set value information indicating the set value, etc.) stored in the used area of the RAM 106 is cleared, and then the first RAM clear process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (when a RAM abnormality is set), the process proceeds to step S5208 to execute a forced RAM clear process. In the forced RAM clear processing, in addition to the normal area of various flag storage areas 106d and the used area where data other than flags are stored, the storage area of various flag storage areas 106d in which the second BB winning flag is stored is also used. Execute data clear processing for the target. Therefore, if the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off in the internal state of the two machines in which the second BB winning flag is set, and then a RAM abnormality is set when the power is turned on, the second BB winning flag is cleared. To move to the non-internal state. After the execution of step S5208, the first RAM clearing process is terminated.

<Setting change processing>
The setting change process in step S19 (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The slot machine 10 is prepared in advance with six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting change process is for setting which winning probability the internal process is to be executed. It is the processing of. This setting change process is executed after the first RAM clear process in the main process.

First, in step S5301, a power recovery command is transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to notify the power-on (recovery from the power failure state). The power recovery command includes power recovery information indicating that the power has been recovered, as well as BB state information indicating whether or not the power is in the first BB state or the second BB state. This also applies to the power recovery command transmitted in step S23 of FIG.

Since the first BB state flag and the second BB state blowfish stored in the various flag storage areas 106d (normal area) of the RAM 106 are cleared to the initial values by the first RAM clear process performed before this setting change process. In the power recovery command transmitted in step S5301, BB state information corresponding to a non-BB state that is neither a first BB state nor a second BB state is set. On the other hand, since the transmission process of the power recovery command in step S23 is executed without going through the RAM clear process, the power is cut off in the first BB state or the second BB state, and then the power is recovered. Is set to the BB state information corresponding to the first BB state or the second BB state in the power recovery command. The values of the BB state information include a value corresponding to the first BB state, a value corresponding to the second BB state, and a value corresponding to a non-BB state that is neither of these BB states. And are prepared.

In step S5302, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub control device 81. The setting change start command is a command for notifying that a setting change is to be performed.

In step S5303, the next timer interrupt is permitted, and in step S5304, the current set value is read. In step S3505, the current set value is displayed on the credit display unit 60 based on the set value read in step S5304. Since the set value information is cleared to the initial value by the first RAM clear process performed before this setting change process, the set value at this point is "set value 1", and the set value 1 is displayed on the credit display unit 60. The display corresponding to is performed.

In step S5306, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S5307 whether or not the reset switch 72 has been turned on.

If the reset switch 72 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S5308, and the set value is updated by 1 with respect to the current set value. For example, when the current set value is "1", the set value is changed to "2". After the execution of step S5308, the process returns to step S5305 to display the changed set value on the credit display unit 60, and then the processing of step S5306 and subsequent steps is repeated. That is, each time the reset switch 72 is turned on, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the reset switch 72 is turned on while the set value is "6", the set value is changed to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S5307 (when the reset switch 72 is not turned on), the processes after step S5305 are executed without updating the set value.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5306 (when the start lever 41 is turned on), the process proceeds to step S5309 to determine whether or not the on state of the setting key continues. If the on state continues (when the setting key is not turned off), wait until the on state ends. When the on state is completed (when the setting key is turned off), it is recognized in step S5310 that the setting change operation is completed, and the setting value information indicating the current setting value is saved in the RAM 106.

In step S5311, the setting change end command is transmitted to the sub control device 81. The setting change end command is a command for notifying that the setting change is completed. This setting change end command includes the setting change end information indicating that the setting change has been completed, as well as the internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination has been won. The values of the internal state information include a value corresponding to the winning state of the first BB combination (3 sheets internal state), a value corresponding to the winning state of the 2nd BB combination (2 sheets internal state), and a value corresponding to the winning state of the 2nd BB combination (2 sheets internal state). Values corresponding to non-internal states that are neither of these states are prepared.

In the state where the setting change is completed, the reset switch 72 is operated to actually change the set value, and the changed set value is confirmed by the operation of the start lever 41. In addition, the reset switch 72 is operated. It also includes the case of terminating the allowable state of setting change without doing (without changing the setting value). In such a case, for example, by turning on the power with the setting key turned on, the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60 for confirmation, and then the setting key is turned off to allow the setting change. There is something to end.

After the execution of step S5311, the next timer interrupt is disabled in step S5312. In step S5313, the second RAM clear process is executed. In the second RAM clear process, the data stored in the used area of the RAM 106 is cleared except for the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area and the set value information stored in the RAM 106.

After the execution of step S5313, the setting change process ends. When the setting change process is completed in this way, as shown in the main process of FIG. 17, the process proceeds to the normal process of step S20. In the normal process, as shown in FIG. 18, the lottery process in step S210 and the reel control process in step S211 are executed. Therefore, in the stage before the setting change is completed, the winning combination lottery is not performed even if the start lever 41 is operated, and the reels 32L to 32R cannot be rotated. That is, the game cannot be played while the setting is changed.

<Sensor monitoring process>
The sensor monitoring process executed in step S107 of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, among various processes executed in the sensor monitoring process, the processes related to the opening and closing of the front door 12 will be described.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the door opening flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The door open flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the front door 12 is open.

If the door opening flag is not set, it is determined in step S5402 whether or not the door opening sensor 27 is in the ON state. Since the door opening sensor 27 is turned on when the front door 12 is opened, the process of step S5402 determines whether or not the front door 12 has been switched from the closed state to the open state.

When the door opening sensor 27 is in the ON state, the door opening command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S5403. The door opening command is a command for notifying that the front door 12 has been opened. The door opening command set in step S5403 is transmitted to the sub-control device 81 in the command output processing in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16). In the following step S5404, the door opening flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (when the door open flag is set), the process proceeds to step S5405 to determine whether or not the door open sensor 27 is in the off state. That is, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 has been switched from the open state to the closed state.

When the door opening sensor 27 is in the off state, the door closing command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S5406. The door closing command is a command for notifying that the front door 12 has been closed. The door closing command set in step S5406 is transmitted to the sub-control device 81 in the command output process in step S110. In the following step S5407, the door opening flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared.

After the execution of step S5404, after the execution of step S5407, when a negative judgment is made in step S5402 (when the door open sensor 27 is not in the on state), or when a negative judgment is made in step S5405 (when the door open sensor 27 is not in the off state). Executes another sensor monitoring process in step S5408. In other sensor monitoring processes, processing such as reading the state of sensors other than the door opening sensor 27 such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is executed.

Next, various processes executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 will be described.

<Power start-up process>
The power supply start-up process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. The power start-up process is executed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on.

In step S5501, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed, and in step S5502, access to the RAM 183 is permitted. In step S5503, the used area of RAM183 is cleared to 0, and in step S5504, the initialization process is executed. In the initialization process, the output initialization process for the upper lamp unit 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the lower display unit 69 is executed. After the execution of step S5504, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

First, in step S5601, the power-on notification process is executed. This power-on notification process is executed only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on.

In the power-on notification process, the upper lamp unit 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled so that the power-on notification corresponding to the power-on of the slot machine 10 is executed. As the power-on notification, the power-on display using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like and the output of the power-on notification sound using the speaker 64 are executed. In the power-on display, for example, a message display such as "power is turned on" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp unit has a predetermined light emission mode set for the display color and display pattern for power-on. Let 63 emit light. Further, in the output of the power-on notification sound, for example, a voice such as "power is turned on" is repeatedly output via the speaker 64. These power-on display and notification sound output are continuously executed until the elapsed period from the power-on reaches a predetermined period.

When the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, the power-on notification sound is not output, but instead the setting change notification sound described later is output. That is, the power-on notification sound is output when the power is turned on with the setting key turned off.

After the execution of step S5601, the external signal output process is executed in step S5602. In the external signal output processing, various signals set in the previous main processing (control signals for driving and controlling the upper lamp unit 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the lower display unit 69, etc.) are transmitted. In step S5603, a counter update process for updating the counter values provided in the various counter areas 83b of the RAM 183 is executed. This counter value is used for the above-mentioned lottery of grant points and the like.

In step S5604, the command determination process is executed. Since the main process of the sub control device 81 is executed asynchronously with the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) and the normal process (FIG. 17) of the main control device 101, the command reception process itself for receiving the command from the main control device 101 itself. Is executed by interrupt processing (not shown). Various commands received by the interrupt processing are stored in the command storage area 183e provided in the RAM 183. The command storage area 183e is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command. Therefore, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each of these commands can be satisfactorily executed.

In step S5604, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 101 with reference to the command storage area 183e, and if a command is received, it is determined which command the received command is. do.

After the execution of step S5604, the setting change process, the internal state notification process, and the door opening notification process are executed in steps S5605-step S5607. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

In step S5608, the error notification process is executed. In the error notification process, errors corresponding to various abnormalities are received from the main control device 101, which indicate various abnormalities such as a medal insertion error, a medal payout error (hopper empty error), and a spare tank full error. The upper lamp unit 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the notification is performed.

In step S5609, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 48 is executed. In step S5610, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current main process. If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step S5602, and the processes after step S5602 are executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time elapses.

<Process for changing settings>
The setting change process in step S5605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in correspondence with the setting change process (FIG. 60) in the main control device 101, and is for performing a setting change notification, which is a notification that the setting is being changed. ..

In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The setting changing flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the setting is being changed. If the setting change flag is not set, it is determined in step S5702 whether or not the setting change start command is received as the current reception command.

When the setting change start command is received, that is, when the setting change is started, the process proceeds to step S5703 to perform the setting change processing of the setting change notification sound. The setting change notification sound audibly notifies that the setting is being changed, and the notification by the setting change notification sound is such that a voice such as "setting is being changed" is emitted from the speaker 64. Will be done. In step S5703, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to start outputting the setting change notification sound. As a result, it is notified that the setting is being changed, in other words, the setting change operation is being accepted.

By the way, the setting change display (visual notification on the auxiliary display unit 65) is not performed. That is, since it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 10 in order to perform the setting change operation, the power on display is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at the time of starting the setting change operation. , Even after the setting change operation is started, the above power-on display is continuously performed.

After the execution of step S5703, the setting changing flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S5704. After the execution of step S5704 or when a negative determination is made in step S5702 (when the setting change start command has not been received), the setting change processing ends.

When it is determined in step S5701 that the setting changing flag is set, that is, when the setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not the setting change end command is received as the current reception command. When the setting change end command is received, that is, when the setting change is completed, the process proceeds to step S5706, and the speaker 64 is controlled so as to end the setting change notification (output of the setting change notification sound).

In step S5707, the setting changing flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and in the following step S5708, the setting change end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The setting change end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the setting change is completed.

After the execution of step S5708 or when a negative determination is made in step S5705 (when the setting change end command has not been received), the setting change process ends.

<Internal status notification processing>
The internal state notification process in step S5606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. This process is a process for performing an internal state notification, which is a notification corresponding to the fact that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

First, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The internal state notification flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the internal state notification is being executed. It should be noted that the execution of the internal state notification includes the output standby state of the internal state notification sound described later.

If the internal state notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S5802, and it is determined whether or not the setting change end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the setting change end flag is not set, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the setting change end flag is set, that is, when the setting change operation by the hall employee is completed, the process of clearing the setting change end flag is executed in step S5803. In the following step S5804, the internal state grasping process is executed. Specifically, based on the setting change end command received from the main control device 101, the state regarding the validity of the first BB combination or the second BB combination is grasped. As described above, the setting change end command includes internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination is in the winning state, or in a non-internal state that is neither of them.

In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S5804 is the winning state (two sheets internal state) of the second BB combination. If it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, the internal state display is set in step S5806. The internal state display visually notifies that the second BB combination is not in the winning state. The internal state display is executed by a notification unit different from the auxiliary display unit 65 on which the power-on display is performed, and specifically, the lower display unit 69 is made to emit light. The light emitting mode of the lower display unit 69 is not particularly limited, but for example, the internal state display is performed by blinking the lower display unit 69 in a predetermined blinking pattern. In step S5806, the lower display unit 69 is driven and controlled so as to repeat the light emitting state and the extinguishing state in the predetermined blinking pattern.

Further, in step S5806, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the internal state display. This notification period determines the upper limit execution time of the internal state display, and the internal state display ends when the elapsed period from the start of the display reaches the above notification period.

In step S5807, the setting process of the internal state notification sound is performed. The internal state notification sound audibly notifies that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, and a voice notification sound different from the power-on notification sound and the setting change notification sound is emitted from the speaker 64. Will be done. In step S5807, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to start outputting the internal state notification sound. As a result, it is notified that the second BB combination is not in the winning state. The internal state notification sound is executed over the notification period set in step S5807.

In step S5808, the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the internal state notification process ends.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S5801 (when the internal state flag is set), that is, if the internal state notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S5809, and the internal state notification (internal state display and internal state notification sound) is performed. It is determined whether or not the elapsed period from the start of the above notification period has reached the above notification period. If the notification period has not elapsed, in step S5810, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command. The second BB winning command is transmitted when the second BB winning combination is won as a result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) performed by the main control device 101, and the winning of the second BB winning combination is sent to the sub control device 81. This is a command to notify. Therefore, the case where the second BB winning command is received while the internal state notification is being executed means that the state in which the second BB winning combination is not won has shifted to the winning state of the second BB winning combination.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S5809 (when the notification period has elapsed) or the affirmative judgment is made in step S5810 (when the second BB winning command is received), the internal state notification is terminated in step S5811. The lower display unit 69 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to do so. In step S5812, the internal state notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared. After the execution of step S5812 or when a negative determination is made in step S5810 (when the second BB winning command has not been received), the internal state notification process ends.

<Process for door opening notification>
The door opening notification process in step S5607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is a process for performing a door opening notification, which is a notification that the front door 12 is open.

In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the door opening flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The door open flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the front door 12 is being opened.

If the door opening flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S5902, and it is determined whether or not the door opening command (step S5403) is received as the current reception command. When the door open command is received, that is, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the front door 12 is open, or when the front door 12 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the step. In S5903, the door opening flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a.

In step S5904, the door open display setting process is performed. The door open display visually notifies that the front door 12 is open. In the door open display, for example, a message display such as "the door is open" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp unit 63 has a predetermined light emitting mode set in the display color and display pattern for opening the door. To emit light. In step S5904, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63 are controlled so as to start the door open display.

In step S5905, the door opening notification sound is set. The door opening notification sound visually notifies that the front door 12 is open, and for example, the notification is made so that a voice such as "the door is open" is output from the speaker 64. In step S5905, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to start outputting the door opening notification sound. After the execution of step S5905 or when a negative determination is made in step S5902 (when the door opening command has not been received), the door opening notification process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5901 (when the door open flag is set), the process proceeds to step S5906, and it is determined whether or not the door close command (step S5406) has been received as the current reception command. When the door closing command is received, the door opening flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared in step S5907. In step S5908, the upper lamp unit 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled so as to end the door opening notification (door opening display and door opening notification sound). After the execution of step S5908 or when a negative determination is made in step S5906 (when the door closing command has not been received), the door opening notification process ends.

<About the electrical configuration of the sub-control device 81 related to sound output>
The electrical configuration of the sub-control device 81 regarding the sound output will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 68.

The sub control device 81 is provided with sound ICs 184a to 184n for controlling the output of sound. In the present embodiment, a plurality of speakers 64a to 64n are mounted as the speakers 64, and a plurality of channels are set as sound output channels. The sound ICs 184a to 184n are provided for each channel, and are arranged one by one for one speaker or two speakers paired for high-pitched sound and low-pitched sound. The sound ICs 184a to 184n are provided between the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 and the speakers 64a to 64n so that a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 64a to 64n based on the sound output instruction from the CPU 181. Control.

A first volume switch 255 and a second volume switch 256 are connected to the input side of the sub control device 81 as a volume adjusting unit for adjusting the volume of the sound emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. The first volume switch 255 is arranged inside the slot machine 10 such as the front surface of the sub control device 81 (the back surface of the front door 12) and the inside of the housing 11, and is intended to be operated by a hall employee. It is a volume control unit provided. On the other hand, the second volume switch 256 is arranged outside the slot machine 10 such as the front portion of the front door 12, and is a volume adjusting unit that can be operated by both hall employees and players.

The ROM 182 of the sub control device 81 (CPU181) is provided with a sound data storage area 185 in which a plurality of sound data are stored. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), each sound data includes unique identification information assigned to each sound data, sound source data to be a sound source, and volume information that specifies a volume when the sound source is output. , Channel information that specifies the output channel, priority information that specifies the priority (layer), and the like are included.

Of these, the volume information specifies the volume in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and the larger the value, the larger the output volume. The volume information related to the effect sound is the volume when the first volume switch 255 or the second volume switch 256 is set to an intermediate value, and by operating the first volume switch 255 or the second volume switch 256, the volume is increased. It is possible to change. On the other hand, the volume information related to various alarm sounds such as the setting change notification sound, the door opening notification sound, and the internal state notification sound has a fixed value, and the first volume switch 255 or the second volume switch 256 is operated. However, the volume cannot be changed.

The priority information defines the priority of each voice by a numerical value, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority. This priority information determines which audio is preferentially output when the output periods of a plurality of audios overlap in the same channel. For example, when the output periods of two types of audio overlap. Only the upper audio is output to, and the lower audio is not output. If the output periods of a plurality of voices having the same priority are overlapped, those voices are mixed (synthesized) and output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a sound data table storage area 186 is provided in various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a sound data table is stored in the sound data table storage area 186. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the sound data table, address information indicating a storage area (address of ROM 182) of each sound data is stored in association with the identification information assigned to each sound data.

The items in the "sound type" column in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b) are added for convenience, and are not stored in the sound data storage area 185 or the sound data table storage area 186.

As shown in FIG. 67, the RAM 183 of the sub control device 81 (CPU181) is provided with a reproduced sound data storage area 189 as an area for storing sound data to be reproduced. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the reproduced sound data storage area 189 is provided with channel-corresponding areas 189a to 189n corresponding to each output channel. In each channel corresponding area 189a to 189n, a capacity capable of storing a plurality of sound data is secured, and when a plurality of sounds are set as output targets in the same channel, in one channel corresponding area 189a to 189n, in one channel corresponding area 189a to 189n. A plurality of sound data corresponding to each voice data are stored.

When the CPU 181 outputs, for example, a setting change notification sound as an output sound from the speaker 64, the CPU 181 refers to a sound data table stored in various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and stores the sound data of the setting change notification sound. Know your address. Then, based on the grasped address, the sound data of the setting change notification sound is read from the sound data storage area 189 of the ROM 182 and written to the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183.

At that time, in the sound data, for example, when the setting change notification sound is specified to be output on the channel 1 and the channel 2, the sound data of the setting change notification sound read from the ROM 182 is stored in the playback sound data storage area 189. In the channel corresponding area 189a for channel 1 and the channel corresponding area 189b for channel 2 in the above. After that, the address (RAM 183) in which the sound data of the setting change notification sound is stored together with the output instruction signal indicating that the sound should be output to the sound IC 184a corresponding to the channel 1 and the sound IC 184b corresponding to the channel 2. Address information indicating the address) is transmitted.

The processing of the CPU 181 regarding the output of these setting change notification sounds is performed in the setting processing of the setting change notification sound in step S5703 in the setting change processing (FIG. 64). After the output instruction is given from the CPU 181 in this way, the speakers 64a to 64n are driven and controlled by the sound ICs 184a to 184n so as to output the instructed voice.

<Sound output processing>
The sound output processing executed by the sound ICs 184a to 184n will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. This process is for driving and controlling the speakers 64a to 64n corresponding to the output instruction from the CPU 181. This process is executed by each of the sound ICs 184a to 184n, and is periodically activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 10 msec).

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not the output instruction signal from the CPU 181 has been received. When the output instruction signal is received, the sound data of the voice to be output is acquired in step S6602. Specifically, the address where the sound data is stored (the address of the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183) is grasped based on the address information transmitted from the CPU 181 and the sound data is read from the area indicated by the address. .. In the following step S6603, the identification information included in the acquired sound data is grasped, and in step S6604, the sound source data included in the acquired sound data is reproduced. In the following step S6605, the priority of the sound to be output is grasped based on the sound data acquired in step S6602.

If a negative determination is made in step S6601 (when the output instruction signal is not received), it is determined in step S6606 whether or not the playback sound is waiting for output. The output standby of the reproduced sound will be described later. After the execution of step S6605 or when a positive determination is made in step S6606 (when the output of the reproduced sound is waiting), it is determined in step S6607 whether or not another sound having a higher priority is being output. do. The audio output here means a state in which audio is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64 of the channel corresponding to the audio output.

If another voice having a higher priority is not being output, the process proceeds to step S6608, and the volume of the voice to be output is set based on the sound data acquired in step S6602. In the following step S6609, the reproduced data of the audio whose reproduction was started in step S6604 is output to the corresponding speakers 64a to 64n via the D / A conversion unit, the amplifier unit, and the like. As a result, the sound specified by the sound data is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

On the other hand, when another voice having a higher priority is being output (when affirmative determination is made in step S6607), the process proceeds to step S6610 and waits for the output of the voice specified by the sound data this time. Specifically, the reproduced data of the audio whose reproduction was started in step S6604 is not output to the corresponding speakers 64a to 64n. Therefore, the output of other voices having a higher priority is continued, and the voice specified by the sound data this time is not output.

Further, in step S6610, based on the identification information grasped in step S6603, the type of voice waiting for output is grasped, and the information is stored in the storage medium in the sound ICs 184a to 184n together with the information indicating the output waiting. As a result, even if the output of two or more types of voices may be waited for, each voice that is waiting for output can be distinguished and waited for output.

When a negative determination is made in step S6607 (when it is determined that another voice having a higher priority is not being output), the priority of the voice specified by the sound data this time is from the speakers 64a to 64n. In some cases, it has a higher priority than other audio being output. In such a case, the other output voice is switched to the output standby state, and the voice specified by the current sound data is preferentially output.

When the output of the reproduced sound is waited as described above, an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S6606 in the next sound output process, and the determination process of step S6607 is executed again. Then, when the output of other voices having a higher priority is completed, a negative determination is made in the determination process of step S6607, and the processes of steps S6608 and S6609 are executed for the reproduced sound waiting for output. As a result, the sound corresponding to the reproduced sound in the output standby is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

At this time, since the sound reproduction processing is performed prior to the sound emission from the speakers 64a to 64n, the sound output from the output standby state is released from the middle of the sound source data. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

For example, in a situation where a predetermined music sound is emitted from each speaker 64a to 64n as BGM, when the output of a production sound having a higher priority than that is interrupted, the production sound is emitted from each speaker 64a to 64n. During this period, the BGM is to be released, but if the BGM reproduction itself is waited for, the speaker 64a to 64n is interrupted by the emission of the effect sound after the emission of the effect sound is completed. The continuation of the BGM that has been done will be released. However, from the player's point of view, since it is natural that the BGM is advanced by the amount of the emission period of the effect sound, there is a possibility that the BGM may give the impression that the BGM is flowing in a lumpy manner. In this respect, in this configuration, since the BGM is reproduced by the background processing even while the BGM is waiting to be released, the BGM can be advanced by the amount of the production sound emission period, and the player can understand the BGM. It is possible to suppress giving a discontinuous impression.

It should be noted that it is not an essential configuration that the audio data reproduction processing is performed prior to the audio emission, and the audio data may be reproduced after the output standby state is released, or the output standby state may be used depending on the type of audio. It may be configured to properly use whether to start the playback prior to the cancellation or to start the playback after the output standby is canceled.

After the execution of step S6609, after the execution of step S6610, or when a negative determination is made in step S6606 (when the output of the reproduced sound is not waiting), it is determined in step S6611 whether or not the end instruction signal from the CPU 181 has been received. judge. The end instruction signal is output from the CPU 181 as an instruction to end the output when the output period of the voice to be output ends. When the audio output period ends, the CPU 181 outputs, in addition to the end instruction signal, identification information indicating the type of audio whose output should be terminated.

When the end instruction signal is received, the reproduction and output of the sound specified by the identification information is ended in step S6612. If the end-instructed voice is a voice that is waiting for output, the playback of the voice is stopped, the output standby state is canceled, and the output of the voice is stopped. After the execution of step S6612 or when a negative determination is made in step S6611 (when the end instruction signal is not received), the sound output process is terminated.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. Here, neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101, that is, neither the first BB combination nor the second BB combination is won. A case where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a situation where there is no internal state will be described as an example.

The power supply arranged inside the housing 11 in a situation where the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on and the setting key is turned on (the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned on). When the switch 71 is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the power-on notification process of step S5601 (FIG. 63) and the setting change process of step S5605 are executed.

As described above, in the setting change notification, the setting change display using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is not performed, so that the power-on display is performed by executing each of the above processes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), a message display 301 such as "the power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in a light emitting mode for when the power is turned on.

Further, when the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting change notification sound is output instead of the power-on notification sound, so that the setting change notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. NS. The notification by the setting change notification sound is performed by outputting a voice such as "setting is being changed". The setting change notification sound is output during the period from the timing t1 when the power is turned on to the timing t2 when the setting change operation ends, during which the above sound is repeatedly output at predetermined intervals (FIG. 70 (e)). ..

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned off, the power-on notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. Notification by the power-on notification sound is performed by outputting a voice such as "power is turned on".

Incidentally, the power-on display and the setting change notification sound are output after the CPU 181 of the sub-control device 81 is started up after the power is turned on. Therefore, these notifications are performed after the rise period has elapsed after the power is turned on, but the rise period is not shown in FIG. 70.

When the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the output of the setting change notification sound ends. The power-on display ends when a predetermined period elapses from the start timing of the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period elapses at a timing earlier than the timing t2, the power-on display ends prior to the setting change notification sound, and if the predetermined period has not elapsed at the timing t2, the setting is made. The power-on display continues even after the change notification sound ends.

Further, when the setting change operation is completed, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. As a result, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 performs an internal state grasping process (step S5804) and a determination process (step S5805) of whether or not the second BB combination is in the winning state (two sheets internal state). ..

As described above, the setting change end command includes the setting change end information indicating that the setting change has been completed, as well as the internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination has been won. The grasping process and the determination process in the sub control device 81 are performed with reference to the setting change end command received from the main control device 101.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state, as a result of each of the above processes, it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state (two internal states), and the internal state notification is sent. Will be done. However, at this time, since the front door 12 is in the open state, the door opening notification for notifying the opening of the front door 12 and the internal state notification compete with each other.

Of these notifications, the door opening display and the internal status display, which are visual notifications, are performed by different notification units, so two notifications are sent in parallel by each notification unit. (Fig. 70 (f), (h)). As the door open display, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), for example, a message display 302 such as "the door is open" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, as the internal state display, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the lower display unit 69 is set to the light emitting state in a predetermined light emitting pattern (for example, blinking).

On the other hand, as for the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound, which are auditory notifications, the door opening notification sound has a higher priority than the internal state notification sound, as shown in FIG. 68 (a). Has been done. Therefore, the output of the door opening notification sound is prioritized, and the output of the internal state notification sound is on standby (FIGS. 70 (g) and 70 (i)). That is, the door opening notification sound is output from the speakers 64a to 64n, and a voice such as "the door is open" is emitted.

The output of the door opening display and the door opening notification sound is continued until the timing t3 when the front door 12 is closed. At this time, the door opening display is performed so that the message display 302 is continuously displayed, and the door opening notification sound is performed so that the voice is repeatedly emitted at predetermined intervals. By these outputs, the hall employee of the game hall is notified that the front door 12 is open.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the output of the door opening notification sound ends, and the output of the internal state notification sound starts accordingly (FIG. 70 (i)). The notification by the internal state notification sound is performed by emitting a voice different from the power-on notification sound and the setting change notification sound from each of the speakers 64a to 64n. The mode of the internal state notification sound is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from other alarm sounds such as the power-on notification sound and the setting change notification sound. It is conceivable to use a message voice such as ", or a predetermined repetitive sound such as a picon picon."

By emitting the internal information notification sound as described above, the hall employee of the game hall is audibly notified that the second BB role is not in the winning state (two sheets internal state). The internal state display, which is a visual notification, is performed prior to the output of the internal state notification sound as described above.

Incidentally, the internal state notification (notification by internal state display and internal state notification) can be said to correspond to the fact that the internal state is not the specified number (2) different from the specified number (3) performed in the normal game. The normal game corresponds to a game played by the player (more specifically, a game played by the player during the business hours of the game hall in a 3-bet game). The normal game includes not only the game in the advantageous section but also the game in the non-advantageous section. In contrast to normal games, non-normal games (games that are not normal games) include games played by hall employees outside the business hours of the game hall (games in a two-bet game played to set the internal state of two cards, etc.). Is applicable.

After the internal information notification sound is emitted, when the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal insertion slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a 2-bet game, and wins the second BB role, the main control device. The second BB winning command is transmitted from 101 to the sub control device 81 (timing t4). As a result, it is grasped that the sub-control device 81 has won the second BB combination, and the internal state notification (internal state display and output of the internal state notification sound) ends (FIGS. 70 (h) and 70 (i)). ). Even if the notification period of the internal state notification elapses before the second BB winning command is transmitted (before the winning state of the second BB combination is reached), the internal state notification ends on the condition that the notification period elapses. ..

In the above operation example, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in the non-internal state, but the first BB winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 (the first BB role). When the power is turned on in the winning state (internal state of 3 cards), or when the 1st BB state flag or the 2nd BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d (1st BB state or 2nd BB state). Even when the power is turned on in the above situation), the sub-control device 81 at the end of the setting change grasps the internal state (step S5804). At that time, in the grasping process, it is recognized that the three sheets are not in the internal state or the BB state, but in the non-internal state.

That is, in the CPU 181 of the main control device 101, the first RAM clearing process in step S18 (FIG. 17) is performed when the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on while the front door 12 is open. Will be executed. In this first RAM clear process, when the power is turned on, the first BB winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 and the slot machine 10 is in the internal state of three slots, or the first BB state flag or the second BB state. When the flags are stored and in those bonus states, the set flags are cleared and changed to the non-internal state.

Then, in the process of grasping the internal state in the sub control device 81, the setting change operation is performed, in other words, the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on when the front door 12 is open. After that, it is executed when the reset switch 72 and the start lever 41 are operated. Of these operations, the opening of the front door 12, the on operation of the setting key, and the power-on operation overlap with the operations that trigger the execution of the first RAM clearing process. That is, as shown in FIG. 72, since the operation that triggers the execution of the first RAM clear process is configured by a part of the operations that trigger the execution of the internal state grasping process, the state at the time of turning on the power is the first BB. Regardless of whether the winning combination is in the winning state (three-card internal state), the first BB state, or the second BB state, the sub-control device 81 is changed to the non-internal state at the timing of executing the internal state grasping process.

Therefore, even if a plurality of states may exist as a state in which the two machines are not in the internal state at the time when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (or before the power is turned on), the two machines are not in the internal state at the execution stage of the internal state notification. The state can be narrowed down to the non-internal state. Therefore, the number of types of notifications in the internal state notification can be suppressed to a small number (only one type is sufficient in the present embodiment), and the work load of the notification design can be reduced. In addition, since the number of types of internal status notifications is small, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to remember many types of notifications from the viewpoint of hall employees. Therefore, when the internal state notification is performed, it becomes easy to detect what the notification is, and it is possible to alert the hall employees in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, by narrowing down the status, it is possible to suppress a wide range of responses when the internal status notification is executed, and it is possible to reduce the burden on hall employees. In the configuration unified to the non-internal state as in the present embodiment, even when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in the three-sheet internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state, it is not. It can be handled by the same operation as when the power is turned on in the internal state, and hall employees can easily handle it.

In the above embodiment, the setting change display is not performed as the setting change notification, but the display may be performed. For example, based on receiving the setting change start command, the screen display is switched from the power-on display to the setting change display on the auxiliary display unit 65, or the setting change display is performed in addition to the power-on display. You may try to do it.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, points are given when the granting condition is satisfied, and when the total value (total points) reaches the privilege granting value, the player is granted the privilege (transition to the second AT mode). By notifying the total points each time, the player can recognize that the total points will increase toward the privilege grant value, and the motivation to further increase the points will be aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game. However, in a configuration in which the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section and the points accumulated up to that point disappear, if the initialization of the total points is reflected in the notification as it is, it is strongly re-accumulated from the beginning. There is a concern that the player will be given the impression that the game will be played, and the motivation to continue the game will be reduced.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the total points are initialized by the main control device 101, the sub-control device 81 does not initialize the holding points stored in the RAM 183 and holds them. , The execution control of the point suggestion effect is performed by referring to the holding point. With such a configuration, when the point suggestion effect after the initialization of the total points is performed, the execution control can be performed while taking into account the total points before the initialization, and the initialization of the total points becomes the suggestion effect as it is. It can be suppressed from being reflected. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-storing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to continue the game.

A configuration that controls whether or not the point suggestion effect can be executed based on the current total points (accumulation points) and the retained points, and restricts the execution of the point suggestion effect when the current total points are less than or equal to the retained points. bottom.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted in the situation where the current total points are larger than the holding points, while the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted in the situation where the current total points are less than or equal to the holding points. In other words, among the point suggestion effects for each point grant, the point suggestion effects are performed in a state where the ones that notify the value below the holding points are thinned out, so the total points are actually reduced due to the effect of initialization. However, from the player's point of view, it can be seen as if the total points are gradually increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the impression that the total value has disappeared, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game after the total points are initialized.

The point suggestion effect is performed after the execution lottery, and when the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted, the point suggestion effect is not executed without performing the above execution lottery. That is, since the execution of the point suggestion effect is forcibly prohibited, it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion effect that reflects the initialized total points.

When the current total points (accumulation points) are larger than the holding points held in the RAM 183, the total points are updated as new holding points. According to this configuration, it is possible to limit the execution of the point suggestion effect based on the highest value among the total points obtained by the game so far. As a result, it is possible to execute the point suggestion effect only when the total points that update the highest value up to that point are obtained, and it is preferable for the player to have the impression that the total points are continuously increasing. Can be embraced.

When the setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state, and when it is determined that the two sheets are not in the internal state, the internal state is notified.

The slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is designed to be playable on the premise that the player plays a game in a state in which the winning state (two internal states) of the second BB combination is carried over. In such a case, if the game is played in a situation where the two cards are not in the internal state, the intended playability may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable that the hall employees of the game hall be informed of whether or not the two pieces are in the internal state.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the slot machine 10 is started up in a situation where the two machines are not in the internal state, the internal state notification is executed when the setting change is completed. Since the setting change and the end operation are performed by the hall employee, the internal status can be notified in the presence of the hall employee with this configuration. This makes it possible to suitably inform the hall employees that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In addition, the set value is generally changed before the opening of the game hall, in other words, when the player is not in the game hall. Therefore, by executing the internal state notification when the setting change is completed, it is possible to prevent the internal state notification for the hall employees from being performed in front of the player. As a result, when the player sees the internal state notification, the notification becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, or the player is inadvertently notified that the two cards are not in the internal state. Can be suppressed.

The internal status is notified at the end of the setting change, not at the start or execution of the setting change.

In order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), it is necessary to execute the combination lottery to win the second BB combination. In other words, since it is necessary to operate the start lever 41 after completing the setting change, even if the hall employee is informed that the two sheets are not in the internal state at the start of the setting change or in the middle of the setting change, the action is taken immediately. I can't. In this regard, in the configuration in which the internal state notification is executed when the setting change is completed as in the present embodiment, the internal state notification is performed after the non-winning state of the second BB combination can be changed to the winning state. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state at a suitable timing.

Further, in a configuration such as the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in which the setting change notification is executed when the setting change is allowed or the setting is changed, the setting change is started or the setting is changed. If the internal status notification is executed in the middle of, the setting change notification and the internal status notification overlap. At that time, if these notifications are executed in duplicate, there is a concern that the distinctiveness of each notification may be deteriorated because a plurality of notifications are performed at the same time. It becomes necessary to make such adjustments, which may increase the design burden. In this regard, by executing the internal status notification when the setting change is completed, the internal status notification can be executed after waiting for the completion of the setting change. As a result, it is possible to avoid duplication of both notifications without requiring adjustment at the design stage, and it is possible to improve the distinctiveness of each notification while reducing the work load of the notification design.

The internal state information is included in the setting change end command and transmitted to the sub control device 81.

According to the above configuration, when the setting change is completed, the internal state can be notified to the sub control device 81 together with the notification of the completion of the setting change. Therefore, the sub-control device 81 can grasp the internal state at the same time as the setting change is completed, and the internal state notification can be performed satisfactorily.

Further, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a dedicated command for internal state information is output, the number of command data stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 increases as a result of the increase in the types of commands. There is a concern that it will put pressure on the capacity. In this regard, by including the internal state information in the setting change end command and outputting it, the increase in the number of command data can be suppressed and the capacity consumption can be saved. Not only that, it also leads to a decrease in the frequency of command transmission and reception, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to command control.

When an operation that triggers the determination of whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state is performed, an operation that clears the three-sheet internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state and triggers the transition to the non-internal state is also performed. Each trigger operation was set in. In other words, the operation that triggers the determination is set so that a part of the operation that triggers the transition to the non-internal state is configured. Specifically, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned on, the transition from the three internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state to the non-internal state is performed, and the start lever 41 is turned on. When the end operation of the setting change is performed, it is determined whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state.

As the state that is not the two-sheet internal state, there are a plurality of types of states including the non-internal state, the three-sheet internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state. In such a case, if an attempt is made to notify each state by changing the mode of the internal state notification, the number of types of the internal state notification will increase. As the number of types of internal status notification increases, it is expected that not only will it be difficult for hall employees to understand, but also the workload of the designer will increase in the notification design scene. In addition, if there are multiple types of states that are not in the two-sheet internal state, the number of countermeasures for changing to the two-sheet internal state will increase, so depending on which of the multiple types of states the hole is As a result of employees being forced to respond differently, there is a concern that the workload will increase.

In this regard, in this configuration, when an operation that triggers a determination is performed in a situation where the three sheets are in the internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, an operation for shifting each of these states to the non-internal state is also performed. ing. In this case, since the hall employee naturally changes to the non-internal state by performing the operation that triggers the determination, the internal state notification can be executed by unifying the non-internal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the diversification of the internal state notification, make the notification easy to understand, and reduce the burden of the notification design. In addition, since the number of coping methods when the two sheets are not in the internal state can be suppressed to a small number, it is possible to reduce the work load of the hall employees.

At that time, the operation that triggers the judgment is not completely matched with the operation that triggers the transition to the non-internal state, and the first half of the operations necessary for establishing the judgment trigger is shared with the operation that triggers the transition. bottom.

In this case, since it is determined whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state after the transition to the non-internal state is performed, the transition to the non-internal state can be performed before the determination process is executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid performing the determination process and the internal state notification in the situation where the transition to the non-internal state has not been performed, and it is possible to preferably narrow down the notification target to the non-internal state.

The setting key insertion hole 73, which becomes operable when the front door 12 is opened, in each of the operation that triggers the determination of whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state and the operation that triggers the transition to the non-internal state. It is assumed that the operation of the power switch 71 is required.

Since the front door 12 can be opened and the setting key insertion hole 73 and the power switch 71 can be operated basically only by the hall employees, this configuration allows the hall employees to touch the gaming machine. , It is possible to notify the internal state in a situation where the player is in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. In addition, since the transition to the non-internal state also requires the operation of those operating means, it is possible to suppress the transition to the internal state by the operation of the player, and the transition to the non-internal state. Can be prevented from being misused by someone who is trying to cheat.

When the notification period by the door opening notification sound and the notification period by the internal state notification sound overlap, the door opening notification sound is given priority over the internal state notification sound and emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the internal state notification is executed when the setting change is completed, it is assumed that the notification period by the door opening notification sound and the notification period by the internal state notification sound overlap. NS. In such a case, since the emission of the door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door 12 is open is prioritized, forgetting to close the front door 12 can be suppressed, and it can be suppressed that the front door 12 is promoted to cheat.

Further, by giving priority to the emission of the door opening notification sound, there is an advantage that the emission timing of the internal state notification sound can be optimized. As mentioned above, in order to change from the non-winning state of the 2nd BB role to the winning state of the 2nd BB role (internal state of 2 cards), it is necessary to execute the role lottery to win the 2nd BB role, so the setting is being changed. Even if the internal state notification sound is emitted while the front door 12 of the hall is open, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, in a situation where the front door 12 is open, the door opening notification sound is emitted to prompt the front door 12 to close, and after the closing is performed, the internal state notification sound is emitted, so that the hall employee can use it. After it becomes possible to deal with it, it will be notified that the two sheets are not in the internal state. Therefore, it is possible to emit the internal state notification sound at a timing preferable for the hall employee.

At that time, the internal state display is executed in accordance with the door opening notification (door opening display and door opening notification sound), and is executed prior to the notification by the internal state notification sound.

Regarding the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound, which are auditory notifications, by giving priority to the former over the latter, it is possible to prevent each notification from becoming difficult to hear. However, there is a concern that the notification period for not being in the internal state of the two sheets will be shortened by delaying the start of the internal state notification sound. In this regard, in this configuration, the internal state display, which is a visual notification that is relatively easy to identify, is executed together with the door opening notification, and is performed prior to the notification by the internal state notification sound. It is possible to preferably suppress the shortage of the notification period.

The door open display and the internal status display are executed on different display units.

With the above configuration, the hall employee can notify the opening of the front door 12 by taking into consideration the difference in the display location (notification location) without checking the display content (notification mode) in detail. It is possible to easily identify whether it is a notification corresponding to the fact that the two sheets are not in the internal state. In other words, it is possible for hall employees to quickly determine which notification is used, and it is a convenient configuration for hall employees to perform internal status notification during the period before the store opens, which is busy with preparatory work. can do.

Priority information is set for each sound data of the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound.

In this case, when controlling the sound output from the speakers 64a to 64n, it is possible to determine which notification sound is prioritized by referring to the priority information set in each sound data. Therefore, it is not necessary to incorporate in the control program which one is prioritized for each notification, and it is possible to simplify the program for output control of the notification sound. Such a configuration becomes more effective as the number of notification sounds competing for output periods increases.

<Modification example 1>
A modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

As shown in FIG. 73A, in this modification, the priority of the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound is set to the same order. Therefore, when the output period of the door opening notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, those sounds are mixed and output. That is, both the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound are emitted from the same speakers 64a to 64n.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). Here, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state in which neither the first BB combination nor the second BB combination is won. Since the flow from the power-on of the slot machine 10 to the end of the setting change operation is the same as that of FIG. 70 according to the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted or simplified. do.

When the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81, and the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 performs the internal state grasping process (step S5804) and the first. A determination process (step S5805) for determining whether or not the 2BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states) is performed.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state, as a result of each of the above processes, it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state (two internal states), and the internal state notification is sent. Will be done. However, since the front door 12 is in the open state, the door opening notification for notifying the opening of the front door 12 and the internal state notification conflict with each other.

At this time, with respect to the door opening display and the internal state display, which are visual notifications, both notifications are performed in parallel on each of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 (FIGS. 73 (b-6), (FIG. 73 (b-6)). b-8)). Further, with respect to the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound, which are auditory notifications, since the priorities of both notification sounds are set to the same order in this modification, both are performed in parallel. (FIGS. 73 (b-7), (b-9)).

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. On the other hand, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound are continuously executed, and then the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81, or a predetermined notification period has elapsed. It will continue until you do. That is, after the front door 12 is closed, only the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the setting change is completed, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In this modified example, since the internal state notification sound and the door opening notification sound are mixed and simultaneously emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, the voice notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state can be started early and the emission period is lengthened. It becomes possible to secure.

<Modification 2>
A modified example 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 74A, in this modification, the priority of the internal state notification sound is set higher than the priority of the door opening notification sound. Therefore, when the output period of the door opening notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, the internal state notification sound is preferentially output.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). Here, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state in which neither the first BB combination nor the second BB combination is won. Since the flow from the power-on of the slot machine 10 to the end of the setting change operation is the same as that of FIG. 70 according to the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted or simplified. do.

When the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81, and the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 performs the internal state grasping process (step S5804) and the first. A determination process (step S5805) for determining whether or not the 2BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states) is performed.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state, as a result of each of the above processes, it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state (two internal states), and the internal state notification is sent. Will be done. However, since the front door 12 is in the open state, the door opening notification for notifying the opening of the front door 12 and the internal state notification conflict with each other. At this time, with respect to the door opening display and the internal state display, which are visual notifications, both notifications are performed in parallel on each of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 (FIGS. 74 (b-6), (Fig. 74 (b-6)). b-8)).

On the other hand, with respect to the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound, which are auditory notifications, the internal state notification sound has a higher priority than the door opening notification sound. Therefore, the output of the internal state notification sound is prioritized, and the output of the door opening notification sound is on standby (FIGS. 74 (b-7) and (b-9)). That is, even when the front door 12 is open, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the door open display ends (FIG. 74 (b-6)). At that time, the output standby state of the door opening notification sound is released by closing the front door 12, and the output ends as it is. That is, in this modification, the door opening notification sound is output when the setting change operation is completed and the two sheets are in the internal state, but is not output when the state is other than the two sheets internal state.

On the other hand, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound are continuously executed. Then, when the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 at the timing t4, or when a predetermined notification period elapses, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end. (FIGS. 74 (b-8), (b-9)).

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the setting change is completed, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In this modified example, since the internal state notification sound is emitted prior to the door opening notification sound, it is possible to start the voice notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state earlier and to secure the emission period for a long time. Become. Further, since the overlap with the notification by the door opening notification sound is avoided, the internal state notification sound can be easily heard and the notification can be performed.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the execution opportunity of the point suggestion effect is expanded. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Process for executing point production>
The process for executing the point effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75 (a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of FIG. 52. In FIG. 75 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 52, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point suggestion effect should be executed. If the suggestion effect flag is set, the flag is cleared in step S2802, and then the type lottery table (FIG. 53) is acquired in step S2803. In step S2804, the lottery process of the point suggestion effect is executed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183.

In step S3101, the use point table stored in the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the use points corresponding to the type (aspect) of the suggestion effect distributed by the lottery process are specified. In the table for used points, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), unique used points are defined for each mode of the point suggestion effect, and the higher the suggested effect, the larger the used points are assigned. For example, 0 points for no effect, 1 point for a small bubble effect (FIG. 56 (a)), 3 points for a medium bubble effect (FIG. 56 (b)), and a large bubble effect (FIG. 56 (c)). )), And 5 points are assigned to the oversized bubble effect (FIG. 56 (d)). The points used are information indicating how many points the suggestion effect (effect selected by lottery) executed this time corresponds to.

In step S3102, the above-specified used points are subtracted from the accumulated points at that time, and the difference value is calculated. The calculated difference value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 183. In the above, the points used are subtracted from the accumulated points, but when this step is executed (when the suggestion effect flag is set as the point suggestion effect should be executed and the affirmative judgment is made in step S2801). , Since the holding points are updated by the accumulation points and both have the same value (steps S2604 to S2608 in FIG. 51 (a)), the processing of this step is to subtract the used points from the holding points. You can also.

After the execution of step S3102, in step S2805, the effect data setting process is performed so that the point suggestion effect drawn in step S2804 is executed. In the present embodiment, the point used identification process and the difference value calculation process are performed before the execution of step S2805, but the execution timing of each of these processes need only be after the lottery of the suggestion effect mode. Therefore, it may be performed after the execution of step S2805.

<Starting effect setting process>
The start-time effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the start effect setting process of FIG. 49. In FIG. 76, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S2309 (setting process of the second AT winning effect) or when a negative determination is made in step S2308 (when the second AT winning command is not received as the command at the start of this time), the start of this time is performed in step S2310. It is determined whether or not the advantageous section start command is received as the hour command. When the advantageous section start command is received, the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2311.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not a point giving command is received as the start command of this time. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the main control device 101 is configured to perform a point-giving lottery at the start of the advantageous section, and this step is a point-giving lottery. Is used to determine whether or not points have been awarded. The point granting command includes information indicating that points have been granted, as well as information indicating the number of points granted in the present lottery and the total number of points granted.

When the point giving command is received, that is, when points are given in the present giving lottery process, the first point processing is executed in step S3201. On the other hand, when the point granting command has not been received (when the points have not been granted), the second point processing is executed in step S3202. Details of these first point processing and second point processing will be described later. After the execution of step S3201 or step S3202, the process proceeds to step S2314 (point effect execution process).

If a negative determination is made in step S2310 (when the advantageous section start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S3203, and whether or not a point trigger command (step S1111 in FIG. 36) has been received as the start command this time. To judge. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the number of games (the number of hamari games) that are not won in the first AT mode transition lottery while staying in the advantageous section is a specific number. When (for example, 600 games) is reached, the main control device 101 is configured to determine that the execution trigger of the point granting lottery has been established and transmit the point trigger command. This step determines whether or not the opportunity has been established.

When the point trigger command is received, the trigger establishment flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S3204. The trigger establishment flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the trigger for the point award lottery based on the number of Hamari games reaching a specific number has been established. After the execution of step S3204 or when a negative determination is made in step S3203 (when the point trigger command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2314 (point effect execution process).

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. This process is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 50. In FIG. 77, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 50, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2403 (when a CZ end command is received) or a negative judgment is made in step S2410 (when a point achievement command is not received), all of this time is performed in step S2404 or step S2412. Judges whether or not a point grant command is received as a stop command. As described in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and the first AT without winning the second AT mode transition lottery. When the mode ends, the main control device 101 performs a point-giving lottery, and step S2404 or step S2412 determines whether or not points have been given in those point-giving lottery.

When the point giving command is received, that is, when points are given in the present giving lottery process, the first point processing is executed in step S3301. On the other hand, when the point granting command has not been received (when the points have not been granted), the second point processing is executed in step S3302. The first point processing and the second point processing are the same as the first point processing and the second point processing of the start effect setting processing (FIG. 76). After the execution of step S3301 or step S3302, the process proceeds to step S2406 (setting process for CZ end effect) or step S2414 (setting process for first AT end effect).

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (when the second AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S3303 whether or not the trigger establishment flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If the trigger establishment flag is established, that is, if the trigger for the point award lottery based on the number of Hamari games reaching a specific number is established, the trigger establishment flag is cleared in step S3304, and then the trigger establishment flag is cleared. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the point giving command is received as the command at the time of total stop.

If the point-giving command has been received, the first point processing is executed in step S3306, and if the point-giving command has not been received, the second point processing is executed in step S3307. The first point processing and the second point processing are the same as the first point processing and the second point processing of the start effect setting processing (FIG. 76). After the execution of step S3306 or step S3307, the process proceeds to step S2423 (other all-stop effect setting processing).

<Processing for the first point>
The processing for the first point in step S3201, step S3301, and step S3306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. In FIG. 78, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the point process of FIG. 51 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the accumulation point is larger than the retention point in step S2604, the process of updating the retention point is executed in step S2605. After that, in step S2606, an effect execution lottery process for whether or not to perform a point suggestion effect is performed. When the execution lottery is won, in step S2804 of the point effect execution process (FIG. 75), the type lottery of the point suggestion effect is performed using the type lottery table (FIG. 53), the holding points, and the counter for the lottery. Lottery processing) to determine which point suggestion effect is to be performed). In this case, the type lottery is performed using the latest holding points updated in step S2605.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2604 (when the accumulation point is equal to or less than the holding point), the process proceeds to step S3401 to determine whether or not the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 75) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 1). judge. If the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S2606 to perform the effect execution lottery process. That is, in the first embodiment described above, when the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points, the point suggestion effect is not uniformly executed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the accumulated points are equal to or less than the holding points. If the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is configured to allow execution of the point suggestion effect. In this case, the effect execution lottery is performed with the same winning probability as the execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points (flow when affirmative determination is made in step S2604 of FIG. 78).

If the player wins the lottery, the point suggestion effect used for the type lottery table (FIG. 53), the holding points, and the lottery counter in step S2804 of the point effect execution process (FIG. 75). Type lottery. However, if the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted based on the difference value being equal to or more than a predetermined value, the holding points are not updated. Therefore, the type lottery in this case is held from the previous time held at that time. Use points.

<Processing for the second point>
The second point processing of step S3202, step S3302, and step S3307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79. All of these processes are executed when the point award lottery is triggered but the points are not awarded.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 75) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 1). If the difference value is smaller than the predetermined value, the processing for the second point is terminated as it is. If the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the processes of steps S350 to S3504 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S2606 to S2608 of FIG. 78. That is, an execution lottery for the point suggestion effect is performed, and if the execution is won, the suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183.

<Flow of point suggestion production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. Here, it is assumed that in the effect execution lottery when points are given, the execution of the point suggestion effect is won.

First, although points are given, the flow when the accumulated points at that time are less than the holding points (maximum value) will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

At the timing t1, when the execution opportunity of the point-giving lottery is established in the middle of the advantageous section A, the point-giving lottery is executed by the main control device 101. At that time, if 3 points are given, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main control device 101 (step S1710 in FIG. 42), and the holding points are updated to 3 points in the sub control device 81 (FIG. FIG. 78 step S2605).

Further, at the timing t1, the type lottery table (FIG. 53) is used, and the type lottery corresponding to the holding points of 3 points is executed. At that time, it is assumed that the bubble small effect having a selection probability of 30% is selected as the type of the point suggestion effect. In this case, in the sub control device 81, one point is derived as a point of use corresponding to the small bubble effect (steps S3101 and 75 (b) of FIG. 75 (a)). Then, the used points (1 point) are subtracted from the accumulated points (3 points), and 2 points are calculated as the difference value (step S3102 in FIG. 75 (a)). Further, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the small bubble effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

When the advantageous section A ends at the timing t2, the initialization process (step S2109 in FIG. 46) is executed in the main control device 101, and the value of the total points is set to the initial value (0). At that time, the accumulation point is set to the initial value (0) also in the sub control device 81, but the holding point is not initialized, and the value (3) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as it is. Further, the difference value is not initialized, and the value (2) at the end of the advantageous section A is maintained as it is.

At the timing t3, when the execution opportunity of the point-giving lottery is established in the middle of the next advantageous section B, the point-giving lottery is executed by the main control device 101. At that time, if 1 point is given, the total points are updated to 1 point in the main control device 101. At that time, in the sub control device 81, since the accumulation point (1 point) at that time is smaller than the holding point (3 points), the holding point is not updated and remains at 3 points.

In this case, in the first embodiment, the effect execution lottery is not performed because the execution of the point suggestion effect should be restricted, but in the present embodiment, the difference value is a predetermined value (for example, 1) or more. Based on this, a production execution lottery is performed (step S2604, step S3401 in FIG. 78). In the effect execution lottery at this time, the same lottery table as in the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points is used. Therefore, the point suggestion effect is performed with the same probability as when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points.

Assuming that the execution of the point suggestion effect is won in the above-mentioned effect execution lottery, the lottery process corresponding to the retained points (3 points) at that time is executed in the subsequent type lottery. At that time, it is assumed that 70% of the foam effect is selected as the type of the point suggestion effect. In this case, in the sub control device 81, 3 points are derived as usage points corresponding to the effect in bubbles (FIG. 75 (b)), and as a difference value obtained by subtracting the usage points (3 points) from the accumulation points (3 points). 0 points are calculated. Further, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the bubble effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

When the execution opportunity of the point-giving lottery is established at the timing t4 of the advantageous section B, the point-giving lottery is executed again by the main control device 101. As a result, if 1 point is given, the total points are updated to 2 points in the main control device 101. As in the case of timing t3, the accumulated points (2 points) at that time are smaller than the holding points (3 points), but in this case, the difference value (0) is less than the predetermined value, so the points are suggested. The execution of the production is restricted. That is, the point suggestion effect is not executed.

Next, the flow when the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established but the points are not award will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

When the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established at the timing t1, the point award lottery is executed by the main control device 101. At that time, if 3 points are given, the total points are updated to 3 points in the main control device 101, and the holding points are updated to 3 points in the sub control device 81.

Further, at the timing t1, the type lottery table is used, and the type lottery corresponding to the holding points of 3 points is executed. At that time, it is assumed that the bubble small effect having a selection probability of 30% is selected as the type of the point suggestion effect. In this case, in the sub control device 81, 1 point is derived as a usage point corresponding to the small bubble effect, and 2 points are calculated as a difference value obtained by subtracting the usage point (1 point) from the accumulation point (3 points). Further, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the small bubble effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

When the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established at the timing t2, the point award lottery is executed by the main control device 101. At that time, it is assumed that no points have been awarded. In this case, in the first embodiment, the point suggestion effect is not uniformly executed, but in the present embodiment, the effect execution lottery is based on the difference value being a predetermined value (for example, 1) or more. (Step S3302, step S3307, FIG. 79 in FIG. 77). In the effect execution lottery at this time, the same lottery table as in the effect execution lottery when the accumulated points are larger than the holding points is used.

Assuming that the execution of the point suggestion effect is won in the above-mentioned effect execution lottery, the lottery process corresponding to the retained points (3 points) at that time is executed in the subsequent type lottery. At that time, it is assumed that 70% of the foam effect is selected as the type of the point suggestion effect. In this case, in the sub control device 81, 3 points are derived as the usage points corresponding to the effect in the bubble, and 0 points are calculated as the difference value obtained by subtracting the usage points (3 points) from the accumulation points (3 points). Further, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the bubble effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

When the execution opportunity of the point award lottery is established again at the timing t3, the point award lottery is executed by the main control device 101. At that time, it is assumed that no points have been awarded. As in the case of timing t2, the accumulated points (2 points) at that time are smaller than the holding points (3 points), but in this case, the difference value (0) is less than the predetermined value, so the effect is executed. The lottery is not held and the point suggestion effect is not executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

After the previous point suggestion effect is executed, the difference value between the points used corresponding to the point suggestion effect and the total points (accumulation points) when the effect is performed is derived, and after that, the difference value is used. It was configured to execute the point suggestion effect of.

As described in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the total points are initialized by the end of the advantageous section, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted when the total points at that time are less than or equal to the holding points. , It is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the total points have been initialized. However, on the other hand, if the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect is reduced due to the execution restriction, the player is less likely to be aware of the existence of the points, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the points will gradually decrease. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect in the restricted state, but at that time, if the suggestion effect is performed in correspondence with the actual total points (total points reduced by initialization), the total There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the points have disappeared, and the original significance of restricting the execution of the production will be impaired. On the contrary, if the suggestion effect is performed in correspondence with the holding points, the notification in a mode different from the actual total points will be induced, which may reduce the player's trust in the notification.

In this respect, in this configuration, the point suggestion effect based on the difference value between the used point and the holding point corresponding to the previous point suggestion performance is performed under the above-mentioned restricted state. Since the later suggestion effect utilizes the margin of the total points for the already executed suggestion effect, by executing such an effect in the restricted state, the mode of the point suggestion effect is matched with the actual total points. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of the suggestion effect while making it. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the creation of the restricted state.

Even if the total points are initialized in the main control device 101, the above difference value is retained. In this configuration, the difference value does not disappear when the total points are initialized, and is maintained thereafter. Therefore, when limiting the execution of the point suggestion effect, the difference value can be used across the initialization. .. As a result, the difference value generated by the point suggestion effect before initialization can be utilized after initialization to execute the point suggestion effect, and in the configuration in which the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section, the point suggestion effect is performed. It becomes possible to preferably increase the execution frequency of.

The point suggestion effect based on the above difference value is executed when no points are given. According to this configuration, the point suggestion effect can be performed even when the points are not given, and the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be suitably increased. It should be noted that the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be performed under the restricted state, and may be performed under the non-restricted state, for example, when the awarding lottery opportunity is established but the point awarding lottery is not performed.

<Third embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that the holding points may not be updated even when the accumulation points are larger than the holding points. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Processing for 1st point lottery>
The first point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. After executing step S1710 (process of adding the given points to the value (accumulated points) of the PT counter), in step S1711, a point giving command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. In the point award command according to the present embodiment, in addition to information that points have been awarded, information indicating the number of points awarded in this award lottery, information indicating the total number of points, points are given by any lottery opportunity. Contains information about whether it was granted. In addition, this information may be included in the point trigger command set when the point grant trigger is established, in place of or in addition to the point grant command.

<Processing for points>
The point processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2313 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the sub control device 81, step S2405, step S2413, and step S2418 of the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 50). It is executed in place of the point processing of 51 (a). In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 51 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S2603 (grasping the holding point), in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the accumulated point grasped in step S2601 is larger than the value of the holding point grasped in step S2603. If the accumulated points are larger than the holding points, that is, if the accumulated points larger than the maximum value up to that point are known, the process proceeds to step S3601 and the point awarding this time ends the first AT mode (shifts to the second AT mode). It is determined whether or not the lottery is based on the end of the first AT mode in a non-winning state). The granting opportunity (trigger of grant lottery) based on the end of the first AT mode is the final opportunity that can be established in the advantageous section, but in this step, the point granting this time is before the end of the advantageous section (initialization of accumulated points). It will be judged whether or not it was made by the final opportunity in the previous).

If the point awarding this time is not based on the end of the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S2605 to execute the process of updating the holding points. On the other hand, when the point awarding this time is based on the end of the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3602, and it is determined whether or not the accumulated points at that time are equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 3). Since this point processing is executed when the accumulated points have not reached the privilege grant value (for example, 5) (step S2410 in FIG. 50), the accumulated points are set to a predetermined value (for example, 3) or more. Means that the points are equal to or more than the predetermined value and less than the privilege grant value.

If the accumulation points are not equal to or more than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S2605 to execute the retention point update process. On the contrary, when the accumulation point is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the process of step S2605 is skipped and the retention point update process is not executed. For example, if the holding points before the points are given are 1 point and the accumulated points after the points are given are 4 points, the holding points are not updated and are maintained at 1 point. After the execution of step S2605 or when a positive determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S2606, and an execution lottery for the point suggestion effect is performed.

<Process for executing point production>
The process for executing the point effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the suggestion effect flag is set in step S2801, that is, when the point suggestion effect should be executed, the effect type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed in step S2804. The production type lottery is performed using the type lottery table (FIG. 53), the holding points, and the lottery counter (random numbers), but the holding points are updated in the previous point processing (FIG. 82). In that case, the updated points are used as the holding points used at the time of lottery. For example, if the holding points before giving points are 1 point and the accumulated points after giving points are 4 points, and the holding points are updated, 4 points are used as the holding points at the time of lottery, and bubbles are used. Select the production type from the medium production and the large bubble production.

On the other hand, if the holding points have not been updated in the previous point processing, the holding points before the points are given are used as the holding points used at the time of lottery. That is, even if points are given when the points are given at the end of the first AT mode and the accumulated points become larger than the holding points due to the given points, the accumulated points are equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 3 points). When the update of the holding point is restricted (YES in step S2604, YES in step S3601 and YES in step S3602 in the previous processing for points (FIG. 82)), it is not the accumulated point at that time, but more than that. A lottery for the type of point suggestion effect is performed using the previously held points, which is also a small value. For example, if the holding points before giving points are 1 point and the accumulated points after giving points are 4 points, and the holding points are not updated, 1 point is used as the holding points at the time of lottery to produce the effect. Select the production type from None and Small Bubble Production. That is, the effect type lottery is performed using the same number of points as the holding points used when the previous point suggestion effect is executed, so that the points given this time are not reflected in the selected effect type.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As described in the first embodiment, by setting the highest value obtained in the game up to that point as the holding point, it is possible to give the player the impression that the total points are increasing. become. However, on the other hand, if the highest value is always reflected as the holding point, the gap with the initial value when the total points are initialized tends to be large. As a result, the period until the actual total points catch up with the holding points becomes long, and the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect tends to decrease significantly.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, even if the total points exceed the holding points, the holding points are not updated in some cases, so that the gap with the initial value when initialized is widened. Is suppressed. As a result, the frequency of executing the point suggestion effect is greatly reduced, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the points from diminishing.

If points are awarded at the final timing of granting before the initialization of total points, the retention points will not be updated even if the total points exceed the retention points.

After the points are given by the final grant trigger before the initialization, new points are not given until the initialization, so that the privilege grant value is not achieved before the initialization. Then, the points at the final opportunity are considered to have been absent due to the subsequent initialization, and do not contribute to reaching the privilege grant value after all. Based on these characteristics, in the present embodiment, when the awarding trigger for which points are given is the final trigger before initialization, the given points are not reflected in the holding points. It is possible to prevent the gap between the value and the value from expanding unnecessarily. In addition, since the points at the final opportunity do not contribute to reaching the privilege grant value as described above, the player can reach the privilege grant value even if the suggestion effect corresponding to such points is not performed. It can be said that it does not matter in aiming to reach it. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without disturbing the player's game.

When the holding points are not updated, the type of the point suggestion effect to be executed at that time is determined based on the holding points before the points are given.

For example, when the retention points are not updated due to the update limit, if the type of point suggestion effect is determined based on the actual total points (total points in the state where the given points are reflected), the total points and retention points are retained. Since the value is different from the point, the type of the point suggestion effect and the holding point may not match, which may cause confusion for the player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the type of the point suggestion effect is determined based on the holding point before the point is given (the holding point in the state where the update is postponed), the type of the point suggestion effect and the holding point are determined. It becomes possible to match them favorably.

Even if the granting opportunity is subject to the renewal restriction of the retention points, if the total points are smaller than the predetermined value, the retention points are renewed without the renewal restriction.

If the retention points are not always updated when the reward is subject to the renewal restriction, the player will not be notified that the total points have increased. It may give the impression that there is no possibility of being done (in other words, the total points will not increase at that opportunity). In this respect, in the present embodiment, the renewal of the holding points is restricted only when the total points reflecting the points given at that opportunity are equal to or more than a predetermined value. In this case, in a situation where the total points are equal to or more than a predetermined value and the gap with the initial value when initialized is expected to be large, it is avoided that the total points are reflected in the holding points, while it is avoided. If the total points are less than the predetermined value, the holding points are updated, and it is possible to notify that the total points have increased. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to notify that the total points have increased while suppressing an excessive gap from the initial value at the time of initialization.

In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the present embodiment is applied to the first embodiment has been described, but the present embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the sub-control device 81 stores the information corresponding to the points, but in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the type of the executed point suggestion effect is stored. .. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Process for executing point production>
The process for executing the point effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83 (a). This process is executed in step S2314 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the point effect execution process of FIG. 52. In FIG. 83A, the same steps as those in FIG. 52 are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When the suggestion effect flag is set in step S2801, that is, when the point suggestion effect should be executed, the effect type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed in step S2804. At this time, in the present embodiment, the accumulation points are used instead of the holding points. That is, the type of the point suggestion effect is drawn based on the acquired type lottery table (FIG. 53), the accumulated points this time, and the lottery counter (random number).

In the following step S3701, the rank information table stored in the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the rank information of the types sorted by the type lottery in step S2804 is grasped. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), rank information corresponding to each effect type is set in the rank information table. For example, when the type of the point suggestion effect distributed in step S2804 is the bubble small effect, 1 is derived as the rank information.

In step S3702, a process of updating the rank information grasped in step S3701 as new retained rank information is executed. Specifically, the rank information (previous rank information) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is rewritten with the current rank information grasped in step S3701. After the execution of step S3702, in step S2805, the effect data setting process is performed so that the point suggestion effect drawn in step S2804 is executed.

In the present embodiment, the rank information grasping process and the update process are performed before the execution of step S2805, but the execution timing of each of these processes is sufficient only after the lottery of the suggestion effect mode, so that the step It may be performed after the execution of S2805.

<Processing for points>
The point processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84 (a). This process is executed in step S2313 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the sub control device 81, step S2405, step S2413, and step S2418 of the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 50). It is executed in place of the point processing of 51 (a). In FIG. 84 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 51 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2601, the total points (the number of points accumulated on the main control device 101 side) are specified based on the point assignment command received from the main control device 101, and the accumulated points are grasped. In step S2602, the accumulated points stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 are updated to the accumulated points grasped in the above step S2601.

In step S3801, the retention rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d is read out and grasped. Since this point processing is performed prior to the point effect execution process of FIG. 83 (a), the retention rank information grasped in step S3801 is the retention rank information updated when the previous point suggestion effect was executed. It becomes.

In step S3802, the corresponding points corresponding to the retained rank information are specified with reference to the rank information table (FIG. 83 (b)), and whether or not the accumulated points updated in step S2602 are larger than the corresponding points is determined. judge. For example, when the retention rank information is 1, 2 points are specified as corresponding points, and it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are larger than 2 points. Here, since the corresponding points indicate how many points the previously executed point suggestion effect corresponds to, the processing of this step is the points that the accumulated points of this time suggested in the previous point suggestion effect. It can also be said that it determines whether or not it is larger than.

If the accumulated points are larger than the corresponding points, the process proceeds to step S2606, and an effect execution lottery process for determining whether or not to perform the point suggestion effect is executed. That is, if it is recognized that the accumulated points of this time are increasing based on the points suggested in the previous point suggestion effect, the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3802 (when the accumulated points are equal to or less than the corresponding points), the processing for this point is terminated without executing the processing after step S2606. That is, if the number of accumulated points this time is the same or decreased when viewed from the points suggested in the previous point suggestion effect, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted and not executed.

As described above, the point effect execution process of FIG. 83A is performed after the point effect process is completed. Therefore, the effect type lottery in step S2804 in the point effect execution process is performed using the accumulated points updated in step S2602 (accumulated points in a state in which the points given in the present granting opportunity are reflected). .. That is, the judgment as to whether or not to execute the point suggestion effect is performed by comparing with the previous point suggestion effect, but if it is executed, the type lottery is performed according to the latest accumulated points. Therefore, as the type of the point suggestion effect this time, it becomes easier to select a higher rank than the previous point suggestion effect.

<Treatment for release>
The release process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84 (b). This process is executed in step S2411 of the effect setting process at the time of total stop (FIG. 50) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in step S3901 instead of step S2702. It is the same as the treatment for release.

In step S3901, a process of clearing (initializing) the holding rank information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. That is, the retention rank information is initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when the privilege based on the arrival at the privilege grant value is granted, and in the period until the next arrival. Retained over.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The rank information corresponding to the type of the executed point suggestion effect is stored, and this is retained as the retention rank information even when the total points are initialized, and the execution restriction of the point suggestion effect is set based on this retention rank information. It was configured to be performed. According to this configuration, after the total points are initialized, it is possible to suppress that an effect lower than the point suggestion effect executed before the initialization is performed, and the above-mentioned first embodiment A similar effect can be achieved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted based on the rank of the executed point suggestion effect (in other words, the type of the executed point suggestion effect) instead of the points. It can be expected that the limitation is relaxed as compared with the case of the first embodiment, and the decrease in the execution frequency of the point suggestion effect is suppressed. For example, if a type corresponding to a value smaller than the actual total points is drawn in the previous point suggestion effect, the holding rank information corresponding to the value smaller than the actual total points will be retained. Even if the total points have not increased due to the execution of the point suggestion effect, the total points (accumulated points) exceed the corresponding points, and the execution of the point suggestion effect is permitted. That is, there may be a case where the point suggestion effect can be executed even when the points are not given.

In the present embodiment, the holding rank information is used instead of the holding points according to the first embodiment, but the second embodiment and the first embodiment are described as opposed to the present embodiment. It is also possible to apply the third embodiment. For example, in the third embodiment, the retention rank information may be restricted from being updated by the rank information of the point suggestion effect executed at the final trigger before initialization.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the sub-control device 81 assigns points in addition to the points given by the main control device 101, and both the points on the sub-control device 81 side and the points on the main control device 101 side are given. It is configured to refer to and perform a point effect. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 100. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the present embodiment, the privilege granting value and the point granting opportunity are different from those in each of the above embodiments, and the difference will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

The privilege grant value according to this embodiment is 20 points. Therefore, the privilege is given when the points given by the main control device 101 are 20 points or more. It should be noted that the content of the privilege is the transition to the second AT mode as in each of the above-described embodiments, and the trigger for granting the privilege is also the end of the first AT mode as in each of the above-described embodiments.

In the present embodiment, six triggers are set as the point granting triggers, and the granting triggers at the time of 200 games and the granting triggers at the time of 400 games are added to the granting triggers related to each of the above embodiments. Has been done. The point award rate, etc. at each awarding opportunity will be described in detail later.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 in order to realize the point granting configuration and the privilege granting configuration will be described.

<Process for ending the 1st AT mode>
The process for terminating the first AT mode according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86 (a). This process is executed in step S1206 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37) in the main control device 101, and is executed in place of the process for ending the first AT in FIG. 40. In FIG. 86A, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 40, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing step S1503 (process for clearing the first AT flag), the process proceeds to step S1504, and it is determined whether or not the second AT winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The second AT winning flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the second AT mode transition lottery. If the second AT winning flag is not set, that is, if the second AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4101, and the value of the PT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Is 20 or more.

When the value of the PT counter is 20 or more (when the total points have reached the privilege grant value), the process proceeds to step S1508, and the value of the PT counter is cleared to 0. In step S1509, a point achievement command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the process proceeds to step S1506 (process of setting the second AT start flag).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101 (when the value of the PT counter is less than 20 and the total points have not reached the privilege grant value), the process proceeds to step S1510, and the first AT end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. To set. The first AT end flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode has ended.

In step S1511, the first AT end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then, in step S4102, the point lottery flag E is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. A plurality of types of point lottery flags are set so that the CPU 102 can grasp that the execution trigger of the point granting lottery has been established. One of them, the point lottery flag E, indicates that the present granting lottery trigger is based on the termination of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery (FIG. 85). After the execution of step S4102, the process proceeds to step S1513 (process of setting the point trigger command).

<Section display first process>
The section display first process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86 (b). This process is executed in step S315 of the lottery process (FIG. 19), and is executed in place of the section display first process of FIG. 44. In FIG. 86 (b), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the process of step S1807 (the process of setting 700 in the ceiling counter), in step S4201, the process of inputting 200 to the disengagement counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The out-of-order counter is for counting the number of games that are not won in the first AT mode transition lottery in the situation of staying in the advantageous section. In step S4202, the 200G flag is set in each flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The 200G flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the counting period of the number of games using the deviation counter is a period up to 200 games. After the execution of step S4202, the second point lottery process of step S4203 is executed. The details of the second point lottery process will be described later.

<Process for updating the number of games>
The game number update process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. This process is executed in step S314 of the lottery process (FIG. 19), and is executed in place of the game number update process of FIG. 36. In FIG. 87, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 36, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1108, the value of the deviation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is subtracted by 1 and updated, and then in step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the deviation counter is 0. When the value of the deviation counter is 0, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the 200G flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the 200G flag is set, it means that the number of Hamari games has reached 200 games. In this case, the point lottery flag A is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4302. The point lottery flag A is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the present grant lottery opportunity is based on the number of Hamari games reaching 200 games (FIG. 85).

After the execution of step S4302, in step S4303, the 200G flag of the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared, the 400G flag is set in the area 106d, and then in step S4304, the counters of the various counter areas 106e are removed. The process of inputting 200 to is executed. The 400G flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the counting period of the number of games using the off counter is the period from 201 games to 400 games.

If a negative determination is made in step S4301 (when the 200G flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S4305 to determine whether or not the 400G flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the 400G flag is set, it means that the number of Hamari games has reached 400 games. In this case, the point lottery flag B is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4306. The point lottery flag B is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the present grant lottery opportunity is based on the number of Hamari games reaching 400 games (FIG. 85).

After the execution of step S4306, in step S4307, the 400G flag of the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared, the 600G flag is set in the area 106d, and then in step S4304, the counters of the various counter areas 106e are removed. The process of inputting 200 to is executed. The 600G flag is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the counting period of the number of games using the off counter is the period from 401 games to 600 games.

If a negative determination is made in step S4305 (when the 400G flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S4308 to determine whether or not the 600G flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the 600G flag is set, it means that the number of Hamari games has reached 600 games. In this case, the point lottery flag C is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4309. The point lottery flag C is for the CPU 102 to grasp that the present grant lottery opportunity is based on the number of Hamari games reaching 600 games (FIG. 85). In step S4310, the 600G flag is cleared, and then the process of step S1111 (the process of setting the point trigger flag) is executed.

<Processing for 1st point lottery>
The first point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88 (a). This process is executed in step S1208 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37), and is executed in place of the first point lottery process of FIG. 42. In FIG. 88 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701 (when none of the AT flags are set), the process proceeds to step S4401 to determine whether or not any of the point lottery flags is set in the various flag storage areas 106 of the RAM 106. do. When any of the point lottery flags is set, in step S4402, the point lottery table corresponding to the point lottery flag is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 89, the point lottery table is a table for performing a lottery for executing whether or not to give points and a lottery for the number of points to be given when points are given. be. In the present embodiment, three types of points, 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points, are set as the number of points to be given.

In step S4402, for example, when the point lottery flag A is set, the point lottery table A is acquired as corresponding to it (FIG. 89). The point lottery table A is set for 200 games. In the table A, the probability that the number of points becomes 0 (points are not given) is 70%, which is the highest. In addition, the probabilities that 5 points, 10 points, and 20 points are given are equal, and each is set to 10%. Further, also in the point lottery table B for 400 games, the probability of giving points and the distribution rate of each number of points are set to the same probability as the point lottery table A.

In the point lottery table C for 600 games, the probability that the number of points becomes 0 is 50%, which is set lower than the point lottery tables A and B. That is, when the number of Hamari games is large, points are likely to be given. Regarding the number of points when points are awarded, 5 points and 10 points have the same probability, and 20 points corresponding to the privilege grant value are set lower than those.

Also, in the point lottery table D when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and in the point lottery table E when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery, the points The grant probability and the distribution rate of each number of points are set to be the same as those in the point lottery table C.

The point lottery tables A to E are merely examples, and the probability of giving points and the probability of distributing points can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the configuration is such that a separate lottery table is used in response to the establishment of each opportunity, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common lottery table corresponding to all opportunities is provided (point award probability and number of points). There may be a configuration in which there is no difference in the distribution rate for each opportunity).

Returning to the description of the first point lottery process (FIG. 88 (a)), after acquiring the point lottery table in step S4402, the point award lottery process is executed in step S1708. In the point granting lottery process, the number of points is drawn based on the acquired point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

<Processing for 2nd point lottery>
The second point lottery process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88 (b). This process is executed in step S4203 of the first section display process (FIG. 86 (b)), and is executed in place of the second point lottery process of FIG. 45. In FIG. 88 (b), the same step numbers are assigned to the processes similar to those in FIG. 45, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After setting the point trigger command in step S1902, the point lottery table F is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S4501. Since the second point lottery process is executed at the start of the advantageous section (see FIGS. 44 and 88 (b)), the process of step S4501 is based on the present grant lottery opportunity at the start of the advantageous section. Assuming that, the point lottery table corresponding to it is acquired. In the point lottery table F, as shown in FIG. 89, the probability that the number of points becomes 0 (points are not given) is 70%, and the point giving probability is set low like the point lottery tables A and B. Has been done. However, when points are awarded, 5 points are 0%, and the distribution rate of 10 points is higher by that amount. That is, although it is difficult to give points at the start of the advantageous section, a higher number of points is given when the points are given. The point lottery table F is only an example like other point lottery tables, and the point award probability and the distribution of the number of points can be arbitrarily set.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 in the present embodiment will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The start-time effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the sub control device 81, and is executed instead of the effect setting process at the start of FIG. 49. In FIG. 90, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start command (step S1810 in FIG. 44) is received as the start command this time. When the advantageous section start command is received, the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2311.

In step S4601, the number of points (granted points) given by the main control device 101 at the start of the advantageous section at the start of the advantageous section is grasped. This process is performed based on the point giving command (step S1907 in FIG. 45) transmitted from the main control device 101. The point granting command includes information indicating that points have been granted, as well as information indicating the number of points granted in the present lottery and the total number of points granted.

In this step, it is determined whether or not the point granting command is received as the start command of this time, and if not received, the granted points are grasped as 0 points. On the other hand, when the point-giving command is received, the command is analyzed to grasp the points to be given. As described above, in the point award lottery at the start of the advantageous section in the main control device 101, the awarding probability of 5 points is set to 0% (FIG. 89), so the awarding points grasped here are 0 points. It will be either 10 points or 20 points.

In step S4602, the sub-point lottery table corresponding to the given points grasped in step S4601 is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. The sub-points are points given by the sub-control device 81 separately from the points given on the main control device 101 side, and the sub-point lottery table is a table for drawing the presence / absence of points given and the number of points.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the sub-point lottery table, a plurality of types of points are set as the number of points that can be given in one granting process, and a selection probability is set for each of these points. In the present embodiment, four types of points that can be given are set: 0 points (without giving subpoints), 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points.

Further, in the various table storage areas 182a, a plurality of sub-point lottery tables are provided according to the size of the points given by the main control device 101. As described above, the points given at the start of the advantageous section are 0 points, 10 points, or 20 points. However, in the present embodiment, the points given as a sub-point lottery table are given. There are three types of tables: a table for 0 points, a table for 10 points, and a table for 20 points.

In the sub-point lottery table when the points given on the main controller 101 side are 0 points, the probability that the sub points will be 0 (sub points will not be given) is 40%, and 10 points, 20 points, and 30 The probability of becoming a point is 20%. Further, in the sub-point lottery table when the granted points are 10 points, the probability that the sub-point will be 0 points is 40%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are 30% and 20 points, respectively. %, 10%. In the sub-point lottery table with 20 points granted, the probability that the sub-point will be 0 points is 50%, and the probabilities that the sub-points will be 10 points, 20 points, and 30 points are 20%, 20%, respectively. It is 10%.

Here, when the distribution rate of the number of points when subpoints are given is compared between the lottery tables, 10 subpoints are given in the subpoint lottery table when the given points are 10 points. The probability is 50%, the probability in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 0 points (33.3%), and the probability in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 20 points (33.3%). It is higher than 40%). Further, in the sub-point lottery table when the granted points are 20 points, the probability that 20 points of sub-points will be granted is 40%, and in the sub-point lottery table when the granted points are 0 points. It is higher than the probability (33.3%) and the probability (33.3%) in the sub-point lottery table when the given points are 10 points.

That is, when the number of points given on the main control device 101 side is 10, 10 subpoints are more likely to be selected than when the number of points is other, and the number of points given on the main control device 101 side is 20 points. In this case, 20 subpoints are more likely to be selected than in the case of other points. That is, when subpoints are given, the larger the given points on the main control device 101 side, the easier it is for the larger subpoints to be given.

The number of points of the sub-points and the above-mentioned numerical values for the sub-point lottery table are merely examples, and are not limited to the above. The number of points of subpoints, the number of types of points, the probability of granting subpoints, and the probability of distribution of each number of points can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 90), after acquiring the sub-point lottery table in step S4602, the sub-point lottery process is executed in step S4603. In the sub-point lottery process, the sub-point lottery is performed based on the acquired sub-point lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183.

In step S4604, the sub-points drawn in step S4603 are added to the points given in step S4601. For example, when 10 points are grasped as the given points and 10 points are drawn as the sub points, 20 points are derived as the added value thereof.

In step S4605 and step S4606, the addition result of step S4604 is stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 as the production possible points and the total points, respectively. As shown in FIG. 92A, the point information storage area 183d is provided with the effectable point storage area 183e and the total point storage area 183f, and in step S4605, the above addition result as the effectable points is obtained. It is stored in the effectable point storage area 183e, and in step S4606, the above addition result as total points is stored in the total point storage area 183f. Details of the points that can be produced and the total points will be described later.

If the number of points granted in step S4601 is 0, the addition result stored in step S4605 and step S4606 will be the subpoints obtained by the lottery in step S4603.

In step S4607, the trigger flag A is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The trigger flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp which of the current point granting triggers (point granting triggers on the main control device 101 side) is, and as shown in FIG. 92B, each granting flag is used. The trigger flag A to the trigger flag F are set corresponding to the trigger. The trigger flag A indicates that the point granting trigger this time is a granting trigger based on the start of the advantageous section.

After the execution of step S4607, the given suggestion effect processing is executed in step S4608, and then the total suggestion effect process is executed in step S4609. In the present embodiment, as the effect related to the points, a grant suggestion effect suggesting that the points have been granted and the number of points granted at that time (the number of points granted in one point grant process) , A total suggestion effect that suggests the total value of the granted points (total points) is set. The process for giving suggestion effect in step S4608 is a process for executing the given suggestion effect, and the process for total suggestion effect in step S4609 is a process for executing the total suggestion effect. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

After the execution of step S4609, the other start-time effect setting process of step S2315 is executed, and then the main start-time effect setting process ends.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of all stops according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93. This process is executed in step S2210 of the effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 50. In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 50, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), if a negative determination is made in step S2401 (when the CZ start command is not received), is the CZ end command received as the current stop command in step S2403? Judge whether or not. If the CZ end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4701 to determine whether or not a point trigger command (step S1312 in FIG. 38) has been received as the command for all stops this time. The point trigger command includes information indicating that the point granting trigger has been established, as well as information indicating which trigger the point granting trigger is.

If the point trigger command is received, the process proceeds to step S4702, and the trigger flag E is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The trigger flag E is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point granting trigger based on the termination of the CZ mode without winning the first AT mode transition lottery has been established (FIG. 92 (b)). In step S4703, the process for giving suggestion effect is executed. This process is the same as in step S4608. After the execution of step S4703 or when a negative determination is made in step S4701 (when the point trigger command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2406 to execute the setting process of the CZ end effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when a negative determination is made in step S2407 (when neither the first AT start command nor the second AT start command is received), the current all-stop command in step S2409. It is determined whether or not the first AT end command is received. If the first AT end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4704, and it is determined whether or not the point achievement command has been received. If the point achievement command has been received, the release process is executed in step S4705, and then the other all-stop effect setting process in step S2423 is executed. The release process in step S4705 will be described later.

On the other hand, when the point achievement command has not been received, it is determined in step S4706 whether or not the point trigger command (step S1513 in FIG. 40) has been received. If the point trigger command is received, the process proceeds to step S4707, and the trigger flag F is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The trigger flag F is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point granting trigger based on the termination of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery has been established (FIG. 92 (b)).

In the following step S4708, the process for suggesting granting is executed. This process is the same as in step S4608. After the execution of step S4708 or when a negative determination is made in step S4706 (when the point trigger command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2414 to execute the setting process of the first AT end effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), when a negative determination is made in step S2415 (when the second AT end command is not received), a point trigger command is received as the current total stop command in step S4709. Judge whether or not it is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when 200 games, 400 games, and 600 games are digested, the main control device 101 is configured to establish a point awarding opportunity, and this step is described in these steps. It determines whether or not the granting opportunity has been established.

If the point trigger command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4710, and the corresponding trigger flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined whether the established grant trigger is 200 game hamari, 400 game hamari, or 600 game hamari. Then, the trigger flag B is set when the game is 200 games, the trigger flag C is set when the game is 400 games, and the trigger flag D is set when the game is 600 games (FIG. 92 (b)). ..

In step S4711, the process for giving suggestion effect is executed. This process is the same as in step S4608.

If a negative determination is made in step S4709 (when the point trigger command has not been received), it is determined in step S2419 whether or not the initialization command has been received. If the initialization command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4712, and the point information (directable points, total points, etc.) stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is erased. After the execution of step S4711 or step S4712, the process proceeds to step S2423, and other all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

<Processing for suggestion of grant>
The process for suggesting the addition of step S4608, step S4703, step S4708, and step S4711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the point giving command from the main control device 101 is received. When the point giving command is received, that is, when the points are given on the main control device 101 side, the process proceeds to step S4802, and the process of adding the given points to the current directable points is executed. In this step, the given points on the main control device 101 side are grasped based on the received point giving command, and the grasped given points are added to the current directable points stored in the effectable point storage area 183e of the RAM 183. do. For example, if the grasped grant points are 5 points and the current directable points are 10 points, 15 points are derived as the addition result. In the following step S4803, the addition result derived in step S4802 is stored in the directable point storage area 183e as a new directable point, and the directable point is updated.

Here, the grant suggestion effect and the points that can be produced will be described.

First, the grant suggestion effect will be described. As described above, the grant suggestion effect suggests that the grant points have been granted and the number of points granted (the number of points granted in one point granting process). Although the details will be described later, the grant suggestion effect is not completely linked to the actual grant points, but functions as an effect suggesting the grant points as a position in the effect.

The specific mode of the grant suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the point suggestion effect (FIG. 56) according to the first embodiment is incorporated. That is, the point suggestion effect according to the first embodiment suggests the accumulated points (total points) at that time depending on the size of the bubble image, but the grant suggestion according to the present embodiment. The effect is configured to suggest the number of points given at the time of this grant, depending on the size of the bubble image. The types of the effect of giving suggestion are small bubble effect (FIG. 56 (a)), medium bubble effect (FIG. 56 (b)), large bubble effect (FIG. 56 (c)), and extra large bubble effect (FIG. 56 (d)). ) Is provided, and the larger the displayed bubble image, the larger the points given this time.

Since the grant suggestion effect does not clearly indicate the number of points by numbers or the like, the player cannot grasp the specific number of points even if any of the above effects is executed. That is, by looking at the grant suggestion effect, it is possible to predict a rough amount such as whether the number of grant points is large or small.

Next, the points that can be produced will be described. The effectable points are like points for performing the grant suggestion effect, and in the present embodiment, the effectable points are consumed to execute the grant suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), directed points (use points) are set for each type of grant suggestion effect, and when the grant suggestion effect is executed, the effect corresponding to that type is performed. Finished points are deducted from the points that can be produced. For example, when a small bubble effect suggestion effect is executed, 5 points that have already been produced are deducted from the points that can be produced at that time, and the remaining points are used to execute the next suggestion effect. .. Therefore, the grant suggestion effect is executed within the range of the effectable points.

Then, as already described, the points that can be produced as points are given as the total value of the assigned points on the main control device 101 side and the sub points on the sub control device 81 side at the start of the advantageous section (FIG. 90 step S4603 to step S4605). However, the granting does not end only at the first time, and when new granting points are granted in the main control device 101 after that, the number of points to be granted is cumulatively added to the points that can be produced. The processes of steps S4801 to S4803 correspond to the cumulative addition process.

After the execution of step S4803 or when a negative determination is made in step S4801 (when the point grant command is not received), it is determined in step S4804 whether or not the current directable points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 5). do. This process determines whether or not the number of points that can execute the grant suggestion effect is secured as the current effectable points. Therefore, the predetermined value in this step is the minimum number of points required to execute the grant suggestion effect, in other words, the minimum value of the effected points when the grant suggestion effect is executed (5 points. Figure. 95 (b)) is used.

If the production possible points are equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S4805, and the type lottery table corresponding to the trigger flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 is acquired. The type lottery table is a table for performing both an effect execution lottery for whether or not to execute the grant suggestion effect and a type lottery for selecting the type (aspect) when the grant suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a), the type lottery table for the grant suggestion effect is set for each point grant trigger, and in the type lottery table A corresponding to the grant trigger at the start of the advantageous section, the grant suggestion effect is performed. The probability of execution is set to 10% (the probability of non-execution is 90%), and the probability of sorting the types when the grant suggestion effect is executed is 3% for each of the small bubble effect to the large bubble effect. , The probability of oversized bubbles is set to 1%.

However, when the execution of the grant suggestion effect is selected, the classification of the type is performed within the range of the effectable points at that time. For example, when the production possible points at that time are 10 points, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the bubble large production and the bubble extra large production in which the produced points exceed 10 points are excluded from the selection target, and the production is performed. The type of the given suggestion effect is selected from the small bubble effect with 5 completed points and the medium bubble effect with 10 completed points. At that time, the 3% assigned to the large bubble effect and the 1% assigned to the oversized bubble effect were replaced with the smallest bubble effect, and the small bubble effect was 7%. A type lottery will be held based on the distribution of 3% of the production. That is, when some types are excluded from the selection target, the type with the smaller production points is likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect and the distribution probability of the type when the grant suggestion effect is executed are also set in the lottery table corresponding to other triggers. Specifically, in the type lottery table B corresponding to the granting opportunity of 200 game hamari and the type lottery table C corresponding to the granting opportunity of 400 game hamari, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is 20% (the probability of non-execution is 20%). 80%) is set, and in the type lottery table D corresponding to the granting opportunity of 600 games, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is set to 30% (probability of non-execution 70%). That is, in the case of a granting opportunity based on the number of Hamari games, the more the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (in other words, the closer to the end of the advantageous section), the easier it is for the grant suggestion effect to be executed.

In addition, it corresponds to the type lottery table E corresponding to the grant trigger when the CZ mode ends without winning the first AT mode transition lottery, and the grant trigger when the first AT mode ends without winning the second AT mode transition lottery. In the type lottery table F, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is set to 40% (the probability of non-execution is 60%).

Although not shown in FIG. 96 (a), selection probabilities for each type are also set for each of the above-mentioned type lottery tables B to F. Then, when the execution of the grant suggestion effect is selected, the classification of the type is performed within the range of the effectable points at that time, as in the case of the grant trigger at the start of the advantageous section. At that time, the probability assigned to the type that is not selected is replaced with the bubble small effect with the smallest effect point.

The above-mentioned lottery tables for each type are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned configurations. The execution probability of the grant suggestion effect and the distribution probability of each type can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to the description of the grant suggestion effect processing (FIG. 94), after acquiring the type lottery table in step S4805, the type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed in step S4806. In this step, the effect type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the acquired type lottery table, the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the effectable points updated in step S4803.

In step S4807, the effect data setting process is performed so that the type of grant suggestion effect selected by the lottery in step S4806 is executed. In the following step S4808, the assignment suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The grant suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the grant suggestion effect should be executed. When the grant suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48), the grant suggestion effect of the lottery mode is executed based on the set effect data. As such, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled. At that time, the grant suggestion flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared.

The execution timing of the grant suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and may be the game start timing (lever-on timing or reel rotation start timing), or the middle timing of the game (timing when a predetermined stop operation is performed). Or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game) or the end timing of the game (when all reels 32L to 32R are stopped).

After the execution of step S4808, in step S4809, the produced points corresponding to the lottery result of the effect type are grasped. For example, when the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are grasped as the produced points. In step S4810, the produced points grasped in step S4809 are subtracted from the current produced points. In step S4811, the subtraction result is stored in the directable point storage area 183e as a new directable point, and the directable point is updated. By the processing of steps S4809 to S4811, the execution amount of the present grant suggestion effect is reflected in the effectable points. After the execution of step S4811, the present grant suggestion effect processing is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4804 (when the effectable points are less than a predetermined value), the process of step S4805 to step S4811 is skipped because the effectable points are insufficient and the grant suggestion effect is not executed. , End the process for this grant suggestion effect.

<Processing for total suggestion production>
The process for total suggestion effect in step S4609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the point giving command from the main control device 101 is received. When the point-giving command is received, that is, when points are given on the main control device 101 side, the process proceeds to step S4902, and a process of adding the given points to the current total points is executed. In this step, the given points on the main control device 101 side are grasped based on the received point giving command, and the grasped given points are added to the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183. In the following step S4903, the addition result derived in step S4902 is stored in the total point storage area 183f as a new total point, and the total point is updated.

Here, the total suggestion effect and the total points will be described. As already explained, the total suggestion effect suggests the total value (total points) of the given points. That is, in the present embodiment, the total amount of points given by the total suggestion effect is increased while raising the interest in the game of accumulating points by making the player aware of the addition of points by the above-mentioned grant suggestion effect. By showing how much the player has reached, for example, the player is given the impression that the game is just around the corner, and these effects are combined to motivate the player to continue the game.

The specific mode of the total suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the total points are suggested by the emission color of the upper lamp 63. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 issues a notification prompting the operation of the effect switch 66, such as "press the effect button". This notification is performed at the start timing of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game. After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the player operates the effect switch 66, the upper lamp 63 emits light as shown in FIG. 98 (c). In this case, there are four types of emission colors, blue, yellow, green, and red, which suggests that the total points are large from blue to red. Since the total suggestion effect does not clearly indicate the number of points by numbers or the like, the player cannot grasp the specific number of points even by looking at the emission color of the upper lamp 63. That is, by looking at the total suggestion effect, it is possible to predict a rough amount such as whether the total points are large or small.

The emission color of the upper lamp 63 is selected according to the total value of the points, but in the present embodiment, the total points on the main control device 101 side and the sub points on the sub control device 81 side are added to the total points. Make the above selection in correspondence. At that time, when new points are given by the main control device 101, the given points are reflected in the total points, and steps S4901 to S4903 are the processes for that purpose.

Note that, unlike the case of the points that can be produced, even if the total suggestion effect is executed, the points for that amount are not subtracted from the total points. That is, the total points are given on the main control device 101 side after the start value is given by the sum of the points given on the main control device 101 side and the sub points on the sub control device 81 side at the start of the advantageous section. Every time points are awarded, it will continue to increase.

Returning to the explanation of the total suggestion effect processing (FIG. 97), if a negative determination is made after the execution of step S4903 or in step S4901 (when the point grant command is not received), various flags of the RAM 183 are stored in step S4904. It is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag is set in the area 183a. If the suggestion effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4905, and an effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the total suggestion effect is executed. In this step, the execution lottery table for the total suggestion effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery is performed based on the lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. ..

The winning probability at the time of the production execution lottery is not particularly limited, but when the execution lottery is performed in each game as in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than the unwinning probability. It should be noted that, for example, when a predetermined number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section, or when a specific number of games is stopped on the reels 32L to 32R, a lottery for executing the production of the total suggestion effect is performed. It may be configured.

In step S4906, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S4905. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S4907, and the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183 are grasped. In step S4908, the type lottery table corresponding to the grasped total points is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, a plurality of tables according to the number of points of the total points are set as the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect, and in step S4907, from among those tables. Acquire the one corresponding to the current total points. In the lottery table for each type shown in FIG. 99, the total points are classified into less than 24 points, 25 points to 39 points, 40 points to 49, and 50 points or more. It is classified according to medium, large, and above the privilege grant value.

In the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect, the selection probability of the effect mode (emission color of the upper lamp 63) is set. For example, in the type lottery table corresponding to the case where the total points are less than 24 points, the probability of becoming blue is set to 67% and the probability of becoming yellow is set to 33% after green and red are excluded from the selection target. ing. Although detailed explanations of numerical values for each type lottery table are omitted, in the type lottery table for total suggestion production, the larger the number of points of the total points, the easier it is to select the higher emission color. The selection probability is set.

The lottery table for each type is only an example, and the allocation of the number of points in each category and the selection probability of each emission color can be arbitrarily set.

After acquiring the type lottery table in step S4908, the type lottery of the total suggestion effect is performed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 in step S4909. In step S4910, the effect data setting process is performed so that the total suggestion effect of the type selected by the type lottery in step S4909 is executed.

In step S4911, the total suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The total suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48), the total suggestion effect of the lottery mode is executed based on the set effect data. As such, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled. At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared.

The execution timing of the total suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and may be the game start timing (lever-on timing or reel rotation start timing) or the middle timing of the game (timing when a predetermined stop operation is performed). Or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game) or the end timing of the game (when all reels 32L to 32R are stopped).

After the execution of step S4911, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S4904 (when the suggestion effect flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S4906 (when a non-winning effect is obtained in the effect execution lottery), this total suggestion effect is produced. End the processing. The reason why the processing after step S4905 is skipped when the suggestion effect flag is set is to avoid duplication with the grant suggestion effect.

<Treatment for release>
The release process of step S4705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S5101, the effect data for executing the point emission effect is set. The point emission effect is the same as the point emission effect (FIG. 57) according to the first embodiment. In step S5102, the emission effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The emission effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the point emission effect should be executed, and is cleared when the point emission effect is executed.

In step S5103, a process of clearing (initializing) the point information stored in the point information storage area 183d of the RAM 183 is executed. Specifically, the effectable points and total points stored in the effectable point storage area 183e and the total point storage area 183f are changed to the initial values (0), or the information of those points is deleted. That is, the directable points and the total points are initialized when the total points reach the privilege grant value, in other words, when the privilege based on the arrival at the privilege grant value is granted. After the execution of step S5103, the main release process is terminated.

<About the flow of point production>
The flow of the point suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

First, it is assumed that points are not given on the main control device 101 side and 20 points of subpoints are given on the sub control device 81 side at the granting opportunity a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the directable points of the sub control device 81 are 20 points by adding them, and the total points are also 20 points.

In the grant trigger a1, a type lottery for the grant suggestion effect is performed, and this type lottery is performed based on 20 points that can be produced. That is, the small bubble effect, the medium bubble effect, and the large bubble effect, in which the produced points are 20 points or less, are selected targets (FIG. 95 (b)), and the type is selected from them. Further, in this type lottery, the execution lottery of the effect and the type lottery are performed together (FIG. 96).

As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that the bubble small effect is selected as the grant suggestion effect (event a2). For example, when the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the actual total points, the grant suggestion effect cannot be executed because the total points are 0 points. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the type lottery is performed based on the added value obtained by adding the sub points, it is possible to execute the grant suggestion effect. That is, since the execution lottery and the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect are performed based on the numerical information larger than the actual total points, the grant suggestion effect can be performed even when the points are not given on the main control device 101 side. become.

When the bubble small effect is selected as the grant suggestion effect, 5 points are grasped as the corresponding effected points. Then, the 5 points are subtracted from the 20 points that can be produced at that time, and the productionable points are updated to 15 points. In this case, 20 points before the type lottery are maintained for the total points. Therefore, if the lottery for executing the total suggestion effect is won until the next grant trigger b1 arrives, a table for less than 24 points is acquired as the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect (FIG. 99). Either blue emission or yellow emission is selected as the type of total suggestion effect.

In the next grant trigger b1, it is assumed that 10 points are granted on the main control device 101 side. In this case, the granted points (10 points) are added to the production possible points (15 points) at that time, and the production possible points are updated to 25 points. Therefore, the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect in the grant trigger b1 is performed based on 25 points that can be produced. In this case, the small bubble effect, the medium bubble effect, and the large bubble effect, in which the produced points are 20 points or less, are selected, and the type of the given suggestion effect is selected from among them.

As a result of the lottery, if the bubble effect is selected as the grant suggestion effect (event b2), 10 points, which are the corresponding production points, are grasped. Then, the 10 points are subtracted from the 25 points that can be produced, and the points that can be produced are updated to 15 points.

Further, in the grant trigger b1, the 10 points granted on the main control device 101 side are added to the total points (20 points) at that time, and the total points are updated to 30 points. Therefore, if the lottery for executing the total suggestion effect is won until the next grant trigger c1 arrives, a table for 25 points to 39 points (FIG. 99) is acquired as a type lottery table for the total suggestion effect. Then, either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the type of total suggestion effect. At this time, yellow light emission is more likely to be selected as compared with the case where the total points are less than 24 points, and it is easier to suggest that the total points are increasing.

In the next grant trigger c1, it is assumed that points are not granted on the main control device 101 side. In this case, the points that can be produced do not change and remain at 15 points. Then, based on the production possible points, a type lottery for the grant suggestion effect at the grant trigger c1 is performed (event c2). In this case, the small bubble effect and the medium bubble effect in which the effected points are 15 points or less are selected, and the type of the given suggestion effect is selected from them. Therefore, even though the points are not given on the main control device 101 side, it is possible to execute the giving suggestion effect which is either the small bubble effect or the medium bubble effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effected points corresponding to the execution of the grant suggestion effect are subtracted from the effectable points, and the grant suggestion effect is executed at the next effect execution opportunity based on the remaining effectable points. It is configured to control. Here, the advantages of such a configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 102. Here, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the sub-control device 81 does not give sub-points, and the main control device 101 gives 10 points at the first grant trigger A and the second grant trigger B. It is assumed that 5 points are given in the above, and no points are given in the third grant trigger C.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), for example, in a configuration in which the execution control of the grant suggestion effect is performed for each grant point (a configuration in which the grant suggestion effect is executed based on one grant point for each grant). Assuming that the grant suggestion effect 231 for 5 points is performed at the first grant trigger A in which 10 points are granted, the unused portion of 5 points, which is the remaining 232, ends without being used thereafter. Therefore, in the next grant trigger B, the grant suggestion effect 234 can be executed only within the range of 5 points, which is the new grant point 233, and in the next grant trigger C, the premise (base). ), Since there is no grant point itself, it is not possible to execute the grant suggestion effect. That is, the points used as the grant suggestion effect are only 10 points out of the total of 15 points given from the grant trigger A to the grant trigger C.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), assuming that the grant suggestion effect 231 for 5 points is performed at the first grant trigger A in which 10 points are granted, the remaining portion is 232. A certain 5 points are left as points for executing the next grant suggestion effect. Therefore, in the next grant trigger B, the grant suggestion effect is executed by expanding the range to 10 points, which is the total of 5 points, which is the remaining 232 of the previous trigger, and 5 points, which is the new grant point 233. be able to. At that time, if the grant suggestion effect 234 for 5 points is performed, the remaining 5 points, which is the remaining amount 235, is left as points for further executing the next grant suggestion effect. Therefore, in the next grant trigger C, the grant suggestion effect can be executed within the range of 5 points even though the points have not been granted. That is, all 15 points, which is the sum of the points granted from the grant trigger A to the grant trigger C, can be used as points for executing the grant suggestion effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the points that are not used as the grant suggestion effect are effectively utilized as the points for the subsequent grant suggestion effect, so that the unused portion is suppressed from being wasted and the points are given. It becomes possible to efficiently execute the grant suggestion effect for the given points. As a result, it is possible to execute the grant suggestion effect on the premise that the number of points is larger than the actual number of points to be granted, or to execute the grant suggestion effect even when the points are not granted. In particular, in the game of granting a privilege by reaching the privilege grant value, if the frequency of point grant is increased to increase the chances of the grant suggestion effect, the difficulty of reaching the privilege grant value becomes low, and as a result, the degree of the privilege There is a restriction that the frequency of point awarding cannot be increased so much because the appealing power to the player is reduced. In view of such circumstances, it can be said that the effect of increasing the chance of giving suggestion effect while suppressing the frequency of giving points in the present embodiment is more preferable.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of the point effect (FIG. 101), it is assumed that the point is not given on the main control device 101 side and the point that can be produced at that time is 0 point in the subsequent granting opportunity n1. In this case, since the number of points that can be produced is less than the number of points required to execute the grant suggestion effect, the grant suggestion effect is not executed. In this way, since the execution of the grant suggestion effect is restricted in relation to the points that can be produced, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect is not unnecessarily increased, but the total points on the main control device 101 side and the sub control device 81 side. The grant suggestion effect is performed in a state where the total value of the subpoints is matched.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, points are given when the granting condition is satisfied, and when the total value (total points) reaches the privilege granting value, the player is granted the privilege (transition to the second AT mode). In addition, since the grant suggestion effect is performed as a notification suggesting that the grant points have been granted, the player can recognize that the total points will increase toward the privilege grant value, and the points will be further increased. The motivation to increase is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is possible to increase the chances of giving points in the main control device 101 to increase the frequency of giving suggestion effects and raise the player's interest in the points. preferable. However, on the other hand, if the number of points awarding opportunities is increased, the difficulty of reaching the awarding value becomes lower, and as a result, the degree of the award must be kept low, which may reduce the appeal to the player. .. That is, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of specific notification, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using points will be impaired.

In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the grant points given by the main control device 101, a directable point having a value larger than the grant point is derived, and the grant suggestion effect is executed based on the grantable points. There is. In this case, since the grant suggestion effect can be executed on the premise of a numerical value larger than the actual grant point, the frequency of the effect can be increased. At that time, the points that can be produced are used exclusively for the execution control of the grant suggestion effect by the sub control device 81, and are not involved in the granting of the privilege by the main control device 101. Therefore, the difficulty level of reaching the privilege grant value is reached. Can be suppressed from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the attractiveness of the game using points from being impaired.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total suggestion effect as a notification for suggesting the total points is not premised on the actual total points, but is executed and controlled on the premise of the total points larger than the total points. It is supposed to be. For example, if the actual total points are 0 points, there is a concern that the total suggestion effect cannot be performed. However, according to this configuration, the total suggestion effect is produced even in the situation where the actual total points are 0 points. It can be performed. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the frequency of the total suggestion effect as well as the grant suggestion effect.

The grant points given on the main control device 101 side and the sub points derived on the sub control device 81 side are added to obtain the directable points.

In the configuration of performing the grant suggestion effect, it is assumed that the player predicts the points (grant amount) granted by the player from the content of each effect, and the player himself totals them to predict the approximate total points. .. For this reason, if the execution control of the grant suggestion effect is performed on the premise of a numerical value different from the grant points, the grant suggestion effect that is far from the actual grant points is executed, and the player greatly deviates from the actual total points. There is a risk of predicting the total value to be used. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the given points are used for deriving the directable points, it is possible to derive the directable points while ensuring the relevance with the actually granted grant points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the grant suggestion effect from deviating significantly from the actual condition of the grant point, even though the configuration uses the effectable points different from the grant points, and the total predicted by the player from the grant suggestion effect. It is possible to match or bring the values closer to the actual total points.

Further, since the addition result of the given points and the sub points is used, even if the given points are 0 points, at least the numerical values for the sub points can be secured as the points that can be produced. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the grant suggestion effect regardless of whether the grant points are actually granted at the grant trigger, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect.

In addition, the total points are also configured so that the newly granted points are sequentially added to the added value of the initial granted points and the sub points, and the total value of the granted points and the sub points are substantially added. Since it is configured to be derived by value, as described above, it is possible to execute the total suggestion effect even in the situation where the actual total points are 0 points, and the frequency of the total suggestion effect can be appropriately increased. Becomes possible.

The size of the points that can be produced is determined based on the size of the points given. Specifically, the larger the points given, the easier it is to derive larger sub-points, and the larger the points that can be produced.

In the above configuration, the larger the given grant points, the higher the frequency of the grant suggestion effect and the amount of the grant indicated by the grant suggestion effect, so that the impression of the player received from the grant suggestion effect and the actual accumulation are accumulated. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the given points. In other words, the larger the amount of points given and the amount accumulated, the stronger the expectation of the player will be aroused. It is possible to increase the frequency of grant suggestion effects while reflecting the amount and accumulated amount.

The subpoint is derived at the start of the advantageous section. In this configuration, sub-points are derived according to the start timing of the advantageous section and added to the given points to obtain the directable points. Therefore, the directable points are abundant and the game in the advantageous section is started. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect from the initial stage of the advantageous section, and it is possible to proceed with the game in the advantageous section while preferably increasing the expectation of the player who expects to reach the privilege grant value. It will be possible.

Since the sub-control device 81 is configured to derive the sub-points, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main control device 101. In general, in the main control device 101, in view of the fact that the countermeasures against fraud are strengthened as compared with the sub control device 81, in the present embodiment, the general control for advancing the game, the awarding of points, and the total thereof are The configuration is such that the processing related to the interests of the player, such as the control of the privilege grant when the privilege grant value is reached, is entrusted to the main control device 101, but in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the main control device 101 becomes high. .. In such a situation, if the execution control of the grant suggestion effect and the subpoint derivation process are entrusted to the main control device 101, there is a concern that processing omissions may occur and the game may be hindered. For example, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the main control device 101 and simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggestion effect while suppressing the increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to make the configuration suitable for a gaming machine in which the storage capacity that can be mounted on the main control device 101 is limited.

The effectable points are updated by subtracting the effected points of the previously executed grant suggestion effect from the effectable points, and the subsequent grant suggestion effect is executed based on the updated effectable points.

As described with reference to FIG. 102, for example, in a configuration in which the grant suggestion effect is executed based on the grant points for each grant each time, the grant suggestion effect corresponding to a value smaller than the grant points at that time is given. When is done, the unused portion is terminated without being used thereafter. On the other hand, in this configuration, when the effect suggestion effect of the effected points smaller than the effectable points is performed, the unused points are left as a numerical value for executing the later grant suggestion effect, which is wasted. Is suppressed. In other words, since the points that were not used in the previous grant suggestion effect can be effectively used as the execution portion of the later grant suggestion effect, it is possible to efficiently execute the grant suggestion effect for the given effectable points. Become. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the configuration in which the grant suggestion effect is executed on the premise that the effectable points have a value larger than the actually granted grant points, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect can be further increased more preferably. It will be possible.

It is possible to set the directed points for each mode of the given suggestion effect (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, oversized bubble effect), and produce the produced points corresponding to the specific aspect of the executed specific effect. It was configured to be subtracted from the points. Specifically, for each mode of the grant suggestion effect, a unique effected point corresponding to the magnitude of the grant amount indicated by each mode (in other words, the degree of expectation of the player) is set.

When a plurality of modes are provided as the grant suggestion effect, the size of the grant points can be suggested depending on which mode the grant suggestion effect is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the produced points of the grant suggestion effect have a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the mode of the grant suggestion effect after the execution is controlled based on the updated effectable points comes first. It will be selected regardless of the mode of the grant suggestion effect. As a result, there is a concern that the total points predicted by the player and the actual total points will greatly deviate from each grant suggestion effect, and the player's trust in the grant suggestion effect will decrease.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the directable points having a size corresponding to the mode of the previous grant suggestion effect are subtracted from the directable points, the later grant suggestion effect is associated with the mode of the previous grant suggestion effect. The aspect can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total points predicted by the player from the given suggestion effect and the actual total points closer to each other. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect while suppressing the decrease in the player's trust in the grant suggestion effect.

The configuration is such that the mode of the subsequent grant suggestion effect is determined within the range of the renewed effectable points. Specifically, among the plurality of modes of the grant suggestion effect, the mode of the subsequent grant suggestion effect is determined from the mode that is equal to or less than the point that can be produced at that time.

In the above configuration, since the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the point that can be produced at that time is excluded from the selection target, it is suppressed that the mode of the subsequent grant suggestion effect is selected by deviating from the actual total points. NS. As a result, it is possible to match or bring the total points predicted by the player from the grant suggestion effect each time and the actual total points closer to each other.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that the point granting suggestion effect is executed in a situation where the point granting opportunity in the main control device 101 is not established. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the present embodiment, a continuous effect is executed as an effect of notifying that the player has won the CZ game or the lottery for shifting to the AT mode. The continuous production is performed as a series of productions over a plurality of games, and is configured to notify whether or not a lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the like has been won in the final game.

Here, an example of continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 103. Here, a continuous production performed over three games will be described as an example.

In the game in which the continuous production is started (the first game), the start production is executed. In this start effect, as shown in FIG. 103A, a character image 252 such as "If you can transform into a witch, hit" is displayed together with the girl character 251 on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. This start effect is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the start game of the continuous effect.

In the subsequent game, depending on whether or not the girl character 251 can be transformed into the wizard character 253, it is notified whether or not the lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the like has been won. Specifically, in the second game, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), an image of the process in which the girl character 251 transforms into the witch character 253 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, in the third game (the final game in the continuous production), a result image of whether or not the transformation is successful is displayed, thereby notifying whether or not the player has won. At that time, if the transition to the CZ mode or the like is won, as shown in FIG. 103 (c1), an image in which the witch character 253 that has succeeded in transformation appears is displayed. On the other hand, if the transition to the CZ mode or the like has not been won, as shown in FIG. 103 (c2), an image in which the girl character 251 that has failed to transform appears is displayed.

The above-mentioned video production is only an example of a production mode as a continuous production. Other aspects may be used. Further, the number of games for continuous production is not limited to three games, and may be two games or four games.

In addition, when executing the continuous production of the success ending and the winning ending, the main control device 101 sets the number of precursor games and shifts to the precursor mode based on winning the CZ mode or the like. When the mode shifts to the precursor mode, the shift to the CZ mode or the like is waited until the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 0. The sub-control device 81 controls to execute the continuous effect during the precursory mode, that is, during the period in which the transition to the mode is awaited after winning the CZ mode or the like. For example, when the number of precursor games is set to 5 and the continuous production of 3 games is executed, the continuous production is controlled to start from the timing when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 3 games. As a result, it is possible to notify the winner of the CZ mode or the like in the final game of the precursor mode. In the above case, in the two games before the start of the continuous production, the production other than the continuous production such as the advance notice production is executed, and the so-called fanning is performed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 in the present embodiment will be described.

<Process for notification of specific role>
The specific combination notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2305 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the sub control device 81, and more specifically, it is executed when a specific combination (so-called rare combination) is won. .. The specific combination notification process is for setting a continuous effect for pseudo-precursor (continuous effect for notifying non-winning such as CZ mode).

First, in step S6101, a chance production execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the chance production as the production of this game. In the chance production, for example, the character "Chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the character with the exclamation mark is displayed corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R ( FIG. 54 (c). In addition, the winning probability of the chance production execution lottery may be different depending on the type of the specific combination, the game state, the set value, and the like.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6101 has been won. If the player has won, the chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of this game in step S6103.

After the execution of step S6103 or when a negative determination is made in step S6102 (when a non-winning result is obtained in the chance production execution lottery), it is determined in step S6104 whether or not a precursor command has been received as the start command of this time. do. The precursor command is transmitted when the main control device 101 shifts to the precursor mode, in other words, when the shift to the CZ mode or the like is won. The precursor command includes information indicating the number of precursor games in addition to information indicating that the mode has changed to the precursor mode.

If the precursor command has not been received, it is determined in step S6105 whether or not the precursor flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The precursor flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the precursor mode is in progress, is set when the precursor command is received, and is cleared when the precursor mode ends.

If the precursor flag is not set, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not the pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The pseudo flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo precursor mode is in progress. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode for expecting the player to have made the above-mentioned transition (in other words, winning the CZ mode, etc.), although it has not actually transitioned to the precursor mode. Using the period of the pseudo precursor mode, a continuous effect for notifying the non-winning such as the CZ mode is executed. As the number of continuous games in the pseudo-precursor mode, the number of games that is larger than the number of games in the continuous production is often set as in the case of the precursor mode. At that time, in the period before the start of the continuous production, a fanning production (a production other than the continuous production) that makes the player expect to win is performed. Although this fanning effect is performed to some extent even during the period before the start of the continuous effect in the precursor mode, it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the precursor mode and the pseudo precursor mode. ..

If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S6107, and the execution lottery of the pseudo precursor mode is performed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the pseudo precursor mode lottery table acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b. In the pseudo-precursor mode lottery table, the probability of winning the pseudo-precursor mode lottery is set to differ depending on the type of transition trigger that has been won. For example, strong cherries are more likely than weak cherries. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is high.

In step S6108, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S6107. If the lottery is not won, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated as it is, while if the lottery is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode (number of pseudo precursor games) is performed in step S6109. In step S6110, the number of pseudo precursor games selected in step S6109 is set in the pseudo precursor counters provided in various counter areas 183b. The pseudo precursor counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game.

In step S6111, the number of continuous production games is set in the continuous production counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games of the continuous effect. In step S6112, a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the specific combination notification process is terminated. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S6104 to S6106 (when a precursor command is received, or when either a precursor flag or a pseudo flag is set), a continuous effect for precursors or In order to avoid duplication with the already executed continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, the process after step S6107 is skipped and the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated.

<Starting effect setting process>
The specific combination notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect setting process of step S6201 is provided after the step S4609 (FIG. 90). The continuous effect setting process sets for executing the continuous effect.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process of step S6201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is received as the start command of this time. When the precursor command is received, the precursor game number is set in the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 in step S6302. In step S6303, the number of games for continuous production is set in the continuous production counters provided in the various counter areas 183b.

After the execution of step S6303 or when a negative determination is made in step S6301 (when the precursor command is not received), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed. When the continuous effect flag is set, that is, when the continuous effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6305, and the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1 to update.

On the other hand, when the continuous effect flag is not set, that is, when the continuous effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S6306 whether or not it is the execution timing (start timing) of the continuous effect. If it is not the execution timing of the continuous effect, the present continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is, while if it is the execution timing of the continuous effect, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S6307.

After the execution of step S6305 or step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the pseudo flag is set in the flag storage area 183a. When the pseudo flag is not set, that is, when the continuous effect for the precursor should be executed, the process proceeds to step S6309, and the effect data for the continuous effect for the precursor is set. In this step, the value of the continuous production counter is referred to to grasp the number of games in which the current game corresponds to the continuous production, and the production data corresponding to the grasped game is set. For example, in the case of the first game, the effect data of the above-mentioned start effect is set, and in the case of the final game, the effect data of the result image that succeeds in transformation is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6308 (when the pseudo flag is set), the process proceeds to step S6310 to set the effect data of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. Also in this step, the value of the continuous production counter is referred to to grasp the number of games in which the current game corresponds to the continuous production, and the production data corresponding to the grasped game is set. At that time, if the final game of the continuous production is grasped, the production data of the result video that fails to transform is set.

After the execution of step S6309 or step S6310, it is determined in step S6311 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the continuous effect flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared in step S6312.

In step S6313, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the pseudo flag is set, the pseudo flag is cleared in step S6314, and the pseudo precursor end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S6315. The pseudo precursor end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor ends. After the execution of step S6315, if a negative determination is made in step S6311 (when the continuous effect counter is not 0) or when a negative determination is made in step S6313 (when the pseudo flag is not set), the continuous effect setting process ends. ..

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107 (a). The process shown in FIG. 107 (a) is provided as a process to be executed when a negative determination is made in step S2421 (FIG. 50) in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 93) according to the fifth embodiment. It is a thing.

If a negative determination is made in step S2421 (when neither the first BB end command nor the second BB end command is received), the process proceeds to step S6401, and whether the pseudo precursor end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. Judge whether or not. As described above, the pseudo-precursor end flag is set in the final game in the continuous production for the pseudo-precursor, so the processing of this step is the final game in which the current game is the continuous production for the pseudo-precursor. It is to judge whether or not there is.

If the pseudo precursor end flag is set, after clearing the pseudo precursor end flag in step S6402, it is determined in step S6403 whether or not the current directable point is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 5). do. This process determines whether or not the number of points that can execute the grant suggestion effect is secured as the current effectable points.

If the production possible points are equal to or more than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S6404, and the type lottery table corresponding to the end of the continuous production for the pseudo precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. This type table is a table for performing both an effect execution lottery for whether or not to execute the grant suggestion effect and a type lottery for selecting the type (aspect) when the grant suggestion effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, at the end of the continuous effect, which is the end of the failure, the sub-control device 81 is configured to independently execute the point-giving suggestion effect, although it is not an opportunity for the main control device 101 to give points. Has been done.

In the type lottery table for the end of continuous production, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the probability that the grant suggestion effect is executed is set to 10% (the probability of non-execution is 90%), and the above-mentioned first Similar to the type lottery table A according to the fifth embodiment, the type lottery tables B to F are set lower than the other type lottery tables B to F. Further, when the execution of the grant suggestion effect is selected, the type is sorted within the range of the effectable points at that time, as in the type lottery table A according to the fifth embodiment. For example, if the production possible points at that time are 10 points, the bubble large production and the bubble oversized production in which the production points exceed 10 points are excluded from the selection, and the bubble small production in which the production points are 5 points. And, the type of the given suggestion effect is selected from the effect in the bubble where the effected point is 10 points.

After acquiring the type lottery table in step S6404, the type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed in step S6405. In this step, the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183.

In step S6406, the effect data setting process is performed so that the type of grant suggestion effect selected by the lottery in step S6405 is executed. In step S6407, the assignment suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The grant suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the grant suggestion effect should be executed. When the grant suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48), the grant suggestion effect of the lottery mode is executed based on the set effect data. As such, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned grant suggestion effect is controlled to be executed at the end of the final game (when all reels 32L to 32R are stopped) in the continuous effect for pseudo precursors. At that time, the grant suggestion flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared.

After the execution of step S6407, in step S6408, the produced points corresponding to the lottery result of the effect type are grasped, and this is subtracted from the current produced points. In step S6409, the subtraction result is stored in the directable point storage area 183e as a new directable point, and the directable point is updated. After the execution of step S6409, if a negative determination is made in step S6401 (when the pseudo precursor end flag is not set) or a negative determination is made in step S6403 (when the production possible points are less than a predetermined value), the step Proceed to S2423, and execute other all-stop effect setting processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the production possible points are used to provide an opportunity to execute the grant suggestion effect at the end of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, but in addition to that, the grant suggestion effect is also provided at the time of transition to the first AT mode. It is configured to provide an opportunity to execute. The configuration for that purpose will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108 (a). The process of FIG. 108 (a) is provided as a process to be executed when a negative determination is made in step S2403 (FIG. 50) in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 93) according to the fifth embodiment. Is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 (when the CZ end command has not been received), whether or not the first AT start command (step S1407 in FIG. 39) has been received as the current stop all command in step S6501. To judge. When the first AT start command is received, the processes of steps S6502 to S6508 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S6403 to S6409 of FIG. 107 (a), and are for executing the grant suggestion effect.

However, in step S6503 for acquiring the type lottery table, the type lottery table corresponding to the start of the first AT mode is acquired instead of the type lottery table for ending the continuous production. In the lottery table for the start of the first AT, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the probability that the grant suggestion effect is executed is set to 50% (the probability that the effect is not executed is 50%), and the continuous effect ends. It is set higher than the type lottery table at the time and the type lottery tables A to F associated with the granting opportunity. The reason why the high execution probability is set in this way is that the privilege given when the privilege grant value is reached shifts (promotes) to the second AT mode after the end of the first AT mode. By proactively giving a suggestion effect at the start of the mode, the player can play the 1st AT mode with a high expectation for the transition to the 2nd AT mode, and can enjoy the game in the 1st AT mode more. This is because it is considered.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned type production table including the one for the end of continuous production is only an example, and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the execution probability for the end of the continuous production and the execution probability for the start of the first AT may be the same, or the production execution probability for the start of the first AT may be lower than that for the end of the continuous production. Can be set arbitrarily.

If a negative determination is made in step S6501 (when the first AT start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S6502, and is the second AT start command (step S1608 in FIG. 41) received as the command at the time of all stoppages this time? Judge whether or not. If the second AT start command is received, the process proceeds to the process of step S2408 (setting process of the start effect of the second AT mode), and if the second AT start command is not received, the process of step S2409 (end of the first AT). Proceed to the process of determining whether or not a command has been received).

<About the flow of grant suggestion production>
The flow of the grant suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same flow as that of the fifth embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

As in the case of FIG. 101, it is assumed that points are not given on the main control device 101 side and 20 points of subpoints are given on the sub control device 81 side at the grant trigger a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the production possible points of the sub control device 81 are 20 points obtained by adding them. Then, in the above-mentioned grant trigger a1, it is assumed that the small bubble effect is selected as the grant suggestion effect (event a2). In this case, 5 points that have been produced corresponding to the small bubble effect are subtracted from 20 points that can be produced, and the points that can be produced are updated to 15 points.

After that, if the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor (FIG. 103) is executed before the grant trigger b1, the pseudo precursor end flag is set in the final game. As a result, although it is not an opportunity to give the given points in the main control device 101, the type lottery of the given suggestion effect is executed at the end of the final game. This type lottery serves both whether or not to execute the grant suggestion effect and the selection of the mode in which it is executed. Further, in this type lottery, the type of the grant suggestion effect is selected within the range of the effectable points at that time, and specifically, the produced points are the produceable points (15 points) or less. Only the small bubble effect and the medium bubble effect are selected (FIG. 95 (b)), and the other large bubble effect and the extra large bubble effect are excluded from the selection.

As a result of the lottery, if the foam effect is selected, the effect is executed at the end of the final game on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, the produced points (10 points) corresponding to the bubble effect are subtracted from the produced points (15 points) at that time, and the produced points are updated to 5 points.

After that, if 10 points are given on the main control device 101 side in the grant trigger b1, the granted points are added to the directable points, and the directable points are updated to 15 points. Therefore, in the grant trigger b1, the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is executed with the effectable points as 15 points.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the configuration is such that the grant suggestion effect is executed when it is not the point grant trigger, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the grant suggestion effect without increasing the point grant trigger. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game by increasing the frequency of the grant suggestion effect while suppressing the decrease in the degree of the privilege due to the increase in the grant opportunity.

Further, in that case, the execution control of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the effectable points. As a result, it is possible not only to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect unnecessarily, but also to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect while corresponding to the actual total points.

The configuration is such that the grant suggestion effect when it is not the grant trigger is performed in accordance with the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. In the continuous production, the presence or absence of winning in the CZ mode or the like is notified. Therefore, when the continuous production is performed, it is assumed that the player is paying close attention to the production. In this configuration, since the grant suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to easily draw attention to the grant suggestion effect, and it is possible to effectively increase the interest in the points.

In addition, in this configuration, the grant suggestion effect is performed in correspondence with the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, not the continuous effect for the precursor. For example, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the grant suggestion effect will increase even with the configuration in which the grant suggestion effect is performed in correspondence with the continuous effect for the precursor, but in this configuration, the relationship with the CZ mode or the like that shifts after the continuous effect. If the mode and execution timing of the grant suggestion effect are not adjusted properly, the effect of the grant suggestion effect cannot be properly exerted, or the beginning of the CZ mode etc. becomes ambiguous, causing confusion for the player. There are concerns. In this respect, according to this configuration, since such troublesome adjustment is not required, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the given suggestion effect while suppressing the increase in the time and effort of the effect design.

Since the sub-control device 81 controls the execution of the continuous effect of the pseudo-precursor, the grant suggestion effect is executed at the end of the effect. The contribution of the device 101 can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggestion effect while suppressing the increase in the processing load of the main control device 101. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the main control device 101 and simplify the control program. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of the giving suggestion effect while suppressing the increase in the program capacity, and it is possible to make the configuration suitable for a gaming machine in which the storage capacity that can be mounted on the main control device 101 is limited.

<7th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that a high-probability mode is provided in which the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is high. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of all stops according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the all-stop effect setting process of FIG. 93 (c) according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 109, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 93 (c), and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2415 (when the second AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S4709 whether or not a point trigger command has been received as the current all-stop command. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when 200 games, 400 games, and 600 games are digested, the main control device 101 is configured to establish a point awarding opportunity, and this step is performed. , It is for determining whether or not those granting opportunities have been established.

When the point trigger command is received, the process proceeds to step S4710, and the corresponding trigger flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. In step S4710, based on the received point trigger command, it is determined whether the established grant trigger is 200 game hamari, 400 game hamari, or 600 game hamari. Then, the trigger flag B is set when the game is 200 games, the trigger flag C is set when the game is 400 games, and the trigger flag D is set when the game is 600 games (FIG. 92 (b)). ..

In step S7101, it is determined whether or not the current directable point stored in the directable point storage area 183e of the RAM 183 is a predetermined value (for example, 5) or more. If the production possible points are equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S7102, and a high-probability mode transition lottery is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high-probability mode. The high-probability mode is a mode in which it is easier to win the execution lottery of the grant suggestion effect as compared with the normal mode (low-probability mode), and the execution frequency of the effect is increased. In this step, the transition lottery table for the high probability mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery is based on the acquired lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. Perform processing.

In the transition lottery table for the high-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the transition rate to the high-probability mode is set according to the number of hamari games. Specifically, in the case of 200 game hamari and 400 game hamari, the transition rate to the high probability mode is set to 5%, and in the case of 600 game hamari, the above transition rate is set to 10%. The above transition rate is only an example, and a specific numerical value thereof can be set arbitrarily.

In step S7103, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode transition lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S7102. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S7104, and the effect data for the high probability mode is set. In the high-probability mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs a dedicated effect for notifying that points are likely to be given, and the above-mentioned effect data is for executing the dedicated effect. .. As a notification that points are likely to be given, for example, a character display such as "high probability of points" can be considered.

In step S7105, the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The high-probability flag is for the CPU 181 to know that the high-probability mode is in progress. Therefore, by setting the high-probability flag, the execution lottery mode of the grant suggestion effect shifts to the high-probability mode.

Further, when the high probability flag is set, in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48), the effect for the high probability mode is executed based on the set effect data. The corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled. In the present embodiment, the effect for the high probability mode is controlled so as to be executed from the start of the next game.

After the execution of step S7105, if a negative determination is made in step S7101 (when the production possible points are less than a predetermined value) or a negative determination is made in step S7103 (when the high probability mode transition lottery is not won), step S7106 In, the process for the effect of giving suggestion effect is executed, and then the other process for setting the effect at the time of stopping in step S2423 is executed.

<Processing for suggestion of grant>
The process for giving suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111. This process is performed in step S4608 (FIG. 90), step S4703 (FIG. 93 (a)), step S4708 (FIG. 93 (b)), and step S7106 (FIG. 109). In addition, in FIG. 111, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for suggesting the addition of FIG. 94, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After the execution of step S4803 (update of the effectable points) or when a negative determination is made in step S4801 (when points are not given), a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in step S7201. Judge whether or not. When the high probability flag is not set, that is, when the high probability mode is not set, the processes after step S4804 (FIG. 94) are executed. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7202, and it is determined whether or not the current production possible point is a predetermined value (for example, 5) or more.

When the current production possible points are equal to or more than a predetermined value, the type lottery table for the high probability mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 in step S7203. In the type lottery table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the execution of the grant suggestion effect is set to 100% (the probability of non-execution is 0%), which is higher than that in the normal mode. It's getting higher. Further, as for the distribution probability of each type, the probability of small bubble effect to large bubble effect is set to 30%, and the probability of extra large bubble effect is set to 10%.

In step S7204, the type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the type lottery table acquired in step S7203 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. At that time, which of the small bubble effect, the medium bubble effect, the large bubble effect, and the extra large bubble effect is selected is within the range of the effectable points as in the case of the effect type lottery in step S4806 (FIG. 94). Do it with. For example, if the production possible points at that time are 10 points, the bubble large production and the bubble oversized production in which the production points exceed 10 points are excluded from the selection, and the bubble small production in which the production points are 5 points. And, the type of the given suggestion effect is selected from the effect in the bubble where the effected point is 10 points. In this case, the 30% assigned to the large bubble effect and the 10% assigned to the oversized bubble effect are replaced with the small bubble effect with the smallest produced points, and the small bubble effect is 70% in the bubble. A type lottery will be held based on the distribution of 30% of the production.

The type lottery table for the high probability mode described above is only an example, and is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be 100%, and may be less than 100% as long as it is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, the distribution probabilities for each type can be arbitrarily set.

After the execution of step S7204, the processes of steps S7205 to S7208 are executed. Since these processes are the same as those in steps S4807 to S4811 in the process for suggesting the addition of FIG. 94, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the execution of step S7208, in step S7209, it is determined whether or not the point awarding opportunity this time is the first opportunity after shifting to the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the trigger for transition to the high-probability mode and the trigger for granting points are established in the same game. Therefore, the process of this step is that the current game is a transition game to the high-probability mode. It can be said that it determines whether or not it is.

If it is not the first opportunity, a continuous lottery in the high probability mode is performed in step S7210. In the continuous lottery, the lottery process is performed using the lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b after setting the continuation probability of the high probability mode to a predetermined probability (for example, 70%). In step S7211, it is determined whether or not the continuous lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S7210. If the continuous lottery is won, the high-probability mode is considered to be continued, and the present grant suggestion effect processing is terminated as it is. Further, even when the first trigger is in step S7209, the processes of steps S7210 and S7211 are skipped and the present grant suggestion effect processing is terminated in order to continue the high probability mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S7211 (when the continuous lottery has not been won), the high probability flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared in step S7212. As a result, the high probability mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, even if the production possible points are not equal to or more than the predetermined value in step S7202, the process proceeds to step S7212 to clear the high probability flag. That is, when the production possible points are insufficient, the high probability mode is terminated. After the execution of step S7212, the present grant suggestion effect processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the mode shifts to the high probability mode in which the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is increased. In the high-probability mode, since the frequency of the grant suggestion effect is increased, the player's expectation that the total points reach the privilege grant value is increased, and the motivation to continue the game can be suitably increased.

In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the present embodiment is applied to the fifth embodiment has been described, but the present embodiment can also be applied to the sixth embodiment. In such a configuration, when the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect when it is not the grant trigger is also higher than that in the normal mode.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the total points (numerical information referred to when executing the total suggestion effect) are derived from the total value of the assigned points on the main control device 101 side and the sub points on the sub control device 81 side. However, in the present embodiment, the total points are derived based on the produced points on the sub-control device 81 side. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Starting effect setting process>
The start-time effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. This process is executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the start of FIG. 90. In FIG. 112, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 90, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the start-time effect setting process of FIG. 90 according to the fifth embodiment, a process of storing the addition result of the given points and the sub-points as a total point is provided in step S4606. In the start-time effect setting process of FIG. 112 according to FIG. 112, such a process is not provided. That is, in the present embodiment, after the addition result of the given points and the subpoints is stored as the produceable points in step S4605, the total point storage process is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S4607 to store various flags of the RAM 183. The trigger flag A is set in the area 183a. The trigger flag A indicates that the point granting trigger this time is a granting trigger based on the start of the advantageous section.

After the execution of step S4607, in step S8101, the process for giving suggestion effect for executing the giving suggestion effect is executed. In the following step S8102, the total suggestion effect processing for executing the total suggestion effect is executed, and then in step S2315, other start-time effect setting processes are executed.

<Processing for suggestion of grant>
The process for giving suggestion effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 113. This process is performed in step S8101 (FIG. 112), step S4703 (FIG. 93 (a)), step S4708 (FIG. 93 (b)), and step S4711 (FIG. 93 (c)). In addition, in FIG. 113, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the process for suggesting the addition of FIG. 94, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After the execution of step S4803 (update of the effectable points) or when a negative determination is made in step S4801 (when points are not given), the current produceable points are a predetermined value (for example, 5) or more in step S4804. Judge whether or not. This process determines whether or not the current effectable points are sufficient to execute the grant suggestion effect. If the production possible points are equal to or more than a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S8201 to acquire the type lottery table corresponding to the current production possible points from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, a plurality of tables according to the number of points that can be produced are set as the type lottery table of the grant suggestion effect, and in step S8201, the present among those tables is currently set. Acquire the one corresponding to the total points of. In the lottery table for each type shown in FIG. 114, 6 points to 10 points, 11 points to 20 points, and 21 points or more are set as the classification of the points that can be produced. Is set to be high. The classification of the types when the execution of the grant suggestion effect is selected is within the range of the effectable points at that time, as in the case of step S4806 in the fifth embodiment. For example, if the number of points that can be produced at that time is 10 points, the type of effect suggestive effect is given from the small bubble effect with 5 points already produced and the medium bubble effect with 10 points already produced. Is selected.

It should be noted that the various numerical values in the type lottery table of FIG. 114 are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in the drawings. Further, the division of the points that can be produced may be divided into two divisions or four or more divisions.

After acquiring the type lottery table in step S8201, in step S8202, a type lottery for drawing the type of the point suggestion effect is executed. In this step, the effect type lottery of the grant suggestion effect is performed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. After that, in step S4807, the effect data setting process is performed so that the type of grant suggestion effect selected by the lottery in step S8202 is executed. In step S4808, the assignment suggestion flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and in step S4809, the production points corresponding to the lottery results of the production types are grasped. For example, when the selected type is a small bubble effect, 5 points are grasped as the produced points.

In step S4810, the produced points grasped in step S4809 are subtracted from the current produced points. In step S4811, the subtraction result is stored in the directable point storage area 183e as a new directable point, and the directable point is updated.

After the execution of step S4811, in step S8203, the produced points grasped in step S4809 are added to the current total points. For example, in a situation where the total points at that time are 10 points, if 5 points are grasped as the produced points this time, 15 points are derived as the addition result. If the total points at that time are 0 points, the current directed points grasped in step S4809 will be the addition result.

In step S8204, the addition result derived in step S8203 is stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183 as a new total point. That is, in the present embodiment, the total points are derived from the cumulative addition value of the produced points. After the execution of step S8204 or when a negative determination is made in step S4804 (when the effectable points are less than a predetermined value), the present grant suggestion effect processing is terminated.

<Processing for total suggestion production>
The process for total suggestion effect in step S8102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115.

First, in step S8301, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The suggestion effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the grant suggestion effect should be executed. If the suggestion effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8302, and an effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the total suggestion effect. In this step, the execution lottery table for the total suggestion effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery is performed based on the lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. ..

In step S8303, it is determined whether or not the execution of the total suggestion effect is won in the effect execution lottery process of step S8302. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S8304 to determine whether or not the total value (total points) of the points granted on the main control device 101 side is equal to or greater than the privilege grant value (20 points). If the total points are not equal to or greater than the specific grant value, the current total points stored in the total point storage area 183f of the RAM 183 are grasped in step S8305. In step S8306, the type lottery table corresponding to the grasped total points is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. As the type lottery table acquired in this case, the same type lottery table (FIG. 99) acquired in step S4908 of the total suggestion effect processing (FIG. 97) according to the fifth embodiment may be used. can. That is, the one corresponding to the current total points is acquired from a plurality of tables set according to the number of points of the total points.

Here, in the present embodiment, the cumulative addition value of the produced points is used as the total points. That is, since the type of the total suggestion effect is selected based on the total of the directed points, the result of the given suggestion effect executed before the total suggestion effect can be reflected in the type of the total suggestion effect. Since the total points are initialized when the total points are initialized, the cumulative addition value is the cumulative addition value of the effected points corresponding to the grant suggestion effect executed after the initialization.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S8304, in step S8307, the type lottery table for arrival corresponding to the case where the total points are equal to or more than the specific grant value is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. In this type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 116, the selection probability of each effect mode (emission color of the upper lamp 63) in the total suggestion effect is set in association with the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect.

For example, when the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect is 0, the probability of becoming blue is set to 0%, the probability of becoming yellow is set to 0%, the probability of becoming green is set to 20%, and the probability of becoming red is set to 80%. ing. When the number of times the grant suggestion effect is executed is one or more, the probability of becoming blue is set to 10%, the probability of becoming yellow is set to 30%, the probability of becoming green is set to 30%, and the probability of becoming red is set to 30%. Has been done. That is, when the grant suggestion effect is not executed, it is easier to select a higher effect mode than when the grant suggestion effect is executed. If the grant suggestion effect is not executed, it is assumed that the player is likely to get the impression that the points are not accumulated and does not expect much to reach the privilege grant value. It is possible to appropriately arouse the surprise and joy of the player by executing the high-ranking total suggestion effect indicating that the amount of accumulated points is large.

The above-mentioned type lottery table is only an example, and is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the probability of turning red when the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect is 0 may be 100%. For example, when the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect is less than 2, the probability of turning red may be 100%. However, the selection probability may be different based on the number of times other than 0 times, such as making it easier to select a higher-level production mode. Further, as long as the higher-level effect mode is easily selected, the total suggestion effect may be drawn with a uniform selection probability regardless of the number of times the grant suggestion effect is executed.

After the execution of step S8306 or step S8307, in step S8308, the type lottery of the total suggestion effect is performed based on the acquired type lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. In step S8309, the effect data setting process is performed so that the total suggestion effect of the type selected by the lottery in step S8308 is executed.

In step S8310, the total suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The total suggestion flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the total suggestion effect should be executed. When the total suggestion flag is set in this way, in the other processes of step S2211 in the effect setting process (FIG. 48), the total suggestion effect of the lottery mode is executed based on the set effect data. As such, the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) is controlled. At that time, the total suggestion flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared.

After the execution of step S8310, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S8301 (when the suggestion effect flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step S8303 (when a non-winning effect is obtained in the effect execution lottery), this total suggestion effect is produced. End the processing.

<About the flow of total suggestion production>
The flow of total suggestion production will be explained. Since the flow of the total suggestion effect differs depending on whether the total value (total points) of the points given by the main control device 101 is less than the privilege grant value or more than the privilege grant value, the flow of the total suggestion effect is different. The flow in the former case will be described with reference to FIG. 117.

It is assumed that points are not given on the main control device 101 side and 20 points of subpoints are given on the sub control device 81 side at the grant trigger a1 at the start of the advantageous section. In this case, the production possible points of the sub control device 81 are 20 points obtained by adding them. Then, assuming that the bubble small effect with 5 points as the effected points is selected as the application suggestion effect at the grant trigger a1 (event a2), the total points are 5 points.

Therefore, if the lottery for executing the total suggestion effect is won until the next granting opportunity b1, the type lottery for the total suggestion effect is performed with the total points set to 5 points. Specifically, a table for less than 24 points (FIG. 99) is acquired as a type lottery table for the total suggestion effect, and either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the type of total suggestion effect.

Assuming that the bubble production with 10 points of the effected points is selected in the next grant trigger b1 (event b2), the total points at that time are 5 points and the effected points of the bubble effect are 10 points. And are added, and the total points are 15 points. Further, assuming that the bubble production with 10 points of the effected points is selected at the next grant trigger c1 (event c2), the total points at that time, 15 points, and the effected points of the bubble effect are used. A certain 10 points are added, and the total points become 25 points.

In this case, if the lottery for executing the total suggestion effect is won until the next granting opportunity, the type lottery for the total suggestion effect is performed with the total points set to 25 points. Specifically, a table for 25 points to 39 points (FIG. 99) is acquired as a type lottery table for the total suggestion effect, and either blue light emission or yellow light emission is selected as the type of total suggestion effect. At this time, yellow light emission is more likely to be selected as compared with the case where the total points are less than 24 points, and it is easier to suggest that the total points are increasing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total points are derived based on the corresponding directed points of the selected grant suggestion effect, and the type lottery of the total suggestion effect is performed based on the total points. Type of total suggestion effect In the lottery, the total points and the effect mode of the total suggestion effect are not made to correspond one-to-one, but the two are made to correspond in a one-to-many relationship, and the effect mode is selected from a plurality of options. However, the configuration of the present embodiment makes it possible to perform a total suggestion effect corresponding to the grant suggestion effect actually shown to the player. Therefore, the impression received by the player from each grant suggestion effect (in other words, the total points predicted by the player from each grant suggestion effect) can be brought close to the effect mode of the total suggestion effect, and both are matched. It becomes possible to make it easier to make.

Next, the flow of the total suggestion effect when the total value (total points) of the points given by the main control device 101 becomes equal to or more than the privilege giving value will be described. Here, it is assumed that the points are not given on the main control device 101 side in the grant trigger a1, and the grant suggestion effect is not executed.

After the granting opportunity b1 gives 20 points to the main control device 101 and the total points exceed the privilege granting value, the lottery for executing the total suggestion effect is won until the next granting opportunity c1. In this case, the type lottery table for arrival (FIG. 116) is acquired as the type lottery table for the total suggestion effect. This type lottery table selects the production mode of the total suggestion effect regardless of the total points at that time, and is higher than the type lottery table when the total points are less than the privilege grant value. The mode is easy to select. That is, when the total points exceed the privilege grant value, the type is selected according to the total points regardless of the grant suggestion effect shown so far.

In the configuration in which the execution control of the total suggestion effect is performed based on the total points derived by the cumulative addition of the produced points (the configuration described with reference to FIG. 117), the given suggestion effect and the total suggestion effect are produced each time. It becomes easier to link with the mode, but on the other hand, in the situation where the total points are small because the grant suggestion effect is not executed or the number of times is small, even if the total points reach the privilege grant value, the total There is an inconvenience that it is not possible to perform a total suggestion effect corresponding to a large amount of accumulated points. In this case, even though the privilege grant value has been reached, there is a concern that the player will not be notified of it, and as a result, the expectation will not be evoked well and the player will stop playing.

In this regard, by adding this configuration, even if the total point accumulation amount is small due to the fact that the grant suggestion effect is not executed or the number of times is small, the total point accumulation amount becomes large. It becomes possible to perform a total suggestion effect corresponding to the presence. That is, the player's expectation that the total points will increase when the total points exceed a certain level, while making it easier to link the effect of each given suggestion effect and the effect mode of the total suggestion effect. It becomes possible to appropriately arouse and encourage the continuation of the game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since a plurality of types of grant suggestion effects corresponding to the granting of points are provided, it is possible to suggest the size of the grant points depending on which type the grant suggestion effect is performed. In addition to the given suggestion effect, a total suggestion effect is performed as a notification corresponding to the total points, and the total points can be suggested depending on the type of the total suggestion effect. By executing both of these notifications, the player can recognize that the total points will increase toward the privilege grant value, and the motivation to further increase the points will be aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Under such a configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the grant suggestion effect is performed through an execution lottery, the grant suggestion effect may not be performed even if the points are actually granted on the main control device 101 side. Although the total points should not have been accumulated so much from the suggestion effect, the total points predicted by the player from the given suggestion effect and the total points predicted from the total suggestion effect, such as suggesting a large total point in the total suggestion effect. There may be a situation in which there is a large deviation from. In this case, the player may be confused because he / she does not know which suggestive effect to trust. In this regard, in this configuration, in order to determine the type of the grant suggestion effect executed earlier, that is, the type of the total suggestion effect based on the results of the grant suggestion effect, the total points suggested by the total suggestion effect are given. It is possible to match or approach the predicted total value from the suggestion effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player.

An execution lottery was conducted based on the points that can be produced at that time, and the larger the points that can be produced, the easier it is to execute the suggestion effect. When the points that can be produced are large, even though the actual total points are large, the execution frequency of the grant suggestion effect is low, or the type of the grant suggestion effect is biased toward the type corresponding to the small points. As a result of this, it is assumed that the surplus of points that can be produced has increased. In such a case, it is preferable to actively encourage the continuation of the game in order to prevent the player from quitting the game and losing the game. In this regard, in this configuration, the larger the points that can be produced, the easier it is for the grant suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, as the frequency of the grant suggestion effect increases, it becomes easier for the player to be notified that the total points have increased. By increasing the performance of the given suggestion effect, it becomes easier to notify a large value as the total suggestion effect. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect in a situation where the actual total points are expected to be larger than the predicted total value from the grant suggestion effect, or to increase the total points suggested by the total suggestion effect. Become.

When the total points exceed the predetermined value (privilege grant value), the type of total suggestion effect is determined regardless of the actual result of the grant suggestion effect. For example, when a large number of points are given at one time, the total points increase sharply. In this case, there is a concern that the actual result of the given suggestion effect tends to be insufficient for the increased total points, and only a small value can be notified in the total suggestion effect. In this regard, in this configuration, depending on the situation, the type of total suggestion effect can be determined regardless of the actual result of the given suggestion effect, so even if the actual result of the given suggestion effect is poor, a large value can be notified in the total suggestion effect. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the case where the total points suddenly increase.

<9th embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the internal state notification is performed when the setting change operation is completed, but in the present embodiment, the notification is triggered when the front door 12 is closed after the setting change operation is completed. Is configured to be done. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119.

<Internal status notification processing>
The internal state notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. This process is a process for performing an internal state notification, which is a notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state. This process is executed in step S5606 of the main process (FIG. 63) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the internal state notification process of FIG. 65.

First, in step S6801, it is determined whether or not the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The internal state notification flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the internal state notification is being executed.

If the internal state notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S6802, and it is determined whether or not the setting change end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The setting change end flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the setting change has been completed (step S5708 in FIG. 64). If the setting change end flag is not set, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the setting change end flag is set, that is, when the setting change operation by the hall employee is completed, the process proceeds to step S6803, and it is determined whether or not the door closing command has been received. The door closing command is transmitted from the main control device 101 when the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state (when the door opening sensor 27 is switched from the on state to the off state) (FIG. FIG. In step S5406) of 61, this is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that the front door 12 has been closed.

If the door closing command has not been received, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the door closing command is received, that is, when the front door 12 is closed, the setting change end flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared in step S6804.

As described above, when the setting change end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, the determination process of whether or not the front door 12 is closed is executed, and it is determined that the front door 12 is closed by the determination process. If this happens, the setting change end flag is deleted. Therefore, when the setting change operation is completed (when the setting change end flag is set), the presence / absence determination of the closing is the execution cycle of the main process until the front door 12 is closed after the operation is completed. Will be repeated at. It is assumed that the front door 12 is opened and closed again after the front door 12 is closed after the setting change is completed, but the determination process in step S6803 is based on the premise that the setting change end flag is set. Therefore, such a second and subsequent closures are not subject to the above determination process. That is, the determination process in step S6803 determines whether the first closing of the front door 12 has been performed after the setting change is completed.

When the start lever 41 is operated to end the setting change (the set value after the change is fixed), the front door 12 is closed after the start lever 41 is operated (the front door is closed after the setting change is completed). When the front door 12 is closed) and when the start lever 41 is operated after the front door 12 is closed (when the setting change is completed with the front door 12 closed). In the former case, step S6803 is affirmed at the timing when the front door 12 is closed, and in the latter case, step S6803 is affirmed at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated (setting change end timing).

After the execution of step S6804, the internal state grasping process is executed in step S6805. Specifically, based on the setting change end command received from the main control device 101, the state regarding the validity of the first BB combination or the second BB combination is grasped. As described above, the setting change end command includes internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination is in the winning state, or in a non-internal state that is neither of them.

In step S6806, it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S6805 is the winning state of the second BB combination (two sheets internal state). If it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, the internal state display is set in step S6807. The internal state display visually notifies that the second BB combination is not in the winning state. The internal state display is executed by a notification unit different from the auxiliary display unit 65 on which the power-on display is performed, and specifically, the lower display unit 69 is made to emit light. The light emitting mode of the lower display unit 69 is not particularly limited, but for example, the internal state display is performed by blinking the lower display unit 69 in a predetermined blinking pattern. In step S6807, the lower display unit 69 is driven and controlled so as to repeat the light emitting state and the extinguishing state in the predetermined blinking pattern.

Further, in step S6807, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the internal state display. This notification period determines the upper limit execution time of the internal state display, and the internal state display ends when the elapsed period from the start of the display reaches the above notification period.

In step S6808, the setting process of the internal state notification sound is performed. The internal state notification sound audibly notifies that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, and the notification by the notification sound is a notification sound of a voice different from the power-on notification sound or the setting change notification sound of the speaker 64a. It is carried out so as to be released from ~ 64n. In step S6808, the sound data of the internal state notification sound is set in the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183, and the output instruction to each sound IC 184a to 184n is set. The internal state notification sound is executed over the notification period set in step S6807.

In step S6809, the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the internal state notification process ends.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S6801 (when the internal state flag is set), that is, if the internal state notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S6810 and the internal state notification (internal state display and internal state notification sound). It is determined whether or not the elapsed period from the start of the above notification period has reached the above notification period. If the notification period has not elapsed, in step S6811, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command. The second BB winning command is transmitted when the second BB winning combination is won as a result of the lottery process (FIG. 18) performed by the main control device 101, and the winning of the second BB winning combination is sent to the sub control device 81. This is a command to notify. Therefore, the case where the second BB winning command is received while the internal state notification is being executed means that the state in which the second BB winning combination is not won has shifted to the winning state of the second BB winning combination.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S6810 (when the notification period has elapsed) or the affirmative judgment is made in step S6811 (when the second BB winning command is received), the internal state notification is terminated in step S6812. The lower display unit 69 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to do so. In step S6813, the internal state notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared. After the execution of step S6813 or when a negative determination is made in step S6811 (when the second BB winning command has not been received), the internal state notification process ends.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification will be described with reference to FIG. 119. Here, neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101, that is, neither the first BB combination nor the second BB combination is won. A case where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a situation where there is no internal state will be described as an example.

The power supply arranged inside the housing 11 in a situation where the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on and the setting key is turned on (the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned on). When the switch 71 is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the power-on notification process of step S5601 (FIG. 63) and the setting change process of step S5605 are executed.

As described above, in the setting change notification, the setting change display using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is not performed, so that the power-on display is performed by executing each of the above processes. Specifically, for example, a message display 301 such as "the power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 71 (a)). Further, the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in a light emitting mode for when the power is turned on.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on, the power-on notification sound is not output, so that the setting change notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. As the setting change notification sound, for example, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is output. The setting change notification sound is output during the period from the timing t1 when the power is turned on to the timing t2 when the setting change operation ends, during which the above sound is repeatedly output at predetermined intervals (FIG. 119 (e)). ..

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned off, the power-on notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. As the power-on notification sound, for example, a voice such as "power is turned on" is output.

When the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the output of the setting change notification sound ends. Then, based on the front door 12 being in the open state, the door opening display indicating the opening of the front door 12 is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the door opening notification sound is output from the speakers 64a to 64n (the door opening notification sound is output from the speakers 64a to 64n). 119 (f), (g)). In the door open display, for example, a message display 302 such as "door is open" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 71 (b)), and in the output of the door open notification sound, for example, "door is open". Sounds such as "is" are emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

Further, when the setting change operation is completed, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. This setting change end command includes the setting change end information indicating that the setting change has been completed, as well as the internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination has been won.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether or not the internal state is grasped (step S6805) and the second BB combination is won (two internal states). (Step S6806) is performed. These processes are performed based on the internal state information included in the setting change end command received from the main control device 101.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a non-internal state, as a result of each of the above processes, it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state (two internal states), and the internal state notification is sent. This is done (FIGS. 119 (h), (i)). As the internal state notification, the internal state display using the lower display unit 69 and the output of the internal state notification sound using the speakers 64a to 64n are performed. The notification by the internal state display is performed by the lower display unit 69 emitting light in a predetermined light emission pattern (for example, blinking) (FIG. 71 (c)), and the notification by the internal state notification sound is performed by the power-on notification sound or setting change. This is performed by emitting a sound different from the notification sound from the speakers 64a to 64n. By these notifications, the hall employee of the game hall is notified that the second BB role is not in the winning state (two pieces internal state).

It is assumed that the setting change is terminated after the front door 12 is closed, but in that case, the internal state notification is not performed at the closing timing of the front door 12, and the internal status notification is performed when the setting change is completed. Is done.

After being notified that the two medals are not in the internal state, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role. The second BB winning command is transmitted from the control device 101 to the sub control device 81 (timing t4). As a result, it is grasped that the sub-control device 81 has won the second BB combination, and the internal state notification (internal state display and output of the internal state notification sound) ends (FIGS. 119 (h), (i)). ). Even if the notification period of the internal state notification elapses before the second BB winning command is transmitted (before the winning state of the second BB combination is reached), the internal state notification ends on the condition that the notification period elapses.

In the present embodiment, since the output period of the door opening notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound do not overlap, the priority of each of these notifications can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the first embodiment, the door opening notification sound may have a higher priority than the internal state notification sound, or as in the modification 1, the priority of both notification sounds may be set. They may be equal to each other, or the internal state notification sound may have a higher priority than the door opening notification sound as in the second modification. In either case, the flow of internal state notification is the same as the above flow described with reference to FIG. 119.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the setting change is completed and the front door 12 is closed, it is determined whether or not the two doors are in the internal state, and when it is determined that the two doors are not in the internal state, the internal state is notified.

Since it is basically limited to hall employees to finish the setting change and close the front door 12, with this configuration, it is possible to notify the internal state in the presence of hall employees. As a result, it is possible to preferably notify the hall employee that the two-sheet internal state is not present, and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a situation where the two-sheet internal state is not present.

Further, the execution timing of the internal state notification can be optimized by performing the internal state notification when the front door 12 is closed. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), it is necessary to execute the combination lottery to win the second BB combination, so the front door 12 opens. Even if the internal status notification is executed in this situation, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. In this regard, in this configuration in which the internal state notification is executed after waiting for the front door 12 to be closed, the internal state notification is performed after the non-winning state of the second BB combination can be changed to the winning state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state at a suitable timing.

Further, since the door opening notification is executed in the situation where the front door 12 is open, it is assumed that the door opening notification and the internal state notification overlap. In that case, if it is attempted to divide the period of each of these notifications, it is necessary to make adjustments when designing the notifications. In this respect, in this configuration, since the internal state notification is executed after the front door 12 is closed, it is possible to avoid overlapping the notification periods of both notifications. Therefore, it is not necessary to adjust the period at the time of design, and it is possible to reduce the work load of the notification design.

The internal state is notified for the first closing of the front door 12 after the setting change is completed.

In this case, the internal state notification can be executed in response to the operation of closing the front door 12 after the setting change is completed. Since such an operation is performed only during the period before the opening of the hall, it is possible to prevent the internal state notification from being performed in front of the player. As a result, when the player sees the internal state notification, the notification becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, or the player is inadvertently notified that the two cards are not in the internal state. Can be suppressed.

The internal status display is executed by the display unit (lower display unit 69) provided on the front surface of the front door 12.

According to this configuration, the internal state can be displayed in front of the hall employee who closed the front door 12. As a result, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state, and it is possible to make it easy to notice the internal state display, and it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the display.

At that time, as a display unit for executing the internal state display, a lower display unit 69 different from the upper lamp unit 63 for executing the door open display is used. In this case, the hall employee can quickly determine whether the notification corresponds to the opening of the front door 12 or the notification corresponding to the fact that the two doors are not in the internal state, based on the difference in the display location (notification location). The structure can be convenient for hall employees.

<10th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the internal state notification is performed when the setting change operation is completed, but in the present embodiment, the notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. There is. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the internal state determination process and the internal state notification execution process are performed. Specifically, when the sub control device 81 receives a power recovery command from the main control device 101, the sub control device 81 executes each of the above processes. The power recovery command is output from the main control device 101 when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, and is a command for notifying the sub control device 81 of the power on (recovery from the power failure state). be. In this power recovery command, in addition to the power recovery information indicating that the power has been recovered, the internal state information indicating whether the first BB combination or the second BB combination is in the winning state, and whether or not it is in the first BB state or the second BB state. BB state information indicating the above is included.

The opportunity to output the power recovery command in the main controller 101 is when a negative determination is made in step S16 (when the setting key is not in the ON state) in the main process (FIG. 17) executed when the power is turned on. There is a processing time of step S23, and a processing time of step S19 (step S5301 in the setting change processing of FIG. 60) performed when an affirmative determination is made in step S16 (when the setting key is in the ON state). That is, the power recovery command is output when the power is turned on so that the setting change is not allowed and when the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed.

Of these, the power recovery command that is output when the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed is output after the execution of the first RAM clear process in step S18 in the main process. In the first RAM clear process, the first BB winning flag (a flag indicating that the first BB combination is in the winning state (three internal states)) and the first BB state flag (the first BB state) are stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the second BB state flag (flag indicating that the second BB state is set) is set, the process of clearing those flags is executed (steps S5203 to S5206 in FIG. 59). Therefore, when the power is turned on in a situation where the second BB combination is not in the winning state (two internal states), the internal state information included in the power recovery command indicates a non-internal state, and the BB state information is a non-BB state. (It is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state).

In the first RAM clearing process of step S18, except when a RAM abnormality occurs when the second BB winning flag (flag indicating that the two cards are in the internal state) is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The flag is not cleared. Therefore, when the power is turned on in the two-sheet internal state, the internal state information included in the power recovery command basically indicates the two-sheet internal state.

On the other hand, the power recovery command that is output when the power is turned on without allowing the setting change is the one that reflects the state at the time of power on because the RAM clear processing as described above is not performed in advance. It becomes. That is, when the power is turned on in the state of three internal states, the internal state information of the power recovery command becomes a value indicating the internal state of three sheets, and when the power is turned on in the situation of the first BB state or the second BB state, The BB state information of the power recovery command becomes a value indicating the first BB state or the second BB state.

<Internal status notification processing>
The internal state notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120. This process is a process for performing an internal state notification, which is a notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state. This process is executed in step S5606 of the main process (FIG. 63) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the internal state notification process of FIG. 65.

First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The internal state notification flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the internal state notification is being executed.

If the internal state notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7302, and it is determined whether or not a power recovery command (step S23 in FIG. 17 and step S5301 in FIG. 60) has been received as the current reception command. If the power recovery command has not been received, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is.

If a power recovery command has been received, in step S7303, the BB state and the internal state are grasped based on the received power recovery command. In step S7304, it is determined whether or not the state is the first BB state or the second BB state based on the grasping result of step S7303. If it is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S7305, and it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S7303 is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). If it is determined that the second BB combination is in the winning state, the internal state notification process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, or if it is determined affirmatively in step S7304 (in either the first BB state or the second BB state), the internal state display setting process is performed in step S7306. As described above, there are five types of states that can be grasped from the received power recovery command: non-internal state, two-sheet internal state, three-sheet internal state, first BB state, and second BB state, excluding the two-sheet internal state. Four types of states are the targets for executing the internal state display.

Therefore, in step S7306, the internal state display is set according to which of the above four types is the state that triggered the internal state display this time. Specifically, when the grasped state is the non-internal state, a state image 311 (FIG. 121 (a)) indicating the non-internal state is displayed, and the grasped state is the three internal states. In that case, a state image 312 (FIG. 121 (b)) indicating that the three images are in the internal state is displayed, and when the grasped state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the zero bonus state (of the medal). It is set to display a state image 313 (FIG. 121 (c)) indicating that the state is a BB state in which an increase or decrease does not occur.

Each of these state images 311 to 313 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. At that time, by displaying each state image 311 to 313 in a predetermined display area (for example, a corner) different from the display area where other displays such as the power-on display and the door open display are performed, each state image 311 to 313 It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned other indications from overlapping with each other and the mutual distinctiveness from being lowered. Further, when displaying each of the state images 311 to 313, the display size is smaller than that of the other display, and the other display is displayed so as to be more conspicuous.

Further, in step S7306, the lower display unit 69 is set to blink in a predetermined blinking pattern as the internal state display performed in combination with each of the above state images 311 to 313. The internal state display by the lower display unit 69 may be performed in a light emitting mode peculiar to each state by making the light emitting color and blinking pattern different for each state, or which of the above four types of states is used. Regardless of this, a common emission color and blinking pattern may be used, and the two sheets may function as a notification indicating that the state is other than the internal state.

Further, in step S7306, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the internal state display. This notification period determines the upper limit execution time of the internal state display, and the internal state display ends when the elapsed period from the start of the display reaches the above notification period.

After the execution of step S7306, the internal state notification sound is set in step S7307. The notification by the internal state notification sound is performed so that a voice notification sound different from the power-on notification sound and the setting change notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. In step S7307, the sound data of the internal state notification sound is set in the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183, and the output instruction to each sound IC 184a to 184n is set. In the sound data according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122A, the priority is set to be higher in the order of the internal state notification sound <door opening notification sound <setting change notification sound.

It should be noted that the internal state notification sound may output a different notification sound for each of the above four types of states excluding the two internal states, and may function as a notification indicating each state, or any state. Regardless of this, a common notification sound may be output and function as a notification indicating that the two sheets are in a state other than the internal state. The notification by the internal state notification sound is executed over the notification period set in step S7306.

After the execution of step S7307, the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S7308, and then the internal state notification process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7301 (when the internal state flag is set), that is, if internal state notification (internal state display and internal state notification sound) is being executed, the process proceeds to step S7309 to notify the internal state. It is determined whether or not the elapsed period from the start of the above notification period has reached the above notification period. If the notification period has not elapsed, in step S7310, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S7309 (when the notification period has elapsed) or the affirmative judgment is made in step S7310 (when the second BB winning command is received), the internal state notification is terminated in step S7311. The auxiliary display unit 65, the lower display unit 69, and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to do so. In step S7312, the internal state notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared. After the execution of step S7312 or when a negative determination is made in step S7310 (when the second BB winning command has not been received), the internal state notification process ends.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification will be described. Here, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states. First, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is not allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b).

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned off and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the front door 12 is opened. Based on this, the door opening display and the door opening notification sound are output (FIGS. 122 (b-3) and (b-4)).

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS. This determination is made based on the internal state information and the BB state information included in the power recovery command.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Of these, the internal state display is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 together with the door opening display by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63. At that time, the internal information display (state images 311 to 313) on the auxiliary display unit 65 does not overlap with the message display 302 (FIG. 71) displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the door open display, and its display position and The display size is set.

The priority of the internal state notification sound is set lower than that of the door opening notification sound. Therefore, the door opening notification sound is preferentially output, and the internal state notification sound is output in the standby state (FIGS. 122 (b-4) and (b-6)). Therefore, only the door opening notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

The above-mentioned processes such as the door opening display, the output of the door opening notification sound, and the transmission of the power recovery command are performed after a predetermined rising period has elapsed. In FIG. 122B, the rising period is shown. Is omitted. Further, prior to the output of the door opening display and the door opening notification sound, the power-on display and the power-on notification sound are output for a predetermined period, but these notifications are also not shown.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t2, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. Along with this, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is started. As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed.

When the setting change is not allowed, the states that are not the two-sheet internal state include the non-internal state, the three-sheet internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state. In the non-internal state, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role. It can be moved to the internal state. In the case of the three internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, after turning off the power of the slot machine 10, the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on again to clear each of these states. By temporarily shifting to the non-internal state and then winning the second BB combination in the 2-bet game, it is possible to shift to the two-card internal state. Assuming that the second BB combination is won by the 2-bet game at the timing t3, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end at that timing.

Next, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the first step S18 (FIG. 17) is performed. 1 RAM clear processing is executed. When the three sheets are in the internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, each of these states is cleared by the first RAM clearing process, and the state becomes a non-internal state.

Further, the setting change notification is performed based on the setting key being turned on. This notification is performed in such a manner that a voice such as "setting is being changed" is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, whereby it is audibly notified that the setting is being changed.

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS.

Since it is in the non-internal state as described above, the internal state is displayed and the internal state notification sound is output. At this time, the output of the setting change notification sound and the output of the internal state notification sound conflict with each other, but the setting change notification sound is set to have a higher priority than the internal state notification sound (FIG. 122 (a)). .. Therefore, the setting change notification sound is preferentially emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and the internal state notification sound is emitted in the standby state.

After that, when the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the setting change notification ends and the door open display is started (FIG. 123 (f)). The door opening notification sound overlaps with the output period of the internal state notification sound, but since the door opening notification sound has a higher priority than the internal state notification sound, the output of the door opening notification sound has priority. It is done in. That is, the internal state notification sound is set to the output standby state, and the door opening notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n (FIG. 123 (g)).

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. Along with this, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is started. As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed.

When the setting is changed, the state that is not the internal state of the two sheets is only the non-internal state. In this case, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role, thereby shifting to the internal state of two medals. can. If such an operation is performed at the timing t4, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end at that timing.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is determined whether or not the two machines are in the internal state, and when it is determined that the two machines are not in the internal state, the internal state is notified.

Since the power switch 71 can be operated to turn on the power of the slot machine 10 only to the hall employees, this configuration makes it possible to notify the internal state in the presence of the hall employees. can. As a result, it is possible to preferably notify the hall employee that the two-sheet internal state is not present, and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a situation where the two-sheet internal state is not present.

Further, in this configuration, since the power is turned on, the internal state notification can be executed even when the set value of the slot machine 10 is not changed. Further, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on every business day, it is possible to encourage the confirmation of whether or not the two machines are in the internal state to be incorporated into the daily inspection in the game hall.

Since the notification mode of the internal state notification is different depending on the case of the non-internal state, the case of the three-sheet internal state, and the case of the first BB state or the second BB state, any of the states is used. You can let hall employees know if there is one. Considering that the method of changing to the internal state is different for each of these states, it is possible to support the quick and smooth response of hall employees by differentizing the notification mode of the internal state notification for each state. become.

The internal state information and the BB state information are included in the power recovery command and transmitted to the sub control device 81.

According to the above configuration, when the power is turned on, the internal state and the BB state can be notified to the sub control device 81 together with the notification of the power on. Therefore, the sub control device 81 can grasp the internal state and the BB state at the same time when the power is turned on, and the internal state notification can be performed satisfactorily.

Further, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a dedicated command for internal state information or BB state information is output, the number of command types increases, and as a result, the number of command data stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 increases. Therefore, there is a concern that the storage capacity will be squeezed. In this regard, by including the internal state information and the like in the setting change end command and outputting it, the increase in the number of command data can be suppressed and the capacity consumption can be saved. Not only that, it also leads to a decrease in the frequency of command transmission and reception, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to command control.

When the notification period by the door opening notification sound and the notification period by the internal state notification sound overlap, the door opening notification sound is given priority over the internal state notification sound and emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the internal state notification is executed when the power is turned on, it is assumed that the notification period by the door opening notification sound and the notification period by the internal state notification sound overlap. In such a case, since the emission of the door opening notification sound for notifying the opening of the front door 12 is prioritized, forgetting to close the front door 12 can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the promotion of fraudulent activities.

Further, by giving priority to the emission of the door opening notification sound, there is an advantage that the emission timing of the internal state notification sound can be optimized. As described above, in order to change from the non-winning state of the 2nd BB role to the winning state of the 2nd BB role (internal state of 2 cards), it is necessary to execute the role lottery to win the 2nd BB role. Even if the internal status notification sound is emitted when the door is open, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, in a situation where the front door 12 is open, the door opening notification sound is emitted to prompt the front door 12 to close, and after the closing is performed, the internal state notification sound is emitted, so that the hall employee can use it. After it becomes possible to deal with it, it will be notified that the two sheets are not in the internal state. Therefore, it is possible to emit the internal state notification sound at a timing preferable for the hall employee.

At that time, the internal state display is executed in accordance with the door opening notification (door opening display and door opening notification sound), and is executed prior to the notification by the internal state notification sound.

Regarding the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound, which are auditory notifications, by giving priority to the former over the latter, it is possible to prevent each notification from becoming difficult to hear. However, there is a concern that the notification period for not being in the internal state of the two sheets will be shortened by delaying the start of the internal state notification sound. In this regard, in this configuration, the internal state display, which is a visual notification that is relatively easy to identify, is executed together with the door opening notification, and is performed prior to the notification by the internal state notification sound. It is possible to preferably suppress the shortage of the notification period.

<Modification example 1>
A modification 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in this modified example, the priority of the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound is set to the same order. Therefore, when the output period of the door opening notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, those sounds are mixed and output. That is, both the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound are emitted from the same speakers 64a to 64n.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (b). Here, a case where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned off in a state other than the internal state of the two machines will be described as an example.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned off and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the front door 12 is opened. Based on this, the door opening display and the door opening notification sound are output (FIGS. 124 (b-3) and (b-4)).

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Of these, the internal state display is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 together with the door opening display by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63. Further, as for the internal state notification sound, in this modification, the priority of the internal information notification sound and the door opening notification sound is set to the same order, so that the internal state notification sound is output together with the door opening notification sound (FIG. 124). (B-4), (b-6)).

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t2, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. On the other hand, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound are continuously executed, and then the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81, or a predetermined notification period has elapsed. It will continue until you do. That is, after the front door 12 is closed, only the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

Even when the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the output of the door opening display and the door opening notification sound and the output of the internal information display and the internal state notification sound are performed in parallel. Will be. Of these, the output of the door open display and the door open notification sound ends when the front door 12 is closed, and the internal information display and the output of the internal state notification sound are output from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. When the second BB winning command is transmitted or the predetermined notification period has elapsed, the process ends.

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two machines are not in the internal state.

In this modified example, since the internal state notification sound and the door opening notification sound are mixed and simultaneously emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, the voice notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state can be started early and the emission period is lengthened. It becomes possible to secure.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in this modification, the priority of the internal state notification sound is set higher than the priority of the door opening notification sound. Therefore, when the output period of the door opening notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, the internal state notification sound is preferentially output.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). Here, a case where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned off in a state other than the internal state of the two machines will be described as an example.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned off and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the front door 12 is opened. Based on this, the door opening display and the door opening notification sound are output (FIGS. 125 (b-3) and (b-4)).

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Of these, the internal state display is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 together with the door opening display by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63.

The priority of the internal state notification sound is set higher than that of the door opening notification sound. Therefore, the internal state notification sound is preferentially output, and the door opening notification sound is output in the standby state (FIGS. 125 (b-4) and (b-6)). Therefore, only the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t2, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. At that time, the output standby state of the door opening notification sound is released by closing the front door 12, and the output ends as it is. That is, in this modification, the door opening notification sound is output when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on when the two machines are in the internal state, but is not output when the slot machine 10 is in a state other than the two internal states.

On the other hand, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound are continuously executed. Then, when the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 at the timing t3, or when a predetermined notification period elapses, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end. (FIGS. 125 (b-5), (b-6)).

Even when the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the door opening display and the internal information display are performed in parallel, while the internal state notification sound is higher than the door opening notification sound. It is output with priority. Of these, the door open display ends when the front door 12 is closed, and the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 for the internal information display and the output of the internal state notification sound. It ends when it is done or when a predetermined notification period has elapsed.

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two machines are not in the internal state.

In this modified example, since the internal state notification sound is emitted prior to the door opening notification sound, it is possible to start the voice notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state earlier and to secure the emission period for a long time. Become. Further, since the overlap with the notification by the door opening notification sound is avoided, the internal state notification sound can be easily heard and the notification can be performed.

<Modification example 3>
A modified example 3 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), there is a difference in priority between the internal state notification sound and the power-on notification sound. Specifically, the priority of the power-on notification sound is higher than the priority of the internal state notification sound. Therefore, when the output period of the power-on notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, the power-on notification sound is preferentially output.

In addition, there is a difference in priority between the internal state notification sound and the setting change notification sound. Specifically, the priority of the setting change notification sound is higher than the priority of the internal state notification sound. Therefore, when the output period of the setting change notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, the setting change notification sound is preferentially output.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described. Here, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states. First, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is not allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b).

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned off and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the power on display and the power on notification sound are displayed. Is output (FIGS. 126 (b-3), (b-4)). In the power-on display, for example, a message display 301 (FIG. 71) such as "power is turned on" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. Will be done. Further, the notification by the power-on notification sound is performed by emitting a voice such as "the power has been turned on" from the speakers 64a to 64n.

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Of these, the internal state display is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 together with the power-on display by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63. At that time, the display position and display size of the internal information display (state images 311 to 313) on the auxiliary display unit 65 are set so as not to overlap with the message display 301 displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The priority of the internal state notification sound is set lower than that of the power-on notification sound. Therefore, the power-on notification sound is preferentially output, and the internal state notification sound is output in the standby state (FIGS. 126 (b-4) and (b-6)). Therefore, only the power-on notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When a predetermined period elapses from the output of the power-on display and the power-on notification sound at the timing t2, each of these notifications ends. Along with this, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is started. As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed.

When the output of the power-on display and the power-on notification sound is completed, the door open display and the door open notification sound are output based on the fact that the front door 12 is in the open state. Is omitted. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the priority of the internal state notification sound and the priority of the door opening notification sound are set to the same order, both the internal state notification sound and the door opening notification sound are set. Is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

After that, when the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 at the timing t3, or when a predetermined notification period elapses, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end. (Fig. 126 (b-5), (b-6)).

Next, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the power on display and the setting change notification sound Is output (FIG. 127 (e)). The notification by the setting change notification sound is performed by, for example, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and it is heard that the setting is being changed (setting change is allowed). Will be notified.

Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81. Based on the reception of the power recovery command, the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81 determines whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether it is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). NS.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Of these, the internal state display is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the lower display unit 69 together with the power-on display by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63 (FIG. 127 (f)).

The priority of the internal state notification sound is set lower than that of the setting change notification sound. Therefore, the setting change notification sound is preferentially output, and the output of the internal state notification sound is set to the standby state (FIGS. 127 (e) and 127 (g)). Therefore, only the setting change notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the output of the setting change notification sound ends. At this time, the power-on display may be terminated at the same time, or the power-on display may be continued until a predetermined period elapses. When the output of the setting change notification sound is completed, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is started. As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed.

After that, when the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 at the timing t3, or when a predetermined notification period elapses, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end. (FIGS. 127 (f), (g)).

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two machines are not in the internal state.

In this modification, the power-on notification sound is given priority over the internal state notification sound and is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. When a hall employee operates the power switch 71, it is considered that there is a high interest in whether or not the switch operation functions effectively and the slot machine 10 is started correctly. Therefore, in response to such a request. Can respond favorably.

Further, by giving priority to the power-on notification sound, there is an advantage that the emission timing of the internal state notification sound can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), the slot machine 10 is started up and the operation of the start lever 41 is activated, and then the start lever 41 is operated. However, since it is necessary to execute the winning combination lottery in the main control device 101, even if the internal state notification sound is emitted immediately after the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the hall employee can immediately deal with it. Can not. Therefore, by giving priority to the emission of the power-on notification sound and delaying the emission of the internal state notification sound, it is possible to emit the internal state notification sound at a timing preferable to the hall employees.

In this modification, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on so that the setting change is allowed, the setting change notification sound is given priority over the internal state notification sound and is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. When a hall employee operates the setting key insertion hole 73, he / she may first want to know whether the slot machine 10 has been allowed to change the setting or whether the setting change has been correctly accepted. It is possible to suitably respond to such a request.

Further, in order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB winning combination to the winning state of the second BB winning combination (two internal states), the start lever 41 is operated to execute the winning combination lottery at least in a situation where the setting change is not allowed. Therefore, by giving priority to the emission of the setting change notification sound and delaying the emission of the internal state notification sound, it is possible to emit the internal state notification sound at a timing preferable to the hall employee.

<Modification example 4>
A modified example 4 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 128, a difference in priority is provided between the internal state notification sound and the input error notification sound. Specifically, the priority of the input error notification sound is higher than the priority of the internal state notification sound. Therefore, when the output period of the input error notification sound and the output period of the internal state notification sound overlap, the input error notification sound is preferentially output. The insertion error notification sound is an error notification sound that is output when a medal is jammed inside the selector 46 due to a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, the internal structure of the selector 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The alternate long and short dash line in the figure indicates the passage route of the medal.

The selector 46 is formed with a guide passage 401 for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the storage passage 47. The guide passage 401 is formed in a curved shape so as to allow medals to pass in a single row and to draw an arc diagonally downward from the upper end portion thereof. More specifically, the selector body constituting the selector 46 is provided with a ridge 402 projecting toward the front side in the drawing, and a guide passage 401 is formed along the ridge 402. As a result, the medals that have reached the guide passage 401 will flow in the downstream direction so as to roll on the ridge 402.

A medal passage switching member 403 is provided at an intermediate position of the guide passage 401. The medal passage switching member 403 includes a passage switching piece 404 provided upstream of the guide passage 401 and capable of appearing and disappearing from the guide passage 401, and a solenoid (not shown) for operating the passage switching piece 404. doing. When the solenoid is not excited, the passage switching piece 404 protrudes into the guide passage 401, and the flow of medals to the storage passage 47 is obstructed. As a result, the medal falls downward so as to get over the ridge 402 and is guided to the discharge passage 48. Further, when the solenoid is excited, the passage switching piece 404 is submerged outside the guide passage 401. As a result, the medal flows along the guide passage 401 and is guided to the storage passage 47.

On the downstream side of the passage switching piece 404, the first inserted medal detection sensor 405 for detecting the passage of medals and the second inserted medal detection sensor 406 are arranged close to each other so as to line up upstream and downstream of the guide passage 401. (The proximity state is such that the same medal is detected at the same time at least for one period). When the solenoid of the medal passage switching member 403 is not excited, the medal falls downward from the middle of the guide passage 401, so that the passage of the medal is not detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 407. On the other hand, when the medal passage switching member 403 is solenoid-excited, the passage of medals is sequentially detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406.

<Medal detection process>
The medal insertion process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed by the sensor monitoring process in step S107 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), detects medal insertion into the medal insertion slot 45, and updates the number of bets based on the detection result. It is a process to do.

First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion permission state is such that the medal can be inserted into the slot machine. The determination of whether or not the medal insertion permission state is performed is performed by confirming whether or not the solenoid of the medal passage switching member 403 is excited. For example, when the start lever 41 is operated and the game is being executed, the current number of bets has reached the maximum value (upper limit of 3) and the number of credits has reached the maximum value (50). In this case, the solenoid of the medal passage switching member 403 is de-energized in order to disallow the acceptance of medal insertion. By confirming this state, it can be determined that the medal insertion is not permitted.

When the medal insertion permission state is set, it is determined in step S7402 whether or not the medal is detected based on the output state of each insertion medal detection sensor 405 or 406. If a negative determination is made in step S7401 or step S7402 (when the medal insertion is not permitted or the medal is not detected), the medal detection process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7402 (in the case of a medal detection state), it is determined in step S7403 whether or not the medal has passed through the detection areas of the respective inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 within a predetermined period. When the guide passage 401 in the selector 46 flows toward the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 405 is turned on → the second inserted medal detection sensor 406 is turned on → both inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 are off. When the output state of each inserted medal detection sensor 405 or 406 changes in the flow of the above, it is determined whether or not the series of changes occurs within a predetermined period.

If it has not passed within the predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S7404, assuming that medals are accumulated inside the selector 46 (medal clogging has occurred), and an insertion error flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. set. When the insertion error flag is set, the credit display unit 60 provided on the front side of the front door 12 displays a predetermined error corresponding to the medal insertion error (selector error). The medal insertion error can be canceled by operating the reset switch 72 with the front door 12 open (the door opening sensor 27 is on) and turning the switch 72 on.

In step S7405, the input error command is transmitted to the sub control device 81. The insertion error command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 81 that a medal insertion error has occurred. When the sub-control device 81 receives the insertion error command, the sub-control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65, the speakers 64a to 64n, and the like so that the medal insertion error display and the insertion error notification sound are output.

In step S7406, a predetermined error signal is output to the management control device HC of the game hall via the external centralized terminal plate 121. As a result, the management control device HC is notified of the occurrence of the medal insertion error. After the execution of step S7406, the medal detection process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7403 (when medals have passed within a predetermined period), it is determined in step S7407 whether or not the output states of the inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 have changed in a predetermined order. do. When the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 flow from the upstream side to the downstream side toward the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 405 is turned on → the second inserted medal detection sensor 406 is turned on → The output state of each inserted medal detection sensor 405, 406 changes in the order in which both inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 are turned off. In step S7407, the first inserted medal detection sensor is turned on after the second inserted medal detection sensor 406 is turned on. It is determined whether or not the output states of the inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 are changed in an order different from the normal order such as turning on 405.

If it does not change in the predetermined order, it is considered that there is a possibility that an object is flowing backward in the selector 46 (an illegal tool is inserted), and the process proceeds to step S7404, and an input error occurs. Set the flag. In the present embodiment, the same type of error flag is set for the case where the negative judgment is made in step S7403 and the case where the negative judgment is made in step S7407, but different types so that each of these events can be distinguished and recognized. It may be configured to set the error flag of. In this case, a different type of command is also transmitted for the error command to be transmitted to the sub control device 81.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7407 (changes in a predetermined order), it is determined in step S7408 whether or not the current number of bets has reached the maximum value (upper limit number). As described above, the specified number of bets is set to 2 or 3 in any of the non-internal state, the 2-card internal state, the 3-card internal state, the 1st BB state, and the 2nd BB state. The maximum value of is three.

If the number of bets has not reached the maximum value, the value of the bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is incremented by 1 and updated in step S7409. The bet counter is a counter value for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of bets, and by updating the counter value, the inserted medals are accepted as bets (number of bets).

When the number of bets has reached the maximum value, the value of the credit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is incremented by 1 and updated in step S7410. The credit counter is a counter value for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of credits, and by updating the counter value, the inserted medals are accepted as credits (stored medals). After the execution of step S7409 or step S7410, the medal detection process ends.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 131. Here, a case where the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on with the setting key turned off in a non-internal state will be described as an example. The flow from the power-on to the end of the power-on notification is the same as the flow from timing t1 to timing t2 in the modification 3 described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). Omit.

When a predetermined period elapses from the output of the power-on display and the power-on notification sound at the timing t2, each of these notifications ends (FIG. 131 (c)). Along with this, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is started (FIG. 131 (h)). As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed.

In the non-internal state, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role, so that the two medals are in the internal state. Can be migrated to. At timing t3, if a medal jam occurs in the selector 46 in the process of inserting medals and a medal insertion error is detected, an insertion error command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81.

When the sub-control device 81 receives the insertion error command, the insertion error display corresponding to the medal insertion error is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This input error display is performed by displaying a message such as "selector error" on the auxiliary display unit 65 and causing the upper lamp unit 63 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. At that time, the input error display is performed in parallel with the internal status display.

When the sub-control device 81 receives the insertion error command, the sound data setting process and the output instruction to the sound ICs 184a to 184n are performed in order to output the insertion error notification sound corresponding to the medal insertion error. Here, since the priority of the input error notification sound is set higher than the priority of the internal state notification sound, the input error notification sound is output with priority, and the output of the internal state notification sound is set to the standby state. (FIGS. 131 (f), (h)). That is, the output of the internal state notification sound is interrupted with the occurrence of the medal insertion error, and the insertion error notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

As a result, the occurrence of a medal insertion error is audibly notified. Therefore, when a medal jam occurs in the response process after being notified of the non-internal state by the internal status display and the output of the internal status notification sound, it is easy for the hall employees to notice the occurrence of the medal jam. can do. Note that the notification by the on-error notification sound is performed by emitting a predetermined alarm sound different from the power-on notification sound, the setting change notification sound, and the internal state notification sound from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When the hall employee clears the medal clogging in the selector 46 and then turns on the reset switch 72 at the timing t4, the insertion error state is released, and the insertion error display and the output of the insertion error notification sound are terminated. Along with this, the output standby state of the internal state notification sound is released, and the output of the notification sound is resumed. As a result, the internal state notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and the auditory notification that the two speakers are not in the internal state is performed again.

After that, when the second BB winning command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined notification period elapses, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end. (FIGS. 131 (g), (h)).

In the case of the three internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, after the hall employee turns off the power of the slot machine 10, the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on again, so that each state is reached. Clear and temporarily shift to the non-internal state. After that, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45 in order to win the second BB role, but if a medal jam occurs in the process, the flow is explained with reference to FIG. 131. Similarly, the input error notification sound is output with priority. That is, it is possible to preferably notify the occurrence of a power-on error even when the three sheets are in the internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state when the power is turned on.

Also, when the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (when the setting is changed) at the time of the previous power-on, the hole is used to shift from the non-internal state to the two-sheet internal state. If a medal jam occurs when an employee inserts two medals into the medal insertion slot 45, the insertion error notification sound is preferentially output.

As described above, also in this modified example, since the internal state notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to suitably notify the hall employee that the two machines are not in the internal state.

In this modification, when the notification by the error notification sound and the notification by the internal state notification sound overlap, the former is prioritized and the error notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When a hall employee operates the start lever 41 to execute a winning combination lottery by the main control device 101 in a situation where the two cards are not in the internal state, some abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10 and the winning combination lottery is not performed. It is possible that the change to the internal state of two cards does not proceed as expected. In such a case, for example, if the internal state notification sound is prioritized, there is a concern that the hall employees may be confused without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality. In this regard, by giving priority to the emission of the error notification sound, it is possible to promptly notify that an abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10, and it is possible to suppress a delay in the preparatory work before the opening of the hall.

In particular, in this modification, the input error notification sound is prioritized over the internal state notification sound. When changing from the non-winning state of the 2nd BB role to the winning state of the 2nd BB role (2 internal state), it is necessary to insert 2 medals into the medal slot 45 to play a 2-bet game. There is a possibility that medals will be jammed during the insertion process. By applying this configuration to such a case, it is possible to prevent the emission of the insertion error notification sound from being hindered by the emission of the internal state notification sound, and promptly notify the occurrence of the medal clogging and eliminate the clogging. Can be prompted. Therefore, even if a medal jam occurs during the change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state, the work for the change can be smoothly performed.

<11th Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, the internal state notification is performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, but in the present embodiment, the notification is performed when the front door 12 is closed after the power is turned on. It is configured to be used. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134.

<Internal status notification processing>
The internal state notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. This process is a process for performing an internal state notification, which is a notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state. This process is executed in step S5606 of the main process (FIG. 63) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the internal state notification process of FIG. 120.

First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If the internal state notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7602, and it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The power recovery flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that a power recovery command (step S23 in FIG. 17 and step S5301 in FIG. 60) has been received from the main control device 101.

If the power recovery flag is not set, in step S7603, it is determined whether or not a power recovery command has been received as the current reception command. When the power recovery command is received, it is determined in step S7604 whether or not the front door 12 is open. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a door opening command has been received from the main control device 101. In some cases, the power recovery command and the door opening command are not transmitted at the same time, and a time lag occurs between the transmission of the power recovery command and the transmission of the door opening command. In that case, a predetermined monitoring period is set in consideration of the time lag, and after receiving the power recovery command, it is determined whether or not the door opening command is received within the monitoring period.

When it is determined in step S7604 that the front door 12 is open, it is presumed that the power is turned on by operating the power switch 71, not recovering from the power failure. In this case, the process proceeds to step S7605, and the power recovery flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If a negative determination is made in step S7603 (when a power recovery command is not received) or a negative determination is made in step S7604 (when the front door 12 is not opened), the internal state notification process is terminated as it is.

After the execution of step S7605 or when a positive determination is made in step S7602 (when the power recovery flag is set), the process proceeds to step S7606 to determine whether or not the door closing command has been received as the current reception command. If the door closing command has not been received, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the door closing command is received, that is, when the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the power recovery flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared in step S7607. ..

As described above, when the power recovery flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, the determination process of whether or not the front door 12 is closed is executed, and it is determined that the front door 12 is closed by the determination process. In some cases, the power recovery flag is cleared. Therefore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (when the power recovery flag is set), the execution cycle of the main process is to determine whether or not the front door 12 is closed until the front door 12 is closed after the power is turned on. Will be repeated at. It is assumed that the front door 12 is opened and closed again after the front door 12 is closed after the power is turned on. However, since the determination process in step S7606 presupposes the presence of the power recovery flag, such 2 The closing after the first time is not subject to the above judgment processing. That is, the determination process in step S7606 determines whether the front door 12 has been closed for the first time after the power is turned on.

After the execution of step S7607, in step S7608, the BB state and the internal state are grasped based on the power recovery command received from the main control device 101. In step S7609, it is determined whether or not the state is the first BB state or the second BB state based on the grasping result of step S7608. If it is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S7610, and it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S7608 is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). If it is determined that the second BB combination is in the winning state, the internal state notification process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, or if it is determined affirmatively in step S7609 (in either the first BB state or the second BB state), the internal state display setting process is performed in step S7611. Further, in step S7611, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the internal state display. The internal state display ends when the elapsed period from the start of the display reaches the notification period.

In the following step S7612, the setting process of the internal state notification sound is performed. Specifically, the sound data of the internal state notification sound is set in the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183, and the output instruction to each sound IC 184a to 184n is set. The notification by the internal state notification sound is executed over the notification period set in step S7611. In step S7613, the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the internal state notification process ends.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S7601 (when the internal state flag is set), that is, if internal state notification (internal state display and internal state notification sound) is being executed, the process proceeds to step S7614 to notify the internal state. It is determined whether or not the elapsed period from the start of the above notification period has reached the above notification period. If the notification period has not elapsed, in step S7615, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S7614 (when the notification period has elapsed) or the affirmative judgment is made in step S7615 (when the second BB winning command is received), the internal state notification is terminated in step S7616. The auxiliary display unit 65, the lower display unit 69, and the speaker 64 are controlled in this way. In step S7617, the internal state notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared. After the execution of step S7617 or when a negative determination is made in step S7615 (when the second BB winning command has not been received), the internal state notification process ends.

<About the flow of internal status notification>
The flow of internal state notification will be described. Here, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states. First, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is not allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 133.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned off and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the front door 12 is opened. Based on this, the door opening display and the door opening notification sound are output (FIGS. 133 (a) and 133 (b)). Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81.

The above-mentioned processes such as the door opening display, the output of the door opening notification sound, and the transmission of the power recovery command are performed after a predetermined rising period has elapsed, but in FIG. 133, the illustration of the rising period is omitted. ing. Further, prior to the output of the door opening display and the door opening notification sound, the power-on display and the power-on notification sound are output for a predetermined period, but these notifications are also not shown.

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t2, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the sub control device 81 determines whether or not it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether or not the second BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states). Will be done. This determination is made based on the internal state information and the BB state information included in the power recovery command received from the main control device 101.

Here, since the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on in a state other than the two internal states, the internal state display and the internal state notification sound are output as a result of the above determination. Notification by the internal state display is performed by causing the lower display unit 69 to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern (blinking) or displaying each state image 31 to 313 (FIG. 121) on the auxiliary display unit 65. The notification by the state notification sound is performed by emitting a voice different from the power-on notification sound and the setting change notification sound from the speakers 64a to 64n. By these notifications, the hall employee of the game hall is notified that the second BB role is not in the winning state (two pieces internal state).

When the setting change is not allowed, the states that are not the two-sheet internal state include the non-internal state, the three-sheet internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state. In the non-internal state, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role. It can be moved to the internal state. In the case of the three internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, after turning off the power of the slot machine 10, the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on again to clear each of these states. By temporarily shifting to the non-internal state and then winning the second BB combination in the 2-bet game, it is possible to shift to the two-card internal state. Assuming that the second BB combination is won by the 2-bet game at the timing t3, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end at that timing.

Next, a case where the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

When the front door 12 is opened from the state where the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on, the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (timing t1), the first step S18 (FIG. 17) is performed. 1 RAM clear processing is executed. When the three sheets are in the internal state, the first BB state, or the second BB state, each of these states is cleared by the first RAM clearing process, and the state becomes a non-internal state.

Further, the setting change notification is performed based on the setting key being in the ON state (FIG. 134 (e)). This notification is performed in such a manner that a voice such as "setting is being changed" is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, whereby it is audibly notified that the setting is being changed. Further, when the power is turned on, a power recovery command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sub control device 81.

After that, when the setting change operation is completed at the timing t2, the setting change notification ends. Along with this, the output of the door opening display and the door opening notification sound is started (FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).

When the front door 12 is closed at the timing t3, the door opening display and the output of the door opening notification sound are terminated. Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the sub control device 81 determines whether or not it is in the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether or not the second BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states). Will be done. Since it is in the non-internal state as described above, the internal state is displayed and the internal state notification sound is output (FIGS. 134 (h) and 134 (j)). By these notifications, the hall employee of the game hall is notified that the second BB role is not in the winning state (two pieces internal state).

When the setting change is allowed, the state that is not the two-sheet internal state is only the non-internal state. In this case, the hall employee inserts two medals into the medal slot 45, operates the start lever 41, plays a two-bet game, and wins the second BB role, thereby shifting to the internal state of two medals. can. If such an operation is performed at the timing t4, the internal state display and the output of the internal state notification sound end at that timing.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the front door 12 is closed after the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the two doors are in the internal state, and when it is determined that the two doors are not in the internal state, the internal state is notified.

Basically, only hall employees can operate both the power switch 71 and the front door 12, so with this configuration, the internal status is notified in the presence of the hall employees. be able to. As a result, it is possible to preferably notify the hall employee that the two-sheet internal state is not present, and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a situation where the two-sheet internal state is not present.

Further, the execution timing of the internal state notification can be optimized by performing the internal state notification when the front door 12 is closed. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), it is necessary to execute the combination lottery to win the second BB combination, so the front door 12 opens. Even if the internal status notification is executed in this situation, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. In this regard, in this configuration in which the internal state notification is executed after waiting for the front door 12 to be closed, the internal state notification is performed after the non-winning state of the second BB combination can be changed to the winning state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state at a suitable timing.

Further, since the door opening notification is executed in the situation where the front door 12 is open, it is assumed that the door opening notification and the internal state notification overlap. In that case, if it is attempted to divide the period of each of these notifications, it is necessary to make adjustments when designing the notifications. In this respect, in this configuration, since the internal state notification is executed after the front door 12 is closed, it is possible to avoid overlapping the notification periods of both notifications. Therefore, it is not necessary to adjust the period at the time of design, and it is possible to reduce the work load of the notification design.

When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open, and when the front door 12 is not opened, the execution of the internal state notification is restricted.

The power to be turned on to the slot machine 10 is not limited to the case where the power switch 71 is operated, but after the supply of external power to the game hall is cut off due to a power failure, the supply of external power is resumed by the restoration of the power transmission equipment. It also happens in some cases. In the case of turning on the power by recovering from such a power failure, there is a possibility that the player is near the slot machine 10, so that the internal state notification for the hall employees may be performed in front of the player. be.

At that time, in the case of turning on the power by recovering from the power failure, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the front door 12 closed, so that the front door 12 is opened when the power is turned on. By setting the above as the execution target of the internal status notification, it is possible to execute the internal status notification by excluding the power-on due to the recovery from the power failure. As a result, it is suppressed that the internal state notification is performed in front of the player, and when the player sees the internal state notification, the notification becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, or the two internal states. It is possible to prevent the player from being inadvertently informed that it is not. The present configuration can also be applied to the tenth embodiment.

The internal state is notified for the first closing of the front door 12 after the power is turned on.

In this case, the internal state notification can be executed in response to the operation of closing the front door 12 when the power is turned on. Since such an operation is basically performed only during the period before the opening of the hall, it is possible to prevent the internal state notification from being performed in front of the player.

<12th Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, the internal state notification notifies that the two sheets are not in the internal state, but in the present embodiment, the power-on notification is configured to notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state. There is. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137.

<Main processing>
The main process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 135. This process is executed by the CPU 181 of the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the main process of FIG. 63. In FIG. 135, the same process as the main process of FIG. 63 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the main process according to the present embodiment, the internal state notification process of step S5606 (FIG. 63) is omitted, and the function of the process is incorporated into the power-on notification process of step S7701. The power-on notification process of step S7701 is executed as a part of the periodic process in the main process, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Power-on notification processing>
The power-on notification process in step S7701 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 136.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the first notification flag or the second notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The first notification flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first power-on notification described later is being executed, and the second notification flag is for executing the second power-on notification described later. This is for the CPU 181 to grasp.

If none of the notification flags are set, it is determined in step S7802 whether or not a power recovery command has been received as the current reception command. If the power recovery command has not been received, the power-on notification process ends as it is.

If the power recovery command has been received, the process proceeds to step S7803, and it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open. This determination is performed by determining whether or not a door opening command has been received from the main control device 101. In some cases, the power recovery command and the door opening command are not transmitted at the same time, and a time lag occurs between the transmission of the power recovery command and the transmission of the door opening command. In that case, a predetermined monitoring period is set in consideration of the time lag, and after receiving the power recovery command, it is determined whether or not the door opening command is received within the monitoring period.

When it is determined in step S7803 that the front door 12 is open, it is presumed that the power is turned on by operating the power switch 71, not recovering from the power failure. In this case, the process proceeds to step S7804 to grasp the BB state and the internal state. Each of these states is grasped based on the internal state information and the BB state information included in the power recovery command from the main control device 101.

In step S7805, it is determined whether or not the state is the first BB state or the second BB state based on the grasping result of step S7804. If it is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S7806, and it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S7804 is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states).

If it is determined that the second BB combination has been won, or if a negative determination is made in step S7803 (when the front door 12 is not opened), the process proceeds to step S7807. The case where the front door 12 is not opened means that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on without operating the power switch 71, for example, when the power is restored from a power failure that occurred during the business hours of the game hall. It means that.

In step S7807, the setting process is performed so that the first power-on notification is performed as the power-on notification. The first power-on notification is to notify that the power of the slot machine 10 has been turned on. As the first power-on notification, a power-on display (first power-on display), which is a visual notification, and a power-on notification sound (first power-on notification sound), which is an auditory notification, are output. The first power-on display is performed by using the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63, and the output of the second power-on notification sound is performed by using the speakers 64a to 64n. Specific examples of each of these notifications will be described later.

Further, in step S7807, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the first power-on notification. This notification period determines the upper limit execution period of the first power-on notification, and the first power-on notification ends when the elapsed period from the start of the notification reaches the above-mentioned notification period. In the following step S7808, the first notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the power-on notification process is terminated.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S7805 (either in the first BB state or the second BB state), or if a negative judgment is made in step S7806 (if it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state), the process proceeds to step S7809. , The setting process is performed so that the second power-on notification is performed as the power-on notification.

The second power-on notification is for notifying that the power of the slot machine 10 has been turned on and that the two machines are not in the internal state. As the second power-on notification, a power-on display (second power-on display), which is a visual notification, and a power-on notification sound (second power-on notification sound), which is an auditory notification, are output. Of these, the power-on display is performed using the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63. At that time, on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, a notification image having a mode different from that of the first power-on display is displayed. Further, the upper lamp unit 63 is also set so that the lamp unit 63 emits light in a light emitting mode different from that of the first power-on display. Further, the output of the second power-on notification sound is performed by using the speakers 64a to 64n, and the sound at that time is different from the above-mentioned first power-on notification sound. Specific examples of each of these notifications will be described later.

Further, in step S7809, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the second power-on notification. This notification period determines the upper limit execution period of the second power-on notification, and the second power-on notification ends when the elapsed period from the start of the notification reaches the above-mentioned notification period. The length of the notification period for the second power-on notification is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, the same length as the notification period for the first power-on notification in step S7807. In the following step S7810, the second notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the power-on notification process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7801 (when the first notification flag or the second notification flag is set), that is, when the first power-on notification or the second power-on notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S7811. , Determines whether the set notification flag is the second notification flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7811, that is, if the second power-on notification is being executed, it is determined in step S7812 whether or not the notification period set in step S7809 has elapsed.

If the notification period has not elapsed, it is determined in step S7813 whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command. If the second BB winning command has not been received, the power-on notification process is terminated as it is.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S7812 (when the notification period has elapsed) or when the affirmative judgment is made in step S7813 (when the second BB winning command is received), the second power-on notification is sent in step S7814. The auxiliary display unit 65, the upper lamp unit 63, and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to end. In the following step S7815, the second notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared.

In step S7816, it is determined whether or not the notification period has elapsed. When the notification period has elapsed, that is, when the second power-on notification has ended due to the elapse of the notification period, the power-on notification process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the notification period has not elapsed, that is, if the second BB winning command has been received before the notification period has elapsed, the power-on notification is switched from the second power-on notification to the first power-on notification. The process proceeds to step S7807. In step S7807, the first power-on notification is set to be executed during the remaining period of the notification period set in step S7809.

When a negative determination is made in step S7811 (when the second notification flag is not set), it means that the first power-on notification is being executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S7817, and it is determined whether or not the notification period set in step S7807 has elapsed. If the notification period has not passed, the power-on notification process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the notification period has elapsed, in step S7818, the auxiliary display unit 65, the upper lamp unit 63, and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to end the first power-on notification. In the following step S7819, the first notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared, and then the power-on notification process is terminated.

<About the flow of power-on notification>
The flow of the power-on notification will be described with reference to FIG. 137.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the power-on notification is executed. At this time, when the second BB combination is in the winning state (two internal states), the first power-on notification is performed as the power-on notification. In the first power-on notification, the first power-on display using the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63 and the output of the first power-on notification sound using the speakers 64a to 64n are performed.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the first power-on display, a message display A such as "power is turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification image for notifying that the power is turned on. At the same time, the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in the emission color A (for example, red). Further, in the output of the first power-on notification sound, a notification sound A such as "power is turned on" is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n as a voice notification notifying that the power has been turned on.

The output of the first power-on display and the first power-on notification sound ends when a predetermined predetermined period (notification period) elapses. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is closed during the execution of each of these notifications, and when the front door 12 is closed, each of these notifications is terminated. At that time, the notification may be terminated by closing the front door 12 instead of the elapse of the notification period (in other words, the notification continues while the front door 12 is open), or the notification period may elapse. And the closure of the front door 12 may be determined together. As such a configuration, the notification is terminated on condition that the front door 12 is closed before the notification period elapses, and when the notification period elapses, the notification is terminated even if the front door 12 is not closed. Is conceivable.

Further, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, if the second BB combination is not in the winning state (not in the internal state of the two machines), the power-on notification is a second power-on different from the first power-on notification. Notification is performed. In the second power-on notification, the second power-on display using the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63 and the output of the second power-on notification sound using the speakers 64a to 64n are performed.

Here, in the case of the non-winning state of the second BB combination, the non-internal state in which neither the first BB combination nor the second BB combination is won, the three-card internal state in which the first BB combination is won, and There is a first BB state or a second BB state. In the present embodiment, the mode of the second power-on display and the second power-on notification sound is different for each of these states.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the non-internal state, as the second power-on display, for example, a message display B such as "The power has been turned on. It is a non-internal state" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Is displayed in. This message display B is a notification image indicating that the power has been turned on and that it is in a non-internal state. In addition to the above display, in the second power-on display, the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in a light emitting color B (for example, blue) different from the light emitting color A in the case where the two lamps are in the internal state. In the output of the second power-on notification sound, for example, a notification sound B such as "The power has been turned on. It is in a non-internal state" (a voice notifying that the power has been turned on and that it is in a non-internal state). Is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

When the 3 sheets are in the internal state, as the second power-on display, for example, a message display C such as "The power is turned on. The 3 sheets are in the internal state" (when the power is turned on and the 3 sheets are in the internal state The notification image of the existence) is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in the emission color C (for example, yellow). In addition, in the output of the second power-on notification sound, for example, a notification sound C (notifying that the power has been turned on and that the three sheets are in the internal state) such as "The power has been turned on. The three sheets are in the internal state" is notified. Audio) is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

In the case of the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, as the second power-on display, for example, a message display D such as "The power is turned on. It is a zero bonus state" (power is turned on and the number of medals is increased or decreased. The notification image of the BB state in which the above is not generated) is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp unit 63 is driven and controlled so as to emit light in the emission color D (for example, green). In addition, in the output of the second power-on notification sound, for example, a notification sound D such as "The power has been turned on. It is in a zero bonus state" (the power has been turned on and the medal has not increased or decreased in the BB state. Sound) is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n.

The output of the second power-on display and the second power-on notification sound ends when a predetermined predetermined period (notification period) elapses. However, if the player shifts to the winning state of the second BB combination (internal state of two cards) before the elapse of the period, in other words, when the non-winning state of the second BB combination ends, each of these notifications is sent to the first power source. It is switched to the on display and the first power on notification sound. The first power-on notification after this switching is performed using the rest of the notification period.

Similar to the case of the first power-on notification, the second power-on display and the output of the second power-on notification sound are terminated when the front door 12 is closed instead of or in addition to the elapse of the notification period. May be.

The power-on display and the power-on notification sound described above are merely examples, and are not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 137. For example, in the second power-on display, a notification image indicating that the power has been turned on (such as "the power has been turned on") and a predetermined pattern image corresponding to each state such as a non-internal state or a three-sheet internal state are displayed. (For example, an image imitating a star in the non-internal state, an image imitating a heart in the case of three internal states, etc.) may be displayed. Further, the upper lamp unit 63 may also emit light in place of or in addition to the difference in emission color with a light emission pattern (a plurality of types of light emission patterns having different blinking presence / absence, blinking interval, etc.) corresponding to each state. good.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, it is determined whether or not the two machines are in the internal state. When it is determined, the second power-on notification is executed.

Since the power switch 71 can be operated to turn on the power of the slot machine 10 only to the hall employees, this configuration makes it possible to notify the internal state in the presence of the hall employees. can. As a result, it is possible to preferably notify the hall employee that the two-sheet internal state is not present, and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a situation where the two-sheet internal state is not present.

Further, in this configuration, since it is notified that the two sheets are not in the internal state due to the difference in the notification mode in the power-on notification, the hall employee can notify both that the power is turned on and that the two sheets are not in the internal state by the notification of 1. You can inform the members. At this time, since it is possible to notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state by using the notification period of the power-on notification, the work of adjusting the period as in the case of performing each of these notifications separately becomes unnecessary, and the notification design It becomes possible to reduce the work load.

When the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open, and if the front door 12 is not opened, the execution of the second power-on notification is restricted and the first power-on notification is sent. It was configured to be executed.

The power to be turned on to the slot machine 10 is not limited to the case where the power switch 71 is operated, but after the supply of external power to the game hall is cut off due to a power failure, the supply of external power is resumed by the restoration of the power transmission equipment. It also happens in some cases. In the case of power-on due to recovery from such a power failure, since there is a possibility that a player is near the slot machine 10, a second power-on notification for hall employees is performed in front of the player. There is a risk.

At that time, in the case of turning on the power by recovering from the power failure, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the front door 12 closed, so that the front door 12 is opened when the power is turned on. Is set as the execution target of the second power-on notification, so that the power-on due to the recovery from the power failure can be excluded and the second power-on notification can be executed. As a result, it is suppressed that the internal state notification is performed in front of the player, and when the player sees the internal state notification, the notification becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, or the two internal states. It is possible to prevent the player from being inadvertently informed that it is not.

The configuration is such that when two sheets shift to the internal state during execution of the second power-on notification, the first power-on notification is switched.

In order to properly notify that the power has been turned on, it is preferable to secure a certain length as the notification period. Under such circumstances, for example, if the internal state of two cards shifts to the internal state during the execution of the second power-on notification, and the notification is terminated accordingly, there is a concern that the power-on notification period may be shortened. On the contrary, if the second power-on notification is continued as it is even if the transition to the two-sheet internal state occurs, the hall employee may not be able to grasp the transition to the two-sheet internal state. In this regard, according to this configuration, it is possible to notify that the two sheets have transitioned to the internal state while continuing the notification corresponding to the power-on, so that the period for the power-on notification and the notification of the transition to the two-sheet internal state can be secured. It becomes possible to make them compatible with each other.

When the second power-on notification is switched to the first power-on notification, the first power-on notification after the switching is executed within the range not exceeding the remaining period of the notification period.

For example, if the power-on notification period becomes too long, when a hall employee moves to the inspection work of the next slot machine, the power-on notification executed by that slot machine and the slot machine that was inspected immediately before are used. There is a concern that the notification may be difficult to understand because it overlaps with the power-on notification. In such a case, the inspection work of the next slot machine may be started after the power-on notification of the immediately preceding slot machine is completed, but this may increase the time required for the inspection and reduce the workability. ..

In this respect, in this configuration, since the first power-on notification after switching ends when the notification period set corresponding to the previous second power-on notification elapses, the first from the second power-on notification becomes the first. After switching to the power-on notification, it is suppressed that the notification period for the first power-on notification is added as it is. As a result, it is suppressed that the total period of the first second power-on notification and the first first power-on notification is longer than the initially set notification period, and the power-on notification period becomes excessively long. Can be avoided.

<13th Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the internal state notification is performed mainly when the setting change operation is completed or the power is turned on, but in the present embodiment, the internal state notification is performed mainly when the front door 12 is closed. It is configured to be used. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the present embodiment, the sub control device 81 is provided with an RTC (real-time clock) 321 that outputs time information. The RTC 321 is connected to the input / output port of the CPU 181 and the time information output from the RTC 321 is input to the CPU 181. The RTC321 has a backup power supply. As a result, the passage of time can be managed even when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off.

A period setting operation unit 322 is connected to the input side of the sub control device 81 as an operation unit for setting the target period for internal state notification. By operating the period setting operation unit 322, it is possible to set the period during which the execution of the internal state notification is permitted by designating the time. The period setting operation unit 322 is arranged inside the slot machine 10 such as the front surface portion of the sub control device 81 (the back surface portion of the front door 12) and the inside of the housing 11, and can be operated by hall employees. It has become. The target period set by the period setting operation unit 322 is assumed to be a predetermined period outside the business hours of the game hall. For example, from about 11:00 pm to about 9:00 am the next day. It is conceivable that a predetermined time range will be specified.

Although not shown, a target period display unit is provided so that the target period set by the period setting operation unit 322 can be visually confirmed. The target period display unit is connected to the CPU 181 and the period (time) specified by the operation of the period setting operation unit 322 and the current target period set in the CPU 181 are displayed on the target period display unit. .. The target period display unit is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized when the front door 12 is opened, and specifically, the target period display unit is provided on the back surface portion of the front door 12 (for example, on the sub control device 81) or inside the housing 11. ing. Therefore, basically, only hall employees can visually recognize the displayed contents of the target period table.

<Internal status notification processing>
The internal state notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139. This process is a process for performing an internal state notification, which is a notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state. This process is executed in step S5606 of the main process (FIG. 63) in the sub control device 81, and is executed in place of the internal state notification process of FIG. 65.

First, in step S8001, it is determined whether or not the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If the internal state notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8002, and it is determined whether or not the door closing command has been received as the current reception command. If the door closing command has not been received, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the door closing command is received, the time information output from RTC321 is acquired in step S8003. In step S8004, the time (current time) indicated by the time information acquired in step S8003 belongs to the target period of internal state notification (period that allows execution of internal state notification) set by the period setting operation unit 322. Judge whether or not. If the current time is outside the target period, the internal status notification process is terminated as it is.

If the current time is within the target period, the process proceeds to step S8005 to grasp the BB state and the internal state. In addition to grasping these states based on the internal information and BB state information included in the power recovery command from the main control device 101, reception of various commands transmitted when the first BB combination or the second BB combination is won, etc. This is performed based on the history and the setting status of various flags set in the various flag storage areas 183a.

In step S8006, it is determined whether or not the state is the first BB state or the second BB state based on the grasping result of step S8005. If it is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S8007, and it is determined whether or not the internal state grasped in step S8005 is the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states). If it is determined that the second BB combination is in the winning state, the internal state notification process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the second BB combination is not in the winning state, or if it is determined affirmatively in step S8006 (in either the first BB state or the second BB state), the internal state display setting process is performed in step S8008. Further, in step S8008, a notification period is set as a period for continuing the internal state display. The internal state display ends when the elapsed period from the start of the display reaches the notification period.

In the following step S8009, the setting process of the internal state notification sound is performed. Specifically, the sound data of the internal state notification sound is set in the reproduced sound data storage area 189 of the RAM 183, and the output instruction to each sound IC 184a to 184n is set. The notification by the internal state notification sound is executed over the notification period set in step S8008. In step S8010, the internal state notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the internal state notification process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8001 (when the internal state flag is set), that is, if internal state notification (internal state display and internal state notification sound) is being executed, the process proceeds to step S8011 to notify the internal state. It is determined whether or not the elapsed period from the start of the above notification period has reached the above notification period. If the notification period has not elapsed, in step S8012, it is determined whether or not the second BB winning command has been received as the current reception command.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S8011 (when the notification period has elapsed) or the affirmative judgment is made in step S8012 (when the second BB winning command is received), the internal state notification is terminated in step S8013. The auxiliary display unit 65, the lower display unit 69, and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to do so. In step S8014, the internal state notification flag set in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared. After the execution of step S8014 or when a negative determination is made in step S8012 (when the second BB winning command has not been received), the internal state notification process ends.

In the present embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed within the target period of the internal state notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is in the first BB state or the second BB state, and whether or not the two doors are in the internal state. Internal status notification is executed based on the result. On the other hand, when the timing when the front door 12 is closed is outside the target period of the internal state notification, each of the above determinations is not performed and the internal state notification is not executed. The front door 12 may be opened and closed while the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off, but in this case, the internal information notification process shown in FIG. 139 does not start, so that the internal state notification is performed. No.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the front door 12 is closed, it is determined whether or not the two doors are in the internal state, and when the front door 12 is not in the internal state, the internal state notification is executed.

Since the front door 12 can be opened and closed only by the hall employees, the internal state can be notified in the presence of the hall employees by this configuration. As a result, it is possible to preferably notify the hall employee that the two-sheet internal state is not present, and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a situation where the two-sheet internal state is not present.

The internal state notification is executed not when the front door 12 is opened but when the front door 12 is closed.

For example, in a configuration in which the internal state notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened, the door opening notification and the internal state notification overlap, and it is considered that the adjustment is required when designing the notification. In this respect, according to this configuration, since such duplication itself can be avoided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the notification design.

Further, the execution timing of the internal state notification can be optimized by performing the internal state notification when the front door 12 is closed. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), it is necessary to execute the combination lottery to win the second BB combination, so the front door 12 opens. Even if the internal status notification is executed in this situation, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. In this regard, in this configuration in which the internal state notification is executed after waiting for the front door 12 to be closed, the internal state notification is performed after the non-winning state of the second BB combination can be changed to the winning state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hall employee that the two sheets are not in the internal state at a suitable timing.

It is determined whether or not the closing timing of the front door 12 is within the preset notification target period, and if it is within the notification target period, the internal state notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, by setting the period before the opening of the hall as the notification target period, it is possible to execute the internal state notification for the case where the front door 12 is closed before the opening of the hall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the internal state notification from being performed in front of the player.

Based on the time information from the RTC321, the time when the front door 12 is closed is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the grasped time belongs to the notification target period.

In this case, since the notification target period can be determined using the time, the notification target period can be easily set, and the notification target period can be set according to the opening hours of each game hall and each business day. As a result, even when the opening time varies in each game hall or when special business days with different opening times are set, it is possible to suppress the notification of the internal state in front of the player.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value is the transition to the second AT mode, but if it is advantageous for the player (in other words, for the player). It is not particularly limited as long as it can be an opportunity to accumulate total points). For example, if the award points have not reached the award grant value, the second AT mode transition lottery will not be performed at the end of the first AT mode, while if the total points have reached the award grant value, the award will be given. As a result, the second AT mode transition lottery may be performed at the end of the first AT mode. In this case, the winning probability in the transition lottery may be the same as the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first AT mode (the second AT mode transition lottery performed when a specific combination in the first AT mode is won). The configuration may be such that the probability of transition to the second AT mode is increased by giving preferential treatment to the transition lottery during the first AT mode.

Further, even in a situation where the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, the second AT mode transition lottery may be performed at the end of the first AT mode. In this case, the winning probability in the second AT mode transition lottery when the total points have reached the privilege grant value is more favorable than the second AT mode transition lottery in the situation where the total points have not reached the privilege grant value. It is good to say.

Further, as a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value, the withdrawal of the first AT mode may be given preferential treatment. Specifically, when the first AT mode ends or after the total points have reached the privilege grant value, the mode (pull-back zone) in which the expectation of transition to the first AT mode is high is entered. The mode is configured to continue for a predetermined number of games or until a predetermined end condition (such as winning a fall lottery) is satisfied. As a mode in which the expectation of transition to the 1st AT mode is high, the pullback of the 1st AT mode is confirmed, the 1st AT mode transition lottery is performed every game regardless of whether or not a small winning combination is won or the winning combination, or the normal mode. Then, the winning combination that does not trigger the transition to the 1st AT mode becomes the transition trigger in the pullback special zone, and the probability of winning each winning combination in the 1st AT mode is higher than in the normal mode (FIG. 30). A configuration that may be set is conceivable.

In addition, even if the 1st AT mode ends when the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, the total points reach the privilege grant value with a configuration that allows the player to move to the pullback zone of the 1st AT mode. When the first AT mode ends in the present state, the transition probability (pull-back probability) to the first AT mode in the pull-back zone may be given preferential treatment as compared with the case where the first AT mode is not reached.

Further, instead of or in addition to the pullback of the first AT mode, the mode (pullback zone) in which the degree of expectation for transition to the second AT mode is high may be set when the second AT mode is terminated or after the second AT mode is terminated. In this case, the transition to the pullback zone of the 2nd AT mode may be a privilege, or even if the 2nd AT mode ends when the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, the transition to the pullback zone of the 2nd AT mode is performed. If the second AT mode ends while the total points have reached the privilege grant value, the probability of transition to the second AT mode in the pullback zone (pullback probability) is higher than when the total points have not been reached. ) May be given preferential treatment.

In addition, as a privilege when the total points reach the privilege grant value, the number of games in the first AT mode or the second AT mode may be added, or the number of sets may be added. good.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the point awarding opportunity is not provided during the first AT mode, but the point awarding opportunity is provided during the first AT mode so that the total points can be increased after the start of the first AT mode. May be. In this case, even if the first AT mode is started when the total points have not reached the privilege grant value, the total points can be increased to the privilege grant value during the game of the first AT mode, so that the total points are the privilege grant value. The first AT mode can be played with one of the goals of reaching the goal, and the range of ways to enjoy the first AT mode can be expanded. In addition, as a configuration provided at the point awarding opportunity in the first AT mode, for example, a configuration capable of shifting to a special mode (for example, a special zone in which the addition of the number of AT games is given preferential treatment) that is advantageous when a specific role is won is possible. Then, if a specific combination is won but the special mode transition lottery is not won, points may be given by the main control device 101.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, an advantageous section is illustrated as a specific state, but a gaming state other than the advantageous section may be set as a specific state as long as the total points are initialized by the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this case, the total points may be initialized when the gaming state other than the advantageous section ends, or the total points may be initialized when the initialization conditions other than the end of the state are satisfied.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized at the end of the advantageous section, but the total points are initialized in the middle of the advantageous section due to the establishment of initialization conditions other than the end of the advantageous section. It may be configured as such.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the initial value when the total points are initialized is set to 0 points, but the value may be 1 or more, which is less than the total points before initialization. Since the initialization process can be regarded as a process for reducing the total points, the initialization process may be rephrased as a reduction process.

In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a reduction trigger for reducing the total points is provided separately from the initialization. For example, in the case of initialization, the total points become 0 points, but in the reduction process, a predetermined value may be subtracted from the total points at that time to reduce the total points. In that case, the holding points may be held both at the time of executing the initialization process and at the time of executing the reduction process, or the holding points are held at the time of executing the reduction process, but at the time of executing the initialization process. May not hold the holding point, or vice versa.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the total points are initialized when the advantageous section ends, but the total points may be initialized after the advantageous section ends. Specifically, in the section display second process (FIG. 46), a process of initializing the total points after clearing the advantageous section flag may be executed. Further, the above initialization may be performed in the next game after the advantageous section is completed.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the total points may not be initialized even if the advantageous section ends. That is, when the total points reach the privilege grant value, when the power is cut off (when power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 or when the power switch 71 of the slot machine 10 is turned off), or an artificial operation (RAM). The total points may not be initialized except when the data in the RAM 106 is erased by the clear operation).

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the first AT mode is configured as a pseudo bonus, but the first AT mode does not have to be a pseudo bonus.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the second AT mode via the first AT mode, but instead of or in addition to this, the mode shifts to the second AT mode without passing through the first AT mode. It may be a configuration to obtain.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of point granting triggers are provided in the main control device 101, but the number of the triggers does not have to be multiple, and the point granting trigger can be established only once in the advantageous section. May be.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the point awarding opportunity is established when an undesired situation occurs for the player, but the conditions for establishing the point awarding opportunity are not limited to this. For example, when a specific pattern combination such as a chance eye is stopped on reels 32L to 32R, the above-mentioned granting opportunity is established, and when a predetermined combination is won, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to give points, and the lottery is won. If this is the case, the above-mentioned granting opportunity may be established.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, even if the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous section (the earlier point awarding opportunity) is more likely to be given than the later or later awarding opportunity. good. For example, the probability of giving points at the start of the advantageous section may be set to 70%, and the probability of giving points at the time of 200 games may be set to 40%. With such a configuration, in the first to fourth embodiments, the period until the current total points catch up with the holding points can be shortened, and the execution of the point effect is restricted. It is possible to prevent the period of the state from becoming prolonged. Further, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, since the advantageous section can be started by increasing the effectable point, it becomes easier to execute the grant suggestion effect at the beginning of the advantageous section, and after the end of the advantageous section. A player who has continued the game in a wait-and-see manner can function as an opportunity to continue the game.

It is conceivable that the start of the advantageous section will not be the trigger for giving points, but in that case, the trigger for giving points after the start of the advantageous section (preferably the first) will be later or later. It is preferable to configure the system so that the points to be granted are more likely to be granted than the subsequent granting opportunity.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be configured in which, at the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous section, a larger awarding point than the awarding opportunity after or after that is likely to be given. For example, in the first to fourth embodiments described above, at the point awarding opportunity at the start of the advantageous section, the probability of awarding 3 points or more is higher than the probability of awarding 2 points or less. On the other hand, the configuration may be the opposite when the point is given at the time of 200 games. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the configuration of (12) above. In a configuration in which the start of the advantageous section is not used as the point granting trigger, the points granted at the earlier (preferably the first) point granting trigger after the start of the advantageous section is larger than the later or later granting trigger. It is preferable to have a configuration in which is easily given.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, even if the point awarding opportunity is established, the awarding point is not given (when 0 points are selected by the point awarding lottery), but the point awarding opportunity is established. In this case, one or more points may be given without fail.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of granting points and the probability of selecting each number of points are different depending on the trigger of grant, but at least one of them is different according to the total points. May be. For example, when the total points are not less than the predetermined value, the points to be given may be more easily given than when the total points are less than the predetermined value.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the point suggestion effect and the grant suggestion effect are executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, but these effects may be a light emission effect using a light emitting means such as an LED. Alternatively, it may be an accessory effect using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the movable effect. Further, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be, for example, auditory using sound effects. This also applies to the continuous production according to the sixth embodiment. Further, the total suggestion effect may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, or may be configured by an auditory effect using sound effects.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the point suggestion effect and the grant suggestion effect are executed only in the game in which the grant points are given, but the point suggestion effect and the grant suggestion effect may be executed in other games. For example, it may be executed in a game after the game in which the given points are given, or may be executed over a plurality of games including the game in which the given points are given.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the accumulated amount of points may be clearly indicated by a numerical value or the like by a point suggestion effect or a total suggestion effect. In addition, the amount of points given may be clearly indicated by a numerical value or the like in the giving suggestion effect.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the addition of the number of games in the CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode is illustrated as a specific event advantageous to the player, but the specific event is not limited to these, for example, ART. It may be a mode, a bonus game, or the like.

(19) In the first embodiment described above, the point suggestion effect suggests that the points to be given and the current total points are given, but the points to be given are given and the points are given. It may be configured to execute the grant point suggestion effect such as suggesting the size (grant amount) of the granted points. In this case, when the total points (accumulated points) are less than or equal to the holding points, the execution of the given point suggestion effect is restricted, and when the total points are larger than the holding points, the execution of the given point suggestion effect is allowed. It is good to do it.

Further, while suggesting the current total points, the total point suggestion effect that does not function as a suggestion that the points have been given may be performed. In this case, when the total points (accumulated points) are less than or equal to the holding points, the execution of the total point suggestion effect is restricted, and when the total points are larger than the holding points, the execution of the total point suggestion effect is allowed. It is good to do it. At that time, the execution trigger of the total point suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be the point granting trigger, and the total point suggestion effect may be executed when an opportunity other than the point granting trigger is established.

(20) In the first embodiment described above, the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted when the total points (accumulated points) are less than or equal to the holding points, but the points are when the total points are smaller than the holding points. The configuration may be such that the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted. That is, when the total points and the holding points have the same value, the point suggestion effect may be allowed to be executed. This also applies to the fourth embodiment, and the configuration may allow the execution of the point suggestion effect when the accumulated points are equal to or greater than the corresponding points.

(21) In the first embodiment described above, when the total points (accumulation points) become larger than the holding points, the point suggestion effect is allowed to be executed, but a predetermined value (for example, 1 point) is set from the holding points. ) May be subtracted to allow the execution of the point suggestion effect when the total points are larger than the subtraction value. Also, if the holding points are small, the gap with the initial value of the total points is not so large, and it is expected that the period until the total points catch up with the holding points will be short, while the larger the holding points, the more the total points will be. It is assumed that the gap with the initial value becomes large, and the period during which the execution of the point suggestion effect is restricted tends to be prolonged. Based on this, in the situation where the holding points are less than the specific value (for example, 3 points), the execution of the point suggestion effect is allowed when the total points are larger than the holding points, and in the situation where the holding points are more than the specific value, the holding points are allowed to be executed. When the total points become larger than the subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the holding points (for example, 1 point), the point suggestion effect may be allowed to be executed.

(22) In the first embodiment described above, when the point suggestion effect is restricted (when the total points (accumulated points) are less than the holding points), the effect is not executed, but the effect is not restricted. The effect may be less likely to be executed than in the case (the probability of executing the point suggestion effect is lower in the restricted state than in the non-restricted state). In the configuration in which the point suggestion effect is not executed in the restricted state, the player's interest in the points may be diluted when the restricted period is prolonged, but according to this configuration, such inconvenience is caused. Occurrence can be suppressed.

(23) In the first embodiment described above, the execution lottery for whether or not to execute the effect is not performed when the point suggestion effect is restricted, but the execution lottery is performed when the effect is restricted. After that, the execution of the point suggestion effect may be restricted regardless of the result. This also applies to the fourth embodiment described above. When the total points (accumulated points) are less than the corresponding points, a lottery for executing the point suggestion effect is performed, and then the point suggestion effect is performed regardless of the result. It may be configured to restrict execution.

(24) In the first embodiment, the restricted state is released based on the total points (accumulated points) being larger than the holding points, but the conditions for releasing the restricted state are limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the restriction state may be released based on the number of games since the execution of the previous point suggestion effect becomes the predetermined number of games.

(25) In the second embodiment, the holding point may not be used (not derived). That is, the subsequent point suggestion effect may be executed by using the difference between the actual total points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect. For example, when the actual total points are 3 points and the effect of 2 points is executed as the previous point suggestion effect, the points suggested to the player by the previous point suggestion effect are larger than the actual total points. Based on the small number (in other words, the difference value is 1 or more), even if the total points do not change, the later point suggestion effect (the effect corresponding to the total points of 3 points) is performed. In this case, the following effects are expected.

In a game using points, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is preferable to increase the chances of giving points, increase the frequency of point suggestion effects, and increase the player's interest in points. However, on the other hand, if the number of points awarding opportunities is increased, the difficulty of reaching the awarding value becomes lower, and as a result, the degree of the award must be kept low, which may reduce the appeal to the player. .. In other words, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of point suggestion effects, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using points will be impaired. In this regard, according to the configuration of (25), the point suggestion effect can be performed based on the difference between the total points and the previous point suggestion effect even if the points are not actually given. Therefore, it is possible to expand the chances of executing the point suggestion effect without increasing the chances of giving points (in other words, without lowering the difficulty of reaching the privilege giving value). As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of notification and appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game while maintaining the degree of privilege.

In addition, in the configuration in which the holding points are not derived, the grant amount (the grant amount for one grant point) is suggested by the point suggestion effect based on the grant points for each time, and then the grant points for one time and the grant points for one time are used. The difference value from the point used in the previous point suggestion effect may be derived, and the later point suggestion effect may be executed based on the difference value. For example, when 2 points are given and 1 point is given as the first point suggestion effect, the actually given points and the previous point suggestion effect are used as the later point suggestion effect. The effect of one point, which is the difference from the amount used, is executed. In this case, it is possible to execute the point suggestion effect later even if the points are not given, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the point suggestion effect.

(26) In the second embodiment, when the difference value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 1), the execution control of the point effect is performed without being based on the difference (affirmative determination is made in step S2604 of FIG. 78). The configuration is such that the execution lottery of the point suggestion effect is performed with the same winning probability as the case flow), but the effect execution lottery is performed by the execution control of the point effect based on the difference value and the execution control of the point effect not based on the difference value. The winning probabilities may be different. Specifically, in the former case, the winning probability may be set so that the point suggestion effect is more easily executed than in the latter case. With such a configuration, the difference value derived by the previous point suggestion effect is positively utilized, and it is possible to preferably produce a feeling that the total points have increased.

(27) In the second embodiment, the probability that the point suggestion effect of the used point smaller than the holding point is executed may be different depending on the size of the holding point. Specifically, when the holding point is the first value (for example, 4 points), the use is smaller than the holding point as compared with the case where the holding point is a second value (for example, 2 points) smaller than the first value. The configuration may be such that the point suggestion effect of the points can be easily executed.

By making the previous point suggestion effect correspond to a value smaller than the holding point, it tends to suggest total points where the earlier point suggestion effect is too small for the convenience of securing a margin for the later point suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a concern that it will not be possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game. In this respect, in this configuration, the larger the holding point is, the easier it is to select the type corresponding to the value smaller than the holding point, and it is easier to secure the difference for the later point suggestion effect. It is possible to preferably suppress that the point suggestion effect of is poor. Therefore, it is possible to suggest a corresponding total point in both the earlier point suggestion effect and the later point suggestion effect, and it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game.

In addition, as described in (25) above, the holding points are not derived, and the later point suggestion effect is executed by using the difference between the actual total points and the given points and the points used in the previous point suggestion effect. In that case, it is preferable that the point suggestion effect of the points used smaller than the total points or the like is more easily executed than the case where the actual total points or the like are smaller.

(28) In the second embodiment, the point suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times based on the difference value derived by the point suggestion effect. That is, after executing the first point suggestion effect using a part of the difference value, the suggestion effect may be executed for the second point using the rest of the difference value.

(29) In the third embodiment, the holding points are held when the total points (accumulated points) after the given points are given at the end of the first AT mode are equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 3 points). However, regardless of the total points, the holding points may not be updated at the time of granting at the end of the first AT mode.

(30) In the third embodiment, the holding points may not be updated regardless of the point awarding trigger in the main control device 101. For example, it may be configured to switch whether or not to update the holding points according to the number of digested games or the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Initialize by shifting to a state where the update of retained points is restricted when there is a high possibility that the privilege grant value cannot be reached, such as when the number of games until the end of the advantageous section (initialization of total points) is small. It is possible to prevent the gap between the initial value of the total points and the holding points in the case of being excessively widened.

(31) In the third embodiment, when the difference between the current holding points and the initial value of the total points when initialized becomes a predetermined value or more, the update of the holding points is restricted. May be. According to this configuration, the gap between the holding points and the initial values of the total points can be suppressed to a predetermined value or less, and it is possible to suppress the extension of the restriction period of the point suggestion effect.

(32) In the third embodiment described above, the execution lottery for the point suggestion effect is performed when the retention points are not updated (the point suggestion effect can be executed), but the point suggestion is performed when the retention points are not updated. Execution of effect The lottery may not be performed, or even if it is performed, it may be forcibly not executed (point suggestion effect is not executed).

Further, when the holding points are not updated, the point suggestion effect type lottery may not be executed, and the point suggestion effect of the same type as the previous point suggestion effect may be executed. That is, the configuration may be such that the type of the point suggestion effect is determined when the holding point is not updated based on the type of the previous point suggestion effect.

(33) In the fifth embodiment, the points given and the subpoints are added to derive the effectable points. However, if the points that can be produced can be derived from a value larger than the points given, the points can be derived. Not limited. For example, a coefficient larger than 1 may be derived as a predetermined numerical value separately from the given points, and the points that can be produced may be derived by multiplying the given points by this coefficient. In addition, when deriving the directable points from the added value of the granted points and the sub points, it is possible to secure at least the numerical value of the sub points as the grantable points even if the granted points are not given, which suggests the granting. In that sense, it is preferable to use the configuration of the fifth embodiment because the effect can be executed.

(34) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the execution control of the grant suggestion effect is performed for each grant point (the configuration is such that the grant suggestion effect is executed based on the grant points for each grant). After that, sub-points may be added to the given points each time to derive the directable points, and the grant suggestion effect may be executed based on the derived directable points. In this case, the grant suggestion effect can be performed even when the grant points are not granted, and the grant suggestion effect can be performed by suggesting points larger than the actual grant amount. It becomes possible to preferably arouse the player's expectation for the arrival of.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, the sub-points are given at the start of the advantageous section, but the sub-points may be given when the directable points are equal to or less than a predetermined value. good. According to this configuration, in the situation where the given points are given at the start of the advantageous section, the given points are used as the directable points to execute the grant suggestion effect, and then the grant suggestive effect is executed to produce the points that can be produced. When the number decreases and becomes insufficient, the shortage can be supplemented by subpoints.

Further, a subpoint may be given in the middle of the advantageous section. Specifically, after the start of the advantageous section, a predetermined opportunity may be established to give subpoints. For example, in a configuration where the opportunity to give points is suppressed to some extent in order to secure a certain degree of difficulty for reaching the privilege grant value, points are not easily given in the middle or the end of the advantageous section. As a result of making it difficult to perform the grant suggestion effect, there is a concern that it will be difficult to maintain the player's interest in the points. In this respect, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect in the middle or the final stage of the advantageous section, and it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the points. As the above-mentioned predetermined opportunity, in addition to the fact that the points that can be produced are equal to or less than the predetermined value, the start timing of the advantageous section or the number of games from the previous suggestion effect of grant may be the predetermined number of games. ..

When subpoints are given in the middle of the advantageous section, the total points may be derived by giving subpoints to the cumulative addition value of the points given up to that point, that is, the total points.

(36) In the fifth embodiment, the point awarding opportunity may not be established at the start of the advantageous section, and then the subpoints may be given according to the first awarding opportunity in the advantageous section. In this case as well, it is possible to increase the frequency of the grant suggestion effect from the beginning of the advantageous section, as in the case of granting sub-points at the start of the advantageous section.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, a larger subpoint is more likely to be derived than when the larger number of points given at the start of the advantageous section (for example, 20 points) is smaller (for example, 10 points). However, the configuration may be such that a large subpoint is more easily derived than a case where the given point is smaller and larger. According to such a configuration, when the granted points are sufficient, the sub-points are made small to keep the gap from the actual total points small, while the granted points are small and the grant suggestion effect is produced. If it is not possible to execute or if sufficient execution frequency cannot be secured, the subpoint can be increased to make up for the shortage, and if the given points are small, the configuration is suitable for increasing the execution frequency of the given suggestion effect. can do.

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the sub-points are given only once in the advantageous section, but the sub-points may be given a plurality of times. In this case, sub-points may be given according to the timing of granting points, or may be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a game that is not the trigger for granting points. In addition, as a predetermined condition, when the grant points are not granted at the grant trigger, or when the value of the grant points is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the start timing of the advantageous section and the number of games from the previous grant suggestion effect are determined. It is conceivable that the number of games reaches a predetermined number, that a predetermined combination is won, that a point-giving lottery that triggers the winning of a predetermined combination is won, or that a specific pattern combination such as a chance eye is stopped on reels 32L to 32R. ..

(39) In the fifth embodiment described above, a lottery for granting subpoints is performed at the opportunity of granting subpoints, and subpoints are granted when the lottery for granting is won. , The sub-points may be always given when the sub-points are given.

(40) In the fifth embodiment, the sub control device 81 derives the sub points, but the main control device 101 derives the predetermined numerical information as the sub points separately from the assigned points. May be. In this case, the process of adding the predetermined numerical information to the given points may be performed by the sub control device 81 or the main control device 101.

(41) In the fifth embodiment, the subpoints may not be derived and the given points may be used as they are as the directable points. That is, the effectable points may be updated by subtracting the effected points of the executed grant suggestion effect from the effectable points derived from the grant points, and the subsequent grant suggestion effect may be executed based on the update result. .. In this case, the total points may not be given as sub points, and the total points (total value of the given points) may be used as they are as the total points.

(42) In the fifth embodiment, the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect differs depending on the type of point granting opportunity, but the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect may differ depending on the points that can be produced. good. Specifically, when the effectable points are the first value (for example, 20 points), the grant suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case where the second value (for example, 10 points) is smaller than the first value. The configuration may be easy. In this case, it is possible to reduce the effectable points that remain without being used for executing the grant suggestion effect, and it becomes possible to efficiently use the effectable points.

(43) In the fifth embodiment, the total points may be derived without giving subpoints. That is, the given suggestion effect may be executed based on the effectable points to which the subpoints are added, while the total suggestion effect may be executed based on the actual total points. When sub-points are used, since the mode of the grant suggestion effect or the total suggestion effect is selected by adding a numerical value different from the actual grant points, the points suggested by those effects are different from the actual total points. It is easy to occur. For the grant suggestion effect, the player can only indirectly predict the total points through the amount of each grant, while for the total suggestion effect, the player continues the game because the total points are directly suggested. It is easy to use as an index when deciding whether or not to do it, and it is expected that the influence on the game due to the deviation from the actual total points will be large. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to perform a total suggestion effect that matches the actual total points, while increasing the frequency of the effect by adding subpoints to the effectable points. ..

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the grant suggestion effect is executed based on the effectable points to which no subpoint is assigned, while the total suggestion effect is given subpoints to the actual total points. It may be configured to be executed based on the total points.

(44) In the fifth embodiment, the giving suggestion effect and the total suggestion effect are executed by different notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 for the former and upper lamp 63 for the latter). The same notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) may be used for execution.

(45) In the fifth embodiment, when the previous grant suggestion effect is executed, the effected points of the effect are subtracted from the effectable points, but the points are subtracted after the previous grant suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured to be used.

(46) In the fifth embodiment, the unique effected points are set for each type of the grant suggestion effect, but a uniform effected point may be set regardless of the type.

(47) In the fifth embodiment, a predetermined value (step S4804 in FIG. 94) for determining whether or not to execute the grant suggestion effect is given as a minimum necessary numerical value (step S4804 in FIG. 94). 5 points), but the above-mentioned predetermined value may be a value larger than the minimum required value.

(48) In the fifth embodiment described above, a plurality of types of total suggestion effects are associated with the number of points of total points, but the number of points of total points and the type of total suggestion effects are 1: 1. It may be configured as corresponding with. This also applies to the eighth embodiment in which the total points are derived based on the cumulative addition value of the produced points.

(49) In the sixth embodiment, the grant suggestion effect is executed in the final game of the continuous effect, but the grant suggestion effect may be executed after the continuous effect is completed. In this case, in order to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship with the continuous effect, it is advisable to execute the grant suggestion effect in the next game after the continuous effect is completed. At that time, when the next game is started or when the next game is started, such as when the start lever 41 is operated in the next game or when the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R is started, the grant suggestion effect may be performed. Then, for example, when the first stop operation is performed, the game may be performed at a predetermined timing in the middle of the next game, or when the final stop operation is performed, the next game ends or ends. In some cases, a grant suggestion effect may be performed.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the grant suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the execution of continuous continuous firing performed over a plurality of games, but the specific effect performed in one game It may be configured to execute the grant suggestion effect according to the execution. At that time, in order to raise the player's attention to the grant suggestion effect, it is preferable that the specific effect is an effect of notifying the player whether or not he / she has won a specific event (CZ mode, AT mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.

Further, the sub-control device 81 counts, for example, the previous grant suggestion effect, the previous grant trigger, the start timing of the advantageous section, and the number of games since the power is turned on, and the number of games is set to a predetermined number. The grant suggestion effect may be executed based on the predetermined processing being performed in the sub-control device 81, such as executing the grant suggestion effect when the result is reached.

(51) In the sixth embodiment, the grant suggestion effect is performed according to the execution of the pseudo precursor continuous effect, but the grant suggestion effect is performed according to the execution of the precursor continuous effect. May be good.

(52) In the sixth embodiment, the grant suggestion effect that is not based on the grant trigger may be executed according to the difference in the number of sheets. For example, if the above-mentioned grant suggestion effect is executed when the difference number is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the grant suggestion effect can be performed in a situation where the medals are likely to run out, and the player stops the game. It becomes possible to arouse the motivation to continue the game in a situation that tends to occur.

Further, the grant suggestion effect that is not based on the grant trigger may be executed according to the actual total points or total points. Specifically, when the actual total points or total points are equal to or more than the predetermined value, the above-mentioned grant suggestion effect is executed, or when the actual total points or total points are equal to or more than the predetermined value, or less than the predetermined value. The configuration may be such that the above-mentioned grant suggestion effect is more easily executed. According to such a configuration, when the total points approach the privilege grant value, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect can be increased, and the continuation of the game can be preferably promoted.

(53) In the seventh embodiment, the mode is shifted to the high probability mode based on the number of games, or the transition lottery is performed. The above-mentioned transition lottery may be performed based on the above. At that time, it is conceivable that the specific value is a numerical value capable of executing the grant suggestion effect for a plurality of times. According to this configuration, the high-probability mode can be continued for a period in which the grant suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, and the effect of the mode can be enhanced.

Further, it may be configured to shift to the high probability mode or perform a shift lottery based on the total points or the total points being equal to or higher than a predetermined value. At that time, if the predetermined value is set to a value close to the privilege grant value, the possibility of reaching the privilege grant value during the high probability mode increases, so that the high probability mode and the arrival at the privilege grant value are linked in the player. It becomes easier and it becomes possible to further enhance the attractiveness of the mode. Further, the above-mentioned predetermined value may be used as the privilege granting value. In this case, since the mode shifts to the high-probability mode while the privilege grant value has actually been reached, the frequency of the grant suggestion effect is increased to arouse the player's expectation, and then the arrival of the privilege grant value is notified. Will be possible.

(54) In the seventh embodiment, the high-probability mode transition lottery is performed in a game in which the point-giving opportunity is established, but the high-probability mode transition lottery is performed in a game different from the game in which the point-giving opportunity is established. It may be configured to be performed.

(55) In the seventh embodiment, the high-probability mode transition lottery is executed at the start of the game, but during the game (for example, when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed). Or at the end of the game (when the final stop operation is performed).

(56) In the seventh embodiment, the configuration has two types, a normal mode and a high probability mode. For example, the normal mode and the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect are higher than those of the normal mode and the normal mode. The configuration may have three or more types of states, such as having one high-probability mode and a second high-probability mode in which the execution probability of the grant suggestion effect is further increased.

(57) In the eighth embodiment described above, when the total points are equal to or greater than the privilege grant value in executing the total suggestion effect, the configuration is switched to the total suggestion effect according to the total points. When it is a small predetermined value or more, it may be configured to switch to the total suggestion effect according to the total points.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the first total points based on the cumulative addition value of the produced points and the second total points similar to the total points according to the fifth embodiment are derived and totaled. When the points are equal to or greater than the privilege grant value or greater than or equal to the predetermined value, the total suggestion effect corresponding to the second total points may be executed.

(58) In the eighth embodiment, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the total suggestion effect according to the number of times the grant suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, the total suggestion effect is executed when the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the number of executions of the grant suggestion effect is less than the predetermined number. However, the configuration may be such that the total suggestion effect can be easily executed. In this case, as the achievement of the grant suggestion effect increases and the total points increase, the total suggestion effect is actively executed, and it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation of the player who expects to reach the privilege grant value. It will be possible.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the setting key insertion hole 73 and the power switch 71 are exemplified as specific operation means provided at a position where the front door 12 can be operated when the front door 12 is opened. It may be a specific operating means. Further, a dedicated operation unit for determining whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state or executing the internal state notification may be provided, and this dedicated operation unit may be a specific operation means. The operation units such as the setting key insertion hole 73, the power switch 71, and the reset switch 72 may be provided not only on the inside of the housing 11 but also on the back side of the front door 12.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, two conditions, that is, the end of the notification period and the transition to the two-sheet internal state, are set as the end conditions of the internal state notification, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the internal state is satisfied. Although the configuration is such that the notification is terminated, only one of these conditions may be used as the termination condition for the internal state notification, or the internal status notification may be terminated when both of these conditions are satisfied.

(61) In each of the above-described embodiments, the internal state notification is executed when the determination result of whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state is the result of not being in the two-sheet internal state. The internal state notification may be executed when the result is that the two sheets are in the internal state. In this case, the internal state notification informs the hall employee that the two cards are in the internal state (a specified number of internal states different from the specified number performed in the normal game). Further, when the above-mentioned determination result is the result of not being in the two-sheet internal state, the first internal state notification is executed, and when the above-mentioned determination result is the result of being in the two-sheet internal state, the first internal state notification is performed. May be configured to execute a different second internal state notification.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, the internal state notification is executed by both the internal state display and the internal state notification sound, but the internal state notification may be performed only by the internal state display or the internal state notification. It may be done only by sound.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the priority is set between the notification by the internal state notification sound and the other notification by voice, but the internal state display and the other notification by the visual one are set. It may be configured to set the priority between and. In this case, the order of priority can be the same as that of the voice notification described in each of the above embodiments. For example, when the relationship between the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound in the first embodiment is followed, the door opening display is executed with priority over the internal state display.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the lower display unit 69 executes the internal state notification, but the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63 may execute the same as the power-on notification, the door opening notification, and the like. good. When the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the internal state, it may be clearly indicated that the two sheets are not in the internal state by means of characters or the like, or by displaying a predetermined symbol or pattern imitating a heart or a star, for example. It may not be specified that the two sheets are not in the internal state. In the latter case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the two cards are not in the internal state. Therefore, even if the internal state is notified in front of the player, the player can notify the internal state. It can be difficult to notice.

Further, when the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the internal state, the internal state display may be displayed darker or lighter than the power-on display, the door open display, or the like. Even with such a configuration, the internal state notification can be made inconspicuous.

If the internal state notification is executed on the same display unit as the power-on notification, the door opening notification, etc., the distinctiveness of each of these notifications deteriorates, and there is a concern that the notification becomes difficult to understand. From such a viewpoint, it is preferable to execute the internal state notification on a display unit different from the power-on notification, the door opening notification, and the like as in each of the above-described embodiments.

Further, a dedicated notification unit for internal status notification may be provided, and the internal status notification may be executed by the dedicated notification unit. At that time, the notification unit for internal status notification may be smaller in size than the auxiliary display unit 65 or the upper lamp unit 63 for executing power-on notification, door opening notification, etc., or may be arranged below them. Such as, it is preferable that the notification unit for internal state notification is less conspicuous than the auxiliary display unit 65 and the upper lamp unit 63. With such a configuration, even if the internal state notification is performed in front of the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the internal state notification.

(65) In each of the above embodiments, when another notification sound is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n in preference to the internal state notification sound, the internal state notification sound is set to wait for emission. After emitting both notifications, the volume of the internal state notification sound may be made lower than that of the other notification sounds to give priority. This also applies when the internal state notification sound is emitted in preference to other notification sounds. That is, it may be configured to give priority by lowering the volume of other notification sounds than the internal state notification sound. This configuration can also be applied to the following (90) to (92).

(66) In each of the above embodiments, the priority information is included in the sound data so that each notification sound and the priority are associated with each other. However, each notification sound is separated from the sound data. Priority information (priority data) may be set in correspondence with the above.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, the internal state notification (notification corresponding to the fact that the two sheets are not in the internal state) is terminated when the two sheets are changed to the internal state during the execution of the internal state notification, and then the two sheets are inside. The configuration is such that the notification regarding whether or not the state is in the state is not executed, but after the internal state notification is terminated by shifting to the internal state of the two sheets, the notification corresponding to the internal state of the two sheets is executed and the two sheets are in the internal state. It may be configured to positively notify that the change to the internal state is completed. This makes it possible for hall employees to more clearly understand that the two sheets are in the internal state.

This notification may be terminated when a predetermined predetermined period elapses or when a predetermined operating means is operated. In the latter configuration, considering that such an operation is performed after the change to the internal state of the two doors is completed (after the front door 12 is closed), the predetermined operating means is the front door 12 It is preferable to provide it on the front surface of the door. At that time, the operating means may be an existing operating means (for example, an effect switch 66, a settlement switch 59, or the like), or may be configured by a dedicated operating means.

(68) In each of the above embodiments, the sub-control device 81 performs the determination of whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state and the execution control of the internal state notification, but at least a part of each of these processes is performed. The configuration may be performed by the main control device 101. When the execution control of the internal state notification is performed by the main control device 101, the notification unit for which the internal state notification is performed may be directly connected to the main control device 101, or may be connected to the main control device 101 via the sub control device 81. May be connected.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the door opening sensor 27 is turned on when the front door 12 is open, but the door opening sensor 27 is turned on when the front door 12 is closed. It may be configured to be in a state. Further, the output of the door opening sensor 27 may be in the first on state corresponding to the opening of the front door 12, and may be in the second on state different from the first on state in response to the closing. That is, the door opening sensor 27 may be configured to detect both the open state and the closed state. In short, the door open sensor 27 may be configured to detect at least one of the open state and the closed state.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on so that the setting change is permitted, the off state of the setting key (setting key insertion hole 73) is grasped after the start lever 41 is operated. The setting change end command is sent to, but the setting change end command is sent based on the operation of the start lever 41 before the off state of the setting key is grasped or whether or not the setting key is in the off state. May be sent.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, the first RAM clearing process in step S18 is executed when both the on state of the setting key and the opening of the front door 12 are grasped when the power is turned on, but it is not always the case. It is not necessary to open the front door 12 as one of the execution conditions of the first RAM clear process, and the first RAM clear process may be executed when the ON state of the setting key is grasped at the time of turning on the power. This is because it can be estimated that the front door 12 is in the open state when the setting key is in the ON state. This also applies to the setting change process in step S19.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on or the setting is changed (when the setting key is turned on and the power is turned on), the door opening notification is not executed even if the front door 12 is opened. It may be configured. Specifically, when the opening of the front door 12 is grasped in a situation other than when the power is turned on or when the setting is changed (for example, when the open state is detected after a lapse of a predetermined period from the power on, or after the power is turned on. When the second and subsequent open states are detected), the door open notification is executed, and when the front door 12 is found to be open when the power is turned on or when the setting is changed (for example, the open state is set within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). When is detected, or when the first open state after the power is turned on is detected), the execution of the door open notification may be restricted. With such a configuration, in the first embodiment in which the end of the setting change is triggered by the internal state notification, and in the tenth embodiment in which the power-on is triggered by the internal state notification, It is possible to avoid duplication of internal status notification and door opening notification.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, an information signal indicating that the two machines are not in the internal state or the two machines are in the internal state is transmitted to the game hall through the external centralized terminal plate 121. It may be configured to output externally to the management control device HC. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify that the two cards are not in the internal state by both the internal state notification in the slot machine 10 and the external output to the management control device HC, and the game can be played in the state where the two cards are not in the internal state. It becomes possible to more preferably suppress the start.

(74) In each of the above embodiments, the door opening sensor 27 may be connected to the input side of the sub control device 81, and the sub control device 81 may determine whether or not the front door 12 is open. In this case, in the ninth and eleventh embodiments, the internal state notification may be performed based on the determination that the front door 12 is closed by the sub control device 81.

(75) In the first and ninth embodiments, the internal state information indicating whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state is included in the setting change end command and transmitted to the sub control device 81, but the setting change is started. It may be included in other commands such as a command and a power recovery command, or a dedicated command may be provided to notify whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state. Further, also in the eleventh and thirteenth embodiments described above, the internal state may be included in a command different from the power recovery command, and a dedicated command for notifying whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state may be provided. It may be provided. In these cases, when a dedicated command is used, the dedicated command may be sent triggered by the transmission of the setting change end command or the power recovery command, regardless of the transmission of the setting change end command or the power recovery command. , Execution timing of determination of whether or not the two doors are in the internal state after the power is turned on (at the end of the setting change in the first embodiment, the front door 12 is closed in the ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments. It may be transmitted at a predetermined timing (for example, a power-on timing, a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the power-on, etc.) in the period up to (hour).

(76) In the first embodiment described above, the internal status notification is executed when the setting change is completed, but when the setting change is allowed (when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on). Alternatively, the internal state notification may be executed when the setting is changed (when the reset switch 72 is operated in a state where the setting change is allowed). Even in these cases, since only hall employees can perform various operations, it is possible to perform internal status notification in the presence of hall employees.

Also, when the current set value is displayed on the set value display unit (credit display unit 60) (when the operation to display the current set value on the set value display unit is performed), or from the display state of the set value. The internal status notification may be executed when the display is switched to the hidden state (when the operation to end the setting value display is performed). The setting value is displayed not only when the setting key is turned on and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, but also when the slot machine 10 is turned on (the power is turned on). Can be implemented even when is turned on. Further, the display of the set value performed in this way can be ended by switching the setting key from the on state to the off state. Since only hall employees can perform these operations, it is possible to perform internal status notification in the presence of hall employees.

In addition, each of the above internal state notifications, which is performed when the setting change is allowed, when the setting is changed, when the setting value is displayed, or when the setting value display is completed, is the notification. It is advisable to end the notification when a predetermined notification period has elapsed from the start or when the internal state of the two sheets has been changed.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the front door 12 is closed after the setting change is allowed, the setting is changed, the set value is displayed, and the set value display is completed. In this case, the internal state notification may be executed. In other words, the internal state notification may be executed when the operation of switching the front door 12 from the open state to the closed state is performed on the premise that the operation for allowing the setting change is performed.

(77) In the first embodiment, when the setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state, but the determination may be executed before the setting change is completed. From the time the power is turned on until the game is executed, the state does not change as to whether or not the two cards are in the internal state. It can be reflected. In short, the above determination may be performed at a predetermined timing in the period from the power-on to the end timing of the setting change (execution timing of the internal state notification). As the predetermined timing, in addition to the end timing of the setting change exemplified in the first embodiment, the power-on timing, the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed from the power-on, and the like can be considered.

(78) In the first embodiment, the internal state display is executed prior to the internal state notification sound, but the internal state display may be started at the start timing of the notification by the internal state notification sound. Then, the internal state display may be started later than the start of the notification by the internal state notification sound.

(79) In the first embodiment, when the internal state display is started in a state where the front door 12 is open, the display unit for executing the display is placed inside the housing 11 or on the back surface of the front door 12. It may be provided on the side. With such a configuration, the internal state can be displayed so that the hall employees can easily see the front door 12 in the open state, and it is possible to quickly notice that the two doors are not in the internal state. .. This also applies to the second power-on display in the tenth embodiment and the twelfth embodiment.

The internal state display on the inside of the housing 11 or on the back side of the front door 12 may be performed instead of the internal state display on the front side of the front door 12, or may be performed in addition to the internal state display. In the latter case, even if the hall employee overlooks the internal state display when the front door 12 is open, the internal state display can be seen when the front door 12 is closed, so that the internal state display is overlooked. Can be suppressed.

Further, as to whether the display unit is provided inside the housing 11 or on the back surface side of the front door 12, it is preferable that the display unit is provided on the side where the setting display unit on which the current set value is displayed is provided. In other words, by arranging the display unit for internal status display on the side that the hall employees pay attention to when changing the setting, the internal status display can be naturally seen by looking at the setting display unit, and the internal status display is overlooked. Can be suppressed.

(80) In the first embodiment, the first half of the operations necessary for establishing the trigger for determining whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state is the trigger for shifting from the three-sheet internal state or the like to the non-internal state. However, all the operations necessary for establishing the determination trigger may be shared with the operation that triggers the transition, or the latter half operation may be shared with the operation that triggers the transition. However, it is preferable to standardize the first half operation in order to determine whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state after shifting to the non-internal state. If all the operations required to establish the judgment trigger are shared with the operations that trigger the transition, the control processing order should be determined so that the judgment is performed after the transition to the non-internal state is performed. good.

(81) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound are mixed (synthesized) and emitted, and the respective notification sounds are alternately emitted. May be good. Further, the door opening notification sound and the internal state notification sound may be emitted from speakers 64a to 64n, which are different from each other.

(82) In the ninth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, it is determined whether or not the two doors are in the internal state, but the determination may be executed before the front door 12 is closed. .. In short, it may be executed at a predetermined timing in the period from the power-on to the closing timing of the front door 12 (execution timing of internal state notification). This also applies to the eleventh and thirteenth embodiments.

(83) In the ninth embodiment, when the sub-control device 81 grasps the end of the setting change and the closing of the front door 12 (when the setting change end command and the door closing command are received), the internal state notification However, instead of ending the setting change, the power is turned on, the setting change is started (power is turned on in the allowable state of setting change), and the setting change is executed (operation of the reset switch 72 in the allowable state). It may be an execution condition of notification. However, by executing the internal status notification on the condition that the setting change is completed and the front door 12 is closed, the closure of the front door 12 during the setting change can be excluded from the execution target of the internal status notification. In such a sense, it is preferable to use the configuration of the ninth embodiment.

(84) In the ninth embodiment, the internal state notification is executed only when the front door 12 is closed for the first time after the setting is changed. However, the number of times the front door 12 is closed after the setting is changed is counted, and the number of times is counted. May be executed when the number of times is within a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). This also applies to the eleventh embodiment.

(85) In the tenth embodiment, the internal state information and the internal state information can be obtained both when the power is turned on so that the setting change is not allowed and when the power is turned on so that the setting change is allowed. The BB status information is included in the power recovery command and transmitted, but in the latter case, the internal status information and the BB status information may be included in the setting change start command and transmitted. Even with such a configuration, the sub control device 81 can grasp each state when the power is turned on.

(86) In the tenth embodiment, the mode of displaying the internal state may be the same depending on whether the three sheets are in the internal state or the first BB state or the second BB state. This is because in these states, the method of changing to the internal state of the two sheets is the same. Further, the mode of displaying the internal state may be the same for the non-internal state, the three-sheet internal state, and the first BB state or the second BB state.

(87) In the tenth embodiment, when the two-sheet internal state is not present, the method of changing to the two-sheet internal state (countermeasure) may be displayed or voiced. When the internal status notification is executed when the power is turned on, there are two non-internal states, a non-internal state, a three-sheet internal state, and a first BB state or a second BB state. Since they are different, it is possible to support smooth coping by hall employees by performing the above guidance notification. It should be noted that this guidance notification may be performed in a situation where the two sheets are not in the internal state, and specifically, it may be performed in combination with the internal state notification.

(88) In the third modification of the tenth embodiment, the emission period of the power-on notification sound may be different depending on whether the two sheets are in the internal state or not. Specifically, the latter may have a shorter release period than the former. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a long emission period of the internal state notification sound after the power-on notification sound ends.

(89) In the third modification of the tenth embodiment, the power-on notification sound is emitted with priority over the internal state notification sound, but the priority information set in the sound data of the power-on notification sound is higher than the priority information. When the higher priority information is set in the sound data of the internal status notification and the emission period of the internal status notification and the emission period of the power-on notification sound overlap, the power-on notification sound is set to the output standby state and the internal state is set. The notification sound may be preferentially emitted. In this case, it is possible to secure a long notification period that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In addition, the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification and the priority information of the same rank are set in the sound data of the power-on notification sound, and the internal state notification and the power-on notification sound are emitted in duplicate. It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to notify the hall employee of both that the two sheets are not in the internal state and that the power is turned on.

(90) In the fourth modification of the tenth embodiment, the input error notification sound is illustrated as the error notification sound, and the input error notification sound is emitted with priority over the internal state notification sound. Alternatively, in addition, the medal abnormality passing notification sound may be emitted with priority over the internal state notification sound. When the output states of the inserted medal detection sensors 405 and 406 change in an order different from the normal order (when a negative determination is made in step S7407), the medal abnormality passing notification sound has an abnormality in the medal passing order. If there is, it is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n. In this configuration, by setting the priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification in the sound data of the medal abnormal passage notification sound, the release period of the internal state notification and the medal abnormal passage notification When the sound emission period overlaps, the internal state notification is set to the output standby state, and the medal abnormal passage notification sound is preferentially emitted. Incidentally, when both the insertion error notification sound and the medal abnormal passage notification sound are prioritized over the internal state notification sound, the priority order between the insertion error notification sound and the medal abnormal passage notification sound can be arbitrarily set.

Further, instead of or in addition to the above, the medal payout error notification sound (hopper empty error notification sound) may be emitted with priority over the internal state notification sound. The medal payout error notification sound notifies that the hopper device 51 is empty (the number of stored medals in the hopper device 51 is less than a predetermined amount). Specifically, the medal payout error notification sound is paid out by the main control device 101. Even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the instruction was given, the medal is paid out (passed) by the payout medal detection sensor provided in the middle of the medal payout passage from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50. If it is not detected, it is emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n because the medal cannot be paid out properly. In this configuration, by setting the priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification in the sound data of the medal payout error notification sound, the release period of the internal state notification and the medal payout error notification When the sound emission period overlaps, the internal state notification is set to the output standby state, and the medal payout error notification sound is preferentially emitted.

Further, instead of or in addition to the above, the spare tank full error notification sound may be emitted with priority over the internal state notification sound. The spare tank full error notification sound is emitted into the spare tank 54 by a medal sensor (full sensor) provided on the surface (inner surface) side of the rear wall portion of the housing 11 so as to correspond to the arrangement position of the spare tank 54. When it is detected that the height position of the stored medals has reached a predetermined position, the spare tank 54 is considered to be full (the number of stored medals in the spare tank 54 is equal to or more than the predetermined amount) and is discharged from the speakers 64a to 64n. Is to be done. In this configuration, the priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification is set in the sound data of the spare tank full error notification sound, so that the release period of the internal state notification and the spare tank are full. When the emission period of the error notification sound overlaps, the internal status notification is set to the output standby state, and the spare tank full error notification sound is preferentially emitted.

In addition, other error notification sounds such as the RAM error notification sound may be emitted in preference to the internal state notification sound as the error notification sound.

Further, in the above-mentioned various configurations, the internal state notification sound may be preferentially emitted over each error notification sound such as the insertion error notification sound and the medal abnormality passage notification sound. Further, the priority of each error notification sound and the internal state notification sound may be set to the same order, and each error notification sound and the internal state notification sound may be mixed and emitted.

(91) In the fourth modification of the tenth embodiment, the clearing notification sound (medal return notification sound) is generated in place of or in addition to the configuration in which the input error notification sound is emitted in preference to the internal state notification sound. It may be configured to give priority to the internal state notification sound. Specifically, based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, for example, a settlement notification sound consisting of a voice such as "payment in progress" can be emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and then set in the sound data of the internal state notification. The priority information higher than the priority information is set in the sound data of the clearing notification sound. As a result, when the release period of the internal state notification and the release period of the settlement notification sound overlap, the internal state notification is set to the output standby state, and the clearing notification sound is preferentially released.

To change from the non-winning state of the 2BB combination to the winning state of the second BB combination (two internal states), two medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 and the start lever 41 is operated by the main control device 101. It is necessary to execute the role lottery. At that time, there are cases where more medals than the required number are inserted and it is desired to operate the settlement switch 59 to cancel the bet acceptance. In this configuration, when the bet acceptance is canceled by such an operation, the clearing notification sound is emitted in preference to the internal state notification sound, so that the hall employee who is trying to make the above change On the other hand, it is possible to promptly notify that the bet acceptance has been canceled.

In particular, in each of the above embodiments, the second BB role cannot be won in the 3-bet game. In such a configuration, the hall employee will change from the non-winning state of the 2BB role to the winning state. At that time, if three medals are inserted and the number of bets becomes 3, even if the start lever 41 is operated to execute the winning combination lottery, the second BB winning combination cannot be won. Therefore, the checkout switch 59 must be operated to cancel the bet acceptance, and two medals must be inserted again. In such a case, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that the bet acceptance has been canceled, and it is possible to make the configuration convenient for hall employees. By the way, in this configuration, the settlement notification sound may be emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n when the settlement switch 59 is operated (regardless of whether or not the medal has been paid out), or the settlement switch 59 may be operated. It may be released during the payout of the underlying medal.

In this configuration, the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification and the priority information of the same rank are set in the sound data of the clearing notification sound, and the internal state notification and the settlement notification sound are emitted in duplicate. It may be configured to be. In this case, since the internal state notification sound and the settlement notification sound are mixed and simultaneously emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, it is possible to notify both that the bet acceptance has been canceled and that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In addition, priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification is set in the sound data of the clearing notification sound, and the emission period of the internal state notification and the release period of the settlement notification sound overlap. In this case, the settlement notification sound may be set to the output standby state, and the internal state notification sound may be preferentially emitted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the hall employee from misunderstanding that the change to the two-sheet internal state is completed by interrupting or making the internal state notification inaudible.

(92) Instead of or in addition to the above (91), a bet notification sound (bet acceptance notification sound) when a bet is accepted may be emitted in preference to the internal state notification sound. Specifically, when a bet is accepted by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45 (preferably for each bet), a bet notification sound composed of a predetermined voice can be emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, and then inside. The priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the status notification is set in the sound data of the bet notification sound. In order to change from the non-winning state of the second BB role to the winning state of the second BB role (two internal states), it is necessary to insert two or more medals into the medal slot 45. By making it easy to hear, it is possible for the hall employee to easily understand that the bet has been accepted by the slot machine 10.

In this configuration, the priority information set in the sound data of the internal state notification and the priority information of the same rank are set in the sound data of the bet notification sound, and the internal state notification and the bet notification sound are emitted in duplicate. It may be configured to be. In this case, since the internal state notification sound and the bet notification sound are mixed and simultaneously emitted from the speakers 64a to 64n, it is possible to notify both that the bet has been accepted and that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

In addition, priority information higher than the priority information set in the sound data of the bet notification sound is set in the sound data of the internal state notification, and the release period of the internal state notification and the release period of the bet notification sound overlap. In this case, the bet notification sound may be set to the output standby state, and the internal state notification sound may be preferentially emitted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the hall employee from misunderstanding that the change to the two-sheet internal state is completed by interrupting or making the internal state notification inaudible.

The various configurations (90) to (92) can be applied not only to the tenth embodiment but also to other embodiments.

(93) In the twelfth embodiment, both the power-on display and the power-on notification sound are different in the first power-on notification and the second power-on notification, but even if only one of them is different. good. Since each of the power-on notifications is performed with the front door 12 open, it is expected that the power-on display will be difficult for hall employees to see at the initial stage of the notification. From such a viewpoint, it is preferable that at least the mode of the power-on notification sound is different.

(94) In the twelfth embodiment, the second power-on notification includes a notification that the two power-on notifications are not in the internal state. (For example, in the former, the power-on is notified by a dialogue, and in the latter, the power-on is notified by a predetermined voice other than the dialogue), or the light emission mode of the upper lamp unit 63 or the like is changed. The configuration may be such that the notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state is not included.

Further, instead of the second power-on notification including the notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state, the first power-on notification may include the notification that the two sheets are in the internal state. That is, the hall employee may be notified that the two sheets are not in the internal state by not notifying the first power-on notification as the power-on notification. Further, the second power-on notification may include a notification that the two sheets are not in the internal state, and the first power-on notification may include a notification that the two sheets are in the internal state.

(95) In the twelfth embodiment, the first power-on notification and the second power-on notification are executed by the same notification unit, but these notifications may be executed by different notification units. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state not only by the difference in the notification mode but also by the difference in the notification location, and it is easy for the hall employee to notice that the two sheets are not in the internal state. Will be possible.

When each of the above notifications is executed by a plurality of notification units, some of the plurality of notification units may have different configurations, or all of them may have different configurations. However, in the latter case, there is a concern that the manufacturing cost will rise because it is necessary to secure a large number of notification units, and as a result of scattered parts that hall employees should see, it may be difficult to notice the notification. Therefore, from such a viewpoint, the former configuration is preferable.

(96) In the twelfth embodiment, the number of notification units may be different between the first power-on notification and the second power-on notification. For example, the number of notification units for the second power-on notification may be larger than that for the first power-on notification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to conspicuously notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state, and it is possible to preferably call attention to the fact that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

(97) In the twelfth embodiment, the notification period may be different between the first power-on notification and the second power-on notification. For example, the notification period of the second power-on notification may be longer than that of the first power-on notification, and such a configuration makes it possible to preferably call attention to the fact that the two sheets are not in the internal state.

(98) In the twelfth embodiment described above, the second power-on notification is performed when the two sheets are not in the internal state, but the first power-on notification is initially executed and the second power-on notification is executed from the middle. It may be configured. For example, if the configuration is such that switching to the second power-on notification is performed when the front door 12 is closed or the setting change is completed, the second power is turned on after the two sheets can be changed to the internal state. Notification will be performed, and it will be possible for the hall employee to notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state at an appropriate timing.

(99) In the twelfth embodiment, the first power-on notification is switched when the two sheets shift to the internal state during the execution of the second power-on notification, but instead of or in addition to the first power-on notification. The configuration may be such that the notification that the two sheets are in the internal state is executed.

(100) In the twelfth embodiment, the first power-on notification switched from the second power-on notification is executed in the remaining period of the notification period, but may be executed in a period shorter than the remaining period. .. In short, the total period of the first second power-on notification and the subsequent first power-on notification may be less than or equal to the notification period set at the start of the second power-on notification.

(101) In the twelfth embodiment, a standby period is provided in which the execution of the power-on notification is waited for a predetermined period from the power-on timing, and the power-on notification is started when the standby period elapses. May be.

(102) In the twelfth embodiment, the power-on notification notifies that the two sheets are not in the internal state, but instead of or in addition to this, the door opening notification may notify that the two sheets are not in the internal state. good. Specifically, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the two doors are in the internal state, the first door open notification is executed when the two doors are in the internal state, and the first door open notification is executed when the two doors are not in the internal state. The second door opening notification different from the above may be executed. At that time, the notification that the two doors are not in the internal state may be included in the second door opening notification, and the notification that the two doors are not in the internal state may be included in the first door opening notification.

The door opening notification may be executed when the power is turned on or when a predetermined period (for example, the notification period for the power-on notification) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When the notification is executed after a predetermined period, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the two sheets are in the internal state at a predetermined timing in the period from when the power is turned on until the predetermined period elapses.

(103) In the thirteenth embodiment, the internal state notification is executed regardless of the closing timing of the front door 12 without executing the acquisition of the time information and the determination of whether or not it is within the notification target period. It may be configured. That is, the internal state notification may be executed only on condition that the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state in a situation where the two doors are not in the internal state.

(104) In the thirteenth embodiment, instead of the case where the front door 12 is closed, the internal state notification may be executed in the state where the front door 12 is in the open state. Since the front door 12 can be opened only by the hall employees, it is possible to perform the internal state notification in the presence of the hall employees even with this configuration. At that time, the internal state notification may be executed only on the condition that the front door 12 is in the open state without executing the acquisition of the time information and the determination of whether or not it is within the notification target period.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, instead of switching the front door 12 from the open state to the closed state, the internal state notification may be executed on the condition that the front door 12 is in the open state. .. That is, it may be configured that it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open when the power is turned on, and the internal state notification is executed when it is determined that the front door 12 is open.

(105) In each of the above embodiments, if a 3-bet game is played in a situation where the second BB winning combination is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB winning combination (the symbol combination for which the second BB winning is established) cannot be stopped. However, the configuration may be such that the pattern combination corresponding to the second BB combination can be stopped, the second BB winning is invalidated, and the transition to the second BB state is restricted.

(106) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to one predetermined fixed value, but a plurality of upper limit games are provided and selected from among them by lottery, set value, or the like. The advantageous section may end depending on the maximum number of games. In addition, the upper limit increase number is not limited to one fixed value set in advance, and a plurality of upper limit game numbers are set, and an advantageous section is set according to the upper limit increase number selected by lottery, set value, etc. from among them. May be configured to end.

(107) In each of the above embodiments, there are two types of sections, a normal section and an advantageous section. For example, a normal section that does not shift to the first AT mode and the like, and a normal section that can shift to the first AT mode and the like are possible. The configuration may have three or more types of states, such as having one advantageous section and a second advantageous section in which the ease of transition to the first AT mode or the like is favored over the first advantageous section.

(108) The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery are not limited to those exemplified in each of the above embodiments.

In addition, although the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is configured to shift to the advantageous section, the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery may be configured to shift to the advantageous section in the next game, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be used. A predetermined number of games may exist between the winning game and the game shifting to the advantageous section.

Further, in the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started, but in the next game of the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is started. The display may be started, or a predetermined number of games may exist between the game for shifting to the advantageous section and the game for starting the display of the eighth display segment N8.

(109) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals does not increase (does not increase or decrease) is illustrated as a bonus game, but the number of medals may decrease or slightly increase (compared to in AT mode). The rate of increase in medals is low). As a bonus game that slightly increases, the expected net increase in the number of cards per game may be less than 0.5. Further, the medal may be increased normally (advantageous to the player) instead of a slight increase.

(110) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is ensured by configuring the normal section to be less likely to win the AT mode transition than the advantageous section.

(111) In each of the above embodiments, the game by the 3-bet game performed in a state where the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is described as a normal game, but the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. The game by the 2-bet game played in the state may be a normal game, or the second-bet game or the third-bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may be a normal game. Further, a game by a 2-bet game performed in a state where the second BB is carried over may be a normal game, or a game by a 3-bet game performed in a state where the first BB is carried over may be a normal game. Further, the game may be advanced while switching each of these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game is switched to any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example. Switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game may be regarded as a normal game.

(112) In each of the above embodiments, the ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value, the setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate, and the setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of the number of balls (game medium) change depending on the situation. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases by a predetermined amount in a short time and decreases by a predetermined amount in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The decrease of a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(113) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(114) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using rotating game machine, even if each of the above inventions is applied as a suggestion or teaching effect of a configuration having a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball ejection rate or the like. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and a predetermined state may be applied. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball entry rate into the ball entry portion is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 are set as the high ball entry state. Each invention may be applied. Further, in the pachinko machine, the period during which the 3-bet game is played in the standby period such as the precursor mode and the CZ mode (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is updated) is the game of the first special figure (the first special). It is applied to one of the period when the variable display of the figure) is performed and the period when the game of the second special figure (variable display of the second special figure) is performed, and the bonus of the 2-bet game and the second BB state is applied during the above waiting period. The period during which the game is played (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of the above modes is not updated) may be applied to the other of the period during which the game of the first special figure is performed and the period during which the game of the second special figure is performed.

(115) In each of the above embodiments, when a medal as a game medium is inserted, the number of bets can be set and the game can be started, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on the game using a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) and start the game, and as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game, the above A virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals may be provided. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration for notifying information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups A to H are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. Regarding the background technology that "the configuration in which the internal lottery is performed is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707)", it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above. , There is still room for improvement in this regard. ”The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
In a gaming machine provided with a second control means (sub-control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means
A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value (privilege grant value) corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player is given a predetermined privilege (to the second AT mode). A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process for terminating the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can grant a transition), and
When a predetermined predetermined condition (end of advantageous section) is satisfied, an initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main controller 101). )When,
With
The second control means
Specific notification execution means (for points by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege values. (Function to execute processing and processing for executing point effect) and
A storage means (various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 of the sub-control device 81) for storing the total value of the privilege numerical values or the specific information (holding point or holding rank information) corresponding to the executed specific notification mode, and
With
The specific notification execution means is configured to control execution of the specific notification by referring to the specific information of the storage means.
The second control means is configured to be able to hold the specific information of the storage means without being initialized when the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized by the initialization means of the first control means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. By notifying the total value each time, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the granted value, and the motivation to further increase the privilege value will be aroused. NS. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege value is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege value accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, the player may be given the impression that he / she will be forced to save again, and there is a concern that the motivation to continue the game may be reduced. In this respect, in this configuration, in the second control means that controls the game effect, even if the total value is initialized on the first control means side, the specific information (total value and the executed notification) stored in the storage means is notified. The information corresponding to the above) is retained, and the retained specific information is referred to when the execution control of the specific notification is performed. In this configuration, when the specific notification after the initialization of the total value is performed, the execution control can be performed while taking into account the total value before the initialization, etc., and the initialization of the total value is suppressed from being reflected in the notification as it is. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-storing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to continue the game.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature A2. The specific notification executing means is based on the total value (accumulation point) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (holding point or holding rank information) held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the execution control of the above is performed.

In this configuration, the execution control of the specific notification is performed by taking into account both the total value before initialization and the total value after initialization. Therefore, after the total value is initialized, the total value before initialization is performed. It is possible to perform specific notification that reflects not only the status of the above but also the status of the total value after initialization.

Feature A3. The specific notification executing means has a limiting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2604 and step S3802 by the sub control device 81) that restricts the execution of the specific notification with reference to the specific information held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that it is provided.

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted by referring to the specific information held in the storage means. Therefore, the execution / non-execution of the specific notification is switched based on the previous total value indicated by the retained specific information. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the specific notification for notifying the total value smaller than the total value before initialization is performed, and it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-accumulation.

Feature A4. A limiting means that limits the execution of the specific notification based on the total value (accumulation point) after initialization by the initialization means and the specific information (retention point or retention rank information) held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A1 to feature A3, which comprises (a function of executing the processing of step S2604 and step S3802 by the sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted based on the total value after the initialization and the specific information held in the storage means. Therefore, for example, when the execution trigger of the specific notification occurs after the initialization. , The magnitude of the total value at that time can be determined based on the previous total value indicated by the specific information held above, and if it is small, the execution of the specific notification can be stopped. In other words, since the execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than the total value before initialization is suppressed, even if the total value actually decreases due to the effect of initialization, the total value is totaled from the player's point of view. It is possible to perform specific notification as if the value is gradually increasing, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game after the initialization of the total value.

Feature A5. When the total value after initialization by the initialization means is less than or equal to the value of the specific information held in the storage means or smaller than the value of the specific information, the limiting means limits the execution of the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature A4.

In the above configuration, since the total value after initialization is limited to the execution of the specific notification for a period equal to or smaller than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so that the total value before initialization is restricted. The execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than the total value is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value is actually reduced due to the effect of initialization, it is possible to perform specific notification as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value is initialized. It becomes possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game later.

Feature A6. The specific notification executing means is configured so that when the specific notification is in a restricted state by the limiting means, the specific notification is not executed or the specific notification is less likely to be executed as compared with the case where the specific notification is not in the restricted state. The gaming machine according to feature A4 or feature A5.

In the above configuration, the notification can be non-executed or the execution frequency can be suppressed to be low due to the execution restriction of the specific notification. Therefore, each of the above effects in the configuration of the feature A4 or the feature A5 can be suitably exhibited. It will be possible.

Feature A7. The total value (accumulation point) after initialization by the initialization means or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization (corresponding point corresponding to the rank information of the selected type) is stored in the storage means. If it is larger than the value of the retained specific information (retention point or retention rank information), the total value after initialization or the value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization is updated as the new specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A6, characterized in that the update means (the function of executing the processing of step S2605 and step S3702 by the sub control device 81) is provided.

In the above configuration, when the total value after initialization is larger than the value of the specific information to be retained, the total value or the like is retained as new specific information, so that the total obtained by the previous game is obtained. Execution control of specific notification can be performed based on the highest value among the values and the like. As a result, the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the total value smaller than the maximum value is suppressed, and as a result, the specific notification can be executed when the total value for updating the previous maximum value is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the total value is continuously increasing, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game.

Feature A8. The specific notification executing means includes a mode determining means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification based on the specific information held in the storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A7.

In the above configuration, it is possible to perform specific notification corresponding to the total value or the like indicated by the specific information held in the storage means. As a result, the execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than the total value before initialization is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-accumulation.

Feature A9. The specific notification execution means is
As the specific notification, the first means (step S2804 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the notification that the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the corresponding value of the specific information held in the storage means. (Function to execute the processing of) and
After the specific notification is executed by the first means, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the value (accumulation point) corresponding to the specific information (difference value between the usage point and the accumulation point). A second means (a function of executing the processing of step S3401 and step S3501 by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part thereof, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A8, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 to the feature A8.

In the above configuration, the difference between the value corresponding to the specific notification executed by the first means and the retained specific information, that is, the margin of the retained information for the executed specific notification is utilized by the second means. Specific notification is executed. If the execution frequency of the specific notification is low, the player is less likely to be aware of the existence of the privilege value, so there is a concern that the interest in the privilege value will gradually diminish. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

In this feature, "the first means (the function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the notification corresponding to the value smaller than the total value as the specific notification" is ". As the specific notification, a numerical value smaller than the total value may be expressed as a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing a notification recognizable by the player. can.

Feature A10. The specific notification executing means is in a situation where the total value has not increased or the increase in the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (difference from the holding point) after the specific notification is executed by the first means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the specific notification can be executed by the second means.

In the above configuration, when the privilege numerical value is not given or when the given privilege numerical value is small, the specific notification is executed by the second means, so that the execution frequency of the specific notification can be suitably increased. become.

Feature A11. The specific notification execution means is
When the total value after initialization by the initialization means is less than or equal to the value of the specific information held in the storage means or smaller than the value of the specific information, the limiting means (sub-control) for limiting the execution of the specific notification. A function of executing the processes of step S2604 and step S3802 by the device 81) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, wherein the specific notification can be executed by the second means in a situation where the limiting means is restricted.

In the above configuration, if the total value after initialization is less than or smaller than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so that the total before initialization The execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than the value is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value is actually reduced due to the effect of initialization, it is possible to perform specific notification as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value is initialized. It becomes possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game later.

However, on the other hand, if the execution frequency of the specific notification is low, the player is less likely to be aware of the existence of the privilege value, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the privilege value will gradually decrease. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state, but at that time, if the specific notification is performed corresponding to the actual total value (total value reduced by initialization), the total value disappears. There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the notification has been made, and the original significance of restricting the execution of notification will be impaired. On the contrary, if the specific notification is performed in correspondence with the retained specific information (total value before initialization), the notification in a mode different from the actual total value is induced, and the player's trust in the notification. May be reduced.

In this regard, in this configuration, in the above-mentioned restricted state, the specific notification is performed by the second means utilizing the margin of the retained information for the executed specific notification, so that the mode of the specific notification is matched with the actual total value. The execution frequency of specific notification can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the creation of the restricted state.

Feature A12. The second control means holds the difference without initializing the difference even if the total value is initialized in the first control means by the initialization means (holds the difference value by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A9 to the feature A11, which is characterized by having a function).

In the above configuration, when the total value is initialized on the first control means side, the difference does not disappear and is maintained thereafter. Therefore, when limiting the execution of the specific notification, the difference can be used across the initialization. It will be possible. As a result, the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization can be utilized after initialization to execute the specific notification, and in the configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be set. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature A13. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
The initialization means performs the initialization when the specific state ends or when the specific state ends.
In the specific state after initialization by the initialization means, the specific notification executing means performs the specific notification by the second means based on at least a part of the difference derived in the specific state before initialization. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A9 to the feature A12, which is characterized by being made feasible.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification can be executed in the later specific state by utilizing the margin generated by the specific notification in the previous specific state, the specific notification is initialized in the configuration in which the total value is initialized by the end of the specific state. It becomes possible to suitably increase the execution frequency of.

Feature A14. When the total value after initialization by the initialization means is less than or equal to the value of the specific information held in the storage means or smaller than the specific information, the limiting means (sub-control device 81) for limiting the execution of the specific notification. (Function to execute the processing of step S2604 and step S3802) and
When a predetermined update condition (the accumulation point is larger than the retention point) is satisfied, the update means for updating the specific information held in the storage means (function of executing the process of step S2605 by the sub control device 81). When,
Even when the predetermined update condition is satisfied, the update of the specific information by the update means is restricted in the predetermined case (at the end of the first AT mode and when the accumulation point is 3 or more). Update limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S3602 by the sub control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A13.

In the above configuration, if the total value after initialization is less than or smaller than the total value before initialization indicated by the retained specific information, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so that the total value before initialization is restricted. The execution of the specific notification that notifies the total value smaller than is suppressed. As a result, even if the total value is actually reduced due to the effect of initialization, it is possible to perform specific notification as if the total value is gradually increasing from the player's point of view, and the total value is initialized. It becomes possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game later.

However, on the other hand, when the value of the specific information to be retained (retained value) becomes high, the gap from the initial value when the total value is initialized becomes large. As a result, the period until the actual total value catches up with the holding value becomes long, and the execution frequency of the specific notification tends to decrease significantly. In this case, since the player is less likely to be aware of the existence of the privilege numerical value, there is a concern that the interest in the privilege numerical value will gradually diminish and it will be difficult to contribute to the continuation of the game. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the update condition is satisfied, the update of the holding value is restricted depending on the situation, so that the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization is suppressed from expanding. .. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification is greatly reduced, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the privilege numerical value from diminishing.

Feature A15. The update condition includes the total value (accumulation point) after initialization by the initialization means or a value corresponding to the mode of the specific notification after initialization (corresponding point corresponding to the rank information of the selected type). ) Is larger than the value of the specific information (holding point or holding rank information) held in the storage means, the gaming machine according to the feature A14.

In the above configuration, when the total value after initialization is larger than the value of the retained specific information, the total value or the like is retained as new specific information, so that the total obtained by the previous game is obtained. The highest value among the values and the like can be used as the holding value. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the total value smaller than the maximum value, and as a result, the specific notification is executed only when the total value that updates the maximum value up to that point is obtained. Becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the total value is continuously increasing, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game.

However, on the other hand, if the maximum value is always reflected as the holding value, the gap with the initial value when the total value is initialized tends to be large, and the above-mentioned inconvenience described in the feature A14 tends to occur. In this regard, in this configuration, even if a total value exceeding the previous maximum value is obtained, the holding value is not updated depending on the situation, so the gap with the initial value when initialized becomes excessive. Can be suppressed. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification is greatly reduced, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the privilege numerical value from diminishing.

Feature A16. A plurality of granting triggers are provided as triggers for granting the privilege numerical value by the numerical value granting means.
In the renewal restriction means, the privilege numerical value is given by a predetermined grant trigger among a plurality of grant triggers (execution trigger of the grant lottery based on the termination of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery). If so, the gaming machine according to feature A14 or feature A15, characterized in that the update of the specific information by the update means is restricted.

In the above configuration, the update of the holding value is restricted depending on which of the plurality of granting triggers for which the privilege numerical value is granted. Thereby, for example, when the granting trigger to which the privilege numerical value is given is the trigger just before the initialization, the granted privilege numerical value can be prevented from being reflected in the holding value, and the initialization can be performed. It is possible to suppress an excessive gap from the initial value when the value is set.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the predetermined grant trigger is the last trigger before the initialization by the initialization means.

After the privilege value is assigned by the last grant trigger before initialization, a new privilege value is not assigned until initialization, so the achievement of the grant corresponding value is achieved before initialization. There is no. Then, the numerical value for the privilege at the final opportunity is considered to have been absent due to the subsequent initialization, and does not contribute to reaching the grant corresponding value after all. Based on these characteristics, in this configuration, if the granting opportunity for which the privilege value is given is the final trigger before initialization, the given privilege value is not reflected in the holding value. , It is possible to prevent the gap from the initial value from expanding unnecessarily. In addition, since the value for the privilege at the final opportunity does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the grant as described above, the player can respond to the grant even if the notification corresponding to the value for the privilege is not performed. It can be said that it does not matter in aiming to reach the value. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without disturbing the player's game.

Feature A18. When the privilege value is given by the predetermined grant trigger and the total value reflecting the granted privilege value is smaller than the grant corresponding value, the specific information is updated by the update means. The gaming machine according to feature A16 or feature A17, characterized in that it is restricted.

For example, if the holding value is not updated when the total value reaches the grant corresponding value according to the granted privilege value, there is a concern that the notification corresponding to the arrival of the grant corresponding value cannot be appropriately performed. In this regard, in this configuration, when the holding value update is restricted, the update of the holding value is not always restricted, but the total value reflecting the privilege value given at that opportunity is given. It is configured to limit only when the corresponding value has not been reached. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the notification corresponding to the arrival of the assigned corresponding value cannot be performed.

Feature A19. The renewal limiting means is the renewal means when the privilege value is given by the predetermined grant trigger and the total value reflecting the granted privilege value is equal to or more than the predetermined value (3). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A16 to the feature A18, which limits the update of the specific information by the player.

If the retention value is not always updated when the retention value is restricted, the player will not be notified that the total value has increased. It may give the impression that there is no possibility that a numerical value will be given (in other words, the total value will not increase at that opportunity). In this respect, in this configuration, the total value reflecting the privilege value given at that opportunity is limited to a predetermined value or more. In this case, in a situation where the total value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value and the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization is expected to be large, the total value is prevented from being reflected in the holding value, while the total value is prevented. If is less than a predetermined value, the holding value is updated and the notification that the total value has increased can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to notify that the total value has increased while suppressing an excessive gap from the initial value at the time of initialization.

Feature A20. When the update limiting means restricts the update of the specific information, the specific notification executing means is based on the specific information held in an unupdated state, not the total value at that time. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A14 to the feature A19, characterized in that the mode determining means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81) is provided.

For example, when the update is not performed due to the update restriction, if the mode of the specific notification is determined based on the total value (the total value in the state where the given privilege numerical value is reflected), the mode of the specific notification and the holding value are obtained. May become inconsistent and cause confusion for the player. In this regard, in this configuration, the mode of the specific notification is determined based on the holding value in the state where the update is postponed (the holding value before the privilege value is given). Can be properly aligned.

Feature A21. When the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the second control means initializes the specific information held in the storage means (step S2702 by the sub control device 81, The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A20, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S3901).

In the above configuration, since the specific information held in the storage means is initialized when the privilege is given, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression of re-accumulation by dividing the period until the privilege is given. Will be possible.

Feature A22. As a gaming state, at least a plurality of specific states (advantageous sections) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
The first control means
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein the initialization means initializes the total value when the specific state ends or when the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the above-mentioned features A1 to A21, it becomes possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature A23. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A22.

By applying the configuration of any of the features A1 to A22 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A23, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, the features F1 to F23, Shown in the configuration of any one of feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, and feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the above technical ideas individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
When a predetermined predetermined condition (end of advantageous section) is satisfied, an initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main controller 101). )When,
Execution of the point effect execution process by the specific notification execution means (sub-control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to do) and
When a predetermined restriction condition (accumulation points have not reached the holding points) is satisfied, even if a privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the specific notification is performed by the specific notification executing means. A limiting means capable of limiting execution (a function of executing the process of step S2604 by the sub-control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. By notifying the total value each time and the value for the privilege given, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the value corresponding to the grant, and the value for the privilege will be further increased. The motivation to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege value is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege value accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the total value is performed as a notification regarding the privilege numerical value, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, the player is forced to save again. There is a concern that it will be given and the motivation to continue the game will be reduced. In addition, in the configuration in which the notification corresponding to the given privilege numerical value is performed, the total value predicted by the player from the notified grant value and the actual total value deviate from each other, and as a result, the player's notification is given. Confidence may be reduced. In this regard, in this configuration, even when the privilege value is given, the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the establishment of the restriction condition, so that the specific notification that reflects the initialized total value is performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the notification of a given value that does not match the actual total value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In this feature, the "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value or the notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value". Further, in this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature B2. The specific notification execution means is
Execution determination means (a function of executing the process of step S2606 by the sub control device 81) for determining whether or not to execute the specific notification based on the addition of the privilege numerical value by the numerical value giving means, and
When it is determined to be executed by the execution determination means, the execution means for executing the specific notification (the process of step S2608 by the sub control device 81, the function of executing the point effect execution process), and
With
In the case of the restricted state by the limiting means, even if the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the determination process of the execution determining means is performed regardless of the determination result of the executing determination means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the execution of the specific notification is restricted without being affected.

In the above configuration, when the privilege numerical value is given, the specific notification is executed after the execution determination of whether or not to execute the specific notification, but when the restriction state is set by the restriction means, it is for execution. Execution of the specific notification is restricted regardless of the result of the determination or without the execution determination being performed. That is, since the execution of the specific notification is forcibly prohibited, it is preferable that the specific notification reflecting the initialized total value is performed or the assigned value that does not match the actual total value is notified. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the limiting condition includes that the total value is initialized by the initialization means.

In the above configuration, the restriction state that restricts the execution of the specific notification can be started when the total value is initialized. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the specific notification that reflects the initialized total value.

Feature B4. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, the holding means (holding point by the sub control device 81) that can be held even after the initialization is set as the holding value (holding point) before the initialization. Has a function to hold)
In the restricted state by the limiting means, the total value after initialization is equal to or greater than the holding value held by the holding means or a value corresponding thereto (a subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the holding point), or their values. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3, which is characterized in that it can be released when it becomes larger.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is released when the total value after initialization becomes equal to or greater than the holding value or the corresponding value, or larger than those values. That is, the execution of the specific notification is restricted until the total value catches up with the holding value, and after catching up, the restriction is lifted. In this case, in the configuration in which the notification corresponding to the total value is performed, even if the total value is actually decreased due to the influence of the initialization, is the total value gradually increasing from the player's point of view? Specific notification can be performed as if. Further, in the configuration in which the notification corresponding to the given privilege numerical value is performed, the total value predicted by the player from the notified grant value can be matched with the actual total value. From these facts, it becomes possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game even after the initialization of the total value.

Feature B5. The specific notification executing means is configured so that when the specific notification is in a restricted state by the restricting means, the specific notification is less likely to be executed than when the specific notification is not executed or the specific notification is not in the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B4.

In the above configuration, the notification can be non-executed or the execution frequency can be suppressed to be low by limiting the execution of the specific notification. Therefore, each of the above effects in the configurations of the features B1 to B4 can be suitably exhibited. It will be possible.

Feature B6. The specific notification execution means is
The process of step S2804 by the sub-control device 81 is capable of executing a notification in which the player can recognize a value or amount smaller than the total value or the given privilege value as the specific notification. Function to execute) and
After the specific notification is executed by the first means, at least the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value (holding point) of the privilege numerical value (difference value between the used point and the accumulated point). A second means (a function of executing the processing of step S3401 and step S3501 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on a part thereof is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5, wherein the specific notification can be executed by the second means in a situation where the limiting means is restricted.

By limiting the execution of the specific notification, each effect of the above-mentioned features B1 to B5 can be obtained. However, on the other hand, if the execution frequency of the specific notification is reduced due to the execution restriction, the player is less likely to be aware of the existence of the privilege numerical value, so that there is a concern that the player's interest in the privilege numerical value will gradually decrease. In this case, it is conceivable to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state, but at that time, if the configuration is such that the specific notification is performed corresponding to the actual total value (total value reduced by initialization), the total value. May give the player the impression that the information has disappeared, and the original significance of restricting the execution of notification may be impaired.

In this respect, in this configuration, the specific notification is performed by the second means based on the difference between the actual value and the total value of the specific notification by the first means, and the specific notification is performed under the restricted state. Since the specific notification by the second means utilizes the margin of the total value for the executed specific notification, by executing such notification in the restricted state, the mode of the specific notification is set to the actual total value. It is possible to increase the execution frequency of specific notification while matching. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the creation of the restricted state.

Feature B7. When the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized by the initialization means, the means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (function of holding the difference value by the sub control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that it is present.

In the above configuration, the difference does not disappear even if the total value is initialized, and is maintained even after that, so that the difference can be used across the initialization when the execution of the specific notification is restricted. As a result, the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization can be utilized after initialization to execute the specific notification, and in the configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be set. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature B8. The restriction condition includes that the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined reference value (holding point) or less.
The description according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B7, which comprises a changing means (a function of executing the process of step S2605 by the sub control device 81) capable of changing the reference value according to the situation of the game. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, when the total value is less than or equal to the predetermined reference value, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and the reference value is changed according to the situation of the game. It is possible to switch the presence or absence of restrictions according to the situation. As a result, for example, when a total value larger than the total value up to that point is obtained, if the reference value is changed accordingly, it is possible to suppress the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the maximum value. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the changing means can change the reference value according to the total value.

According to this configuration, the reference value can be changed according to the change of the total value each time. Therefore, for example, when a total value larger than the total value up to that point is obtained, the reference value is adjusted accordingly. Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the maximum value is performed, and it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B10. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, the total value before the initialization or a value corresponding thereto (a subtraction value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the holding point) is used as the reference value after the initialization. Equipped with a holding means (a function of holding a holding point by the sub-control device 81) that can also hold
As the changing means, when the total value after initialization becomes larger than the reference value, the updating means for updating the total value as a new reference value (function of executing the process of step S2605 by the sub control device 81). ), The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9.

In the above configuration, when the total value after initialization becomes larger than the retained reference value, the total value is retained as a new reference value, so that the total value obtained by the previous game is used. The highest value is the standard value. Therefore, the reference value can be changed each time the maximum value is updated, and it is possible to suppress that the specific notification is performed in a situation where the total value is lower than the maximum value each time. On the other hand, when a total value exceeding the maximum value is obtained each time, the execution of the specific notification is not restricted, so that the player can be notified that such a total value has been reached. That is, it is possible to notify the player that the total value has increased and motivate the player to continue the game while suppressing the impression that the total value has disappeared.

Feature B11. Execution of the change limiting means (process of step S3602 by the sub control device 81) capable of limiting the change of the reference value by the changing means in a predetermined case (at the end of the first AT mode and when the accumulation point is 3 or more). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B8 to the feature B10, which is characterized by having the function of performing the game.

For example, when the reference value is changed so that the execution of the specific notification is more likely to be restricted, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the total value has disappeared. On the other hand, there is a risk that the player's interest in the bonus value will be diminished due to the decrease in the frequency of notification. In this respect, in this configuration, since the change of the reference value can be restricted, the decrease in the notification frequency can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature B12. A plurality of granting triggers are provided as triggers for granting the privilege numerical value by the numerical value granting means.
The change limiting means is given the above-mentioned privilege numerical value by a predetermined granting opportunity among a plurality of granting triggers (execution trigger of the granting lottery based on the termination of the first AT mode without winning the second AT mode transition lottery). If, the gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the change of the reference value can be restricted.

For example, when a total value larger than the total value up to that point is obtained, the reference value is changed according to the obtained total value, and specific notification is executed according to the change in the total value each time. You will be able to limit it. However, on the other hand, it also leads to widening the gap with the initial value at the time of initialization and greatly reducing the subsequent notification frequency. In this respect, in this configuration, the change of the reference value is restricted depending on which of the plurality of granting triggers for which the privilege numerical value is granted. Thereby, for example, when the granting opportunity to which the privilege numerical value is given is the trigger just before the initialization, the granted privilege numerical value can be prevented from being reflected in the reference value, and the initialization can be performed. It is possible to prevent the gap from the initial value of time from becoming excessive.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the predetermined grant trigger is the final trigger before the initialization by the initialization means.

After the award value is given by the final grant trigger before initialization, a new award value is not given until the initialization, so the achievement of the grant correspondence value is achieved before the initialization. There is no. Therefore, it is considered that the value for the privilege at the final opportunity did not exist due to the subsequent initialization, and it does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the grant after all. Based on these characteristics, in this configuration, if the granting opportunity for which the privilege value is given is the final trigger before initialization, the given privilege value is not reflected in the reference value. , It is possible to prevent the gap from the initial value from expanding unnecessarily. In addition, since the value for the privilege at the final opportunity does not contribute to reaching the value corresponding to the grant as described above, the player can respond to the grant even if the notification corresponding to the value for the privilege is not performed. It does not matter in aiming to reach the value. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the gap without hindering the player's game.

Feature B14. When the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means, it is characterized by having an initialization means (a function of executing the processes of step S2702 and step S3901 by the sub control device 81) for initializing the reference value. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B8 to the feature B13.

In the above configuration, since the reference value is initialized when the privilege is given, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression of re-accumulation by dividing the period until the privilege is given.

Feature B15. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
When a predetermined predetermined condition (end of advantageous section) is satisfied, an initialization means for initializing the total value (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
Execution of the point effect execution process by the specific notification execution means (sub-control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to do) and
The processing of the specific means (process of step S2604 by the sub control device 81) so that the execution frequency of the specific notification after the initialization of the total value by the initialization means is lower than the execution frequency of the specific notification before the initialization. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. By notifying the total value each time and the value for the privilege given, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the value corresponding to the grant, and the value for the privilege will be further increased. The motivation to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege value is initialized, and the privilege value accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the total value is performed as a notification regarding the privilege numerical value, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, the player is forced to save again. There is a concern that it will be given and the motivation to continue the game will be reduced. In addition, in the configuration in which the notification corresponding to the given privilege numerical value is performed, the total value predicted by the player from the notified grant value and the actual total value deviate from each other, and as a result, the player's notification is given. Confidence may be reduced. In this regard, in this configuration, the execution frequency of the specific notification after initialization is set to be lower than that before initialization, so that it is difficult for the player to realize that the total value has been initialized. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In this feature, the "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the addition of the privilege numerical value". Further, any configuration of the above features B1 to B15 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature B16. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
The numerical value giving means grants a privilege numerical value based on the granting opportunity in the specific state.
The initialization means performs the initialization when the specific state ends or when the specific state ends.
The specific means is characterized in that the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state after the initialization is lower than the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state before the initialization. Features The gaming machine according to B15.

According to this configuration, in the configuration in which the total value is initialized by the end of the specific state, the execution frequency of the specific notification in the specific state after the previous specific state can be suppressed to be low, so that the total value is initialized. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B17. As a gaming state, at least a plurality of specific states (advantageous sections) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B16, wherein the initialization means initializes the total value when the specific state ends.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the above-mentioned features B1 to B17, it becomes possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature B18. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B17.

By applying the configuration of any of the features B1 to B17 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B18, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
Specific notification executing means (point processing and point effect execution by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to execute processing) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
As the specific notification, a first means (a function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing a notification in which the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the privilege numerical values. ,
After the specific notification by the first means is executed, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value when the specific notification is executed (difference value between the used point and the accumulated point). A second means (a function of executing the processing of step S3401 and step S3501 by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the above.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In addition, since the specific notification is performed as the notification corresponding to the total value each time, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the granted value, and let's further increase the privilege value. The motivation to do so is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is preferable to increase the chances of giving the privilege numerical value to increase the frequency of the specific notification and increase the player's interest in the privilege numerical value. However, on the other hand, if the number of benefits is given more often, the difficulty of reaching the given value becomes lower, and as a result, the degree of the benefits must be kept low, which may reduce the appeal to the player. There is. In other words, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of specific notification, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value will be impaired.

In this respect, in this configuration, the difference between the specific notification executed by the first means and the total value of the privilege numerical value, that is, the margin of the total value with respect to the executed specific notification is utilized to specify by the second means. Notification is executed. In this case, since the specific notification can be performed even if the privilege numerical value is not actually assigned, it is possible to expand the execution opportunity of the specific notification without lowering the difficulty of reaching the assigned corresponding value. become. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of notification and appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game while maintaining the degree of privilege.

In this feature, "after the specific notification by the first means is executed, the difference between the specific notification by the first means and the total value when the specific notification is executed (use points and accumulation). The second means (function of executing the processing of step S3401 and step S3501 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the difference from the point) is "the first. After the specific notification by the means is executed, the difference (difference) between the value (use point) corresponding to the specific notification by the first means and the total value (accumulation point) when the specific notification is executed. It can also be expressed as a second means (a function of executing the processing of step S3401 and step S3501 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on at least a part of the value).

Feature C2. The first means may execute a notification in which the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the privilege numerical values as the specific notification based on the addition of the privilege numerical value by the numerical value giving means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform the specific notification by the second means by utilizing a part of the case where the privilege numerical value is given and the total value increases. As a result, it becomes easy to secure a large value as a difference, and it is possible to make it appear that the total value is greatly increased by the specific notification by the second means, or to increase the number of times of the specific notification by the second means.

Feature C3. The specific notification executing means is described in feature C1 or feature C2, which is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed by the second means in a situation where the privilege numerical value is not given by the numerical value giving means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed by the second means in the situation where the privilege numerical value is not given, the opportunity of the specific notification can be secured without increasing the chance of giving the privilege numerical value. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the decrease in the degree of the privilege based on the arrival of the grant corresponding value.

Feature C4. The specific notification executing means is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed by the second means in a situation where the total value has not increased after the specific notification is executed by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to feature C3.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed by the second means in a situation where the total value has not increased since the specific notification was performed by the first means, the opportunity for the specific notification is secured without increasing the chance of giving the privilege numerical value. can do. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the decrease in the degree of the privilege based on the arrival of the grant corresponding value.

Feature C5. Means for determining the mode of the specific notification by the second means based on the total value when the specific notification is executed by the first means (function of executing the process of step S2804 by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature C3 or the feature C4.

In the above configuration, since the mode of the specific notification by the second means is determined based on the total value when the specific notification by the first means is performed, the total value indicated by the specific notification by the second means and the total value at that time are determined. Can be matched with the actual total value of. Therefore, it is possible to perform specific notification in a situation where the privilege numerical value is not given, while suppressing the hindrance to the game aiming to reach the grant corresponding value.

Feature C6. As the specific notification mode, a plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set.
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification in any aspect selected from a plurality of aspects.
The selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is executed by the first means, the special notification given when the specific notification is executed by the first means, or the specific notification by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C5, which comprises a specific means for making the total value different according to the total value when the game is executed.

By associating the specific notification by the first means with a value smaller than the actual total value, for the convenience of securing a margin for the specific notification by the second means later, the specific notification by the first means first Shows a total value that is too small, and there is a concern that it will not be possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game. In this respect, in this configuration, the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means is configured to differ depending on the privilege numerical value given at that time or the total value at that time. For example, if the notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value is more likely to be selected as the given privilege value or total value is larger, the total value is larger in the first place, so the value is smaller than that. Even if the specific notification is performed by the first means in correspondence, it is possible to preferably suppress the notification from becoming poor. Therefore, it is possible to show a corresponding total value in both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game.

Feature C7. In the specific means, the first value (4 points) is the value for the privilege given when the specific notification is executed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is executed by the first means. ), The player can recognize a value or amount smaller than the total value of the privilege values as compared with the case where the second value (2 points) is smaller than the first value. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the selection mode is different so as to facilitate.

According to this configuration, as the selection mode when selecting the notification mode of the specific notification by the first means, the notification mode corresponding to the value smaller than the total value is selected as the given privilege numerical value or the total value is larger. It is easy to do. That is, the larger the total value is, the easier it is to select the mode corresponding to the value smaller than the total value, and the easier it is to secure the difference for the specific notification by the second means. It is possible to preferably suppress the notification from becoming poor. Therefore, it is possible to show a corresponding total value in both the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, and it is possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game.

Feature C8. When a predetermined limiting condition (the accumulation point has not reached the holding point) is satisfied, the limiting means (step S2604 by the sub control device 81) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means. It has a function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the specific notification can be executed by the second means in a restricted state by the limiting means.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is restricted when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. In this case, if the specific notification is not executed at all in the restricted state, there is a concern that the player's interest in the privilege numerical value may decrease. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific notification by the second means is performed under the restricted state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the specific notification in the restricted state.

In addition, "when a predetermined restriction state is satisfied" of this feature may be rephrased as "when the total value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (a holding point or a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from a holding point)". In this case, "Since the specific notification by the second means is performed based on the total value obtained in the past, it can be executed without being restricted by the total value at the time of execution of the notification. It has the characteristic that it can be executed without any problem even in a situation where the execution of the specific notification is restricted depending on whether the total value is several. Taking advantage of such a characteristic, the specific notification by the second means is restricted. By using it as the specific notification of the above, it is possible to suitably secure the execution opportunity of the specific notification in the relevant state. "

Feature C9. The specific notification by the second means can be executed in the restricted state based on at least a part of the difference derived by the specific notification performed by the first means before the restricted state by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized in that it is said to be.

In order to perform the specific notification by the second means in the restricted state, a difference that is a prerequisite for the difference is required, but in this configuration, it is derived from the specific notification by the first means in the non-restricted state. In the non-restricted state, the execution of the specific notification is not restricted, and the specific notification is likely to be performed. Therefore, with this configuration, the above difference can be preferably secured.

Feature C10. When a predetermined predetermined condition (end of advantageous section) is satisfied, an initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main controller 101). ), The gaming machine according to the feature C8 or the feature C9.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the total value of the privilege value is initialized, and the privilege value accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, the player may be given the impression that he / she will be forced to save again, and there is a concern that the motivation to continue the game may be reduced. For such a configuration, it is effective to limit the execution of specific notification in a situation where the total value after initialization is small, but on the other hand, the player is aware of the privilege value because the notification frequency decreases. There is a concern that opportunities will decrease and interest in bonus figures will diminish. In such a case, by applying the configuration of the feature C8 or the feature C9, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state while making it difficult to give the impression that the total value is initialized.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature C11. As the specific notification mode, a plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set.
The first means is configured to execute the specific notification in any aspect selected from a plurality of aspects.
The selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is executed by the first means, the special notification given when the specific notification is executed by the first means, or the specific notification by the first means. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which comprises a specific means for making the total value different according to the total value when the game is executed.

When a large bonus value is obtained, the total value also increases, but the larger the total value, the larger the gap from the initial value when the total value is initialized. Such a large gap leads to a prolonged restriction state in subsequent games. In this respect, in this configuration, the selection mode of the notification mode when the specific notification is performed by the first means is configured to differ depending on the privilege numerical value given at that time or the total value at that time. In a situation where it is easy to select a notification mode corresponding to a value smaller than the total value, it is easy to secure a difference for specific notification by the second means thereafter. Assuming that the larger the total value is, the more likely it is to occur, the more the restricted state is likely to be prolonged, the easier it is to secure the difference for the specific notification by the second means. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the specific notification by the second means in a long restricted state in which the need for increasing the execution frequency of the specific notification is likely to occur.

Feature C12. In the specific means, the first value (3 points) is the value for the privilege given when the specific notification is executed by the first means or the total value when the specific notification is executed by the first means. ), The player can recognize a value or amount smaller than the total value of the privilege values as compared with the case where the second value (2 points) is smaller than the first value. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the selection mode is different so as to facilitate.

According to this configuration, as the selection mode when selecting the notification mode of the specific notification by the first means, the notification mode corresponding to the value smaller than the total value is selected as the given privilege numerical value or the total value is larger. It is easy to do. As a result, the more the restricted state is likely to be prolonged, the easier it is to secure the difference for the specific notification by the second means. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the specific notification by the second means in a long restricted state in which the need for increasing the execution frequency of the specific notification is likely to occur.

Feature C13. When the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized by the initialization means, the means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (function of holding the difference value by the sub control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C10 to the feature C12.

In the above configuration, the difference does not disappear when the total value is initialized, and is maintained even after that, so that the difference can be used across the initialization when the execution of the specific notification is restricted. As a result, the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization can be utilized after initialization to execute the specific notification, and in the configuration in which the total value is initialized when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be set. It becomes possible to increase it suitably.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C13, wherein the specific notification does not specify a numerical value for privilege.

In the above configuration, since the privilege value is not specified in the specific notification, it is difficult for the player to notice even if there is a deviation from the actual total value in the specific notification by the first means, and the player's trust in the notification is lowered. Can be suppressed.

Feature C15. As a gaming state, at least a plurality of specific states (advantageous sections) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) may occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
With
It is characterized by having an initialization means (a function of executing an initialization process in the section display second process by the main control device 101) that initializes the total value when the specific state ends or ends. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C13.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the features C1 to C13, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature C16. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C15.

By applying the configuration of any of the features C1 to C15 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C16, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
In the specific state, a numerical value giving means (a function of executing the first point lottery process and the second point lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of giving a privilege numerical value (point) according to the situation of the game, and
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
When the specific state ends, an initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values, and
Specific notification executing means (point processing and point effect execution by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to execute processing) and
With
The specific notification executing means is a specific means (sub) that executes the specific notification in the specific state after the predetermined specific state based on at least a part of the privilege numerical values given in the predetermined specific state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of step S3401 and step S3501 by the control device 81).

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given according to the situation of the game, and when the total value reaches the value corresponding to the grant, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. By notifying the total value each time and the value for the privilege given, the player can recognize that the total value will increase toward the value corresponding to the grant, and the value for the privilege will be further increased. The motivation to go is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

However, in the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the total value of the privilege value is initialized, and at least a part of the privilege value accumulated up to that point disappears. In this case, if the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, the player may be given the impression that he / she will be forced to save again, and there is a concern that the motivation to continue the game may be reduced. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific notification regarding the privilege numerical value is performed, the specific notification in the specific state after that is performed based on at least a part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state. It is suppressed that the initialization of the total value is reflected in the notification as it is, and it becomes possible to preferably arouse the motivation to continue the game even after the initialization.

In this feature, the "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the addition of the privilege numerical value". Further, in this feature, "when the specific state ends, the initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101)" , "When the specific state ends, a reduction means for reducing the total value of the privilege numerical values (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101)" can also be expressed. ..

Feature D2. When the total value in the specific state after the predetermined specific state is equal to or less than the predetermined value (holding point), the specific means is at least a part of the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific notification is executed based on the above.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is small, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the earlier specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification until the total value increases can be supplemented by the notification, and the motivation to continue the game after the initialization of the total value can be preferably aroused.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the predetermined value is the total value in the predetermined specific state.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is less than the total value in the previous specific state, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification until the total value catches up can be supplemented by the notification, and the motivation to continue the game after the initialization of the total value can be preferably aroused.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3, wherein the predetermined value is the highest value before initialization in the total value in the predetermined specific state.

In the above configuration, when the total value in the later specific state is less than the maximum value before initialization, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification until the total value catches up with the maximum value can be supplemented by the notification, and the motivation to continue the game after the initialization of the total value can be preferably aroused.

Feature D5. The specific notification executing means is a situation in which the privilege numerical value is not given by the numerical value giving means in the specific state after the predetermined specific state, and the privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the specific notification is executed based on at least a part thereof.

In the above configuration, in the situation where the privilege numerical value is not given in the later specific state, the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the earlier specific state is executed. As a result, the specific notification until the total value increases can be supplemented by the notification, and the motivation to continue the game after the initialization of the total value can be preferably aroused.

Feature D6. Execution of the processing of step S2604 by the sub-control device 81 capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification in a predetermined case (when the accumulation point is smaller than the holding point) in the specific state after the predetermined specific state. Function to do)
The specific means is characterized in that, in the restricted state by the restricting means, the specific notification is executed based on at least a part of the privilege numerical values given in the predetermined specific state. The gaming machine described in any of.

For example, by restricting the execution of the specific notification in a situation where the total value in the later specific state is smaller than the total value in the earlier specific state, it is possible to suppress the notification that the total value has decreased, and the player. It is preferable in order not to give the impression of re-storing. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the execution frequency of the specific notification will be low, and the player will have less chance to be aware of the privilege value, and as a result, the interest in the privilege value will be reduced. In this respect, in this configuration, in the situation where the execution of the specific notification is restricted, the specific notification is performed based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state, so the execution frequency of the specific notification in the restricted state is preferable. It becomes possible to increase to.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the specific means executes the specific notification a plurality of times based on at least a part of a privilege numerical value given in the predetermined specific state.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification based on the privilege numerical value given in the previous specific state is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification in the later specific state. Become.

Feature D8. The specific notification execution means is
In the predetermined specific state, the first means (step S2804 by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the notification in which the player can recognize a numerical value or amount smaller than the total value of the privilege numerical values as the specific notification. Has a function to execute processing)
The specific means is at least a part of the difference (difference value between the used point and the accumulated point) between the specified notification by the first means and the total value (accumulation point) when the specific notification is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it includes a second means for executing the specific notification based on the above.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification generated in the previous specific state utilizes the difference between the corresponding value and the total value to perform the specific notification in the later specific state, the total value notified by the notification and the actual value are used. It is possible to preferably suppress the deviation from the total value.

Feature D9. When the total value is initialized by the initialization means, it is provided with means for holding the difference before the initialization even after the initialization (a function of holding the difference value by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature D8.

In the above configuration, the difference does not disappear even if the total value is initialized, and is maintained thereafter, so that the difference can be used across the initialization. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the difference generated by the specific notification before initialization in executing the specific notification after initialization.

Feature D10. A plurality of gaming states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state of is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D9.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the features D1 to D9, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature D11. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D10.

By applying the configuration of any of the features D1 to D10 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

Feature D12. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
In the specific state, points are given in the specific information variable means (first point lottery process and second point lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of changing specific information (total points) according to the game situation. Function to give) and
When the specific information has a predetermined content (privilege grant value), a privilege granting means (processing for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of granting a predetermined privilege (shift to the second AT mode) to the player Function to execute) and
When the specific state ends, an initialization means for initializing the specific information (a function of executing the initialization process in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
Specific notification executing means (point processing and point effect execution by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (point suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the specific information. (Function to execute processing) and
With
The specific notification executing means is a means (sub) that executes the specific notification in the specific state after the predetermined specific state based on at least a part of the specific information before initialization in the predetermined specific state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of step S3401 and step S3501 by the control device 81).

According to this feature, the same effect as that of feature D1 can be obtained. It should be noted that any configuration of the above features D1 to D11 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D12, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value (privilege grant value) corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player is given a predetermined privilege (to the second AT mode). A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process for terminating the first AT mode by the main control device 101) that can grant a transition), and
Point processing by the specific notification execution means (sub-control device 81) that controls the specific notification (granting suggestion effect, total suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. And the function to execute the process for executing the point effect),
With
The specific notification executing means has specific information (directable points, total points) corresponding to a value larger than the privilege numerical value (granted point) or the total value (total point) of the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means. It is characterized by having a specific means (a function of executing the processes of step S4601 to step S4609, step S4801 to step S4811, and step S4901 to step S4911 by the sub control device 81) for performing execution control of the specific notification based on the above. A game machine to be.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In addition, since the specific notification is performed as the notification regarding the privilege value, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the granted value, and is willing to further increase the privilege value. Is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is preferable to increase the chances of giving the privilege numerical value to increase the frequency of the specific notification and increase the player's interest in the privilege numerical value. However, on the other hand, if the number of benefits is given more often, the difficulty of reaching the given value becomes lower, and as a result, the degree of the benefits must be kept low, which may reduce the appeal to the player. There is. In other words, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of specific notification, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value will be impaired.

In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the privilege numerical value given by the grant trigger, specific information corresponding to the privilege numerical value or a value larger than the total value is derived, and specific notification is performed based on this specific information. It is configured to control execution. In this case, since the specific notification can be executed on the premise of the actual privilege value or a value larger than the total value, the frequency of the specific notification can be increased. At that time, since the specific information is used exclusively for the execution control of the specific notification and is not involved in the granting of the privilege, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the difficulty of reaching the grant corresponding value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value from being impaired.

In this feature, the "notification regarding the privilege numerical value" can also be expressed as "notification corresponding to the total value or notification corresponding to the addition of the privilege numerical value".

Feature E2. Derivation means for deriving the specific information based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and a predetermined numerical value (subpoint, predetermined coefficient) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4606 by the sub-control device 81) is provided.

In the above configuration, since the privilege numerical value is used for deriving the specific information, the specific information can be derived while ensuring the relevance with the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the specific notification from deviating significantly from the actual state of the privilege value, even though the configuration uses specific information different from the privilege value, and the total value predicted by the player from the specific notification. And, it becomes possible to match or approach the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege value.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the derivation means derives the specific information by adding the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value.

In the above configuration, since the specific information is obtained from the addition result of the privileged numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, it is possible to secure at least the value for the predetermined numerical value as the specific information even if there is no privilege numerical value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the privilege numerical value is actually given at the time of grant, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature E4. Determining means for determining the value of the specific information based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof (a plurality of sub-point lottery tables according to the size of the given points are provided, and among them The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, which is characterized by having a function of acquiring sub-points by acquiring those according to the actual points granted from the player.

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific information is determined according to the value for the privilege, the size of the value for the privilege and the size of the specific information can be linked. , The specific information can be increased accordingly. In this case, the larger the value for the privilege given, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification, so that the impression of the player received from the specific notification and the actual accumulation are accumulated. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the value for the privilege.

In addition, this feature derives the specific information based on "a privilege numerical value or a total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and a predetermined numerical value (subpoint) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof. A plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points) based on the derivation means (the function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4606 by the sub-control device 81) and the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof. Etc.), a determination means for determining a numerical value of 1 as the predetermined numerical value (a plurality of sub-point lottery tables according to the size of the grant points are provided, and the one corresponding to the actual grant points is acquired from them. It is also characterized by having (a function of drawing sub-points) and. "

Feature E5. When the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means is the first predetermined value (20 points), the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is from the first predetermined value. The description in any of the features E1 to E4, which is characterized in that the specific information having a larger value is derived or is configured to be easier to derive than the case where the second predetermined value (10 points) is also smaller. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the value for the privilege given, the larger (or more likely) the specific information becomes, and the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification increase. It is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the impression of the person and the actually accumulated privilege value. In other words, the larger the amount of grant and the amount of accumulation, the stronger the expectation of the player will be aroused. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification is not unnecessarily increased, but the actual amount of grant and accumulation. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, this feature states that "in the determination means, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof". Is also expressed as "the gaming machine according to feature E4, which is characterized in that a larger numerical value is determined or is easier to determine as the predetermined numerical value than when is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value". can.

Feature E6. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming state, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (winning to shift to the advantageous section) is satisfied. It ends when the predetermined end conditions (the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number, and the AT mode has ended) are satisfied. ,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
A function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the first derivation means (sub-control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value or the total value given by the numerical value giving means. )When,
A second derivation means (step by the sub control device 81) that derives the specific information based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means. (Function to execute the process of S4604 to step S4606),
The first derivation means has a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of an advantageous section in accordance with the start timing of the specific state or the first grant trigger in the specific state. ), The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the grant corresponding value has been reached for the privilege numerical value given in the specific state of 1, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, since a predetermined numerical value is derived according to the start timing of the specific state or the first granting trigger in the specific state, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification from the initial stage of the specific state. As a result, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a specific state while suitably increasing the player's expectation that the bonus numerical value reaches the grant corresponding value.

Feature E7. A plurality of game states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the game state, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (winning a lottery for transition to an advantageous section) is satisfied. , It ends when the predetermined end conditions (the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number, and the AT mode has ended). can be,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
A function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the first derivation means (sub-control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value or the total value given by the numerical value giving means. )When,
A second derivation means (step by the sub control device 81) that derives the specific information based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means. (Function to execute the process of S4604 to step S4606),
In the first derivation means, after the specific state is started, the number of games from a predetermined trigger (when the production possible point becomes a predetermined value or less, the start timing of the advantageous section, etc.) becomes the predetermined number of games. Any of the features E1 to E6 characterized in that the means for deriving the predetermined numerical value based on the above-mentioned (when it becomes) (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 in the middle of the advantageous section) is provided. Described gaming machine.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the grant corresponding value has been reached for the privilege numerical value given in the specific state of 1, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, a predetermined numerical value is derived by a predetermined opportunity established at a timing in the middle of the specific state. Therefore, for example, when the numerical value for privilege is insufficient in the middle of the specific state, the predetermined numerical value (specific information) is used. ) Can be supplemented. For example, in a configuration where the opportunity to give a bonus value is suppressed to some extent in order to secure a certain degree of difficulty for reaching the grant corresponding value, the bonus value is set in the middle or the end of a specific state. As a result of not being given easily and making it difficult to perform specific notification, there is a concern that it will be difficult to maintain the player's interest in the bonus value. In this respect, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification in the middle stage or the final stage of the specific state, and it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest in the privilege numerical value.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the predetermined opportunity is a privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or a total value thereof being equal to or less than a predetermined predetermined value.

According to the above configuration, when the privilege numerical value is insufficient, it is possible to supplement it with a predetermined numerical value (specific information) and execute the specific notification.

Feature E9. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means.
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means and a derivation means for deriving the specific information (a function of executing the processes of steps S4601 to S4606 by the sub control device 81).
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the specific means controls execution of the specific notification based on the specific information derived by the derivation means.

In the above configuration, not only the execution control of the specific notification but also the derivation processing of the specific information is entrusted to the second control means side, so that the specific notification is performed while suppressing the increase in the processing load of the first control means. The frequency can be increased. In general, in view of the fact that the first control means has stronger countermeasures against fraud than the second control means, in this configuration, general control for advancing the game, granting a privilege value, and a privilege value are used. Is configured to entrust the processing related to the profit of the player, such as the control of the privilege grant when the grant corresponding value is reached, to the first control means, but in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means becomes high. NS. In such a situation, if the execution control of the specific notification and the derivation process of the specific information are entrusted to the first control means, there is a concern that processing omissions may occur and the game may be hindered. , The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and a suitable configuration can be provided for a gaming machine having a limited storage capacity that can be mounted on the first control means.

Feature E10. The specific notification execution means executes the processes of execution determination means (steps S4804 to 4806 and steps S7203 to S7204 by the sub-control device 81) for determining whether or not to execute the specific notification based on a predetermined execution trigger. It is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined by the execution determination means to execute the specific notification.
A plurality of states related to the specific notification include a first state (low probability mode) and a second state (high probability mode) in which it is easier to determine that the specific notification is executed by the execution determination means than the first state. State is provided,
When a predetermined transition condition (winning a high-probability mode transition lottery) is satisfied in the first state, a state transition means for transitioning to the second state (a function of executing the process of step S7105 by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E9.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the second state in which the execution probability of the specific notification is increased is performed. In the second state, since the frequency of the specific notification is increased, the player's expectation that the total of the bonus values reaches the grant corresponding value is increased, and the motivation to continue the game can be appropriately aroused. become.

Feature E11. The specific means
When the predetermined specific notification is performed or when the specific notification is performed, the first means (1st means) for updating the specific information by subtracting the value (directed point) corresponding to the predetermined specific notification from the specific information (directable point). The function of executing the process of step S4805 to step S4811 by the sub control device 81) and
Predetermined information including the specific information updated by the first means (if no new grant points are given after updating the effectable points by subtraction, the updated directable points and new grant points are given. In the case of the case, the second means (the effect after the update by the sub control device 81) that controls the execution of the specific notification after the predetermined specific notification based on the added value obtained by adding the given points to the updated production possible points). A function that controls the execution of grant suggestion effects based on possible points),
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E10.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or when the specific notification is performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific information, and the rest is used as a numerical value for executing the later specific notification. For example, in the configuration in which the specific notification is executed based on the privilege value for one time for each grant of the privilege value, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the privilege value at that time is performed, the specific notification is performed. The unused portion is subsequently terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the specific information is performed, the unused portion is left as a numerical value for executing the specific notification later, and it is suppressed that it is wasted. NS. That is, since the specific information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as the execution portion of the later specific notification, it is possible to efficiently execute the specific notification for the derived specific information. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the privilege numerical value can be suitably improved.

Feature E12. As the specific notification mode, a plurality of modes including the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (foam medium effect) are set.
As the value corresponding to the specific notification, the first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein different second predetermined values (10 points) are configured to correspond to each other.

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as the mode of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest the amount of the privilege numerical value to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (value subtracted from the specific information) has a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after the execution is controlled based on the predetermined information The mode will be selected regardless of the mode of the specific notification described above. As a result, there is a concern that the total amount of bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification and the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege values will greatly deviate, and the player's trust in the specific notification will decrease. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since a value having a size corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific information, it is possible to select the later specific notification mode in relation to the previous specific notification mode. can. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total of the privileged numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification each time and the accumulated amount of the actual privileged numerical values closer to each other. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the decrease in the player's trust in the specific notification.

In addition, this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (in the bubble) that makes the player expect that a numerical value for privilege larger than that of the first mode is given. A plurality of modes including (effect) are set, and as a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the second aspect corresponds to the specific notification. It is also characterized in that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification. "

Feature E13. The second means includes a mode determining means (a function of executing the process of steps S4805 to S4807 by the sub control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the identification of the mode determined by the mode determining means. It is configured to perform notifications and
The gaming machine according to feature E12, wherein the mode determining means includes means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the predetermined information when the specific notification is executed later. ..

In the above configuration, when the execution control of the specific notification afterwards based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is suppressed that the mode of the specific notification after the deviation from the accumulated amount of the actual privilege value is selected, the total of the privilege value predicted by the player from each specific notification, and the actual privilege. It is possible to match or approach the accumulated amount of numerical values.

Feature E14. The feature E13 is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed later, the mode determining means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from the mode in which the corresponding value among the plurality of modes is the predetermined information or less. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the plurality of modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is excluded from the selection target. As a result, the mode selection within the range of the predetermined information can be preferably performed with a simple configuration, and the mode can be a preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E13.

Feature E15. After the update is performed by the first means, when the privilege numerical value is not given by the numerical value giving means, the specific information updated by the first means is set as the predetermined information.
When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means after the update is performed by the first means, the added privilege numerical value is added to the specific information updated by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature E11 to feature E14, characterized in that the result is configured to be the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific information is updated, if a new privilege numerical value is assigned by the numerical value assigning means, the assigned privilege numerical value is used. Predetermined information is derived by adding to the updated specific information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than in the case where there is no such addition, as a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the specific notification later, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature E16. The specific means
When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the first specific means (a function of executing the giving suggestion effect at the point giving opportunity by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification, and
Regardless of whether or not the granting opportunity has been established or whether or not the bonus numerical value has been granted by the numerical value giving means, a predetermined trigger (when the continuous production for the pseudo precursor ends, when the mode shifts to the first AT mode) A second specific means (a function of executing a grant suggestion effect in a situation other than the point granting trigger by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on the above.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E15.

In the above configuration, not only the first specific means for executing the specific notification when the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, but also whether or not the granting opportunity is established and whether or not the privilege numerical value is given. Regardless of the above, the second specific means for executing the specific notification is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the chance of giving the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the degree of the privilege from being lowered due to the increase in the opportunity to give the numerical value for the privilege.

Feature E17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means.
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means.
The gaming machine according to feature E16, wherein the second control means is configured so that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the execution of a predetermined process (execution control of continuous effect for pseudo precursors). ..

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that is the execution trigger of the specific notification by the second specific means is established by the execution of the predetermined process by the second control means, the specific notification by the second specific means (the situation where the grant trigger is not established). It is possible to keep the contribution of the first control means low in the execution control of the specific notification) in the situation where the value for privilege is not given. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and a suitable configuration can be provided for a gaming machine having a limited storage capacity that can be mounted on the first control means.

Feature E18. Specific determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the sub control device 81) controls so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. Function to execute) and
With
The specific effect (continuous effect for pseudo precursors) in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event is performed or performed. The gaming machine according to feature E16 or feature E17, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the above.

In the above configuration, a specific effect of notifying the player of the determination result of the specific determination means is executed. When the determination result of the specific determination means becomes a specific result, a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, when the above specific effect is performed, the player is looking at the effect with high interest. Is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since the specific notification is executed by the second specific means in accordance with the execution of the above specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the specific notification, and the interest in the privilege numerical value. Can be effectively increased.

In addition, in this feature, the specific notification is performed by the second specific means in correspondence with the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it is expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will be increased by the configuration in which the specific notification is performed by the second specific means in correspondence with the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the specific result. Unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted in consideration of the relationship with the specific event that occurs, the effect of the specific notification cannot be properly exerted, or the boundary with the specific event becomes ambiguous and the player's There is a concern that it may cause confusion. In this respect, according to this feature, since such troublesome adjustment is not required, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in the labor of the production design.

When this feature is applied to the feature E17, "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific effect executing means. It may have a configuration of "being".

Feature E19. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
When the specific state ends or ends, it is provided with an initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E18.

In the above configuration, the privilege value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to the case where the privilege value is accumulated throughout the business hours of the game hall, the period during which the player can increase the privilege value is shortened, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the grant corresponding value is low. It tends to be. For this reason, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus numerical value is reduced, and it becomes difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue the game by the game aiming at reaching the grant corresponding value. In such a situation, by applying the configuration of any of the above features E1 to E18, the frequency of the specific notification in the specific state can be increased, and the value for the privilege is initialized by the end of the specific state. It is possible to provide a particularly useful configuration for a gaming machine.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature E20. A plurality of gaming states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state of is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
When the specific state ends or ends, the initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E19.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the bonus numerical value is initialized when the specific state ends, and it is difficult to accumulate the bonus numerical value as compared with the case where the bonus numerical value is accumulated throughout the business hours of the game hall. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the above-mentioned features E1 to E19, it becomes possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the above-mentioned features.

Feature E21. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E20.

By applying the configuration of any of the features E1 to E20 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E21, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
Specific notification executing means (point processing and point effect execution by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (granting suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to execute processing) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
Derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced) (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the sub-control device 81) and
When the predetermined specific notification is performed or when the specific notification is performed, the value (directed point) corresponding to the predetermined specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information derived by the derivation means to update the specific numerical information. (Function of executing the process of step S4805 to step S4811 by the sub control device 81) and
Predetermined information including specific numerical information updated by the updating means (if no new granting points are given after updating the directable points by subtraction, the updated directable points and new grant points are given. In the case, the effect after the update by the sub-control device 81 is possible by the specific means (sub-control device 81) that controls the execution of the specific notification after the predetermined specific notification based on the added value obtained by adding the given points to the updateable points). A function that controls the execution of grant suggestion effects based on points) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In addition, since the specific notification is performed as the notification regarding the privilege value, the player can recognize that the total value is increasing toward the granted value, and is willing to further increase the privilege value. Is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is preferable to increase the chances of giving the privilege numerical value to increase the frequency of the specific notification and increase the player's interest in the privilege numerical value. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or when the specific notification is performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the rest is used as a numerical value for executing the later specific notification. It has a structure.

For example, in the configuration in which the specific notification is executed based on the privilege value for one time for each grant of the privilege value, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the privilege value at that time is performed, the specific notification is performed. The unused portion is subsequently terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the specific numerical information is performed, the unused portion is left as a numerical value for executing the specific notification later, and it is suppressed from being wasted. Will be done. That is, since the specific numerical information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as the execution portion of the later specific notification, it becomes possible to efficiently execute the specific notification for the derived specific numerical information. .. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the privilege numerical value can be suitably improved.

In this feature, "derivating means for deriving specific numerical information (directable points)" is referred to as "deriving means for deriving specific numerical information (directable points) using the privilege numerical value given by the numerical assigning means". It can also be expressed as.

Feature F2. The privilege granting means is characterized in that, regardless of the specific numerical information, when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is granted. The gaming machine described in F1.

In this configuration, the specific numerical information is not referred to when the predetermined privilege is given, and the specific numerical information is treated only for executing the specific notification. That is, since the granting of the privilege using the privilege numerical value and the execution control of the specific notification using the specific numerical information are independent, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as a decrease in the difficulty of granting the privilege. At the same time, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the addition of a numerical value for privilege.

Where the frequency of specific notification can be increased by the above-mentioned feature F1, according to the configuration of this feature, it is possible to increase the frequency of notification that a privilege numerical value has been given as such specific notification. If there are many notifications that the bonus numbers have been given, it is expected that the player will have an impression that the total value of the bonus numbers is increasing, so it is necessary to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game. Becomes possible.

Feature F4. As the specific notification mode, a plurality of modes including the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (foam medium effect) are set.
As the corresponding value, the first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the second predetermined value different from the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of feature F1 to feature F3, characterized in that a predetermined value (10 points) is configured to correspond.

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as the mode of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest the amount of the privilege numerical value to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (value subtracted from the specific numerical information) has a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after the execution is controlled based on the predetermined information Is selected regardless of the above-mentioned specific notification mode. As a result, there is a concern that the total amount of bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification and the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege values will greatly deviate, and the player's trust in the specific notification will decrease. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since a value having a size corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific numerical information, the later specific notification mode should be selected in relation to the previous specific notification mode. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total of the privileged numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification each time and the accumulated amount of the actual privileged numerical values closer to each other. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the decrease in the player's trust in the specific notification.

In addition, this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (foam) corresponding to expecting the player to give a numerical value for privilege larger than the first mode. A plurality of modes including (medium effect) are set, and as the corresponding value, the first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first mode, and the specific of the second mode. It is also characterized in that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the notification. "

Feature F5. The specific means includes mode determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4805 to step S4807 by the sub control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the specific notification of the mode determined by the mode determination means. Is configured to run
The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the mode determining means includes means for determining the mode of the subsequent specific notification within the range of the predetermined information when the specific notification is executed later. ..

In the above configuration, when the execution control of the specific notification afterwards based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is suppressed that the mode of the specific notification after the deviation from the accumulated amount of the actual privilege value is selected, the total of the privilege value predicted by the player from each specific notification, and the actual privilege. It is possible to match or approach the accumulated amount of numerical values.

Feature F6. The feature F5 is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed later, the aspect determining means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from the aspect in which the corresponding value among the plurality of aspects is the predetermined information or less. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the plurality of modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is excluded from the selection target. As a result, the mode selection within the range of the predetermined information can be preferably performed with a simple configuration, and the mode can be a preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F5.

Feature F7. When the predetermined information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points), the specific notification execution means restricts the execution of the specific notification based on the predetermined information (process of step S4804 by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F6, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined information is not sufficiently secured, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so that the frequency of the specific notification does not increase unnecessarily, and the accumulated amount of the actual privilege value is accumulated. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while appropriately suppressing the deviation from the above.

The "predetermined specific value" of this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value necessary for executing the specific notification".

Feature F8. The specific means includes an execution decision means for determining whether or not to execute the later specific notification based on the predetermined information, and when the execution decision means determines to execute the later specific notification, the specific means is later. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F7, characterized in that the specific notification is executed.

In the above configuration, since it is determined whether or not to execute the specific notification afterwards based on the predetermined information, the ease of executing the notification can be changed according to the magnitude of the predetermined information. For example, if the configuration is such that the larger the predetermined information is, the higher the execution probability of the specific notification is, the predetermined information that remains without being used for the execution of the specific notification can be reduced, and the predetermined information can be used efficiently. become.

Feature F9. When the predetermined information has a first value (20 points), the execution determining means can easily determine that the specific notification is executed later than when the predetermined information has a second value (10 points). The gaming machine according to feature F8, which is characterized in that it is configured as described above.

According to the above configuration, the larger the predetermined information is, the more positively the specific notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the predetermined information that remains without being used for executing the specific notification, and the predetermined information is used efficiently. Will be possible.

Feature F10. When the privilege numerical value is not given by the numerical value giving means after the update is performed by the updating means, the specific numerical information updated by the updating means is used as the predetermined information.
When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means after the update is performed by the updating means, the addition result of adding the given privilege numerical value to the specific numerical value information updated by the updating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F9, which is configured to have the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific numerical value information is updated, if a new privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the given privilege numerical value is given. Is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the predetermined information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than in the case where there is no such addition, as a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the specific notification later, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Features F11. The derivation means is a specific numerical value based on a privilege numerical value or a total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and a predetermined numerical value (subpoint, a predetermined coefficient) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F10, which is characterized by deriving information.

In the above configuration, since the privilege numerical value is used for deriving the specific numerical value information, the specific numerical value information can be derived while ensuring the relevance with the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, even though the configuration uses specific numerical value information different from the privilege numerical value, it is possible to suppress that the content of the specific notification greatly deviates from the actual state of the privilege numerical value, and the total predicted by the player from the specific notification. It is possible to match or bring the value and the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege value closer to each other.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the derivation means derives the specific numerical value information by adding the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value.

In the above configuration, since the specific numerical value information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, the specific notification can be executed on the premise of a numerical value larger than the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of the feature F1, it is possible to more preferably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification. Further, in this configuration, since the specific numerical value information is obtained from the addition result, it is possible to secure at least a predetermined numerical value as the specific numerical value information even if there is no privilege numerical value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the privilege numerical value is actually given at the time of grant, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature F13. The specific notification is a notification corresponding to the addition of a numerical value for privilege.
The second specific notification execution means for controlling the second specific notification (total suggestion effect) corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical values to be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. (A function to execute the total suggestion effect processing by the sub control device 81)
The second specific notification execution means is a means for performing execution control of the second specific notification based on the addition result (total points) of the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value given by the numerical value giving means. The gaming machine according to feature F12, which comprises (a function of executing the processes of step S4606 and steps S4907 to S4911 by the sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical value information that is the premise of the specific notification corresponding to the assignment of the privilege numerical value and the addition result that is the premise of the second specific notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value are given numerical values. It is obtained from the sum of the privilege value given by the means and the predetermined value. That is, since the numerical values that are premised in each of the above notifications are aligned, the total value of the privilege numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification corresponding to the assignment of the privilege numerical value and the privilege predicted by the player from the second specific notification. It can be matched or brought close to the total value of the numerical values.

Feature F14. The derivation means is a determination means (step S4601 by the sub-control device 81) for determining the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F13, which is characterized by having (a function of executing the process of step S4605).

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific numerical value information is determined according to the privilege numerical value, the size of the privilege numerical value and the size of the specific numerical value information can be linked. For example, the given privilege numerical value is large. In that case, the privilege numerical information can be increased accordingly. In this case, the larger the value for the privilege given, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification, so that the impression of the player received from the specific notification and the actual accumulation are accumulated. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the value for the privilege.

In addition, this feature is based on "the derivation means is based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value (subpoint) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof. The specific numerical value information is derived, and one of a plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) is set as the predetermined numerical value based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof. It is also characterized by having a determination means for determining (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the sub-control device 81). "

Feature F15. In the derivation means, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the first predetermined value (20 points), the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is said. Described in any one of the feature F1 to the feature F14, which is characterized in that the specific numerical value information having a larger value can be easily derived or derived than the case where the second predetermined value (10 points) is smaller than the first predetermined value. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the given privilege value, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical value information becomes, and the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification increase. It is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the player's impression and the actually accumulated privilege value. In other words, the larger the amount of grant and the amount of accumulation, the stronger the expectation of the player will be aroused. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification is not unnecessarily increased, but the actual amount of grant and accumulation. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, this feature states that "in the determination means, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof". Is also expressed as "the gaming machine according to the feature F14, which is characterized in that a larger numerical value is determined or is easier to determine as the predetermined numerical value than when is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value". can.

Feature F16. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming state, and the specific state is started when a predetermined start condition (winning to shift to the advantageous section) is satisfied. It ends when the predetermined end conditions (the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number, and the AT mode has ended) are satisfied. ,
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
A function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 by the first derivation means (sub-control device 81) for deriving a predetermined numerical value (subpoint or coefficient) separately from the privilege numerical value or the total value given by the numerical value giving means. )When,
The second derivation means (by the sub control device 81) that derives the specific numerical value information based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value derived by the first derivation means. (Function to execute the processes of steps S4604 to S4606) and
With
The first derivation means is characterized by including means for deriving the predetermined numerical value in accordance with the start timing of the specific state (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4603 at the start of an advantageous section). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F15.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the grant corresponding value has been reached for the privilege numerical value given in the specific state of 1, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result. Under such a configuration, since a predetermined numerical value is derived according to the start timing of the specific state or the first granting trigger in the specific state, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification from the initial stage of the specific state. As a result, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a specific state while suitably increasing the player's expectation that the bonus numerical value reaches the grant corresponding value.

Feature F17. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F16, wherein the second control means includes the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, the derivation of the specific numerical information, the update of the specific numerical information by subtracting the value corresponding to the executed specific notification, and the execution control of the specific notification based on the predetermined information including the updated specific numerical information are all second. Since the configuration is left to the control means side, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. In general, in view of the fact that the first control means has stronger countermeasures against fraud than the second control means, in this configuration, general control for advancing the game, granting a privilege value, and a privilege value are used. Is configured to entrust the processing related to the profit of the player, such as the control of the privilege grant when the grant corresponding value is reached, to the first control means, but in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means becomes high. NS. In such a situation, if each process such as the derivation of specific numerical information is entrusted to the first control means, there is a concern that processing omissions may occur and the game may be hindered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and a suitable configuration can be provided for a gaming machine having a limited storage capacity that can be mounted on the first control means.

Feature F18. When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the specific notification executing means executes the giving suggestion effect at the point giving opportunity by the first means (sub-control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification. Function)
The specific means is the first AT mode when the predetermined trigger (when the continuous production for the pseudo precursor is completed) regardless of whether or not the granting opportunity is established or whether or not the privilege numerical value is granted by the numerical value giving means. When the case of shifting to The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F17, which is characterized by having a function).

In the above configuration, not only the first means for executing the specific notification when the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, but also whether or not the granting opportunity is established and whether or not the privilege numerical value is given. Regardless, the second means for executing the specific notification is provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the chance of giving the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value from being impaired.

Feature F19. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means.
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means.
The gaming machine according to feature F18, wherein the second control means is configured so that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the predetermined processing (execution control of continuous effect for pseudo precursors) being performed. ..

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that is the execution trigger of the specific notification by the second specific means is established by the execution of the predetermined process by the second control means, the specific notification by the second specific means (the situation where the grant trigger is not established). It is possible to keep the contribution of the first control means low in the execution control of the specific notification) in the situation where the value for privilege is not given. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and a suitable configuration can be provided for a gaming machine having a limited storage capacity that can be mounted on the first control means.

Feature F20. Specific determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the sub control device 81) controls so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. Function to execute) and
With
The specific effect (continuous effect for pseudo precursors) in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event is performed or performed. The gaming machine according to feature F18 or feature F19, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the above.

In the above configuration, a specific effect of notifying the player of the determination result of the specific determination means is executed. When the determination result of the specific determination means becomes a specific result, a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, when the above specific effect is performed, the player is looking at the effect with high interest. Is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since the specific notification is executed by the second specific means in accordance with the execution of the above specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the specific notification, and the interest in the privilege numerical value. Can be effectively increased.

In addition, in this feature, the specific notification is performed by the second specific means in correspondence with the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it is expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will be increased by the configuration in which the specific notification is performed by the second specific means in correspondence with the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the specific result. Unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted in consideration of the relationship with the specific event that occurs, the effect of the specific notification cannot be properly exerted, or the boundary with the specific event becomes ambiguous and the player's There is a concern that it may cause confusion. In this respect, according to this feature, since such troublesome adjustment is not required, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in the labor of the production design.

Feature F21. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
When the specific state ends or ends, it is provided with an initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F20.

In the above configuration, the privilege value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to the case where the privilege value is accumulated throughout the business hours of the game hall, the period during which the player can increase the privilege value is shortened, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the grant corresponding value is low. It tends to be. For this reason, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus numerical value is reduced, and it becomes difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue the game by the game aiming at reaching the grant corresponding value. In such a situation, by applying the configuration of any of the above features F1 to F20, the frequency of the specific notification in the specific state can be increased, and the value for the privilege is initialized by the end of the specific state. It is possible to provide a particularly useful configuration for a gaming machine.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature F22. A plurality of gaming states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state of is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
When the specific state ends or ends, the initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F21.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the bonus value is initialized when the specific state ends, making it difficult to accumulate the bonus value compared to the case where the bonus value is accumulated throughout one business day of the game hall. .. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the feature F1 to the feature F21, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature F23. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F22.

By applying the configuration of any of the features F1 to F22 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F23, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, the features F1 to F23, Shown in the configuration of any one of feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, and feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the above technical ideas individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
Point processing by the specific notification execution means (sub-control device 81) that controls the specific notification (giving suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification corresponding to the assignment of the privilege numerical value. And the function to execute the process for executing the point effect),
With
The specific notification execution means is
When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the first means (a function of executing the giving suggestion effect at the point giving opportunity by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification, and
Regardless of whether or not the granting opportunity has been established or whether or not the bonus numerical value has been granted by the numerical value giving means, a predetermined trigger (when the continuous production for the pseudo precursor ends, when the mode shifts to the first AT mode) A second means (a function of executing a grant suggestion effect in a situation other than the point granting trigger by the sub control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification based on the above.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In addition, since the specific notification is performed as the notification corresponding to the granting of the privilege numerical value, the player can recognize that the privilege numerical value has been assigned by the specific notification each time, and the total value is calculated toward the granting corresponding value. It becomes possible to recognize that it will increase. As a result, the motivation to further increase the bonus value is aroused, and it becomes possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

In such a configuration, in order to strongly arouse the motivation to continue the game, it is preferable to increase the chances of giving the privilege numerical value to increase the frequency of the specific notification and increase the player's interest in the privilege numerical value. However, on the other hand, if the number of benefits is given more often, the difficulty of reaching the given value becomes lower, and as a result, the degree of the benefits must be kept low, which may reduce the appeal to the player. There is. In other words, if an attempt is made to increase the frequency of specific notification, there is a concern that the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value will be impaired.

In this respect, in this feature, not only the first means for executing the specific notification when the numerical value for privilege is given by the numerical value giving means, but also whether or not the granting opportunity is established and whether the numerical value for privilege is given. Regardless of whether or not, it is provided with a second means for executing the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the specific notification without increasing the chance of giving the privilege numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately arouse the motivation to continue the game by improving the notification frequency while suppressing the attractiveness of the game using the privilege numerical value from being impaired.

Feature G2. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a second control means (sub control device 81) that controls so that a game effect corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed.
The first control means includes the numerical value giving means and the privilege giving means.
The second control means includes the specific notification execution means.
The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the second control means is configured so that the predetermined trigger is established based on the predetermined processing (execution control of continuous production for pseudo precursors) being performed. ..

In the above configuration, since the predetermined trigger that is the execution trigger of the specific notification by the second means is established by the execution of the predetermined processing by the second control means, the specific notification by the second means (a situation or privilege that the grant trigger is not established). It is possible to keep the contribution of the first control means low in the execution control of the specific notification) in the situation where the numerical value is not assigned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the first control means. In general, in view of the fact that the first control means has stronger countermeasures against fraud than the second control means, in this configuration, general control for advancing the game, granting a privilege value, and a privilege value are used. Is configured to entrust the processing related to the profit of the player, such as the control of the privilege grant when the grant corresponding value is reached, to the first control means, but in this case, it is assumed that the processing load of the first control means becomes high. NS. In such a situation, if the execution control of the specific notification by the second means is entrusted to the first control means, there is a concern that processing omissions may occur and the game may be hindered. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid complicating the processing configuration of the first control means and simplify the control program. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification can be increased while suppressing an increase in the program capacity, and a suitable configuration can be provided for a gaming machine having a limited storage capacity that can be mounted on the first control means.

Feature G3. Specific determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (CZ mode, first AT mode) advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
After the specific determination is made by the specific determination means, the specific effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the sub control device 81) controls so that the specific effect (continuous effect) corresponding to the result of the specific determination is executed. Function to execute) and
With
The specific effect (continuous effect for pseudo precursors) in a mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a non-specific result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific event is performed or performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity is established based on the above.

In the above configuration, a specific effect of notifying the player of the determination result of the specific determination means is executed. When the determination result of the specific determination means becomes a specific result, a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, when the above specific effect is performed, the player is looking at the effect with high interest. Is assumed. Under such a configuration, in this feature, since the specific notification is executed by the second means in accordance with the execution of the above specific effect, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the specific notification, and the interest in the privilege numerical value can be increased. It will be possible to increase it effectively.

In addition, in this feature, the specific notification is performed by the second means in correspondence with the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the non-specific result among the specific effects. For example, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the specific notification will be increased by the configuration in which the specific notification is performed by the second means corresponding to the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the specific result, but in this configuration, it occurs after the specific effect. Unless the mode and execution timing of the specific notification are properly adjusted in consideration of the relationship with the specific event, the effect of the specific notification cannot be properly exerted, or the boundary with the specific event becomes ambiguous and the player is confused. There is a concern about inviting. In this respect, according to this feature, since such troublesome adjustment is not required, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification while suppressing the increase in the labor of the production design.

When this feature is applied to the feature G2, "the first control means further includes the specific determination means and the specific event means, and the second control means further includes the specific effect executing means. It may have a configuration of "being".

Feature G4. A pattern (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of variable display areas (display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied are visible. Reel 32L, 32M, 32R area)
The specific effect is executed over a period in which the game in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and then the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas is performed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to the feature G3, which is characterized in that it is to be played.

According to the above configuration, since the specific effect is performed over a plurality of games, the specific effect can be made more conspicuous than the other effects. Under such a configuration, in order to perform a specific effect corresponding to the non-specific result, or to execute a specific notification corresponding to the addition of the privilege numerical value based on the performance, the player is sent to the specific notification. It can be made easier to pay attention to, and it becomes possible to effectively increase the interest in the bonus value.

In this feature, the second means may further include a configuration in which the specific notification is executed in the final game of the specific effect or the game following the final game. In this case, the player can see the specific notification after seeing it at the end of the specific effect, and it is possible to suppress the confusion between the specific effect and the specific notification.

Feature G5. A pattern (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of variable display areas (display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied are visible. A game is played in which the reels (areas 32L, 32M, 32R) are provided, and the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and then the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. Is configured to
When the number of times of the game from a predetermined predetermined timing (execution game of the previous grant suggestion effect, establishment game of grant trigger, start game of advantageous section, power-on, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined trigger The game machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4, characterized in that the game machine is configured to hold the above.

In the above configuration, for example, by setting the predetermined timing as the execution game of the previous specific notification, the interval between the specific notifications becomes long, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the privilege numerical value from diminishing.

Feature G6. The mode of the specific notification executed by the first means and the mode of the specific notification executed by the second means are configured so that the player cannot identify each of the specific notifications. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G5.

In the above configuration, since it is not possible to distinguish between the specific notification by the first means and the specific notification by the second means, the player is made to think that the numerical value for the privilege is given when the specific notification by the second means is executed. Can be done. As a result, even if the bonus value is not actually given or the granting opportunity is not established, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the bonus number and motivate the player to continue the game. It will be possible.

Feature G7. The specific notification execution means is
Derivation means for deriving specific numerical information (points that can be produced) (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the sub-control device 81) and
When the specific notification is performed or performed by the first means, the value (directed point) corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information derived by the derivation means to update the specific numerical information. Means (a function of executing the process of step S4805 to step S4811 by the sub control device 81) and
With
The second means provides predetermined information including specific numerical information updated by the updating means (if no new granting points are given after updating the directable points by subtraction, the updated directable points and new grants). The game according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G6, which is characterized in that the specific notification is executed based on the added value obtained by adding the given points to the updated productionable points when the points are given. Machine.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined specific notification is performed or when the specific notification is performed, the value corresponding to the specific notification is subtracted from the specific numerical information, and the rest is used as a numerical value for executing the later specific notification. .. For example, in the configuration in which the specific notification is executed based on the privilege value for one time for each grant of the privilege value, when the specific notification corresponding to the value smaller than the privilege value at that time is performed, the specific notification is performed. The unused portion is subsequently terminated without being used. On the other hand, in this feature, when a specific notification corresponding to a value smaller than the specific numerical information is performed, the unused portion is left as a numerical value for executing the specific notification later, and it is suppressed from being wasted. Will be done. That is, since the specific numerical information that was not used in the previous specific notification can be effectively used as the execution portion of the later specific notification, it becomes possible to efficiently execute the specific notification for the derived specific numerical information. .. As a result, the execution frequency of the specific notification can be increased, and the player's interest in the privilege numerical value can be suitably improved.

Feature G8. As the specific notification mode, a plurality of modes including the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (foam medium effect) are set.
As the value corresponding to the specific notification, the first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification of the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein different second predetermined values (10 points) are configured to correspond to each other.

In the above configuration, since a plurality of modes are provided as the mode of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest the amount of the privilege numerical value to be given depending on which mode the specific notification is executed each time. Under such a configuration, for example, if the value corresponding to the specific notification (value subtracted from the specific numerical information) has a uniform size regardless of the notification mode, the specific notification after the execution is controlled based on the predetermined information Is selected regardless of the above-mentioned specific notification mode. As a result, there is a concern that the total amount of bonus values predicted by the player from each specific notification and the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege values will greatly deviate, and the player's trust in the specific notification will decrease. be.

In this regard, in this feature, since a value having a size corresponding to the previous specific notification mode is subtracted from the specific numerical information, the later specific notification mode should be selected in relation to the previous specific notification mode. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to match or bring the total of the privileged numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification each time and the accumulated amount of the actual privileged numerical values closer to each other. That is, it is possible to increase the frequency of the specific notification while suppressing the decrease in the player's trust in the specific notification.

In addition, this feature is "as the mode of the specific notification, the first mode (small bubble effect) and the second mode (in the bubble) that makes the player expect that a numerical value for privilege larger than that of the first mode is given. A plurality of modes including (effect) are set, and as a value corresponding to the specific notification, a first predetermined value (5 points) corresponds to the specific notification of the first aspect, and the second aspect corresponds to the specific notification. It is also characterized in that a second predetermined value (10 points) larger than the first predetermined value corresponds to the specific notification. "

Feature G9. The second means includes a mode determining means (a function of executing the process of steps S4805 to S4807 by the sub control device 81) for determining the mode of the specific notification, and the identification of the mode determined by the mode determining means. It is configured to perform notifications and
The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the aspect determining means includes means for determining the aspect of the specific notification within the range of the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, when the execution control of the specific notification afterwards based on the predetermined information is performed, the mode of the specific notification is selected within the range of the predetermined information. As a result, it is suppressed that the mode of the specific notification after the deviation from the accumulated amount of the actual privilege value is selected, the total of the privilege value predicted by the player from each specific notification, and the actual privilege. It is possible to match or approach the accumulated amount of numerical values.

Feature G10. The feature G9 is characterized in that, when the specific notification is executed later, the aspect determining means determines the mode of the subsequent specific notification from the aspect in which the corresponding value among the plurality of aspects is the predetermined information or less. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, when selecting the mode of the specific notification later, among the plurality of modes prepared in advance as options, the mode corresponding to the value exceeding the predetermined information at that time is excluded from the selection target. As a result, the mode can be selected within the range of the predetermined information with a simple configuration and can be preferably performed, and can be a preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature G9.

Feature G11. When the predetermined information is smaller than a predetermined specific value (5 points), the specific notification executing means restricts the execution of the specific notification by the second means (process of step S4804 by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G7 to the feature G10, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined information is not sufficiently secured, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, so that the frequency of the specific notification does not increase unnecessarily, and the accumulated amount of the actual privilege value is accumulated. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while appropriately suppressing the deviation from the above.

The "predetermined specific value" of this feature can also be expressed as "a specific value that is equal to or greater than the minimum value necessary for executing the specific notification".

Feature G12. When the privilege numerical value is not given by the numerical value giving means after the update is performed by the updating means, the specific numerical information updated by the updating means is used as the predetermined information.
When the privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means after the update is performed by the updating means, the addition result of adding the given privilege numerical value to the specific numerical value information updated by the updating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G7 to the feature G11, which is configured to have the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, after the value corresponding to the executed specific notification is subtracted and the specific numerical value information is updated, if a new privilege numerical value is given by the numerical value giving means, the given privilege numerical value is given. Is added to the updated specific numerical information to derive the predetermined information. In this case, since the predetermined information becomes larger than in the case where there is no such addition, as a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the specific notification later, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature G13. The derivation means adds the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value (subpoint, predetermined coefficient) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value to specify the above. The gaming machine according to any one of feature G7 to feature G12, which is characterized by deriving numerical information.

In the above configuration, since the specific numerical value information is obtained from the addition result of the given privilege numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, the specific notification can be executed on the premise of a numerical value larger than the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, by combining this feature with the configuration of the feature G1, it is possible to more preferably increase the execution frequency of the specific notification.

In this case, since the privilege numerical value is used for deriving the specific numerical value information, the specific numerical value information can be derived while ensuring the relevance with the actually given privilege numerical value. Therefore, even though the configuration uses specific numerical value information different from the privilege numerical value, it is possible to suppress that the content of the specific notification greatly deviates from the actual state of the privilege numerical value, and the total predicted by the player from the specific notification. It is possible to match or bring the value and the accumulated amount (total value) of the actual privilege value closer to each other.

Further, since the specific numerical value information is obtained from the addition result of the privileged numerical value and the predetermined numerical value, it is possible to secure at least the value for the predetermined numerical value as the specific numerical value information even if there is no privilege numerical value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification regardless of whether or not the privilege numerical value is actually given at the time of grant, and it is possible to preferably increase the frequency of the specific notification.

Feature G14. The second specific notification execution means for controlling the second specific notification (total suggestion effect) corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical values to be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. (A function to execute the total suggestion effect processing by the sub control device 81)
The second specific notification execution means is a means for performing execution control of the second specific notification based on the addition result (total points) of the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof and the predetermined numerical value given by the numerical value giving means. The gaming machine according to feature G13, which comprises (a function of executing the processes of step S4606 and steps S4907 to S4911 by the sub control device 81).

In the above configuration, both the specific numerical value information that is the premise of the specific notification corresponding to the assignment of the privilege numerical value and the addition result that is the premise of the second specific notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical value are given numerical values. It is obtained from the sum of the privilege value given by the means and the predetermined value. That is, since the numerical values that are premised in each of the above notifications are aligned, the total value of the privilege numerical values predicted by the player from the specific notification corresponding to the assignment of the privilege numerical value and the privilege predicted by the player from the second specific notification. It can be matched or brought close to the total value of the numerical values.

Feature G15. The derivation means is a determination means (step S4601 by the sub-control device 81) for determining the value of the specific numerical information (the number of points that can be produced) based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G7 to the feature G14, which is characterized by having (a function of executing the process of step S4605).

In the above configuration, since the value of the specific numerical value information is determined according to the privilege numerical value, the size of the privilege numerical value and the size of the specific numerical value information can be linked. For example, the given privilege numerical value is large. In that case, the privilege numerical information can be increased accordingly. In this case, the larger the value for the privilege given, the higher the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification, so that the impression of the player received from the specific notification and the actual accumulation are accumulated. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the value for the privilege.

In addition, this feature is based on "the derivation means is based on the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof given by the numerical value giving means and the predetermined numerical value (subpoint) different from the privilege numerical value or the total value thereof. The specific numerical value information is derived, and one of a plurality of numerical values (0 points, 10 points, etc.) is set as the predetermined numerical value based on the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof. It is also characterized by having a determination means for determining (a function of executing the processing of steps S4601 to S4605 by the sub-control device 81). "

Feature G16. In the derivation means, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the first predetermined value (20 points), the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is said. Described in any one of the feature G7 to the feature G15, which is characterized in that the specific numerical value information having a larger value can be easily derived or derived than the case where the second predetermined value (10 points) is smaller than the first predetermined value. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the larger the given privilege value, the larger (or more likely) the specific numerical value information becomes, and the frequency of the specific notification and the amount of grant (accumulation amount) indicated by the specific notification increase. It is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the player's impression and the actually accumulated privilege value. In other words, the larger the amount of grant and the amount of accumulation, the stronger the expectation of the player will be aroused. Therefore, the frequency of specific notification is not unnecessarily increased, but the actual amount of grant and accumulation. It is possible to increase the frequency of specific notification while reflecting the amount.

In addition, this feature states that "in the determination means, when the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof is the first predetermined value, the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means or the total value thereof". Is also expressed as "the gaming machine according to the feature G15, which is characterized in that a larger numerical value is determined or is easier to determine as the predetermined numerical value than when is a second predetermined value smaller than the first predetermined value". can.

Feature G17. A plurality of gaming states including at least a specific state (advantageous section) are set as the gaming states.
The privilege granting means can grant a predetermined privilege when the total value of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value granting means becomes the grant corresponding value in the specific state.
When the specific state ends or ends, it is provided with an initialization means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G16.

In the above configuration, the privilege value is initialized when the specific state ends. In this case, compared to the case where the bonus value is accumulated throughout the business hours of the game hall, the period during which the player can increase the bonus value is shorter, and as a result, the frequency of reaching the grant corresponding value becomes lower. It tends to be. For this reason, the player's interest in accumulating the bonus numerical value is reduced, and it becomes difficult to increase the player's motivation to continue the game by the game aiming at reaching the grant corresponding value. In such a situation, by applying the configuration of any of the above features G1 to G16, it is possible to suitably increase the motivation to continue the game even when the total of the bonus values is initialized with the end of the specific state. It will be possible.

In this feature, the "initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege value (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of section display by the main control device 101)" is "the total value of the privilege value." It can also be expressed as a reduction means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101).

Feature G18. A plurality of gaming states including at least the specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (AT mode transition, push order notification) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur. The game state of is set,
A specific determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination as to whether or not the specific event is caused in the specific state, and
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event means for causing the specific event (process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101, Function to execute the winning result correspondence process) and
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a specific state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101).
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, a specific state end means for terminating the specific state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
When the specific state ends or ends, the initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G17.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event that is advantageous to the player and the granting of a numerical value for a privilege can be received only in a specific state, and the specific state is emphasized as a situation in which the fun of the game can be enjoyed. In addition, the bonus value is initialized when the specific state ends, making it difficult to accumulate the bonus value compared to the case where the bonus value is accumulated throughout one business day of the game hall. .. In such a configuration, by applying any of the configurations of the features G1 to G17, it is possible to suitably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature G19. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the operation of the first operation means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G18.

By applying the configuration of any of the features G1 to G18 to the slot machine having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of each feature.

For each configuration of the feature G1 to the feature G19, the feature A1 to the feature A23, the feature B1 to the feature B18, the feature C1 to the feature C16, the feature D1 to the feature D12, the feature E1 to the feature E21, and the feature F1 to the feature F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, and feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the above technical ideas individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A function to execute a first point lottery process and a second point lottery process by the main control device 101, which can give a privilege numerical value (point) based on a predetermined granting opportunity (point granting opportunity). )When,
When the total value (total points) of the privilege numerical values given by the numerical value giving means becomes the grant corresponding value corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the player can be granted a predetermined privilege (transition to the second AT mode). Benefit granting means (function to execute the process for ending the first AT mode by the main control device 101)
Specific notification executing means (point processing and point effect execution by the sub control device 81) that controls the specific notification (granting suggestion effect) to be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as the notification regarding the privilege numerical value. Function to execute processing) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
As the specific notification, the first means (execution of the grant suggestion effect processing by the sub control device 81) for executing the first specific notification (grant suggestion effect) as the notification corresponding to the privilege numerical value given by the numerical value giving means is executed. Function to do) and
As the specific notification, a second means (a function of executing the total suggestion effect processing by the sub control device 81) for executing the second specific notification (total suggestion effect) as a notification corresponding to the total value of the privilege numerical values, and
With
As the mode of the first specific notification, a plurality of modes (small bubble effect, medium bubble effect, large bubble effect, extra large bubble effect) are set.
The second means is a mode determining means (step S8201, step S8202, step S8305, step S8201 by the sub-control device 81) for determining the mode of the second specific notification based on the mode of the first specific notification executed earlier. A gaming machine comprising S8306, a function of executing the processes of steps S8308 to S8310), and executing the second specific notification of the mode determined by the mode determining means.

In this configuration, a numerical value for a privilege is given when the granting opportunity is established, and when the total value reaches the granting corresponding value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In addition, since a plurality of modes are provided in the first specific notification corresponding to the addition of the privilege numerical value, it is possible to suggest the amount of the privilege numerical value to be given depending on which mode the first specific notification is performed. .. In addition to the first specific notification, the second specific notification is performed as a notification corresponding to the total value of the given privilege numerical values. By executing both of these notifications, the player can recognize that the total value increases toward the granted value, and the motivation to further increase the privilege value is aroused. That is, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game.

Under such a configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the first specific notification is performed through an execution lottery, the first specific notification may not be performed even if the privilege numerical value is actually given, so that the first specific notification is performed. Although the privilege grant value should not have been accumulated so much from the notification, the total value predicted by the player from the first specific notification and the prediction from the second specific notification, such as suggesting a large total value in the second specific notification, etc. There may be a situation where the total value is significantly different from the total value. In this case, the player may be confused because he / she does not know which specific notification to trust. In this respect, in this feature, in order to determine the mode of the first specific notification executed earlier, that is, the mode of the second specific notification based on the results of the first specific notification, it is suggested by the second specific notification. The total value can be matched with or close to the predicted total value from the first specific notification, and the confusion of the player can be suitably suppressed.

Feature H2. Values (directed points) are set for each mode of the first specific notification.
The specific notification execution means performs the processing of the derivation means (step S8203 and step S8204 by the sub-control device 81) for deriving the cumulative addition value (total points) of the values corresponding to the first specific notification mode executed earlier. Has a function to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the mode determining means determines the mode of the second specific notification based on a cumulative addition value derived by the derivation means.

In the above configuration, a unique value is set for each mode of the first specific notification, and the execution is performed by deriving the cumulative addition value of the values corresponding to the previously executed first specific notification mode. The actual results of the first specific notification can be easily grasped. Therefore, by determining the mode of the second specific notification based on the cumulative addition value, it is possible to preferably carry out the second specific notification based on the actual results of the first specific notification.

Feature H3. When a predetermined predetermined condition (end of advantageous section) is satisfied, an initialization means for initializing the total value of the privilege numerical values (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in the section display second process by the main controller 101). )
The feature H1 or the aspect determining means is characterized in that the aspect of the second specific notification is determined based on the mode of the first specific notification performed after the initialization by the initialization means and executed earlier. Feature The gaming machine described in H2.

In the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed based on the actual result of the first specific notification after the total value of the privilege numerical values is initialized. In this case, since the actual result of the first specific notification before initialization is not referred to when determining the mode of the second specific notification, the second specific notification shows a value larger than the total of the actual specific values. This is suppressed, and it becomes possible to execute the second specific notification corresponding to the total value of the actual privilege numerical values.

When this feature is applied to the feature H2, "when the total of the privilege numerical values is initialized by the initialization means, the second initialization means for initializing the cumulative addition value derived by the derivation means". It may further have a configuration of "providing."

Feature H4. The second means is
The first aspect determining means as the aspect determining means and
In a predetermined case (when the total value of the granted points is equal to or greater than the privilege corresponding value), the second aspect determination for determining the second specific notification mode is determined regardless of the first specific notification mode executed earlier. Means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8304 and S8307 by the sub-control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H3.

For example, when a large privilege value is given at the time of one grant, the total value of the privilege value sharply increases. In this case, there is a concern that the actual result of the first specific notification tends to be insufficient with respect to the total value of the increased privilege values, and only a small value can be notified in the second specific notification. In this regard, in this configuration, depending on the situation, the mode of the second specific notification can be determined regardless of the actual result of the first specific notification. Therefore, even if the actual result of the first specific notification is poor, a large value can be obtained in the second specific notification. It becomes possible to notify. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with the case where the total value of the privilege values suddenly increases.

Feature H5. The second aspect determining means is a predetermined value (privilege granting) in which the total value of the bonus values or the value corresponding to the total value (the value obtained by adding the lottery 5 subpoints to the total value of the grant points) is predetermined. When the value is equal to or greater than the value, the value obtained by adding the lottery sub-points to the privilege grant value), the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the mode of the first specific notification executed earlier. The gaming machine according to the feature H4.

In the above configuration, when the total value of the privilege values is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the actual result of the first specific notification. When a numerical value is given and the total value of the privilege numerical value suddenly increases, it becomes possible to notify a large value by the second specific notification.

Feature H6. In the second aspect determining means, when the total value of the privilege numerical values becomes equal to or more than the grant corresponding value, or the value corresponding to the total value corresponds to the grant corresponding value (the lottery subpoint is given the privilege). The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the mode of the first specific notification executed earlier when the value is equal to or greater than the value added to the value). ..

In the above configuration, when the total value of the privilege numerical values becomes equal to or more than the grant corresponding value, the mode of the second specific notification is determined regardless of the actual result of the first specific notification, so that the actual result of the first specific notification is sufficient. Even in a situation other than that, it is possible to execute the notification corresponding to the fact that the value exceeds the assigned corresponding value.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H6, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B18, features C1 to C16, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E21, features F1 to F23, features G1 to G19, and features. The technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, and feature M1 to feature M17 are individually shown. It is possible to apply it, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The inventions shown in the following features I to M are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, the inside is based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, for a slot machine, a start lever is bet on a medal as a game medium. When is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the above corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the game machine, there is still room for improvement in notifying the employees of the game hall of the state of the game machine. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments), and
Specific operating means (setting key insertion hole 73, power switch 71, reset switch 72) provided at a position where the door body can be operated when the door body is opened.
When a predetermined operation (setting change start operation, setting change operation, power-on operation, set value display operation, set value display end operation) including the operation of the specific operation means is performed, or the predetermined operation is performed. When a specific operation (operation to end the setting change, operation to close the front door 12) is performed after that, the specific notification (internal state notification) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is the predetermined notification means (lower display unit). 69, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speakers 64a to 64n) execute the internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the specific notification execution means (first, ninth to eleventh embodiments). Function to do) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall whether or not they have won a specific role.

In this respect, in the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state, and the specific notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification means. The specific notification at that time is performed when a predetermined operation is performed by a specific operation means that can be operated when the door body is opened, or when the specific operation is performed after the predetermined operation is performed. Basically, only hall employees can open the door and operate specific operation means. Therefore, with the above configuration, hall employees can touch the gaming machine or be in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. Specific notification can be performed in any situation. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been elected.

Regarding "when the specific operation is performed after the predetermined operation is performed" of this feature, "a specific operation different from the operation that triggers the lottery process by the lottery means after the predetermined operation is performed". May be provided with the configuration "when is performed".

Feature I2. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the specific operating means (setting key insertion hole 73, reset switch 72) is operated when the setting of the set value is changed.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the operation means used for setting change is operated as the specific operation means. Since the set value is changed by the hall employee, this configuration enables specific notification in the presence of the hall employee. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been elected.

In addition, the set value is generally changed before the opening of the game hall, in other words, when the player is not in the game hall. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific notification for the hall employees from being performed in front of the player. As a result, when the player sees the specific notification, the notification becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, or the player is inadvertently notified whether or not the specific role has been won. It is possible to suppress chilling.

Feature I3. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
The predetermined operation is an operation for allowing the change of the set value (operation for starting the setting change (operation for turning on the power with the setting key turned on)) and an operation for changing the set value (operation for changing the setting). (Operation of pressing down the reset switch 72 after turning on the power with the setting key turned on), operation of displaying the current set value on the predetermined display unit (credit display unit 60) (operation of displaying the set value (setting) It is an operation including an operation of turning on the key)) or an operation of ending the display of the set value on the predetermined display unit (an operation of ending the setting value display (an operation of switching the setting key from the on state to the off state)). The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

In the above configuration, the operation of allowing the change of the set value or the operation of actually changing the set value is the trigger for executing the specific notification. As a result, the specific notification can be performed in the presence of the hall employees, and further, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

Feature I4. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
The specific notification execution means is intended to execute the specific notification when the specific operation is performed.
The specific operation is an operation of shifting from a state in which the change of the set value is allowed to a state in which the change of the set value is restricted (a setting change end operation (the start lever 41 is turned on after the setting change is performed). Operation)) The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I3.

In order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to execute the lottery process of the lottery means to make the specific combination win. In other words, since it is necessary to operate the first operation means after completing the setting change, even if the hall employee is informed of whether or not he / she is in the winning state of a specific role during the setting change, he / she will immediately deal with it. I can't. In this respect, in this configuration, the specific notification is executed when the operation of shifting from the allowable state of changing the set value to the restricted state of the change, that is, the operation of ending the setting change is performed. As a result, the specific notification is executed after the change from the non-winning state of the specific role to the winning state becomes possible, and the hall employee is notified of whether or not the specific role is in the winning state at a suitable timing. Will be possible.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, when the setting change is allowed or the setting is changed, the setting change notification is executed as a notification of those states. In such a type of gaming machine, if the specific notification is executed at the start of the setting change or in the middle of the setting change, the setting change notification and the specific notification overlap. At that time, if the configuration is such that these notifications are executed in duplicate, there is a concern that the distinctiveness of each notification may be deteriorated due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of notifications, and conversely, the periods of both notifications are separated. If the configuration is to be executed, it will be necessary to make adjustments when designing the notification, which may increase the design burden. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the specific notification is executed after waiting for the completion of the setting change, it is possible to avoid duplication of both notifications without requiring adjustment at the design stage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the distinctiveness of each notification while reducing the work load of the notification design.

Feature I5. The specific operating means is a power supply operating unit (power switch 71 according to the tenth and eleventh embodiments) for turning on the power of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation of turning on the power of the gaming machine using the power operating unit.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the power supply operation unit is operated. Since the power to the gaming machine is turned on by the hall employees, this configuration enables specific notification in the presence of the hall employees. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been elected. In addition, since the power of the gaming machine is turned on every business day, it is possible to encourage the confirmation of whether or not a specific winning combination has been won to be incorporated into the daily inspection at the gaming hall. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that the game is performed in a situation where the specific combination is not in the winning state.

Feature I6. A door body detecting means (door opening sensor 27) capable of detecting at least one of the open state and the closed state of the door body, and
The specific notification executing means is a means (front door) for executing the specific notification when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the open state of the door body is detected by the door body detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing an internal state notification when the power is turned on in a state where the door 12 is open.

Powering on the gaming machine is not limited to when a specific operating means is operated, but when the supply of external power to the gaming hall is cut off due to a power outage and then the supply of external power is resumed due to the restoration of the power transmission equipment. Also occurs. In the case of turning on the power by recovering from such a power failure, there is a possibility that the player is near the gaming machine, so that the specific notification may be performed in front of the player. In such a case, the gaming machine determines whether the power is turned on by operating the specific operating means or the power is turned on without such an operation, and the former is targeted for the specific notification. Is preferable. However, since the gaming machine is in the off state (non-operating state) immediately before the specific operating means is operated, it is not always easy to make such a determination.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the open state of the door body is detected when the power is turned on, it is presumed that the power is turned on by the operation of the specific operating means, and this case is specified as a target. It is configured to execute notification. In the case of recovery from a power failure state, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the door body closed. Therefore, this configuration preferably suppresses the execution of specific notification in front of the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature I7. The specific determination means has a predetermined timing (a setting change end timing, a power-on timing) when the predetermined operation is performed or during a period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to when the specific operation is performed. , When the setting is changed or the power is turned on according to the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments, the means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won by the closing timing of the front door 12 or the like. It has a function to determine whether or not it is in the internal state of the sheet).
The specific notification executing means is a means for causing the specific notification to be executed after the determination is made by the specific determination means (execution of the internal state grasping process according to the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that it is provided with a function of later executing an internal state notification).

According to the above configuration, whether the specific winning combination is in the winning state when the predetermined operation is performed after the door body is opened or the predetermined timing is reached in the period until the specific operation is performed. Whether or not it is determined. This makes it possible to preferably perform specific notification that reflects the latest state of the gaming machine.

When the feature is applied to any of the configurations of the feature I2 to the feature I4, the specific operation of the feature "when the predetermined operation is performed or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on" is performed. The "predetermined timing in the period until the game is performed" can be rephrased as "the predetermined timing in the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the predetermined operation or the specific operation is performed". Since the game does not progress during the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the predetermined operation or the specific operation is performed, the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine is changed each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific winning combination has been won as a target. This makes it possible to perform specific notification that reflects the state when the power is turned on.

Feature I8. The specific notification executing means is a means for executing the specific notification when the specific determination means determines that the specific combination is not in the non-winning state (internal state notification when the two sheets are not in the internal state). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I7, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the specific combination is not in the winning state (when the specific combination is not in the winning state). This makes it possible to preferably inform the hall employees that they are not in the winning state of a specific role.

Feature I9. Predetermined notification execution means (door opening display and door opening display according to the first and tenth embodiments) for executing a predetermined notification (door opening notification) different from the specific notification when the door body is in the open state. (A function to output the door opening notification sound) and
When the execution period of the predetermined notification and the execution period of the specific notification overlap, the prioritization means (first and tenth embodiments) so that the predetermined notification is executed with priority over the specific notification. (Function to execute sound output processing by sound ICs 184a to 184n) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I8.

In the configuration premised on this feature, the specific notification is performed when the specific operation means that can be operated is operated while the door body is open. Therefore, the execution period of the specific notification and the predetermined notification (door) It is assumed that the execution period of (notification corresponding to opening) overlaps. In this configuration, in such a case, the predetermined notification is executed with priority over the specific notification, and the hall employee is notified that the door body is in the open state. As a result, forgetting to close the door body can be suppressed, and it can be suppressed that the door body is promoted to cheat.

Further, by giving priority to the predetermined notification (door opening notification), there is an advantage that the timing of the specific notification can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to operate the first operating means after closing the door body and execute the lottery process by the lottery means. For this reason, even if the specific notification is positively given in the situation where the door body is open, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, in a situation where the door is open, the hall employee can deal with it by urging the door to close by executing the door opening notification and then executing the specific notification after the closing is performed. After that, the status of winning / non-winning of a specific role will be notified, and it will be possible to notify the hall employees at a favorable timing.

In addition, this feature further includes a configuration that "provides a means for executing the specific notification after the predetermined notification is preferentially executed or when the door body is closed". You may be. According to this configuration, after the predetermined notification is preferentially output, the non-priority specific notification (whether the specific combination is won or not) is obtained in response to the end of the predetermined notification or the closing state of the door body. Notification of whether or not) is executed. As a result, even in a situation where the predetermined notification is prioritized, it is possible to notify the hall employee whether or not the specific combination has been elected.

Feature I10. The predetermined notification executing means is such that the predetermined notification is executed by the predetermined notification means (speakers 64a to 64n).
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the predetermined notification and the specific notification are sound notifications (door opening notification sound and internal state notification sound).

If a plurality of notifications are executed together in the auditory notification, it is assumed that it becomes difficult for the hall employees to hear each notification. In this respect, in this configuration, overlapping execution of the predetermined voice notification and the specific voice notification is avoided, and the former notification sound is preferentially output, so that it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming difficult to hear.

Feature I11. The predetermined notification execution means is
Predetermined display executing means (function for executing door open display according to the first and tenth embodiments) for executing a predetermined display (door open display) corresponding to the predetermined notification, and
Predetermined voice notification executing means (first, tenth) so that a predetermined voice notification (door opening notification sound) corresponding to the predetermined notification is output from a voice output unit (speakers 64a to 64n) as the predetermined notification means. Function to output the door opening notification sound according to the embodiment of
With
The specific notification execution means is
Specific display execution means (function for executing internal state display according to the first and tenth embodiments) for executing specific display (internal state display) corresponding to the specific notification, and
The specific voice notification execution means (outputs the internal state notification sound according to the first and tenth embodiments) so that the specific voice notification (internal state notification sound) corresponding to the specific notification is output from the voice output unit. Function to do) and
With
When the execution period of the predetermined notification and the execution period of the specific notification overlap, the predetermined display and the specific display can be executed in parallel (in the first and tenth embodiments). The door opening display is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the internal status display is performed by the lower display unit 69).
The gaming machine according to feature I9 or feature I10, wherein the prioritizing means causes the predetermined voice notification to be output with priority over the specific voice notification.

Regarding the predetermined voice notification and the specific voice notification, which are auditory notifications, by giving priority to the former over the latter, it is possible to prevent each notification from becoming difficult to hear. However, there is a concern that the notification period of whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state will be shortened by the amount of delaying the start of the specific voice notification. In this respect, in this configuration, the specific voice notification is executed after being delayed from the predetermined voice notification, while the predetermined display and the specific display, which are visual notifications, are executed in parallel. That is, since the specific display is executed prior to the execution of the specific voice notification, it is possible to preferably suppress the shortage of the notification period.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the predetermined display and the specific display can be executed in parallel by different display units (auxiliary display unit 65 and lower display unit 69)". .. According to this configuration, when the predetermined display and the specific display are performed in parallel, it is suppressed that the display size of each notification is reduced due to the restriction of the display area and the visibility is lowered, and the two notifications are identified. It becomes possible to enhance the sex.

Feature I12. The specific notification execution means is such that the specific display as the specific notification is executed by the predetermined notification means.
When the door body is in the open state, a predetermined display (door open display) different from the specific display is executed by a notification means (upper lamp unit 63) different from the predetermined notification means (lower display unit 69). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I11, which is provided with a predetermined display executing means (a function of executing the door opening display according to the first and tenth embodiments). ..

In the above configuration, since the predetermined display (display corresponding to the opening of the door) and the specific display (display corresponding to whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state) are executed by different notification means, each of these notifications is executed. Even if the periods overlap, it is possible to distinguish between the two.

In this feature, the feature that "the different notifying means is arranged above the predetermined notifying means in the gaming machine" may be further provided. According to this configuration, the predetermined display can be notified in a more conspicuous manner than the specific display, which can be a preferable mode for preventing fraudulent acts.

Feature I13. The specific notification execution means is intended to execute the specific notification when the specific operation is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein the specific operation is an operation of switching the door body from an open state to a closed state.

In order to shift from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state of the specific combination, it is necessary to execute the lottery process of the lottery means to make the specific combination win. In other words, since it is necessary to operate the first operating means after closing the door body, even if the hall employee is informed of whether or not a specific role has been won when the door body is open, it is immediately possible. I can't deal with it. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific notification is executed when the door body is changed from the open state to the closed state, it is possible to notify whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state at an appropriate timing that can be dealt with. can.

Further, in the situation where the door body is in the open state, the door opening notification corresponding to the situation is executed, so that the specific notification and the door opening notification are expected to overlap. Therefore, it is considered that the adjustment is necessary when designing the notification, but with this configuration, such duplication can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the notification design.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to feature I13, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided on a front surface portion of the door body.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed via the notification unit provided on the front surface of the door body, the specific notification can be performed in front of the hall employee who closed the door body. As a result, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and it is possible to make it easier to notice the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the notification.

Feature I15. The specific determination means has a predetermined timing (close timing of the front door 12, power-on timing, etc.) in the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to when the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state. Means for determining whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state (when a predetermined period has elapsed from the power-on, etc.) (two when the front door 12 according to the ninth and eleventh embodiments is closed) It has a function to determine whether it is in the internal state).
The specific notification executing means is a means for causing the specific notification to be executed after the determination is made by the specific determination means (internal after determining the two internal states according to the ninth and eleventh embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature I13 or feature I14, which comprises a function of executing a state notification).

It is assumed that the game does not proceed during the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the door body is closed, and the state does not change as to whether or not the specific winning combination is won. Therefore, by determining whether or not a specific winning combination is in the winning state at a predetermined timing in the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the door body is closed, the state at the time of turning on the power is targeted. The determination can be made. As a result, if the specific role is not in the winning state before the opening of the game hall, it can be reliably notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in the situation where the specific role has not been won.

Feature I16. As the non-winning state of the specific combination, there are a plurality of types of states including a first state (non-internal state) and a second state (three-sheet internal state, first BB state, second BB state) different from the first state. Have and
In the second state, when a specific operation including the operation of the specific operation means (the power is turned on when the setting key is turned on) is performed, the specific process is performed so as to be in the first state. It is provided with a specific process execution means (a function of executing the first RAM clear process by the main control device 101) for executing (a process of clearing the third internal state, the first BB state, and the second BB state).
The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I15, wherein at least a part of the predetermined operation and the specific operation are the same operation.

In the above configuration, there are a plurality of types of states as non-winning states of the specific combination, and in such a case, if an attempt is made to notify each state by different modes of the specific notification, the number of types of the specific notification increases. It leads to. As the number of types of specific notifications increases, it is expected that not only will it be difficult for hall employees to understand, but also the workload of the designer will increase in the notification design scene. In addition, if there are multiple types of states as non-winning states of a specific role, the number of countermeasures for eliminating the non-winning state of a specific role will increase, so it depends on which of the multiple types of states. As a result of the hall employees being forced to respond differently, there is a concern that the workload will increase.

In this respect, in this configuration, when a specific operation is performed in the situation of the second state, which is one of the non-winning states of the specific combination, the game shifts to the first state, which is the other one of the non-winning states. On top of that, both operations are set so that at least a part of the predetermined operation that triggers the execution of the specific notification and the specific operation that triggers the transition from the second state to the first state are common. Has been done. As a result, when the game machine is in the second state when the power is turned on, the hall employee automatically changes to the first state by performing an operation that triggers a specific notification, and the number of types of non-winning states. Can be reduced to execute specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the diversification of specific notifications, make the notifications easier to understand, and reduce the burden of notification design. In addition, since the number of coping methods when a specific role is not elected can be suppressed to a small number, it is possible to reduce the work load of hall employees.

Feature I17. The winning state of the specific combination is an internal state (two internal states) of a second specified number (2) different from the first specified number (3) performed in a normal game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I16, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the internal state or not the internal state.

After shifting to the second specified number of internal states, the game is designed on the premise that the player will carry over the internal state and continue the game by playing the game with the first specified number in the normal game. There is a machine. By applying any of the configurations of the feature I1 to the feature I16 in such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from playing a game in a situation other than the second specified number of internal states. become.

When this feature is applied to feature I1, "a housing (housing 11) opened forward and a door body (front door 12) provided so as to be able to open and close the front opening of the housing. ), And a plurality of orbitals (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction, and a part of the orbits can be visually recognized. Based on the operation of the display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R), the first operating means (start lever 41) in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when operated, and the operation of the first operating means. A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for drawing a winning combination, and a second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each orbiting body when operated. A drive control means (main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. The function of executing the reel control process by A normal game is provided with a game value giving means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination when a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is stopped. Concerning the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments of the specific determination means (first, ninth to eleventh embodiments) for determining whether or not the internal state (two sheets internal state) of the specified number (2) different from the specified number (3) performed in The function for executing the internal state notification process by the sub control device 81) and the specific operation means (setting key insertion hole 73, power switch 71, reset) provided at a position where the door body can be operated when the door body is opened. When a predetermined operation (setting change start operation, setting change operation, power-on operation) including the operation of the switch 72) and the specific operation means is performed, or after the predetermined operation is performed, the specific operation (setting change) When the end operation and the closing operation of the front door 12 are performed, the specific notification (internal state notification) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is the predetermined notification means (lower display unit 69, auxiliary display unit 65, speaker). 64a to 64n) is provided with specific notification execution means (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments). It can be expressed as "a game machine characterized by being."

Feature I18. The lottery means draws a combination according to the number of bets on the game, and the specific combination (second BB combination) can be won in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first bet (2 bets). Is set,
In a situation where the bet number of the game is the first bet number, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the winning result of the specific combination, and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific combination at the effective position (the pattern combination of the second BB). Specific game state transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (second BB state) when
When the specific pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the winning state of the specific combination, the reservation means (winning of the second BB combination by the main control device 101) capable of retaining the winning state of the specific combination. Function to carry over the state) and
With
It is possible to play a game as a second bet number (3 bets) different from the first bet number in a situation where the winning state of the specific combination is reserved by the reservation means. Yes, when a game is played by the second bet number in the specific reserved state, the stop of the specific pattern combination at the effective position or the transition to the specific game state is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I17.

In the above configuration, after the winning state of the specific combination is set by the first bet number, in the situation where the game is played with the betting number of the game as the second betting number, the game does not shift to the specific game state and the winning state is carried over. It becomes possible to continue the game. There is a gaming machine whose game is designed on the premise of such a game, and in a situation where a specific role is not won in such a gaming machine, the hall employee to that effect before the player plays the game. It is desirable to be notified to the staff and deal with it. By applying any of the configurations of the feature I1 to the feature I17 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature I19. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the second bet number in the non-winning state of the specific combination than to play the game with the second bet number in the winning state of the specific combination. The gaming machine according to feature I18, characterized in that it is present.

In the above configuration, it is more disadvantageous to play the game in the non-winning state of the specific role than to play the game by the second bet number in the winning state of the specific role. By applying any of the configurations of the feature I16, it is possible to suitably suppress the situation in which the player plays a game in such an unfavorable situation.

For each configuration of the above features I1 to I19, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, the features F1 to F23, Shown in the configuration of any one of feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, and feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the above technical ideas individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state when the first condition (the operation to end the setting change is performed and the front door 12 is closed after the end of the setting change) is satisfied. (Functions for executing internal state notification processing according to the first and ninth embodiments) and
The specific notification executing means (internal state notification) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means (lower display unit 69, auxiliary display unit 65, speakers 64a to 64n). (Functions for executing internal state notification processing) according to the first and ninth embodiments) and
With
As the non-winning state of the specific combination, there are a plurality of types of states including a first state (non-internal state) and a second state (three-sheet internal state, first BB state, second BB state) different from the first state. Have and
Specific processing (third internal state, first BB state) so as to be in the first state when the second condition (power is turned on when the setting key is turned on) is satisfied in the second state. , A specific process execution means (a function of executing the first RAM clear process by the main control device 101) for executing the second BB state) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are set so that when the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is also satisfied.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall whether or not they have won a specific role. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state, and the specific notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification means. As a result, the hall employee is notified of whether or not the player is in the winning state, and if the specific role is not in the winning state, it is possible to urge the hall employee to change to the winning state.

However, in the above configuration, there are a plurality of types of states as non-winning states of the specific combination, and in such a case, if an attempt is made to notify the individual states by different modes of the specific notification, the number of types of the specific notification Will lead to an increase in. As the number of types of specific notifications increases, it is expected that not only will it be difficult for hall employees to understand, but also the workload of game machine designers will increase in the notification design scene. In addition, if there are multiple types of states as non-winning states of a specific role, the number of countermeasures for eliminating the non-winning state of a specific role will increase, so it depends on which of the multiple types of states. As a result of the hall employees being forced to respond differently, there is a concern that the workload will increase.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the second condition is satisfied in the situation of the second state, which is one of the non-winning states of the specific combination, the game shifts to the first state, which is the other one of the non-winning states. When the first condition, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the specific winning combination is won, is satisfied, each of these conditions is set so that the second condition is also satisfied. As a result, in the case of the second state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, when it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state, the game machine is naturally changed to the first state, and the non-winning state. It is possible to reduce the number of types and execute specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the diversification of specific notifications, make the notifications easier to understand, and reduce the burden of notification design. In addition, since the number of coping methods when a specific role is not elected can be suppressed to a small number, it is possible to reduce the work load of hall employees.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first condition and the second condition are set so that at least a part of the satisfying element of the first condition includes the satisfying element of the second condition. ..

In the above configuration, since at least a part of the elements that satisfy the first condition includes the elements that satisfy the second condition, the second state can be regarded as the completed state when the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if it is in the second state, it is possible to change to the first state and execute the specific notification.

Features J3. Described in feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the first condition and the second condition are set so that a part of the satisfying element of the first condition and the satisfying element of the second condition are common. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since a part of the elements for satisfying the first condition and the second condition are common, the first condition can be satisfied after the second condition is satisfied. As a result, in the case where the gaming machine is in the second state when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state after changing to the first state. Therefore, the specific notification can be executed by narrowing down to the first state, and it is possible to preferably suppress the increase in the number of types of the specific notification and the coping method.

Features J4. The elements for satisfying the first condition include a predetermined first condition (the power is turned on when the setting key is turned on) and a predetermined first condition that can be satisfied when the predetermined first condition is satisfied. Two conditions (the operation to end the setting change is performed, and the front door 12 is closed after the setting change is completed) are included.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the first condition and the second condition are set so that the predetermined first condition and the second condition are common to each other.

According to the above configuration, the second condition can be satisfied before the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in the second state when the power is turned on, the specific combination is changed to the first state. It is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the winning state. Therefore, the specific notification can be executed by narrowing down to the first state, and it is possible to preferably suppress the increase in the number of types of the specific notification and the coping method.

Feature J5. When the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the specific process is executed by the specific process executing means, and then the determination is executed by the specific determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J1 to the feature J4.

According to the above configuration, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state after the change from the second state to the first condition is made. Will be Therefore, the specific notification can be executed by narrowing down to the first state, and it is possible to preferably suppress the increase in the number of types of the specific notification and the coping method.

Features J6. The winning combination in the lottery process by the lottery means includes a first specific combination (second BB combination) as the specific combination and a second specific combination (first BB combination) different from the first specific combination. The first specific combination and the second specific combination are configured so as not to be in the winning state in duplicate.
The first state is a non-winning state of the first specific combination and the non-winning state of the second specific combination, and the second state is a winning state of the second specific combination. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J1 to feature J5.

In the above configuration, the first state is the non-winning state of the first specific combination and the non-winning state of the second specific combination, and the second state is the winning state of the second specific combination. In this case, the change from the second state to the first state only needs to clear the winning state of the second specific combination and change to the non-winning state, so the change from the second state to the first state is easily performed. be able to. Further, even when the specific notification is given, the hall employee only needs to execute the lottery process to shift to the winning state of the first special role, and the handling can be a simple operation.

Feature J7. The specific notification executing means is a means for executing the specific notification when the specific determination means determines that the specific combination is not in the non-winning state (a function of executing the internal state notification when the two cards are not in the internal state). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J1 to the feature J6.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the specific combination is not in the winning state (when the specific combination is not in the winning state). This makes it possible to preferably inform the hall employees that they are not in the winning state of a specific role. In this case, in the configuration of the feature J1 to the feature J6 on which this feature is premised, the second state is changed to the first state and the specific notification is performed. Therefore, according to this configuration, the number of types is suppressed to a small number. , It becomes possible to execute the notification (specific notification) that the specific combination is not in the winning state.

Feature J8. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
Specific operating means (setting key insertion hole 73, power switch 71, reset switch 72) provided at a position where the door body can be operated when the door body is opened.
With
The second condition is satisfied when the first predetermined operation (operation of turning on the power with the setting key turned on) including the operation of the specific operation means is performed, and the first predetermined operation and the first predetermined operation are performed. The first condition and the second condition are satisfied so that the first condition is satisfied when a second predetermined operation (setting change operation, setting change end operation, front door 12 closing operation) different from the above is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J1 to feature J7, characterized in that conditions are set.

In the above configuration, when the specific operating means that can be operated when the door body is opened is operated, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and the specific notification is executed. Basically, only hall employees can open the door and operate specific operation means. Therefore, with the above configuration, hall employees can touch the gaming machine or be in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. Specific notification can be performed in any situation. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been won in advance of the game by the player. Further, in the above configuration, since the change from the second state to the first state also requires the operation of the specific operation means that can be operated when the door body is opened, the change from the second state to the first state is illegal. It can be performed by a person who intends to perform an act and can be suppressed from being abused.

Features J9. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the specific operating means (setting key insertion hole 73, reset switch 72) is operated when the setting of the set value is changed.

In the above configuration, when the operating means used for setting change is operated as the specific operating means, the change from the second state to the first state and the specific notification are executed. Since the setting value is changed by the hall employee, with this configuration, it is possible to perform specific notification in the presence of the hall employee, and changing from the second state to the first state is a fraudulent act. It is possible to suppress what is done by a person.

Features J10. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
The first predetermined operation is an operation for allowing a change in the set value (an operation for turning on the power with the setting key turned on) or an operation for changing the set value (an operation for turning the power on with the setting key turned on). The gaming machine according to feature J8 or feature J9, which is an operation including an operation of pressing down the reset switch 72 after being turned on.

In the above configuration, the change from the second state to the first state and the specific notification are executed by the operation of allowing the change of the set value or the operation of actually changing the set value as the execution trigger of the specific notification. As a result, it is possible to perform specific notification in the presence of hall employees, and it is possible to prevent a fraudster from making a change from the second state to the first state.

Features J11. The first condition is satisfied when the first predetermined operation and the second predetermined operation are performed.
The second predetermined operation is an operation of shifting from a state in which the change of the set value is allowed to a state in which the change of the set value is restricted (an operation of turning on the start lever 41 after changing the setting). The gaming machine according to the feature J10, which is characterized by being present.

In order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to execute the lottery process of the lottery means to make the specific combination win. In other words, since it is necessary to operate the first operation means after completing the setting change, even if the hall employee is informed of whether or not he / she is in the winning state of a specific role during the setting change, he / she will immediately deal with it. I can't. In this respect, in the present configuration, in the present configuration, the specific notification is executed when the operation of shifting from the allowable state of changing the set value to the restricted state of the change, that is, the operation of ending the setting change is performed. As a result, the specific notification is executed after the change from the non-winning state of the specific role to the winning state becomes possible, and the hall employee is notified of whether or not the specific role is in the winning state at a suitable timing. Will be possible.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, when the setting change is allowed or the setting is changed, the setting change notification is executed as a notification of those states. In such a type of gaming machine, if the specific notification is executed at the start of the setting change or in the middle of the setting change, the setting change notification and the specific notification overlap. At that time, if the configuration is such that these notifications are executed in duplicate, there is a concern that the distinctiveness of each notification may be deteriorated due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of notifications, and conversely, the periods of both notifications are separated. If the configuration is to be executed, it will be necessary to make adjustments when designing the notification, which may increase the design burden. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the specific notification is executed after waiting for the completion of the setting change, it is possible to avoid duplication of both notifications without requiring adjustment at the design stage. This makes it possible to improve the distinctiveness of each notification while suppressing an increase in the burden of notification design.

Features J12. Predetermined notification execution means (door opening display and door opening display according to the first and tenth embodiments) for executing a predetermined notification (door opening notification) different from the specific notification when the door body is in the open state. (A function to output the door opening notification sound) and
When the execution period of the predetermined notification and the execution period of the specific notification overlap, the prioritization means (first and tenth embodiments) so that the predetermined notification is executed with priority over the specific notification. (Function to execute sound output processing by sound ICs 184a to 184n) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J8 to the feature J11.

In the configuration premised on this feature, the specific notification is performed when the specific operation means that can be operated is operated while the door body is open. Therefore, the execution period of the specific notification and the predetermined notification (door) It is assumed that the execution period of (notification corresponding to opening) overlaps. In this configuration, in such a case, the predetermined notification is executed with priority over the specific notification, and the hall employee is notified that the door body is in the open state. As a result, forgetting to close the door body can be suppressed, and it can be suppressed that the door body is promoted to cheat.

Further, by giving priority to the predetermined notification (door opening notification), there is an advantage that the timing of the specific notification can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to operate the first operating means after closing the door body and execute the lottery process by the lottery means. For this reason, even if the specific notification is positively given in the situation where the door body is open, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, in a situation where the door is open, the hall employee can deal with it by urging the door to close by executing the door opening notification and then executing the specific notification after the closing is performed. After that, the status of winning / non-winning of a specific role will be notified, and it will be possible to notify the hall employees at a favorable timing.

In addition, this feature further includes a configuration that "provides a means for executing the specific notification after the predetermined notification is preferentially executed or when the door body is closed". You may be. According to this configuration, after the predetermined notification is preferentially output, the non-priority specific notification (whether the specific combination is won or not) is obtained in response to the end of the predetermined notification or the closing state of the door body. Notification of whether or not) is executed. As a result, even in a situation where the predetermined notification is prioritized, it is possible to notify the hall employee whether or not the specific combination has been elected.

Feature J13. The predetermined notification executing means is such that the predetermined notification is executed by the predetermined notification means (speakers 64a to 64n).
The gaming machine according to feature J12, wherein the predetermined notification and the specific notification are sound notifications (door opening notification sound and internal state notification sound).

If a plurality of notifications are executed together in the auditory notification, it is assumed that it becomes difficult for the hall employees to hear each notification. In this respect, in this configuration, overlapping execution of the predetermined voice notification and the specific voice notification is avoided, and the former notification sound is preferentially output, so that it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming difficult to hear.

Feature J14. The specific notification execution means is such that the specific display as the specific notification is executed by the predetermined notification means.
Predetermined display executing means (first,) that causes a predetermined display (door open display) different from the specific display to be executed by a notification means different from the predetermined notification means when the door body is in the open state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J8 to feature J13, which comprises a function of executing a door open display according to a tenth embodiment).

In the above configuration, since the predetermined display (display corresponding to the opening of the door) and the specific display (display corresponding to whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state) are executed by different notification means, each of these notifications is executed. Even if the periods overlap, it is possible to distinguish between the two.

In this feature, the feature that "the different notifying means is arranged above the predetermined notifying means in the gaming machine" may be further provided. According to this configuration, the predetermined display can be notified in a more conspicuous manner than the specific display, which can be a preferable mode for preventing fraudulent acts.

Feature J15. The first condition is satisfied when the first predetermined operation and the second predetermined operation are performed.
The gaming machine according to feature J10, wherein the second predetermined operation is an operation of switching the door body from an open state to a closed state.

In order to shift from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state of the specific combination, it is necessary to execute the lottery process of the lottery means to make the specific combination win. In other words, since it is necessary to operate the first operating means after closing the door body, even if the hall employee is informed of whether or not a specific role has been won when the door body is open, it is immediately possible. I can't deal with it. In this regard, in this configuration, when the door body is changed from the open state to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and the specific notification is executed. It is possible to inform whether or not a specific role has been won.

Further, in the situation where the door body is in the open state, the door opening notification corresponding to the situation is executed, so that the specific notification and the door opening notification are expected to overlap. Therefore, it is considered that the adjustment is necessary when designing the notification, but with this configuration, such duplication can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the notification design.

Feature J16. The winning state of the specific combination is an internal state (two internal states) of a second specified number (2) different from the first specified number (3) performed in a normal game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J14, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the internal state or not the internal state.

After shifting to the second specified number of internal states, the game is designed on the premise that the player will carry over the internal state and continue the game by playing the game with the first specified number in the normal game. There is a machine. By applying any of the configurations of the feature J1 to the feature J14 in such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from playing a game in a situation other than the second specified number of internal states. become.

Feature J17. The lottery means draws a combination according to the number of bets on the game, and the specific combination (second BB combination) can be won in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first bet (2 bets). Is set,
In a situation where the bet number of the game is the first bet number, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the winning result of the specific combination, and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific combination at the effective position (the pattern combination of the second BB). Specific game state transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (second BB state) when
When the specific pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the winning state of the specific combination, the reservation means (winning of the second BB combination by the main control device 101) capable of retaining the winning state of the specific combination. Function to carry over the state) and
With
It is possible to play the game as a second bet number (3 bets) different from the first bet number in a situation where the winning state of the specific combination is reserved by the reservation means. Yes, when a game is played by the second bet number in the specific reserved state, the stop of the specific pattern combination at the effective position or the transition to the specific game state is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J1 to the feature J16.

In the above configuration, after the winning state of the specific combination is set by the first bet number, in the situation where the game is played with the betting number of the game as the second betting number, the game does not shift to the specific game state and the winning state is carried over. It becomes possible to continue the game. There is a gaming machine whose game is designed on the premise of such a game, and in a situation where a specific role is not won in such a gaming machine, the hall employee to that effect before the player plays the game. It is desirable to be notified to the staff and deal with it. By applying any of the configurations of the feature J1 to the feature J16 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Features J18. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the second bet number in the non-winning state of the specific combination than to play the game with the second bet number in the winning state of the specific combination. The gaming machine according to the feature J17, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, it is more disadvantageous to play the game in the non-winning state of the specific role than to play the game by the second bet number in the winning state of the specific role. By applying any of the configurations of the feature J16, it is possible to suitably suppress the situation in which the player plays a game in such an unfavorable situation.

Features J19. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
When the first condition (the setting change operation is completed and the front door 12 is closed after the setting change operation is completed) is satisfied, the specific determination means (specific determination means) for determining whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state. A function for executing the internal state notification process according to the first and ninth embodiments) is provided.
As the non-winning state of the specific combination, there are a plurality of types of states including a first state (non-internal state) and a second state (three-sheet internal state, first BB state, second BB state) different from the first state. Exists and
Specific processing (third internal state, first BB state) so as to be in the first state when the second condition (power is turned on when the setting key is turned on) is satisfied in the second state. , A specific process execution means (a function of executing the first RAM clear process by the main control device 101) for executing the second BB state) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are set so that when the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is also satisfied.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall whether or not they have won a specific role. In this regard, in the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state when the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, by performing the specific notification corresponding to this determination, it is determined whether or not the specific winning state is in the winning state. It will be possible to inform hall employees.

However, in the above configuration, there are a plurality of types of states as non-winning states of the specific combination, and in such a case, if an attempt is made to notify the individual states by different modes of the specific notification, the number of types of the specific notification Will lead to an increase in. As the number of types of specific notifications increases, it is expected that not only will it be difficult for hall employees to understand, but also the workload of game machine designers will increase in the notification design scene. In addition, if there are multiple types of states as non-winning states of a specific role, the number of countermeasures for eliminating the non-winning state of a specific role will increase, so it depends on which of the multiple types of states. As a result of the hall employees being forced to respond differently, there is a concern that the workload will increase.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the second condition is satisfied in the situation of the second state, which is one of the non-winning states of the specific combination, the game shifts to the first state, which is the other one of the non-winning states. If the first condition, which is the trigger for determining whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, is satisfied, the second condition, which is the trigger for the transition from the second state to the first state, is also satisfied. Each of these conditions is set in. As a result, in the case of the second state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, when it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state, the game machine is naturally changed to the first state, and the non-winning state. It is possible to reduce the number of types and execute specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the diversification of specific notifications, make the notifications easier to understand, and reduce the burden of notification design. In addition, since the number of coping methods when a specific role is not elected can be suppressed to a small number, it is possible to reduce the work load of hall employees.

It should be noted that any configuration of the above features J2 to J18 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J19, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the first and tenth embodiments), and
When the power of the game machine is turned on or after the power is turned on, specific operations (setting change start operation, setting change operation, setting change end operation, setting value display operation, setting value display end operation, front door 12 When the closing operation) is performed, the specific notification (internal state display, internal state notification sound) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means (lower display unit 69, speakers 64a to 64n). The first notification execution means (a function of executing the internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the first and tenth embodiments) and
When a predetermined event (opening of the front door 12, setting change, power-on, medal insertion error, etc.) occurs, a predetermined notification (door opening notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, power-on error notification, etc.) different from the specific notification is performed. ) Is performed by the predetermined notification means (speakers 64a to 64n) or a notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) different from the predetermined notification means (door opening by the sub control device 81). (Functions for notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, power-on error notification, etc.) and
When the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, one of the predetermined notifications or the specific notification is given priority over the other notification of the predetermined notification or the specific notification. Specific means (configuration that gives priority to internal status notification, door opening notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall in advance of the game whether or not the specific role has been won.

In this regard, in the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific combination has been won, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a specific operation is performed after the power is turned on, the specific operation corresponding to the result of the above determination is performed. Notification is performed. As a result, the hall employee is notified whether or not the player is in the winning state before playing the game, and if the specific role is not in the winning state, it is possible to urge the player to change to the winning state. .. However, it is assumed that such a specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event overlap, and in such a case, there is a concern that each notification becomes difficult to understand. .. In this respect, in the present configuration, when such a specific notification and a predetermined notification overlap with each other, one of the notifications is given priority over the other, so that it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming difficult to understand.

Regarding "when a specific operation is performed after the power is turned on" of this feature, "when a specific operation different from the operation that triggers the lottery by the lottery means is performed after the power is turned on". Alternatively, it may have a configuration of "when a specific operation different from the operation that triggers the lottery is performed in a situation where the lottery by the lottery means has not yet been performed since the power was turned on". According to such a configuration, the state of whether or not the specific winning combination is won does not change between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the specific operation is performed. It is possible to execute a specific notification that reflects the state at the time of turning on the power as to whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state.

Feature K2. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
With
As the second notification executing means, a means for executing the predetermined notification when the door body is in the open state (a function of executing the door opening notification according to the first and tenth embodiments) is provided. Prepare,
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

In the above configuration, when the execution period of the specific notification overlaps with the execution period of the predetermined notification (door opening notification), the door opening notification is executed with priority over the specific notification, and the door body is in the open state. Employees are informed. As a result, forgetting to close the door body can be suppressed, and it can be suppressed that the door body is promoted to cheat.

Further, by giving priority to the door opening notification, there is an advantage that the timing of the specific notification can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to operate the first operating means after closing the door body and execute the lottery process by the lottery means, so that the door body is in the open state. Even if the specific notification is positively made in such a situation, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. For this reason, in a situation where the door is open, the hall employee can deal with it by urging the door to close by executing the door opening notification and then executing the specific notification after the closing is performed. After that, the status of winning / non-winning of a specific role will be notified. That is, it becomes possible to perform a specific notification at a timing preferable for the hall employee.

Feature K3. As the second notification executing means, means for executing the predetermined notification (power-on notification) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (sub-control according to the third modification of the tenth embodiment). It is equipped with a function to execute power-on notification by the device 81).
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

In the above configuration, when the execution period of the specific notification overlaps with the execution period of the predetermined notification (power-on notification), the power-on notification is executed with priority over the specific notification. When a hall employee operates a power-on means such as a power switch mounted on a gaming machine, it is considered that there is a great deal of interest in whether or not the switch operation functions effectively and the gaming machine is started correctly. Therefore, it is possible to suitably respond to such a request.

Further, by giving priority to the power-on notification, there is an advantage that the timing of the specific notification can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, the first operating means is operated after the gaming machine is started up and the operation of the first operating means is activated, and the lottery process by the lottery means is executed. Because it is necessary, even if the specific notification is positively given immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, by giving priority to the power-on notification and delaying the specific notification, it is possible to perform the specific notification at a timing preferable for the hall employee.

Features K4. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
As the second notification executing means, a means (first) for executing the predetermined notification (setting change notification) when the change of the set value is allowed or when the set value is changed. A function of executing a setting change notification by the sub-control device 81 according to the embodiment) is provided.
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

In the above configuration, when the execution period of the specific notification overlaps with the execution period of the predetermined notification (setting change notification), the setting change notification is executed with priority over the specific notification. When a hall employee operates a setting change operation means such as a setting key insertion part mounted on a gaming machine, it is determined whether the gaming machine is in an allowable state for setting change or whether the setting change is correctly accepted by such an operation. First of all, it is thought that one wants to know, so it is possible to respond appropriately to such a request.

Further, by giving priority to the setting change notification, there is an advantage that the timing of the specific notification can be optimized. That is, in order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to operate the first operating means at least in a situation where the setting change is not allowed, and execute the lottery process by the lottery means. Even if a specific notification is made positively during the event, the hall employee cannot immediately deal with it. Therefore, by giving priority to the setting change notification and delaying the specific notification, it is possible to perform the specific notification at a timing preferable for the hall employee.

Feature K5. Equipped with anomaly detection means (insert medal detection sensor 45a, etc.) that can detect the occurrence of anomaly factors
As the second notification executing means, a means for executing the predetermined notification (medal insertion error notification, medal payout error notification, etc.) when a predetermined abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means is provided.
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

For example, in a situation where the state of the gaming machine is a non-winning state of a specific combination, when a hall employee tries to execute a lottery process by the lottery means by operating the first operating means, some abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. It is possible that the lottery process will not be performed and the change to the winning state of the specific role will not proceed as expected. In such a case, for example, if the specific notification is prioritized, there is a concern that the hall employees may be confused without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality. In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution period of the specific notification overlaps with the execution period of the predetermined notification (abnormality notification), the abnormality notification is executed with priority over the specific notification, so that an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. It will be possible to promptly notify that you are there.

Feature K6. A receiving means (medal slot 45) capable of accepting a predetermined game medium, and
A passage portion (guidance passage 401) through which the game medium accepted by the receiving means passes, and
A detection means (inserted medal detection sensor 45a) capable of detecting a game medium passing through the passage portion, and
A stop determination means (a function of executing a medal detection process by the main control device 101) for determining the stop state of the game medium based on the detection result of the detection means, and
With
As the second notification executing means, a means for executing the predetermined notification when a predetermined state (medal jamming state) is determined by the stop determination means (corresponding to a modification 4 of the tenth embodiment). Equipped with a function to execute input error notification)
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

In order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to insert a predetermined number of game media into the receiving means, operate the first operating means, and execute the lottery process by the lottery means. At that time, if the game medium is stopped (clogging of the game medium) in the process of inserting the game medium, the number of game media accepted by the game machine does not reach the required number for executing the lottery process, so that the first operation It is assumed that the lottery process is not performed even if the means is operated. In such a case, for example, if the specific notification is prioritized, the hall employees may be confused without noticing the clogging of the game medium, or the change to the winning state of the specific role cannot be made promptly, so that preparations before opening the store There is a concern that work may be delayed. In this respect, in this configuration, when the execution period of the specific notification overlaps with the execution period of the predetermined notification (stop abnormality notification), the stop abnormality notification is executed with priority over the specific notification, so that the game medium is executed in the passage portion. It is possible to promptly notify that the store is clogged, and it is possible to prevent hall employees from being confused and delays in preparatory work before opening the store.

Feature K7. A receiving means (medal slot 45) capable of accepting a predetermined game medium, and
A reception means (a function of executing the process of step S109 by the main control device 101) capable of accepting the game medium accepted by the reception means as a bet number, and
When a predetermined operating means (payment switch 59) is operated, the acceptance as the bet number is canceled, and the payout means (main control device 101) capable of paying out the number of game media corresponding to the canceled bet number. (Function to execute medal return processing) and
With
As the second notification executing means, a means (sub-control) for executing the predetermined notification (clearing notification) when the predetermined operating means is operated or when the game medium is paid out based on the operation. It is equipped with a function to execute settlement notification by the device 81).
The specific means is characterized in that when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the predetermined notification is given priority over the specific notification. Feature The gaming machine described in K1.

In order to change from the non-winning state of the specific combination to the winning state, it is necessary to insert a predetermined number of game media into the receiving means, operate the first operating means, and execute the lottery process by the lottery means. At that time, there is a case where a game medium larger than the required number is input and it is desired to cancel the acceptance as the bet number (bet acceptance) by operating a predetermined operation means. In this configuration, when a predetermined operating means is operated or when the game medium is paid out (returned) based on the operation, the predetermined notification (clearing notification) is given priority over the specific notification. It is possible to promptly notify the hall employee who is about to make the change that the acceptance as the number of bets has been canceled.

In addition, in this feature, "the lottery means draws a winning combination according to the number of bets on the game, and the winning combination can be won in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first betting number (2 bets). The specific combination is not included in the winning combination in the situation where the specific combination (second BB combination) is included and the number of bets in the game is the second bet number (3 bets) larger than the first bet number. It may have the feature of "gambling". In such a configuration, when a hall employee tries to change from a non-winning state of a specific role to a winning state, he / she throws in more game media than the first bet number, and the game bet number is the second bet number. When the number is reached, even if the first operation means is operated to execute the lottery process, the winning state of the specific combination cannot be obtained. Therefore, it is inevitable to operate a predetermined operation means to cancel the acceptance as the bet number, and to insert the game medium in the number corresponding to the first bet number again. In such a case, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that the acceptance as the number of bets has been canceled, and it is possible to make the configuration convenient for hall employees.

Feature K8. When the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, the specific means puts the execution of the specific notification by the predetermined notification means into a standby state (sound by sound ICs 184a to 184n). The gaming machine according to any one of feature K2 to feature K7, which is characterized by having a function of executing output processing).

In the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification is not canceled when the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, but the execution of the specific notification is in the standby state during the period in which the predetermined notification is prioritized. Will be done. As a result, the specific notification can be started when the predetermined notification ends, and even if the predetermined notification is prioritized, it is possible to notify the hall employee whether or not the specific combination has been elected. ..

In addition, in this feature, "means for releasing the standby state and shifting to the execution state of the specific notification when the predetermined notification ends in a situation where the execution of the specific notification is in the standby state (sound IC184a- A function of executing sound output processing by 184n) ”may be provided. According to this configuration, when the predetermined notification is completed, the specific notification can be promptly executed by the predetermined notification means.

Feature K9. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K2 to the feature K8, wherein the specific notification and the predetermined notification are notifications by sound.

If the predetermined notification sound and the specific notification sound are emitted together, it may be difficult for the hall employees to hear each notification, and there is a concern that the response may be delayed. However, any configuration of feature K2 to feature K8 is adopted. As a result, it is possible to prevent both notification sounds from being emitted at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming difficult to hear. That is, any of the configurations of the feature K2 to the feature K8 is particularly useful in the relationship between the predetermined notification by sound and the specific notification by sound, and each notification is performed while achieving the above-mentioned effects by setting the predetermined notification as the priority side. It becomes possible to make it easier to hear.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to feature K9, wherein the predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means.

If the predetermined notification sound and the specific notification sound are simultaneously emitted from the same notification unit, it is assumed that it becomes particularly difficult to hear the individual notifications. In such a case, by adopting any of the configurations of the feature K2 to the feature K8, it is possible to prevent both notification sounds from being emitted at the same time and to prevent the notification from becoming difficult to hear.

Features K11. A storage means (sound data storage area 185 of ROM 182) for storing a plurality of types of sound information (sound data) is provided.
The first notification executing means executes the specific notification based on the sound information (sound data of the internal state notification sound) corresponding to the specific notification stored in the storage means.
The second notification executing means executes the predetermined notification based on the sound information (sound data such as a door opening notification sound) corresponding to the predetermined notification stored in the storage means.
Predetermined information (priority information) corresponding to the output priority of each of the notifications is set corresponding to each of the sound information so that the predetermined notification is higher than the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to feature K9 or feature K10, wherein the specific means is such that the predetermined notification is preferentially performed on the specific notification based on the predetermined information.

In the above configuration, predetermined information indicating the output priority is set corresponding to the sound information of each notification, so that it is possible to determine which notification sound is prioritized by referring to the predetermined information in the priority control. can. Therefore, it is not necessary to incorporate in the control program which one is prioritized for each notification, and it is possible to simplify the program for output control of the notification sound.

Feature K12. The first notification executing means is a means for executing the specific notification when the specific determination means determines that the specific combination is not in the non-winning state (internal state notification when the two sheets are not in the internal state). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K11, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the specific combination is not in the winning state (when the specific combination is not in the winning state). This makes it possible to preferably inform the hall employees that they are not in the winning state of a specific role.

Feature K13. The winning state of the specific combination is an internal state (two internal states) of a second specified number (2) different from the first specified number (3) performed in a normal game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K12, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the internal state or not the internal state.

After shifting to the second specified number of internal states, the game is designed on the premise that the player will carry over the internal state and continue the game by playing the game with the first specified number in the normal game. There is a machine. By applying any of the configurations of the feature K1 to the feature K12 in such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from playing a game in a situation other than the second specified number of internal states. become.

Feature K14. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
The lottery means draws a winning combination according to the number of bets on the game, and a specific winning combination (second BB winning combination) is selected as a winning combination in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first betting number (2 bets). Has been set and
In a situation where the bet number of the game is the first bet number, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the winning result of the specific combination, and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific combination at the effective position (the pattern combination of the second BB). Specific game state transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (second BB state) when
When the specific pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the winning state of the specific combination, the reservation means capable of retaining the winning state of the specific combination (winning state of the second BB combination by the main control device 101). Function to carry over) and
With
It is possible to play the game as a second bet number (3 bets) different from the first bet number in a situation where the winning state of the specific combination is reserved by the reservation means. Yes, when the game is played by the second bet number in the specific reserved state, the stop of the specific pattern combination at the effective position or the transition to the specific game state is restricted. And
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the first, ninth to eleventh embodiments), and
The first notification executing means (first, ninth to eleventh) so that the specific notification (internal state notification sound) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means (speakers 64a to 64n). The function of executing the internal state notification process by the sub-control device 81 according to the embodiment of
Detection means (door opening sensor 27, setting key insertion hole 73, power switch 71, medal detection sensor 45a, etc.) capable of detecting the occurrence of a predetermined event (closed front door 12, setting change, power on, medal insertion error, etc.) When,
Based on the detection of the occurrence of the predetermined event by the detection means, a predetermined notification (door opening notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, turn-on error notification, etc.) different from the specific notification is the predetermined notification means or A second notification executing means (a function of performing door opening notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, power-on error notification, etc. by the sub-control device 81) to be performed by a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
When the execution period of the specific notification and the execution period of the predetermined notification overlap, one of the predetermined notifications or the specific notification is given priority over the other notification of the predetermined notification or the specific notification. Specific means (configuration that gives priority to internal status notification, door opening notification, setting change notification, power-on notification, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, the same effect as that of the above feature K1 can be obtained. It should be noted that any configuration of the above features K2 to K12 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the features K1 to K14, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the tenth and eleventh embodiments), and
Specific notification execution means (12th implementation) for executing specific notification (power-on notification, door opening notification, etc.) when the power of the game machine is turned on or when a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on. (Function to execute power-on notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the mode) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
When the specific determination means determines that the specific combination has been won, the first means (first power-on notification, first door opening notification, etc.) of the first aspect can be executed. Function to execute the setting process of the first power-on notification, etc.) and
When it is determined by the specific determination means that the specific combination is not in the winning state, the specific notification of the second aspect (second power-on notification, second door opening notification, etc.) different from the first aspect can be executed. Possible second means (function to execute the setting process of the second power-on notification, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall in advance of the game whether or not the specific role has been won.

In this regard, in the above configuration, it is determined whether or not a specific combination has been won, and the result is a power-on notification performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on. It is reflected in the specific notification such as the door opening notification that is performed. Specifically, when it is determined by the above determination that the specific combination is in the winning state, the specific notification of the first aspect is executed, and when it is determined that the specific combination is not in the winning state, the first aspect is described. The specific notification of the second aspect different from the above is executed. Basically, only hall employees can turn on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, with the above configuration, the hall employee may be in contact with the gaming machine or in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. Through the specific notification of each aspect, it is possible to notify whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the hall employee whether or not the specific role has been won before the game is played by the player.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the specific notification includes a power-on notification corresponding to a power-on.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific winning combination is in the winning state by using the power-on notification. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been elected.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a power-on notification and a notification of whether or not a specific winning combination is won are performed separately, it is necessary to adjust how to divide the notification period of each notification at the notification design stage. There is a concern that the burden of design work will increase. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the notification period of the power-on notification can be used as the notification period of whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, the above period adjustment becomes unnecessary, and the work load of the notification design becomes unnecessary. Can be reduced.

Feature L3. The specific notification of the second aspect includes the power-on notification and a predetermined notification corresponding to the non-winning state of the specific combination (for example, notification of "non-internal state"). Features The gaming machine described in L2.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification corresponding to the non-winning state of the specific combination is included in the specific notification of the second aspect together with the power-on notification corresponding to the power-on, so that the power is turned on. At the same time, it is possible to clearly inform that the specific role is not in the winning state.

Feature L4. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the door body is closed, the determination by the specific determination means or the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect by the specific notification execution means is restricted. (Function to execute the process of step S7803 by the sub control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L3.

Powering on the gaming machine is not limited to when the hall employee powers on, but after the power supply to the gaming hall is cut off due to a power outage, the external power is supplied by the restoration of the power transmission equipment. It also occurs when it is restarted. In the case of turning on the power by recovering from such a power failure, there is a possibility that the player is near the gaming machine, so that the player may be informed that the specific combination is not in the winning state. In such a case, the gaming machine determines whether the power was turned on by the power-on operation of the hall employee or the power was turned on without such an operation, and the former is the winning state of the specific role. It is preferable to inform whether or not. However, since the gaming machine is in the off state (non-operating state) before the power is turned on, it is not always easy to make such a determination.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the door body is closed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is estimated that the power is turned on by returning from the power failure state, and a specific role is won in this case. It is configured to limit the determination of whether or not it is in a state and the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect in front of the player, and to prevent the player from being notified that the specific combination is not in the winning state.

Feature L5. Switching means (processing of steps S7813 to S7816 by the sub-control device 81) for switching to the specific notification of the first aspect when the specific combination is changed to the winning state during the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect. Features L1 to L4 characterized by having a function to execute, a function to switch to notification that two cards are in the internal state when a second BB winning command is received during execution of the second power-on notification). The gaming machine described in any of.

In the above configuration, when the specific notification is switched to the winning state of the specific combination during the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect, the specific notification is switched to the specific notification of the first aspect. Can be notified.

When this feature is applied to feature L2, "In order to properly notify that the power has been turned on, it is preferable to secure a certain length as the notification period. Under such circumstances, for example. , If the winning state of the specific combination is entered during the execution of the specific notification of the second aspect, and the notification is terminated accordingly, there is a concern that the notification period of turning on the power may be shortened. If the specific notification of the second aspect is continued as it is even if the transition to the above occurs, the hall employee may not be able to grasp the transition to the winning state. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the power is turned on. Since it is possible to notify that the player has entered the winning state of a specific combination while continuing the corresponding notification, it is possible to suitably balance the securing of the power-on notification period and the notification of the transition to the winning state. " The effect is expected.

Feature L6. The specific notification execution means is a notification end means (step by the sub-control device 81) for ending the specific notification of the second aspect when the execution period of the specific notification of the second aspect becomes a predetermined notification period. (Function to execute the process of S7812 to step S7814) is provided.
The switching means performs the processing of steps S7816 and S7807 by the sub-control device 81 so that the specific notification of the first aspect after switching is executed so as not to exceed the remaining period in the predetermined notification period. The gaming machine according to feature L5, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

For example, if the period of the specific notification such as the power-on notification becomes too long, when the hall employee moves to the inspection work of the adjacent gaming machine, the specific notification executed by the gaming machine and the game inspected immediately before There is a concern that the notification will be difficult to understand due to duplication with the specific notification on the machine. In such a case, the inspection work of the next gaming machine may be started after the specific notification by the immediately preceding gaming machine is completed, but this may increase the time required for the inspection and reduce the workability.

In this regard, in the above configuration, since the specific notification of the first aspect after switching is executed within the range of the remaining period in the predetermined notification period, when the specific notification is performed by switching from the second aspect to the first aspect. , It is suppressed that the notification period predetermined for the specific notification of the first aspect is added as it is. As a result, it is suppressed that the total period of the specific notification of the first second aspect and the specific notification of the first aspect is longer than the initially set notification period, and the specific notification period becomes excessively long. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Feature L7. The specific notification of the second aspect is executed by a predetermined notification means (lower display unit 69) different from the notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) on which the specific notification of the first aspect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L6.

In the above configuration, the specific notification of the second aspect is performed by a notification unit different from the specific notification of the first aspect. As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not the specific role is in the winning state not only by the difference in the notification mode but also by the difference in the notification location, which makes it easier for the hall employees to notice that the specific role is not in the winning state. Will be possible.

Feature L8. The game according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L7, characterized in that the specific notification of the second aspect is provided with a means for executing the specific notification of the first aspect by more notification means than the specific notification of the first aspect. Machine.

In the above configuration, the specific notification of the second aspect is performed by more notification units than the specific notification of the first aspect. As a result, it is possible to conspicuously notify that the specific winning combination is not in the winning state, and it is possible to preferably call attention to the fact that the specific winning combination is not in the winning state.

Feature L9. The specific determination means is a means for determining whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (a function of executing the processes of steps S7802 and S7804 by the sub control device 81). With
The specific notification executing means includes means for causing the specific notification to be executed after the determination is made by the specific determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7809 by the sub-control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L8.

In the above configuration, since the determination is performed by the specific determination means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the winning state of the specific combination is targeted for the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power. It can be determined whether or not it is. This makes it possible to perform specific notification that reflects the state when the power is turned on.

Feature L10. The specific notification execution means is intended to execute the specific notification when the predetermined period has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on.
The specific determination means has the specific combination at a predetermined timing (power-on timing, timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the power-on) in the period from the power-on of the gaming machine to the elapse of the predetermined period. Equipped with a means to determine whether or not the player is in the winning state
The specific notification executing means according to any one of the features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific notification executing means includes means for causing the specific notification to be executed after the determination is made by the specific determination means. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, the determination by the specific determination means is performed at a predetermined timing in the period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the predetermined period elapses (the period until the execution timing of the specific notification is reached). As a result, it is possible to perform a specific notification that reflects the latest state regarding whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state.

Feature L11. A first control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and
A control is performed so that the notification corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65, upper lamp unit 63, speakers 64a to 64n, lower display unit 69, etc.). In a gaming machine equipped with two control means (sub-control device 81),
The first control means includes the lottery means.
The second control means includes the specific determination means and the specific notification execution means.
The first control means includes an output means (a function of transmitting a power recovery command by the main control device 101) that outputs predetermined command information (recovery command) to the second control means when the power is turned on.
Whether the predetermined command information includes predetermined information (internal state information, etc.) capable of grasping whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, or the predetermined information is triggered by the output of the predetermined command information. The gaming machine according to feature L9 or feature L10, which is output to a second control means.

In the above configuration, a first control means for controlling the progress of the game and a second control means for controlling the notification corresponding to the processing result of the first control means are provided, and the processing load related to the operation control of the gaming machine is applied. It is configured to be distributed to both of these control means. In this case, since the lottery means for performing the winning combination lottery is provided in the first control means, only the first control means can directly grasp the validity of the specific winning combination. Therefore, in order to perform the notification corresponding to the result of the success or failure of the specific combination, it is necessary to output the information regarding the success or failure to the second control means.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, predetermined command information indicating whether or not a specific combination is appropriate is output from the first control means to the second control means in order to notify that the power of the gaming machine has been turned on. The predetermined information is output to the second control means when the predetermined command information is output. As a result, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to transmit to the second control means whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and the first mode and the second mode can be properly used in the specific notification. It becomes possible to perform favorably.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which dedicated command information for predetermined information is output, there is a concern that the types of command information will increase and the capacity of the storage means mounted on the first control means will be squeezed. By including it in the predetermined command information and outputting it, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of command information. Not only that, the frequency of output of command information from the first control means can be reduced, and the processing load related to command control can be reduced.

Feature L12. The specific notification of the first aspect includes the power-on notification and a predetermined mode notification corresponding to the winning state of the specific combination (for example, notification such as "two internal states"). The gaming machine according to the feature L2 or the feature L3.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined mode notification corresponding to the winning state of the specific combination is included in the specific notification of the first mode as a set with the power-on notification corresponding to the power-on, so that the power is turned on. At the same time, it is possible to clearly inform that the specific role has been won.

Any of the configurations of the features L4 to L11 can be applied to this feature, and further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature L13. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
With
The specific notification executing means is for executing the specific notification in a situation where the door body is in an open state.
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the specific notification includes a door opening notification (for example, a notification of "the door is open") corresponding to the door body being in the open state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify whether or not a specific winning combination has been won by using the door opening notification. Since the door body can be opened only by the hall employees, it is possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been won.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a door opening notification and a notification of whether or not a specific winning combination is won are performed separately, it is necessary to adjust how to divide the notification period of each notification at the notification design stage. There is a concern that the burden of design work will increase. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the notification period of the door opening notification can be used as the notification period of whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, the above period adjustment becomes unnecessary, and the work load of the notification design becomes unnecessary. Can be reduced.

Any of the configurations of the features L4 to L11 can be applied to this feature, and further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature L14. The specific notification of the second aspect includes the door opening notification and a predetermined mode notification corresponding to the non-winning state of the specific combination (for example, notification of "non-internal state"). The gaming machine according to the feature L13.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification corresponding to the non-winning state of the specific combination is set with the door opening notification corresponding to the door body being in the open state, and is included in the specific notification of the second aspect. Since it is included, it is possible to clearly inform that the door is open and that the specific role is not in the winning state.

Feature L15. The specific notification of the first aspect includes the door opening notification and a predetermined mode notification corresponding to the winning state of the specific combination (for example, notification such as "two internal states"). The gaming machine according to the feature L13 or the feature L14.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined mode notification corresponding to the winning state of the specific combination is set with the door opening notification corresponding to the door body open state, and is included in the specific mode notification of the first mode. Since it is included, it is possible to clearly inform that the door is open and that a specific role has been won.

The configuration of any of the features L4 to L11 can be applied to the feature L14 or the feature L15, and further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations. In applying the feature L6, in the feature L6, "a notification end means for ending the specific notification of the second aspect when the execution period of the specific notification of the second aspect becomes a predetermined notification period". And "means to be executed so as not to exceed the remaining period in the predetermined notification period", "specification of the second aspect when the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state". It can be read as "means for ending the notification" and "means for ending the notification when the switching is performed".

Feature L16. The winning state of the specific combination is an internal state (two internal states) of a second specified number (2) different from the first specified number (3) performed in a normal game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L15, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the internal state or not the internal state.

After shifting to the second specified number of internal states, the game is designed on the premise that the player will carry over the internal state and continue the game by playing the game with the first specified number in the normal game. There is a machine. By applying any of the configurations of the feature L1 to the feature L15 in such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from playing a game in a situation other than the second specified number of internal states. become.

Feature L17. The lottery means draws a combination according to the number of bets on the game, and the specific combination (second BB combination) can be won in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first bet (2 bets). Is set,
In a situation where the bet number of the game is the first bet number, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the winning result of the specific combination, and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific combination at the effective position (the pattern combination of the second BB). Specific game state transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (second BB state) when
When the specific pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the winning state of the specific combination, the reservation means capable of retaining the winning state of the specific combination (winning state of the second BB combination by the main control device 101). Function to carry over) and
With
It is possible to play a game as a second bet number (3 bets) different from the first bet number in a situation where the winning state of the specific combination is reserved by the reservation means. Yes, when a game is played by the second bet number in the specific reserved state, the stop of the specific pattern combination at the effective position or the transition to the specific game state is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L16.

In the above configuration, after the winning state of the specific combination is set by the first bet number, in the situation where the game is played with the betting number of the game as the second betting number, the game does not shift to the specific game state and the winning state is carried over. It becomes possible to continue the game. There is a gaming machine whose game is designed on the premise of such a game, and in a situation where a specific role is not won in such a gaming machine, the hall employee to that effect before the player plays the game. It is desirable to be notified to the staff and deal with it. By applying any of the configurations of the feature L1 to the feature L15 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature L18. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the second bet number in the non-winning state of the specific combination than to play the game with the second bet number in the winning state of the specific combination. The gaming machine according to feature L17, characterized in that it is present.

In the above configuration, it is more disadvantageous to play the game in the non-winning state of the specific role than to play the game by the second bet number in the winning state of the specific role. By applying any of the configurations of the feature L15, it is possible to suitably suppress the situation in which the player plays a game in such an unfavorable situation.

For each configuration of the feature L1 to the feature L18, the feature A1 to the feature A23, the feature B1 to the feature B18, the feature C1 to the feature C16, the feature D1 to the feature D12, the feature E1 to the feature E21, and the feature F1 to the feature F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
The first operating means (start lever 41), which starts the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a winning combination based on the operation of the first operating means, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A drive control means (by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated. Function to execute reel control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of adding a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and
With
A specific combination (second BB combination) is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won (a function of executing internal state notification processing by the sub-control device 81 according to the tenth, eleventh, and twelfth embodiments) and
When the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state, or when the door body is in the open state, a specific notification (internal state notification) corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is predetermined. Inside by the sub-control device 81 according to the ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments of the specific notification execution means (internal display unit 69, auxiliary display unit 65, speakers 64a to 64n) to be performed by the notification means (lower display unit 69, auxiliary display unit 65, speakers 64a to 64n). Function to execute status notification processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

There is a gaming machine whose playability is designed on the premise that the player plays a game in a state where the winning state of a specific role is carried over. In such a gaming machine, if the game is played in a situation where the specific winning combination is not won, the intended gaming property may not be properly exhibited. For this reason, it is desirable to inform the hall employees of the game hall whether or not they have won a specific role.

In this respect, in the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state, and the specific notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification means. At that time, the specific notification is performed when the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state or when the door body is in the open state. Basically, only hall employees can open and close the door, so with the above configuration, specific notification will be given when the hall employee is touching the gaming machine or is in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. be able to. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately inform the hall employees whether or not the specific role has been elected.

Feature M2. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the specific notification executing means is such that the specific notification is executed when the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state. ..

There is a gaming machine that calls attention by executing a door opening notification when the door body is in the open state. If the specific notification is executed while the door body is open in such a type of gaming machine, the door opening notification and the specific notification overlap. At that time, if the configuration is such that these notifications are executed in duplicate, there is a concern that the distinctiveness of each notification may deteriorate due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of notifications, and conversely, the periods of both notifications are switched. If the configuration is set to be executed, it will be necessary to make adjustments when designing the notification, which may increase the design burden. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific notification is executed after waiting for the door body to be closed, it is possible to avoid duplication of both notifications without requiring adjustment at the design stage. This makes it possible to improve the distinctiveness of each notification while suppressing an increase in the burden of notification design.

Feature M3. When the number of times of the switching after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is a predetermined first number of times (once or twice), the specific notification executing means is allowed to execute the specific notification, and the switching is performed. The means for limiting the execution of the specific notification when the number of times is a predetermined second number (one or more times) than the first number (corresponding to the eleventh embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature M2, which comprises a function of executing an internal state notification process by the sub-control device 81).

If something goes wrong with the gaming machine while the player is playing the game, the hall employee may open or close the door for the purpose of checking the status of the gaming machine. If the specific notification is performed in such a case, the specific notification may be performed in front of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, the specific notification is executed only when the number of times the door body is closed after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is the first time. Since the power of the gaming machine is basically turned on before the opening of the game hall, by executing a specific notification only for closing the door within a certain number of times (the first time) after the power is turned on, before the opening of the hall Specific notification can be executed for the closing operation of. As a result, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

Features M4. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the first number of times is one.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification can be executed only for the first closing after the power is turned on. As a result, the specific notification will be given only when the daily inspection before the opening of the hall is completed and the hall employee closes the door body, and it is preferable to prevent the specific notification from being given in front of the player. Becomes possible.

Feature M5. A plurality of stages of set values (set value 1 to set value 6) are provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and the set value is set to one of the set values of the plurality of stages. It is configured so that you can play games
In the specific notification executing means, the number of times of switching after the change of the set value is allowed or after the change of the set value is performed is a predetermined first number of times (once or twice). In this case, the execution of the specific notification is permitted, and the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the number of times of the switching is a predetermined second number (one or more times) than the first number. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the gaming machine is provided with means for performing the method (a function of executing an internal state notification process by the sub-control device 81 according to the ninth embodiment).

If something goes wrong with the gaming machine while the player is playing the game, the hall employee may open or close the door for the purpose of checking the status of the gaming machine. If the specific notification is performed in such a case, the specific notification may be performed in front of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, the specific notification is executed only when the number of times the door body is closed is the first number after the setting change is allowed or after the setting change is performed. Since the operation of allowing the setting change or changing the setting is basically performed before the opening of the game hall, the door is closed within a certain number of times (first time) based on this operation. By executing the specific notification, the specific notification can be executed for the closing operation before the opening of the hall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

In addition, this feature may further include a configuration that "the first number of times is once". According to this configuration, the specific notification is performed only when the setting change work before the opening of the hall is completed and the hall employee closes the door body, and it is preferable that the specific notification is performed in front of the player. Can be suppressed.

Feature M6. The specific determination means includes predetermined timings (close timing of the front door 12, power-on timing, timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the power-on, etc.) in the period from the opening state to the closed state of the door body. ) Is a means for determining whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state (whether or not the two front doors 12 are in the internal state when the front door 12 according to the ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments is closed. Has a function to execute the judgment of
The specific notification executing means is a means for causing the specific notification to be executed after the determination is made by the specific determination means (two internal states according to the ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M2 to the feature M5, which is provided with a function of executing an internal state notification after a determination).

It is assumed that the game does not proceed during the period from the opening state to the closing state of the door body, and the state does not change as to whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state. Therefore, by determining whether or not the specific winning combination is in the winning state at a predetermined timing in the period from the open state to the closed state, the state immediately before the door body is closed is reflected. It becomes possible to execute the specified notification.

Feature M7. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M2 to the feature M5, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided on the front surface portion of the door body.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed via the notification unit provided on the front surface of the door body, the specific notification can be performed in front of the hall employee who closed the door body. As a result, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and it is possible to make it easier to notice the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the notification.

Feature M8. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the specific notification executing means is such that the specific notification is executed in a situation where the door body is in the open state.

Basically, only hall employees can open the door body, and in the situation where the door body is open, it is assumed that the hall employee is in the immediate vicinity of the gaming machine. Therefore, by executing the specific notification when the door body is in the open state, it is possible to perform the specific notification in the presence of the hall employees.

Feature M9. A door body detecting means (door opening sensor 27) capable of detecting at least one of the open state and the closed state of the door body, and
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the door body determination means for determining whether or not the door body is in the open state based on the detection result of the door body detection means, and the door body determination means.
With
The game according to feature M8, wherein the specific notification execution means includes means for executing the specific notification when the door body determination means determines that the specific notification is in the open state. Machine.

In the above configuration, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is determined whether or not the door body is in the open state, and when it is determined that the door body is in the open state, the specific notification is executed, so that the door body is opened. Specific notification can be executed for the case where the power is turned on. Since the door body is opened and the power of the gaming machine is basically turned on only before the opening of the hall, this configuration can prevent the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

Feature M10. A door opening notification means for executing the door opening notification when the door body is in the open state is provided.
The door opening notification means
A first means capable of executing the door opening notification of the first aspect when it is determined by the specific determination means that the specific combination has been won.
When the specific determination means determines that the specific combination is not in the winning state, the second means capable of executing the door opening notification of the second aspect different from the first aspect, and the second means.
With
The gaming machine according to feature M8 or feature M9, wherein the specific notification is performed by either the door opening notification of the first aspect or the door opening notification of the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, since the door opening notification also serves as the specific notification as to whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, it is possible to execute the specific notification by using the notification period of the door opening notification. For example, in a configuration in which door opening notification and specific notification are performed separately, it is necessary to adjust how to switch the notification period of each notification at the notification design stage, which may increase the burden of design work. There is. In this respect, according to this configuration, such period adjustment becomes unnecessary, and the work load of the notification design can be reduced.

Features M11. The gaming machine according to any one of features M8 to M10, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided on the back surface side of the door body or inside the housing.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed via the notification unit provided on the back surface of the door body or the inside of the housing, so that the specific notification can be easily seen by the hall employee who opened the door body. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the specific combination is in the winning state, and it is possible to make it easier to notice the specific notification.

Feature M12. A function of executing the process of step S8004 by the period determination means (sub-control device 81) for determining whether or not the switching from one of the open state and the closed state to the other is performed within a predetermined notification target period. )
The specific notification executing means is characterized in that the specific notification is executed when it is determined by the period determining means that the switching has been performed within the notification target period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M11.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the timing at which the door body is opened or closed is within the predetermined notification target period, and it is specified when it is determined that the door body is within the notification target period. Notification is executed. At this time, if the period before the opening of the hall is set as the notification target period, the specific notification can be executed only when the door body is opened or closed before the opening of the hall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

Feature M13. Time information output means (RTC321) that outputs time information,
A time grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S8003 by the sub control device 81) for grasping the time when the switching is performed based on the output result of the time information output means, and
With
The period determination means includes means for determining whether or not the time grasped by the time grasping means is included in the notification target period (a function of executing the process of step S8004 by the sub control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature M12.

According to the above configuration, since the notification target period can be determined using the time, the notification target period can be easily set, and the notification target period can be set according to the opening hours of each game hall and each business day. Can be done. As a result, even when the opening hours vary in each game hall or when special business days with different opening times are set, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed in front of the player.

Feature M14. The specific notification executing means is a means for executing the specific notification when the specific determination means determines that the specific combination is not in the non-winning state (internal state notification when the two sheets are not in the internal state). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M13, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the specific combination is not in the winning state (when the specific combination is not in the winning state). This makes it possible to preferably inform the hall employees that they are not in the winning state of a specific role.

Feature M15. The winning state of the specific combination is an internal state (two internal states) of a second specified number (2) different from the first specified number (3) performed in a normal game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M14, wherein the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the internal state or not the internal state.

After shifting to the second specified number of internal states, the game is designed on the premise that the player will carry over the internal state and continue the game by playing the game with the first specified number in the normal game. There is a machine. By applying any of the configurations of the feature M1 to the feature M14 in such a gaming machine, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from playing a game in a situation other than the second specified number of internal states. become.

Features M16. The lottery means draws a combination according to the number of bets on the game, and the specific combination (second BB combination) can be won in a situation where the number of bets on the game is the first bet (2 bets). Is set,
In a situation where the bet number of the game is the first bet number, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the winning result of the specific combination, and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific combination at the effective position (the pattern combination of the second BB). Specific game state transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that shifts the game state to the specific game state (second BB state) when
When the specific pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the winning state of the specific combination, the reservation means capable of retaining the winning state of the specific combination (winning state of the second BB combination by the main control device 101). Function to carry over) and
With
It is possible to play a game as a second bet number (3 bets) different from the first bet number in a situation where the winning state of the specific combination is reserved by the reservation means. Yes, when a game is played by the second bet number in the specific reserved state, the stop of the specific pattern combination at the effective position or the transition to the specific game state is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M15.

In the above configuration, after the winning state of the specific combination is set by the first bet number, in the situation where the game is played with the betting number of the game as the second betting number, the game does not shift to the specific game state and the winning state is carried over. It becomes possible to continue the game. There is a gaming machine whose game is designed on the premise of such a game, and in a situation where a specific role is not won in such a gaming machine, the hall employee to that effect before the player plays the game. It is desirable to be notified to the staff and deal with it. By applying any of the configurations of the feature M1 to the feature M15 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably exert the above-mentioned effects of the respective features.

Feature M17. It is configured so that it is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with the second bet number in the non-winning state of the specific combination than to play the game with the second bet number in the winning state of the specific combination. The gaming machine according to feature M16, characterized in that it is present.

In the above configuration, it is more disadvantageous to play the game in the non-winning state of the specific role than to play the game by the second bet number in the winning state of the specific role. By applying any of the configurations of the feature M14, it is possible to suitably suppress the situation in which the player plays a game in such an unfavorable situation.

For each configuration of the features M1 to M17, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B18, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E21, and the features F1 to F23. , Feature G1 to feature G19, feature H1 to feature H6, feature I1 to feature I19, feature J1 to feature J19, feature K1 to feature K14, feature L1 to feature L18, feature M1 to feature M17. It is possible to apply each of the shown technical ideas individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature M group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature M group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component. When each of the above features is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, it can be understood that the game (1 game) related to each feature is a variation (1 variation).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine, 11 ... Housing, 12 ... Front door, 32 ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop switch, 45 ... Medal slot, 45a ... Insert medal detection sensor, 64 ... Speaker, 65 ... Auxiliary display, 71 ... power switch, 73 ... setting key insertion hole, 81 ... sub control device, 101 ... main control device, 184 ... sound IC.

Claims (6)

The housing that is open to the front and
A door body provided so that the opening on the front side of the housing can be opened and closed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
The first operating means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a combination based on the operation of the first operation means, and
A second operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the first operating means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the second operating means is operated.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the winning result of the predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbols can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a game value-adding means capable of adding game value corresponding to the predetermined combination,
With
A specific combination is included as a combination that can be won in the lottery process by the lottery means.
A specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific combination has been won, and
When the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state, or when the door body is in the open state, the specific notification corresponding to the determination result of the specific determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means. Specific notification execution means to be used and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The game according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification executing means is such that the specific notification is executed when the door body is switched from the open state to the closed state. Machine. The specific notification executing means is allowed to execute the specific notification when the number of times of the switching after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is a predetermined first number, and the number of times of the switching is the first number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising means for limiting the execution of the specific notification when the number of times is more than a predetermined second number of times. A set value of a plurality of stages is provided so as to correspond to the winning probability of the lottery process by the lottery means, and it is possible to set a set value of one of the set values of the plurality of stages to play a game. Has been
The specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when the number of times of switching after the change of the set value is allowed or after the change of the set value is a predetermined first number of times. 2. The second aspect of the present invention is characterized in that, when the number of times of switching is a predetermined second number of times larger than the first number of times, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. The described gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification executing means is such that the specific notification is executed in a situation where the door body is in the open state. A door body detecting means capable of detecting at least one of the open state and the closed state of the door body,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the door body determination means for determining whether or not the door body is in the open state based on the detection result of the door body detection means, and the door body determination means.
With
The specific notification executing means according to claim 5, further comprising means for executing the specific notification when the door body determination means determines that the specific notification is in the open state. Gaming machine.

Images